Full text of "Journal and Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal"

See other formats

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

1 ^i.

», ^. #1 4«.«

.C21

»•.

' I

)

{

GENERAL Library

UNJV. OF

o^riA.! JAN 4 t9fi6

JOURNAL & PP0C£EDI]<GS ^^^^

OP THE ^ . ,

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. I, No, 1.

1906

\ CALCUTTA :

' PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PEESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET.

1906.
bioed JwM 21st, IMS.

List of Officers and Members of Council

OP THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OP BENGAL

For the year 1905.

President :
H.H. Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K.O.S.I.

Vice-Presidents :

The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosli Mukhopadhyaya, M.A., D.L.,

F.R.S.Xi.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esq., I.C.S., (retired).

Secretary and Treasurer :

I
Honorary General Secretary : J. Macf arlane, Esq.

Treasurer : The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, j

M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries : '

Philological Secretary: E. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary : Captain L. Rogers, M.D., B.Sc, I

I.M.S.
Anthropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Esq., B.A., D.Sc.
Joint Philological Secretary : Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad

Shastri, M.A. j

Other Members of Council :

The Hon*ble Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S. |

Kumar Ramessur Maliah. '

I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.

H. E. Kempthome, Esq.

W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon'ble Mr. A. Earle, I.C.S.

Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S. |

R. O. Lees, Esq.

H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

E. Thornton, Esq., P.R.I.B.A.

• ri

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

*^ FOR

JANUARY, 1905.

The Monthly Genei*al Meeting of the Society wa* held on
Wednesday, the 4th January, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Hon. Mr. Justice F. E. Paixiter, B.A., I.C.S., President,
in the obair.

The following membei*8 were pi^esent : —

Mr. J. Bathgate, Major W. J. Bythell, R.E., Babu Manmohan
Chakravarti, Rai Saimt Chandra Das Bahadur, Mr. F. Doxey,
Mr. G. C. Dudgeon, Mr. N. L. Hallward, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Mr.
H. H. Mann, Dr. M. M. Masoom, The Hon. Mr. Justice Saroda
Charan Mitra, Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S., Pandit Yogesa Chandra
Sastree, Pandit Satin Chandi*a Vidyabhusana.

Visitcyrs : — Mr. H. Chandler, Mr. P. M. Choudiy, Rev. Ekai
Kamaguchi, Mr. B. T. Pell, and Mr. S. C. Sanial.

The minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.

Sixty-nine presentations were announced.

His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fmser, K.C.S.I., Lt.-Col. H. T. S.
Ramsden, I.A., Mr. J. T. Rankin, Mr. Sukumar Sen, Babu Muck-
soodan Das, and Mr. F. Turner, wei^ ballotted for and elected
Ordinary Members.

It was announced that Babu Roormall Goenka and Major A. H.
Bingley, I. A., had expressed a wish to wiihdi*aw from the Society.

The President announced that he had, in accoi^dance with the
resolution passed at the last Council Meeting, that the objects
which the Society decided to lend to the Trustees of the Victoria
Memorial Hall for exhibition should be lent to them for exhibition
during this cold season as soon as H.E. the Viceroy wished for
them — handed them over to the Tmstees, except the Asoka stone
which the Tnistees excluded.

The President also announced that he had received six essays

172649

Proceedings. [January, 1905.

in competition for the Elliott Prize for Scientific Research for the
year 1904.

Rai Sarat Chandra Das Bahadur described the Lamaic in-
carnation of Tibet.

The following papers were read : —

1. On the MSrkanieya Purana, — By The Hon. Mr. Justice
F. E. Paroiter, B.A., I.C.S.

The paper will not be published in the Journal.

2. The Dalai LounwHs Hierarchy. — By Rai Sabat Chandra
Das Bahadur, C.I.E.

The paper has been published in Journal, Part I, Extra
No., 1904.

3. On the Prevalence of Fevers in the Dinajpur District. — By
Leonard Rogers, M.D., I.M.S., Officiating Professor of Pathology,
Medical College, Calcutta.

The paper has been published in Journal, Part II, Sup-
plement, 1904.

FEBRUARY, 1905.

The Annual Meeting of the Society was held on Wednesday,
the 1st February, 1905, at 9-30 p.m.

His Excellency Lord Cubzon; G.M.S.I., G.M.I.E., Patron,
in the chair.

The following members were present : —

Dr. A. G. Allan, Mr. N. Annandalej Mr. J. Bathgate, Rev.
P. O. Bodding, Babn Monmohan Ghakravarti, Mr. B. L. Ghaudhuri,
Mr. W. B. Griper, Mr.' J. N. Das-Gupta, Mr. W. K. Dods, Mr.
F. Doxey, His Honour Sir A. H. L. Praser, Mr. N. L. Hallward, Mr.
T. H. Holland, Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Mr. G. W.
Kiichler, Mr. G. W. McMinn, Mi*. J. Macfarlane, Mr. E. D. Macla-
gan, Kumar Ramessur Maliah, The Hon. Mr. Justice F. E. PaJrgi-
ter, Mr. W. Parsons, The Hon. Mr. A. Pedler, Kumar Satindradev
Rai Mahasai, Dr. P. K. Ray, Mr. H. H. Risley, Gaptain L. Rogers,
I.M.S., Dr. E. D. Ross, Pandit Yoge^ Ghandra Sastree, Mahama-
. hopadhraya Haraprasad Shastri, Mr. H. E. Stapleton, Pandit
Satis Cfhandra Vidyabhushana, Mr. E. Vredenburg, Mr. W, H.
Arden Wood, Mr. J. Wyness.

Visitors : — Mr. R. E. V. Arbuthnot, Miss B. Buckland, Mr. H.
Chandler, Mr. E. G. Gotes, Mr. A.F.Gousins, Rev. J. Dahlmann, S.J.,
Lady Eraser, BabuDevabrataMukhopadhyaya, Kumar Manin<^^ey
Rai Mahasai, Mr. S. G. Sanyal, Mr. G. Stapleton, Rev. A.
Willifeiv Young.

According to the Rules of the Society, the President ordered
the voting papers to be distributed for the election of Officers and
Members of Gouncil for 1905 and appointed Messrs. G. W. Kiichler
and N. L. Hallward to be scrutineers.

The President announced that the Trustees of the " Elliott
Prize for Scientific Research*' had awarded the prize for the
year 1904 to Babu Sarasi Lai Sarkar, and read the following report
of the Trustees : —

Report on the Elliott Prize for Scientific Research for 1904.

The Trustees have received Essays from the following com-
petitors for the prize : —

1. On the crystalline properties of a potassium copper fer-
rocyanide compound. Farts I ^ II. — By Sabasi Lal Sarkab, M.A.

2. On the experimental determination of the Electro-chemiC'al
equivalent of nickel. (With diagrams,). — By Surendra Nath
Maitra, M.A.

Annual Beport, [February, 1905.

3. On a complete intfesttgation of a Phenomenon taking phice
beyond the critical angle. — By Jagadindra Boy.

4. Essay on metal soaps. — By Akshata Kumar Majumdar, M.A.

5. An JEssay on the results of " Original Besea/rches " (made
during 1903-04) leading to the discovery of a cheap and simple ch&rmcal
process for the extraction a/nd cleaning cf fibre from plantain and banana
stalks easily adoptablefor the development of aprofUahle industry by all
classes of people in Bengal or in any place in India, — By Manindra-

NATH BANERJEE.

6. On the Hindu method of manufacturing spirit from rice
and its scientific explanation, — By Joges Chandra Hot.

The Trustees, after consulting experts as provided in the
scheme, adjudge the prize for the year 1904 to Babu Sarasi Lai
Sarkar, M.A.

F. E. Pargitbr,

President, Asiatic Society of Bengal,

Alex. Pedler,
Director of Public Instruction, Bengal,

AND

* Vice- Chancellor, Calcutta University,

. , . Calcutta,
30th Janua/ry, 1905,

The President also announced that the Barclay Memorial
Medal for the year 1904 had been offered to Lt.-Col. D. D. Cunning-
ham, 'F.R.S., C .I.E., I.M.S., (retired).

The President then called upon the Secretary to read the
Annual Beport.

Annual Report for 1904.

The Council of the Society have the honour to submit the fol-
lowing Report on the state of the Society's affairs during the
year ending 31st Decenlber, 1904.

Member List.

During the year under review, 39 Ordinary Members were
elected, 8 withdrew, 5 died, and 18 were removed from the list,
viz,: 6 under Rule 38, as defaulters ; 9 under Rule 40, being
more than 3 years absent from India; and 3 under Rule 9, not

I'ebruary, 1905.]

Annual Sqport*

having paid their entrance fees. The election of one member was
cancelled at his own request as he- was not prepared to join
the Society at once. Of the members elected, 2 were old members
who rejoined. The total number of members, at the close of 1904,
was thus 343 against 335 in the preceding year. Thi^ is higher
than that of any year on record. Of these 132 were Resident,
130 Non-Besident, 14 Foreign, 21 Life, and 45 absent from India ;
and one a Special Non-Sulracribing Member, as will be seen from
the following table, which also shows the fluctuations in the num*
ber of Ordinary Members during the past six years : —

Fating.

Non-Patxno.

Ybab.

1
1

•

GXAND

Total.

1809

120

119

262

801

1900

lie

124

268

80.

811

1901

123

188

269

828

1902

126

266

884

1908

127

126

16.

268

885

1904

182

180

276

848

The five Ordinary Members, whose loss by death during the year
we have to regret, were Dr. U. C. Mukerjee, Mr. A. T. Pringle, Mr.
H. M. Bustomjee, Dr. Mahendralal Sircar and Dr. 0. R. Wilson.

There was one death amongst the Honorary Members, viz.^ Dr.
Otto von B^htlingk. To fill this vacancy and others previously
existing, the Society on the recommendation of the Council elected as
Honorary Members, Professor H. Kern, Professor Bam Krishna
Gopal Bhandarkar, Professor M. J. DeGoeje, Professor Ignaz
Goldziher, Sir Charles Lyall, Sir William Ramsay, and Dr. G. A.
Ghierson.

The List of Special Honorary Centenary Members and Associate
Members continued unaltered from last year ; their numbers
standing at 4 and 13 respectively.

Intmiation was received of the death of Dr. Emil Schlagint^
•weit, the only Corresponding Member of the Society.

No members colbpounded for their subscription during the
year.

Annual Report. [Febmary, 1905.

Indian Museum.

There was only one change amongst the Trustees ; it was
caused by the death of Dr. Mahendralal Sircar, and Mr. J. Macf ar-
lane was appointed to fill the vacant place.

The other Trustees who represent the Society have been : —

The Hon. Mr. A. Pedler, C.I.E., F.R.S.
G. W. Kiichler, Esq., M.A.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
The Hon. Sir J. A. Bourdillon, K.O.S.I.

Finance.

The accounts of the Society are shown in the Appendix under
the usual heads, and besides in this year's account there is an
additional statement under the head '* Arabic and Persian Manu-
scripts.'' Statement No. 9 contains the Balance Sheet of the
Society and of the different funds administered through it.

The financial position of the Society shows an improvement,
and the credit balance at the close of the year amounts to
Bs. 1,92,939-7-5, which is more than eleven thousand rupees in
advance of last year, and is chiefly due to the special Government
grant of Bs. 10,000.

The Budget for 1904 was estimated at the following figures : —
Receipts Bs. 17,700; Expenditure Rs. 25,374-4 (Ordinary
Rs. 17,254-4 ; Extraordinary Rs. 8,120.) Taking into account only
the ordinary items of receipts and expenditure for the year 1904, the
actual results have been : — Beceipts Bs. 30,368-13-8 ; Expenditure
Bs. 14,134-0-7,. showing a balance (after setting aside the special
grant of Bs. 10,000) in favour of the Society on its ordinary
working of Bs. 6,234-13-1. Against this balance, there have
been several extraordinary items of expenditure amounting to
Bs. 5,182-8-10 ; the net balance is Bs. 1,052-4-3. There is aTem-
porary Investment of Bs. 48,300, at the close of the year, out of
which Rs. 33,259-5-7 is in favour of the Society, Bs. 5,097-1-3
Oriental Publication Fund,.Bs. 3,578-0-5 Sanskrit MS. Fund, and
Bs. 6,365-8-9 Arabic and Persian MS. Fund. In addition to this,
a sum of Bs. 1,088 has been added to the Beserve Fund from
entrance fees paid during the year.

There is an increase in receipts under every head except
" Miscellaneous," which has fallen off very slightly.

The ordinary expenditure was estimated at Bs. 17,254-4-0,
but the amount paid out was only Bs. 14,134-0-7. The principal
items in excess were " Postage," " Freight," " Books," " Proceed-
ings," and the increase was caused by lai'ger transactions and
the payment of outstanding printing charges and of Messrs. Luzac
and Go's account from Apnl 1902 to October 1904. The actual
expenditure on the Journals was Bs. 3,673, against a budget provi-
sion of Bs. 6,200. The balance is due on outstanding printing bills.

'ffehruBXjy 1905.] Annual Iteport,

There were three extraordinaiy items of expenditure during
1904 under the heads " Furniture," " Pension " and " Building "
not provided for in the Budget. New furniture was required, the
lavatory arrangements were improved, and on the retirement of
the Cashier, a pension of Bs. 11^, at the rate of Bs. 20 per month ;
has been paid to him, and in his place Babu Asutosh Dhur has been
appointed.

• The expenditure on the Boyal Society's Catalogue (including
subscriptions sent to the Central Bureau) has been Bs. 5,842,
while the receipts under this head from subscriptions received
on behalf of the Central Bureau (including the grant from the
Government of India) Bs. 5,352. A sum of Bs. 610 is due to
the Central Bureau and will be sent.

Four extraordinary items of expenditure were budgetted for.
Out of the sum of Bs. 1,000 for.the ssdary of the Assistant engaged
in revising the Library Catalogue, Bs. 81 only have been spent, as
his services have be^n dispensed with. Bs. 1,800 were assigned
for cleaning, varnishing and relinrng the Society's pictures, and
Bs. 1,306 have been spent ; but a sum of Bs. 500 which had been
advanced to the late Mr. A. E. Caddy, for cleaning the pictures,
has been written off as unrecoverable on his death, and Bs. 566
have been spent on the freight, etc., due on the frames which
were procured from England, while their cost has yet to be paid.
Bs. 2,320 were paid for renewing the floor of the entrance hall,
which is now greatly improved, and Bs. 366 were spent in
additions to the lavatory arrangements.

The Budget Estimate of Beceipts and Disbursements for 1905
has been fixed as follows : — Beceipts Bs. 18,100, Expenditure Bs.
17,654. The item " Bent of Booms " has been increased, as one
room has been rented to the Automobile Association of Bengal at
Bs. 50 per month. On the expenditure side, the items '^ Freight **
and '* Journal Part III " have been increased, as greater activity
is expected. '* Insurance " has been reduced by half owing to .the
removal of the Photographic Society of India. The item, " Begis-
tration Fees '' has been omitted, as under the Act no fee will be
charged for filing copies of the Society's papers. There is a new
item of Bs. 192 under the head " Pension."

Three extraordinary items of expenditure have been budget-
ted for during the year 1905, namely, Bs. 1,000 for the new
Library Catalogue, Bs. 2,809 for reframing the pictures, and Bs.
1,220 for white-washing and colourwashing part the Society's
premises. Besides these provisions, the application of the
special grant of Bs. 10,000 from the Government towards the
thorough repair and improvement of the Society's premises is
under careful consideration.

Annual AeporL

tFebmary, 1905.

BUDGET ESTIMATE FOB 1905.
Beoeipts.

1904.

1905.

Estimate. Actuals.

Estimate.

Bs.

Bs. •

Subscriptions

.•■

7,500

8,719

7,800

Sale of Publications

■ ■ ■

600

1,053

600

Interest on Investments

•■•

6,000

6,787

6,000

Bent of Booms

• . •

500

730

600

Government Allowances

a . •

3,000 13,000

3,000

Miscellaneous

• ••

100

Total

7,700 • 30,369

18,100

Sxpenditore.

Bs.

Bfl.

Bs.

Salaries

• ••

3,800

3,460

3,800

Commission

■ . ■

425

376

425

Pension

■ ■ ■

.■•

• ••

192

Stationery

• *•

120

134

120

Lighting and Fans

...

320

218

320

Municipal Taxes ...

.. •

884

Postage

■ ■■

500

567

500

Freight

...

129

100

Meetings

• • ■

100

105

100

Contingencies ....

...

500

459

500

Books

• • •

2,000

2,135

2,000

Binding

Journal, Part I ...

■ . .

700

599

700

. • .

2,100

1,437

2,100

„ „ 11 ...

...

2,100

1,381

2,100

») »j ■■-I-*- •••

...

2,000

855

2,500

Proceedings

...

600

753

600

Printing Circulars, Ac.

■ • ■

200

Begistration Fee ...

. • ■

a •■

...

Auditor's Fee

...

100

Petty Bepairs

a • .

100

Insurance

...

625

313

17,254

14,134 ]

17,654

February, 1905.] Annual Beport.

Xxtraordiiiflry Expenditure.

Library Catalogue
Royal Society^s Catalogue

Pictures
Picture Frames
Repairs
Furniture
Pension
Building

1904.

1905.

Estimate.

Actuals.

Estiinate.

■••

1,000

ogue . . •

■ ••

5,842

• ■ •

misning
• •«

1,800

1,306

* • •

• ••

3,000

566

2,809

■ •■

2,320

2,686

• ••

■ ••

• • t

354

• ••

■ ••

• #•

112

• ••

■ ••

1,220

8,120

11,025

5,029

Agenoiee.

•

Tbe Council has tz-ansferred the London Agency of tbe
Society — ^from Messrs. Luzac & Co. to Mr. Bernard Quaritch, 15
Piccadilly.

During the year no publications have been sent to Messrs.
Luzac & Co., pending the settlement of the 'question of Agency,
but from them we have received books and papers of the yalue
of £28-13-5. They have submitted a statement of their accounts
to the end of October 1904, and the balance of £36-6-11 due to
them has been remitted in full settlement of their account.

Two consignments of publications have been sent to Mr.
Quaritch since his appointment as the Society's London Agent,
amounting to £60-17 and Rs. 533-2, being value of 480 copies
of the various issues of the Journals and Proceedings and of 741
fasciculi of the Bibliotheca Indica, respectively.

Our Continental Agent is Mr. Otto Harrassowitz, to whom we
have sent publications valued at £19-17-6 and Rs. 560-8, of which
£19-14-4 and Rs. 229-11-9 worth have been sold for us.

Library.

The total number of volumes or parts of volumes added to the
Library during the year was 2,949, of which 675 were purchased and
2,274 presented or received in exchange for the Society's publica-
tions.

The MS. of the new edition of the Society's Library Catalogue,
after careful revision by the members of the Library Committee,
was sent to the Press at the beginning of January 1905.

The Government of India, with the assent of the Council,
decided to publish a combined subject-index of the books in Euro-
pean languages in the Society's Library and the Imperial Library.
This is expected to be in print early in 1906.

Annual Eeport, [February, 1905.

In continuation of the Council order, the Imperial Library has
been allowed to borrow books and MSS, from the Society for
the use of its readers until the end of August 1905. During the
period from 28th January to 31st December, 1904, 26 books and 5
Manuscripts have been thus borrowed.

In connection with the proposed rejection of certain books
from the Society's Library, the General Meeting resolved (1)
that the books weeded out by the Committee be rejected and
disposed of, the Medical works being placed in a coUeotion by
themselves ; (2) that the best way of disposing of them is by
sale, and that they be accordingly offered for sale ; (3) that
the first offer be made to the Imperial Library, and that, if
it purchases any of these books, the prices of the books be settled
between the Council and that Library according to the price.-
catalogues of . Quaritch and other booksellers ; (4) that the next
offer be made to the Calcutta University, the Presidency and
other Colleges and the Medical College, and. that the prices of books
bought by them be settled similarly ; (5) that the remainder of
the rejected books be disposed of by public auction under some
arrangement by which members and others can bid, and by which
real prices may be obtained if possible ; and (6) that all books
rejected and £sposed of be first stamped plainly and indelibly
with a special stamp.

International Catalogue of Soientiflio Idteratnre.

During the year, the two remaining volumes of the first
annual issue and the volumes of the second annual issue, with the
exception of thiB volumes on Chemistry, Meteorology, Botany and
Zoology have been received and distributed.

Of the third annual issue the volumes on Physics and Astro-
nomy have been published but have not yet been received.

A great falling off among subscribers for the second and
subsequent issues has to be here recorded. The Agent to the
Oovemor-Qeneral in Bajputana (four sets), the Agent to the
Gbvemor-General in Cenlii^l India (two sets), the Bombay Univer-
sity Library (one set) and the Native Greneral Library, Bombay
(one set), are the most important ; special part subscribers have
in three instances discontinued their subscriptions.

The Director at the Central Bureau was informed of the
number of copies thus left in hand, and he advised that they
should be returned to London. The books have been packed up
and will be sent off soon.

All the subscriptions for the first annual issue, with two or
three exceptions, have been received. A sum of £340, representing
subscriptions for 20 complete sets; and another sum of £17-15-0
for special parts, have been remitted to the Central Bureau during
the year.

The sanction of the Government of India was obtained

February, 1905.] Annual Eepmf.

during the year to the expense of postage in the distribution
of the Catalogue being met fix)m the grant.

Owing to the illness of the clerk during thi^o months of the
year a number of index slips were left over ; these after .being
checked by the experts will be despatched shoi'tly. The number
of slips sent to London was 71.

Mr. W. D. Wright was appointed Clerk attached to the Hegi-
onal Bureau of the Royal Society in the place of Mr. J. B. Richard-
son, I'esigned.

Elliott Prise for Boientiflo Researoh.

A sum of Rs. 1,000 out of the accumulated intei'est on account
of the Elliott Prize Fund in the hands of the Accountant General
of Bengal has been invested in 3i per cent. Government securities ;
and the Council has decided to reserve the power to make use
of this investment, if i*equired by the Tnistees, in awaixling the
prize.

Barclay Memorial Medal.

In connection witli the Barclay Memorial Medal, the following
gentlemen wei-e appointed to form a special Committee to make
the awaixl during 1905 — Captain L. R<igei'H, I. M.S., the Natural
History Seci-etary ; Mr. N. Annandale, Captain A. T. Gage,
I. M.S., Mr. H. H. Hayden, and Major F. J. Drury, I.M.S.

The Society's Premises and Property.

•

The Council met several times to ccmsider a letter fix>m the
Secretary' to the Trustees of the Victoria Memorial, suggesting
the loan of cei-tain ])oi'ti-aits and other objects of interest to the
Victoria Memorial Hall, and, on the matter being referred to the
genei-al body of membens, under rule 64A., it has been decided
to lend certain specified objects for exhibition in the Victoria
Memorial Hall, namely, the following porti*aits and other
objects : —

Two portraits of the Society's founder Sir William Jones

(one of him as a youth and the other in middle age)

(Nos. 67 and 41);
the poi-trait of Waiven Hastings (No. 65) ;
the bust of James Prinsep (No. 19) ;
the old cannon of Mir Jumlu (No. 2) ; .
a Ms. of tlie Gulistan (No. 114) ;
a Ms. of the Badshah-nama (No. 118) ;
three old copper-plate inscriptions (No. 126, found at

Amgachi ; No. 135, found in the Sambalpui* district ;

and No. 136, found at Angasi) ;
a stone 6dict of King A^oka (No. 25) ;

Annual Report, [Febmaiy, 1906.

a poi'trait of Shah Ghazi-nd-din Haidar, King of Ondh

(No. 26);
a portrait of James Grrant Duff, author of the " History

of the Mahrattas " (No. 51) ;
a painting of the interview between the Governor- General

and the Raja of Kota, (No. 107) ; and
a poi'trait of Nasarat Jang, Nawab of Dacca (No. 91).

This decision was communicated to the Trustees. They
asked that these objects might be placed at their disposal at once,
with the exception of the Asoka stone, for exhibition along with
the other Victoria Memorial Exhibits in the galleries of the
Indian Museum, and the Council have handed over the objects
for exhibition in the Indian Museum Galleiy during the cold
season of 1904-5 with the request that the objects be returned
when the exhibition closes, to be on view in the Society *s ix>om8.

During the year certain portions of the Society's i-ooms were
whitewashed and colourwashed ; and the Council has now under
considei*ation a proposal to execute thorough i-epairs and certain
stmctural impix)vements in the Society's building. The cost will
be great, but will be chiefly met out of a gi^nt of *Rs. 10,000
which the Government of India has generously made to the
Society for the purpose. The estimates a,ve now under considera-
tion.

All the pictui*es of the Society have been cleaned and var-
nished at a cost of Rs. 1,306, and new frames have been received
from London. The pictures will be reframed as soon as possible.

Exchange of Publioations.

During 1904, the Council accepted eight applications for
exchange of publications, viz : (1) from the Botanic Institute of
Buitenzorg, Java, the Society's Journal Pai-t II and Proceedings
being exchanged for their " Annals " and " Icones Bogorienses " ;
(2) from the Schlesische Gesellschaft fiir vaterlandische Cultur,
Breslau, the Society's Journal Pai-ts I — III and Proceedings
being exchanged for the publications of that Society ; (3) fix>m
the TJniveraity of Montana, the Society's Journal Pai'ts II
and III for the *' Bulletin '' ; (4) fi*oni the R. Accademia dei
Lincei, Rome, the Society's Journal Part I-lIT and Pix>ceeding8
being exchanged for the publications of tlie Academy ; (5)
from the Societe d'Kthnogi'aphie, Paris, the Society's Journal
Part III, for their " Bulletin " ; (()) fi-om the Societe Royale Beige
de Geographic, Bmssels, the Society's Journal Pai't III being
exchanged for their " Bulletin ; " (7) fix)m the Depai'tment of
Fisheries, Sydney, the Society's Jouraal Part II, for their
" Report " ; and (8) fi-om the Archaeological Survey Department
of India, the Society's Journal Parts I and III being exchanged
for the publications of that Depaii^ment.

In addition to these exchanges, the Imperial Libiwy

February, 1905.] Annual Report.

and the Lucknow Pi'ovincial Museum have been placed on the
distribution list of the Society's publications.

Seoretaries and Treasurer.

Dr. E. D. Ross carried on the duties of Philological Secretary
till ApHl, when Dr. T. Bloch returned from tour and took charge
of the office in addition to the editorsliip to the Journal Fart
/, and the numismatic work which he had I'etained. Dr. Bloch
continued till November ; lie left tlien on toui*, and Dr. Ross con-
sented to undertake both tlie duties, while Mr. H. N. Wright was
in charge of the numismatic work.

Captain L. Rogers, I. M.S., continued Natural History
Secretary and editor of the Journal Fart II, throughout the
year.

Dr. Ross continued Anthi-opological Seci-etaiy and editor
of the Journal Fart III, till July, when he left India on leave for'
three months, and Mr. J. Macfarlane took charge of his work
during the interval. In December, Mr. N. Annandale was per-
manently appointed Aiithix>pological Secretary in the place of Dr.
Ross, who resigned.

Dr. C. R. Wilson continued to be Ti*easurer till April, when
he left for Darjeeling. The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopa-
dhyaya consented to officiate dui'ing his absence, and when Dr.
Wilson resigned his office, because of ill-health in May, he was
appointed permanently to this position. During October he left
Calcutta for a few weeks and Mr. W. K. Dods officiated for
him.

Mr. Macfarlane continued Genei'al Seci-etary and editor of
the Froceedings throughout the year, except during three months,
fix)m May to July, when he went to Europe on leave, and Lt.-Col.
J. H. TuU Walsh, I.M.S., took charge of the work.

Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, was in chai'ge of
the Bibliotheca Indica and the Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts,
and caiTied on the duties of t^e Joint Philological Secretary
throughout the year.

Mr. J. H. Elliott continued Assistant Secretary and Librarian
throughout the year.

There were published during the year ten numbers of the
Pi-oceedings (Nos. 9—11 of 1903 and Nos. 1—7 of 1904) containing
115 pages.

Of the Journal, Part I, five numbers were published (No. 2 of
1903 and Nos. 1 — 4 of 1904) containing 472 pages and 9 plates.
The Numismatic Supplement has been published in Journal Part
L noH. 1, 2 and 4, under the editoi*ship of Mr. Wright.

Of the Journal Pai*t II, six numbers were published (No. 4

Annual Report. [February, 1905

of 1903 and Nob. 1 — 5 of 1904) containing 358 pages and 9 plates.
The Index for 1903 was also published.

Of the Journal Part III four numbers wei'e published (Nos.
1 — 4 of 1904) containing 77 pages and 4 plates. The Index for
1903 was also published.

The other publications issued during the year were the 4th
fasciculus of the Catalogue of the Society's Sanskrit Books and
Manuscripts, and the 2nd fasciculus of the Catalogue of the
Society's Arabic Books and Manuscripts.

Proceedings.

All impoi'tant papei'S noticed in the Proceedings have appeai^ed
in full in the various pai-ts of the Journal, only small papers and
abstracts of the important papers being published in the Proceed-
ings. The Rev. P. 0. Bodding contributed a paper on Shoulder-
headed and other forms of stone implements in th6 Santal Parganas.
Of the implements those with square edgefe are supposed to be very
rare in India. Mr. E. H. Walsh described cei'tain stone implements
found in the Darjeeling Distidct, whicli are locally believed to be
the weapons of • gods and to possess various protective and
medicinal powers. Mr. C. Little contributed two papers,
one on the Himalayan Summer Storm of September 24th
1903, and the other on the Cyclone of 13th November 1903 in
the Bay of Bengal ; both have been published in the Journal with
maps. Mahamahopadhyaya Hai*aprasad S^astri exhibited two
Bengali documents obtained fi*om Rai Jadunath Mozumdar Baha-
dui" of Jessoi*e, in which the executant purported to sell himself
and his family into slavery. One was executed daring the later part
of the Emperor Aurangzeb's reign and the other during the great
famine of 1176 B.S. Among other exhibitions one may be
mentioned by Pundit Yogeia Chandra S^astree of two important
copper-plate grants from Raj put ana and Guzei-at and a beautiful
image of Manjunath, a Buddhist deity, brought from Lhassa.
Major P. R. T. Gurdon, I.A., contributed Notes on the Khasis,
Syntengs, and allied ti*ibes inhabiting Khasia Jaintia hill district
in Assam. These tribes are matriarchal; and among them the
youngest daughter inheiits f I'om the mother ; failing daughters, the
pi'opei'ty passes to the youngest niece ; and failing a niece, to the
youngest female cousin. Babu J. M. Dass in his paper " Notes on
the titles used in Orissa " said that the Oria people are very fond
of titles, which they accept not only from the Raja of Puri but also
from great landloi-ds and even from their castemen, while new titles
are still being invented.

Journal Part I.

Five numl>ers were published during the yeai' under review,
namely. No. 2 of Vol. LXXll and Nos. 1-4 of Vd. LXXIII. The

Pebraary, 1905.] Annual Report.

papers published in these numbers are of historical and linguistic
value and ranged fi-om the 6tli century B.C. to the 19th century
and from the Eastern extremity 4)f Assam to the Western pix>-
vinces of the Indian Empire.

Taking the papers chronologically : — Babu Panneshwar Doyal
identified the Pragbodhi cave, where Buddha sat in meditation for
some time before ho came to Budh Gay a, with a stone chamber about
14 or 15 li fix)m the Bodhi tree in the range of hills called by
General Cunningham, Pragbodhi mountain. The chamber, says
the writer, had never before been visited by an antiquarian.

The late lamented Dr. C. R. Wilson identified Sandanes of the
Periplus with Sundara Satakarni of the Puranas and placed his
short reign between 83 and 84 A.D.

Babu Gangamohan Laskar, a research scholar, has deciphered
throe copper- plates fi-om Khurda written in what is called the
Kufila variety of the Nagari character and placed the donor of the
grant before the latter half of the 7th century. These plates give
some information about the S'ailodbhava dynasty of Kalinga, with
seven kings. This dynasty was already known from the Bagu<}a
plates explained by Dr. Kielhom.

Mr. W. N. Edwaixis and Mr. H. H. Mann described some
intei*esting fortifications situated just over the boundary line of
British tenntoiy in the independent Daphla country and gave the
local traditions connected with them. These ti'aditions I'each back
to the 13th centuiy of the Christian era.

Babu Monmohan Chakravai-ti's paper on the Chronology of
the Eastern Gai)ga kings of Orissa has already been refeiTed to in the
last Annual Rept)^. It is a scholarly paper giNnng a collected history
of these kings fi'om the 11th centuiy to the 15th century based
upon inscriptions. The author says, ** Their history (i.e. of the
kings of the Gaijga dynasty) now rests on surer grounds than the
unreliable ti*aditions embodied in the Madala Pafiji."

The works of the genealogists oi* gha^akas of Bengal have never
been explored by Oriental scholars, yet they embody valuable in-
formation about the great races inhabiting Eastern India from the
7th century downwards. For this reason we welcome Pundit
Yoge^a Chandra S'asti'ee's paper on the Kap section of the Varendra
class of Brahmans, though shoi't, as the beginning of an important
line of reseai^ch.

Coming down to Mahommedan history, Mr. Beveridge has
criticised General Maclagan's paper on the Jesuit Mission to the
Empeix)r Akbar published in our Journal for 1896, p. 38, and a*
portion- of Dr. Wise's paper on the " Bai*a Bhftyas of Eastern
Bengal'' published in our Journal for 1874. In the former the
writer expatiated on cei-tain chapters of the Ain-i-Akbari dealing
with the position of Akbar as a founder of a religion ; and in the
latter the author gave much valuable additional information about
Is& Sb&ii) one of the twelve BhCiyas. Mr. W. Irvine's monograph
on the Later Mughals is continued. Mr. J. F. Fanthome's paper

Anntml ISeport. [February, 1905.

headed " A Forgotten City " deals with Nagarohain, the halting-sta-
tion or villa of the Emperor Akbar, a few miles ivon\ Agra, which
ix>se to be a city in the early part of his reign but was lost sight of
before his death, and can with difficulty be identified at the present
moment.

" The Mints of the Mughal Emperoi-s, " by Mr. Bum, gives a
list of the mint towns of the Mughal Emperors arranged
in alphabetical order and divided into chronological sections.
Mirza Mehdy Khan cnticised the ti-anslation of the Quatrains of
Baba Tahir by Mr. Hei-on- Allen and gave an edition of these. Mr.
H. R. Nevill's paper on Mahals in Sarkar Lakhnau and Maulavi
Abdul Wali's paper on the Antiquity and Traditions of Shahzad-
pur, thi-ow some light on obscure points of Mohammedan history.

Coming to modem History, Babu Gerindranath Dutt's history
of the Hutwa Raj is an important contribution on the stmggles
which the English Government had in the I'evenue settlement of
the Pix)vince8 of Lower Bengal for 30 years or more from the
date of the Diwani. When writing in our Proceedings for 1888
on the Dutch hatchments in Chinsui'a Church, Mi*. Beames left some
initials undeciphered. The late Di*. C. R. Wilson studied Dutch
heraldry and identified these names. His paper is to be found in
vol. LXXIII, No. 3.

Of the linguistic papei-s the most important is that by Major
P. R. T. Gui*d(m on the Moi*ans, a tnbe inliabiting the hills in the
Assam valley. By a compaiison of the woinis in their language
with those of Kachans, Bodos and Dimasas, Major Gui*don says
that they ai*e allied to the Kacharis. Babu Gerindi^anath Dutt's
paper on the Bhojpuri dialects spoken in Saitin is a revised edition
of the notes supplied by him to the Linguistic Survey.

Of the Tibetan papers, those by Mi-. E. H. Walsh have ali^eady
been noticed in the last Repoi't. The only interesting additional
paper received duinng the year under re,view is. by Rev. A. H.
Fi'ancke entitled "A Language Map of West Tibet with notes"
prepared for the benefit of the students of his Ladaki Grammar.

There has unfortunately been some irregularity in the issue
of the Society's Journal, Pai't 1, and it has now been decided
to issue the Journals pix)mptly, publishing such material as is
available, and at least quarterly.

Journal Part II.

The past year has been one of gi'eat activity in the Natui'al
History section of the Society, no less than six numbers of Paiii II
of the Journal having been issued with 358 pages and nine illusti'a-
tive plates, this quantity being more than thi'ee times as much as
in the preceding year. This is due partly to the fact that some
papei*s read dui'ing 1903 were published dui-ing the past year, and
partly to the gi^eater efPoi'ts that have been made to publish papers

Fetruary, 1906.] Annual Report,

more rapidly than has hitherto been done ; hence only two papers
read i^ecently remained in hand at the end of the year.

Botany haw been specially well represented. The papers
published include two important memoirs on " Matenals for a Floi-a
of the Malayan Peninsula" by Sir George King and Mr. J. S.
Gamble, in which the natural oi'ders Caprifoliaceee and RubiaceeB
are dealt with ; Nos XXI to XXIV of the Noviciee Indica) and three
other papers describing new plants by Major D. Prain, I.M.S. ;
two joint papers by Major Prain and Mr. I. H. Burkill on Dioscoreae
or Yams ; and one by Mr. J. R. Drummond on a new Scii'pus.

The Zoological contributions include three papera on the life-
history of cei'tain insects of economic importance, by Mr. E. P.
Stebbing, a paper on Additions to the Oriental Snakes at the Indian
Museum by Mr. Nelson Annandale, and another by the same author
(not yet published) on the Lizards of the Andamans.

Among the other contributions of interest must be mentioned a
series of four papers, illustrated by plates, on " Cyclones in the Bay
of Bengal " and on " Himalayan Summer Storms" by Mr. C. Little,
and two by Mr. D. Hooper on the occurrence of Melanterite in
Baluchistan and on Rusot, an ancient Eastern Medicine.

Adopting a proposal made by Major Pi»ain, I. M.S., the Council
resolved to hasten the publication of Sir George King's " Materials
for a Floitt of the Malayan Peninsula " by having it piinted in
London, and to issue it as an " Extra Number " of the Society's
Journal, Part II.

Journal Part III.

Four numbers have been issued, three containing supplements
as well as long communications. The papei's ai^ of considerable
impoii;ance, for they are concise statements by men who have had
oppoi-tunities of studying the less accessible Indian races or the
aixjhffiology of interesting localities. Mr. J. E. Friend -Pereira
conti'ibuted an Essay on the septs of the Khonds and the customs
which regulate intei-marriage among them ; the Rev. E. M. Goinion
and Major P. R. T. Gurdon have dealt, chiefly from a cultural
standpoint, with primitive tribes in the Bilaspore district and in
Assam respectively ; the Rev. P. (). Hodding and Mr. E. H. Walsh
have desci'ibed stone implements from difFerent parts of India ; and
various authoro have furnished shorter notes and pa])ers on other
points in ethnogiaphy or sociology. The matter printed fills 77
pages and is illustrated with four photogmpliic plates.

It has been decided that tlie subject of National Indian Hymns
and Popular Chants might well be taken up by the members of
the Society in connection with the Journal Part III.

Coins.

Ten copper coins and 13 silver coins have been presented

Annudl Beport [February, 1905.

to the Society in 1904. The copper coins belong to the following
Pathan Sultans of Delhi : —

Jalaluddin Firoz Shah ... ... 1

' A^a'uddin Muhammad Shah ... ... 1

Mul^ammad ibn Tughlaq Shah ... ... 1

Firoz Sj^ah Tughlaq ... ... 6

„ with Fatt Khaii •• ... 1

Of the 13 silver coins 4 are coins of the East India Company
struck in the name of Shah ' jSlam at the Mul^ammadabad-Benares
Mint ; one belongs to the kings of Oudh, and the remaining eight
are coins of the following Mughal Emperors : — -^

Jahangir ... ... ... 1

Aurangzeb ... ... ... 1

Fami^siyar ... ... ... 1

Muhammad Shah ... ... ... 1

Ahmad Shah ... ... ... 2

'Alamglrll. ... ... ... 1

Shah * A lam II. ... ... ... 1

In accordance with the Council order to lend to the Trustees
of the Indian Museum as many of the Society *s coins as may be
required by them for the purpose of classification and exhibi-
tion along with the Museum coins, all the coins have been made
over to the' Indian Museum for selection and for return of the
remainder not required by them.

In July 1904, the Council resolved to separate the Society's
numismatic work from that of the Philological Secretary, and Mr.
H. Nelson Wright, I.C.S., was appointed Honorary Numismatist of
the Society.

Bibliotheoa Indioa.

In the year 1903, thirty-five fasciculi wei*e published — a
larger number than in any previous year. During 1904, however,
forty-two fasciculi have been published, showing an unprecedented
activity in the publication of the Bibliotheca Indica.

The cost of pHnting these forty-two fasciculi is Ra. 1,076
and the cost of editing Rs. 4,971; the average cost for each
fasciculus being Rs. 375.

These fasciculi contain twenty-five works, of which two are in
the Ai'abic-Pei'sian and the rest in the Sanskrit series. According
to I'esolution of the Council a descnption is to be given in the annual
I'epoi't only of such works as ai^e either commenced or ended. In
the case of the first, the descri])tion serves as an inti-oduction and in
the case of the last as an adveitisement. The Ai^abic- Persian series
contains translation of the Akbamamah and Riyfizu-s-Salatin. In
the Sanskrit series too there are three English ti*anslations, namely,
Marka];L4eya Pura^a, Tantra Vartika and Sloka Vai-tika. The last

Febraary, 1905.] Annual Report.

two are editions of Sanskrit works of rare yalne whioH Have no
chance' of being published by private enterprise. Two of these
belong to Jaina literature, namely, the Tattvai'thadhigama Sutra
and ITpamitibhaya-prapancakatha ; the first was composed by
TJmasyati Vacaka in the 1st Century A.D. at Pataliputra, and the
second by Siddhar^i, reputed to be the bi^other's son of the poet
M»gha, in the beginning of the 10th century. There are two
Buddhist works among these, namely, the Bodhicaryavatara by
S^antiDevainthe 7th century, and the S'atasahasrika PrajnapramitS
attributed to Nagarjuna, the founder or at least the first great
writer of the Mahajana School, in the 2nd century A.D. Several
other works are in the course of publication of which no mention
is made here, since no fasciculi have been published during the
year.

Of the Brahmanic Sanskrit works two belong to the Orissa
school of Smrti, two to the Bengal, one to the Bombay, and one
to the Benares school ; one to the Ramanuja School of the Yedanta,
one to the Sankara School, and to the Mimamsa School.

Of the works that have been completed, the Riyaz- us- Sala tin
belongs to the Arabic- Persian series. It is an English translation
of a histoiT of Bengal composed by G-hulam Husain Salim between
1786 and 1789. The translation has been made by Maulavi Abdus
Salam, M. A., of the Bengal Provincial Service, and he has elucidated
it with ample footnotes and enriched it with an elaborate table of *
proper names. The Riyaz-us-Salatin is the only comprehensive
history of Bengal, and Stewart*s History of Bengal is based upon
it. Dr. Blochmann long ago strongly recommended that ii^ should
be translated, and the translation has now been accomplished.

Since H. H. Wilson translated the Vi^ij^u Purana, no sustained
effort was made to translate any other Puraija till in 1884 Mr. Jus-
tice Pargiter (now our President) undertook the translation of the
Marka];L46ya Purana. Onerous official duties and other difficulties
impeded the preparation of the work with the notes. The progress
was slow, but the translation has at length been brought to a close.
It is accompanied by a full index and a preface in which the trans-
lator expresses the opinion that the Purana had its origin in the
Narbada valley, and that pai*ts of it may be as old as, if not older
than, the Chi*istian era.

Godadhara Rajaguru, who floui*ished by the middle of the
18th Century, was the spiritual guide of the Gajapati Rajas of
Puri. He compiled a complete code of Hindu law and ritual for
Orissa. As no Hindu work from Orissa had ever been published,
the publication of this work was thought desirable, and it was placed
in the hands of Pan<Jit Sada S^iva Mi Bra, a well-known pandlit of
Orissa. The work consists of three volumes, of which the first has
been completed with an elaborate index.

Last year was notified the completion of the Var^akriya Kau-
mudi, by Govindananda Kavikaokanacarya ; and the other work
by the same author, belonging to the same code of Hindu law and

1»

Animal Report, [February, 1905

ritual, has been completed this year, namelj the d^riddhakrijA
Kaumudi, by the same young editor Pandit Kapial Kr^na Smrti-
bha^ana of Bhatpara. He has added a full subject iAdex of the work.
• The new works undertaken during the year are : —
The Baudhayana S'rauta Sutra. Pi'ofessor Hillebrandt of
Bi'eslau, the great authority on Vedic subjects, undertook the edi-
tion of three Vedic works for the Bibliotheca Indica, namely,
Sankhayana, Baudhayana and Hiranya-Ke^i's S'rauta Sutras. He
completed the Sankhayana Suti^a and transfeiTcd (with the consent
of the Council) the editorahip of Baudhayana's work to Dr. W.
Caland of Utrecht. Dr. Caland has published two fasciculi of the
work during the year under review. Baudhayana's School is still
current in Southern India, and he seems to have flourished several
centuries before Christ.

The Balambhat^i or Lak$mi is a commentary on the Mitak^arA,
by Balambhatta Payaguncja of Benares in the 18th century. It
is an important work on the_ Hindu Law of the Benares school,
and the Hon'ble Mr. Justice A^utosh Mukhopadhyaya obtained the
permission of the Council to edit it. But his numerous engage-
ments afforded him little leisure, and the editorship was trans-
ferred to Babu Govinda Das of Benares, who has published the
first fasciculus during the year under review.

The Caturvarga Cintamaui, by Hemadri, the Minister of the
Yadava Kings of Devagiri, about the middle of the 13th century,
is an encyclopedic work on Hindu Laws and rituals of great value.
As it quotes from a variety of works, the publication of the entire
work was considered forty yeara ago to be of great importance,
as giving the names of Sanskrit works existing before Hemadri's
time. The work is divided in parts or kandas, three of which have
already b^en published during the last forty years. MSS. of the
other parts not being procurable, the publication was kept in abey-
ance. During the past two years, however, the MS. of a fourth
part, the Praya^citta-kha^cja, being available, the Council requested
Pa^^it Pramatha Nath Tarkabhu^an, Sanskrit Professor in the
Sanskrit Cojlege, Calcutta, to undei'take the editing of it. He has
issued three fasciculi of the woi'k this year.

The Vallala-carita pui'ports to be biography of Vellala Sena,
a great King of Bengal who reigned during the middle of the 12th
century. It was composed from old materials by Ananda Bhatta in
the beginning of the 16th century at Navadvipa. Several incom-
plete and pai-tial i^eprints of the work were published in the Bengali
character in Calcutta, but no authentic MS. was forthcoming. Dur-
ing the caste agitation that arose after the census of 1901, two
authentic MSS. of the work, were placed in the hands of Mahd-
mahopadhynya Haraprasad Sastri, and the Council requested him
to publish the work in Deva Nagari with an English translation and
historical notes. The first fasciculus has been published containing
the text only. The translation and notes are in the course of pre-
paration.

Fefarap7i 1^&] Annual Addnw.

Search for Sanskrit MSS.

This department of the Society *s work was, as in previous years,
in the hands of tlie Joint Philological Seci*etary. He paid several
visits to Benai'es and other places, and with the assistance of his
ti'a veiling pantjits collected more than 1,200 MSS. and about 300
notices of MSS. So much material has been collected that it is now
possible to give a connected history of Hindu literature during the
whole of the Mohammadan period and to check in many impoi'tant
instances the statements of Mohammadan historians about the
Hindus. A complete list of the names of the MSS. in the entire
Government collection, now amounting to nearly 7,000 MSS., has
been prepared in alphabetical order for publication. The second
volume of the second series of notices of Sanskrit MSS. has been
published. The thii-d volume has been printed, and the Nepal
Catalogue is in type; and both will shortly be published. The
fourth and fifth volume ai-e ready in manuscript and will soon be
sent to press.

The President was empowered to apply to the Government*
of India for a special ginint for the purchase of about 2,000 Jaina
works in Sanski-it, Praki-it, Guzerati, Hindi, Marwari and other
languages on behalf of the Government, if, on f mother examination
of the manuscripts, he is assured that the collection is valuable
enough to waiTant such an application. The application has been
made.

The notices of Hindi manuscripts collected by the Society's
agents during the year 1895 have been made over to the Nagaripra-
chaiini Sabha of Benares for publication at the Society's cost.

Search for Arabic and Feralan ManuBoripts.

In answer to the i*epresentation made by the Society to the
Government of India, in favour of a systematic seareh for Arabic
and Persian MSS., the Government approved of the scheme and
sanctioned an annual grant of Rs. 5,0(X) for a period of five years
for its prosecution, and a further annual gi»ant of Rs. 2,000 for the -
same penod, for the purehase of manuscripts of exceptional value
and interest. The search is in charge of Dr. Ross, and he has
appointed two Travelling Maulavis and a Resident Maulavi to assist
him in this work.

The Report having been read and some copies having been
distributed, The Hon'ble Mr. Pargiter, President, gave his An-
nual Address.

Annual Address, 1904.

The Secretaries have laid before you their combined report
setting out briefly the* business that has been transacted by the

Annual Address. [Febroarji 1905

Society or that has oome before it dnring the past year, and it
remains for me to ofEer some remarks on its affairs during the same
period.

The matter jthat engrossed the largest share of time has been
the preparation of the new catalogue of the books in the Society's
Library. The catalogue now in use was published twenty years
ago, when the Society celebrated its centenary, and the need of a
revised one has been felt for some years past. A new catalogue has
been gradually compiled in manuscript, and there remained the
arduous business of making a thorough revision of it. This has been
carried through by the Library Committee with the help of the
General Secretary, who, as a skilled librarian, was specially qualified
to deal with it. The members of the Committee have given
liberally of their time and have held many meetings to complete
the revision ; and but for the care, and I may say devotion, which
they ajid the Secretary have bestowed on it, it could not have been
carried through with any expectation that the catalogue would
be full, accurate and useful. In this matter two tasks called
for special consideration — ^first, the revision of the Library itself
and the separating out of books and pamphlets that are not needed
by the Society ; and secondly, the framing of the entries in the
most serviceable shape.

A considerable quantity of publications had accumulated
which appeared to be either superfluous or of too little use to the
members, and it was desirable to remove them because of the
limited space and for economy. These were separated as the
revision went on. The principles adopted were two, first, that
the Library should aim at completeness in aU publications
relating to Asia in conformity Mrith the Society's name and
scope, whatever might be their chai^acter or value, official reports
and publications being placed in a separate category ; and secondly,
that the Library could not maintain works relating to other
parts of the world except such as are of general interest and high
reputation. Yet the process of exclusion was applied with so
conservative a spirit that nothing was put out unless the members of
the Committee were unanimous. A list of the works thus excluded
was laid before the monthly meeting in June for general considera-
tion, and has been passed without objection. These will be
disposed of as mentioned in the Heport.

The second task dealt with the method of cataloguing the
names of Oriental authors, and the Committee decided that no
single method was feasible, and that the most convenient course
was that, while the names of authors now living or recently
deceased should be spelt as the authors themselves Anglicized
them, the names of all others should be transliterated correctly in
the headings according to the system approved by the Society.

The catalc^e is* now in the pi-ess, and the Council trust that
it will be as complete, accurate and useful as is possible in such an
undertaking. When it is published, members will be able to keep

Febmarj, 1905.] Anntial Address.

their oopies correct np to date, since lists of the additions are pub-
lished quarterly with the Proceedings.

Another important matter was the part which the Society was
able to take in contributing to the objects to be exhibited in the
Victoria Memorial Hall. The Society's existence is nearly coeval
with British rule in Bengal, and it h&s represented the linguistic,
scientific and literary activity of this rule. It has numbered
f^mong its members, besides its founder, some of the most distin-
guished men whose services have helped to make India what it is
now, and it possesses unique memorials of them. The members
resolved, with but little difference of opinion, to lend some of the
most interesting of their treasures to the Trustees of the Memorial
Hall to be exhibited there. The Society is gratified at this public
recognition of its achievements, and cannot but gain by the wider
interest which the exhibition of these objects will arouse among
those who will visit the Memorial.

The collection of Oriental MSS. is an important branch of the
Society's work. The Society has received during many years an
annual grant from the Government for the systematic search after
and the purchase of Sanskrit MSS. This is in the charge of
the Joint Philological Secretary, Mah&mahopadhyaya Haraprasad
S^astri. He has found and acquired a large number of valuable
and interesting writings. No similar measures have hitherto been
taken to collect Persian and Arabic MSS. from among the stores
that exist in this country, except such as private persons have
undertaken at times on their own behalf ; but during the past year
the Gbvemment of India has generously assigned a further annual
grant in order that a systematic search may be made for those
classes of writings, and that valuable MSS. may be bought and
preserved here in the same way as Sanskrit MSS. This business
has been placed in the hands of the present Philological Secretary,
Dr. Ross, and he has been prosecuting an active search with the aid
of maulavis during the last five months. He has discovered a
number of private libraries that were not known to us befora ; the
works in them have been examined, and what has been already
found offers sanguine expectations that the grant will enrich
our collection with writings of the highest interest and value,
especially for historical pui^poses. I may add that the recent
expedition to Thibet has brought to light a quantity of Thibetan
MSS. ; these have been placed temporarily in the Imperial Library
here and are available for study.

The Society has about 600 Jain manuscripts in its custody at
present. These are not always easy to be obtained, because the
Jains do not part with their writings readily. Mahamahopadhyaya
Harapras&d Sastri has however recently learnt of a valuable col-
lection of such manuscripts, comprising nearly two thousand works
or portions of works, and the owner, who is not a Jain, is willing to
sell them. It is very desirable that they should be secui-ed. An
application has been made to the Oovemment of India for special

2:i

Atmual Add/ren, [February, 1905.

aid towards their pxtrchafie, and if they can be bought, the total
collection of Jain manuscripts which will be in the Society's
custody will be the finest in the world.

These collections demand that the fullest use should be made of
them, and one of the first duties will be to compile descriptive
catalogues of the Persian, Ai'Abic and Jain manuscripts, as has been
done for the Sanskrit manuscripts. In all this fresh work we must
look more to oui* Indian members to prosecute the research neces-
sary. Some use is made of these manuscripts by scholars in Europe,
and by European scholai's resident in this country ; but the number
of the latter is very small and will probably be fewer in the future.
Members of the Government Services can only give of the leisure,
which they can spare from their of&cial duties, towards qualifying
themselves in Oiiental learning and studying Oriental works ; and
they are less able year by year to find leisure for such studies. Their
official duties inci^ase and become more exacting, and do not in any
way conduce towards acquiring any thorough acquaintance with
ancient learning. The two pursuits have been continually diverg-
ing more and more markedly. Moi-eovei", to add to the hesitation
that besets Oriental study here, the standard of Oriental attain-
ments requii'ed rises with the additional knowledge that is con-
tinually accumulated by scholars in Eui'ope. These and other
reasons deter membera of those Services fix)m attempting original
research in these fields, and there are very few, if any, inducements.
The opportunities therefore are all the ampler for Indian students,
and a career of distinction is open to them, if they will carry on
their investigations according to the standaid of European scholar-
ship. This is, no doubt, not a simple qualification, yet it is essen-
tial ; and those of them are fortunate who can receive some part of
their training fi'om European teachers. It is very much to be
wished that moi'e training of this kind should be available for them.

The scientific side of the Society's work, on the other hand,
should inci'ease in the future. The Scientific Departments of the
Government have been strengthened. Among the members of
those services there is no such disagreement between official duties
and private pursuits; but 'the two blend and strengthen each
other, and scientific research and pi'ofessional success go hand in
hand. For scientific investigation, therefore, there are the most
encouraging inducements. Moreover, as private enterprise develops
the resources of the country, Science will be applied to those objects
in larger measure, and*the number of workei*s in scientific fields
should steadily increase. The Society must hope that it will re-
ceive the benefit of all such investigations in future, and that more
scientific papers will be contributed to its Journal rather than
communicated to the publications of the various Societies in
England.

A matter that concerns us closely is the style in which our
Proceedings and Journal are published. This is now under con-
sideration. The present style is what was adopted many years ago,

February, 1905.] Annual Address,

and the Council desire to improve and probably enlarge these
publications and add more illustrations, so as to suit the requii'e-
ments of the present day better. Efforts are also being made to
issue our publications promptly, and the Council hope that mem-
bers will contiibute papers the more readily in that the Journal
will then HUpply them with a gi*eater quantity of matter of varied
interest. These modifications should tend to increase the sale of
our publications in Europe ; and the Report mentions the change
which .has been made in the Society's agency in London to secure
a readier, larger and more remunei'ative disposal. Our thanks are
due to Mr. Macfarlane who arranged the new terms during his
visit home on leave last year.

Steady progi^ess has been made in the publication of the Bib-
liotheca Indica. Mi\ Beveridge has finished his translation of the
Akbamama ; fresh work vrill be placed in his hands, and it is hoped
arrangements may be made for additional works on the Persian and
Arabic side, which has of late years rather given way to the Sans-
krit side. This should be one of the first results of the systematic
search that (as I have menti(med) is being made for Persian and
Arabic manuscripts. Among Sanskrit wntings the Society should,
I think, pay moi'e attention to various old works in futui-e, which
represent i*ather the general or popular side of litei»ature. Arch-
aeological discovenes in ancient countries have shewn that the
accounts handed down from ancient times are not as fictitious
as was imagined formerly, but contain much substantial truth. This
should be found true in India also. With regaixi to the Pura^as,
for instance, recent researches have indicated that they ai'e more
ancient than was conjectured a gonei^ation ago. Professor Wilson
estimated their age as lying between the eighth and thirteenth cen-
turies approximately, but it now seems that all of them were com-
posed earlier, most of them befrn-e the seventh century, and some
at lea.st in the earliest centuries of the Christian era. Similarly the
Tantms appear to be nioi-e ancient than wa« imagined, and a study
of them will thix)w much needed light on a very wide and obscure
though important subject, namely, on various phases of the popu-
lar forms of Hindu religion of mod(»ni times and of the present day.
The Society might well turn part of its attention to these and
other original compositions leather than towai'ds editing commen-
taries, which ai*e admittedly of compai^atively modem origin.

Much attention has been given to the Society's house, and
various repaii'S and improvements have been eairied out. Through
. the geneix)sity of the Government of India the munificent sum of
Rs. 10,CXX) was granted for the further inij)i*ovement of this build-
ing. Pi'oposals and estimates have been di'awn up and ai'e now
under consideration, and when the Council has decided hr)w the
funds at its disposal can be best utilized, the alterations will be
undertaken and should he finished this yeai-.

The valuable pictures which the Society possesses, either as its
own br as Trustee of the Home Bequest, required renovation. They

Annual Address. [February, 1905.

have been cleaned, re-stretcbed and yamisbed. Fresb frames were
selected by tbe late President, tbe Hon. Mr. Bolton, in London, and
have recently aiTived. The pictures are now being placed in their
new frames and will be re-hung, when the repairs to the building
are completed, and re-arranged so as to show to better advantage.
The expense has been great, but the renovation should suffice for
many years.

The Report shows that the list of the Society's members has
increased so as to stand now at a higher number than it has ever
recorded in the past. This is of good augury for the future, and
we trust that among the new members many will contribute not
only their interest in the Society's business, but also the results
of travels and inquiries. The inquiries that were open to members
in the Society's early days were many and wide, and offered all the
attraction and interest that newly-discovered fields possess, where all
information is welcome ; but the conditions of research have gi'eatly
altered now. In the settled Provinces of India, no doubt, the har-
vest of investigation has been freely reaped, and what moi*e is to be
gathered becomes rather the work of specialists and expei*ts. The
field of Indian investigation has been surveyed and described, and
the work that remains is for those who can bring minds, unbur-
dened with other demands and replete .with knowledge, to the eluci-
dation of the problems and difficulties that have arisen out of the
general survey. Yet much valuable ethnological information still
awaits the gathering among the ruder tribes, especially in the outly-
ing Provinces. To members who have such opportunities the
ethnological side of the Society's researches offers ample scope for
investigation, and if they will make careful and systematic notes
about those tinbes and their languages, customs and religion, they
can supply facts of real interest and value, as regaixis both the early
conditions of such ti'ibes and also the changes that are being work-
ed among them by the influence of Hinduism.

I will conclude by mentioning some matters of interest which
lie outside the Society, but in which members have taken or are
taking a part.

A Buddhist Sanskrit Appendix was compiled to Rai Sarat
Chandra . Das' Thibetan • Dictionaiy under the auspices of the
Government, and the Government has recently placed it in the cap-
able hands of M. de La Vallee Poussin in Belgium, in order that it
may receive a finishing revision fi'om a European scholar.

The AixjhsBological Department of Government has published
its first annual volume. It covers the whole ground of such
research and sets out most interesting discoveries with a wealth of
detailed information.

A book of gi'eat interest has lately been published by Mr. Vin-
cent Smith on the early history of India from B.C. 600 to the Mo-
hammedan conquest. It brings the latest discoveries to elucidate
that long and most important period, and will be of signal service to
students in this country. Prof. Thibaut has published in the series

Febraary, 1905.} Annual Address.

of Saored Books of the East a translation of Bamftnnia's great
work, the ffribhafja,' which is a commentary on the Yedftnta Su-
tras and is the standard book of the Yaifi^avas of South India. Dr.
Grierson has published two more parts of his monumei^tal work in
the Linguistic Survey of India.

A Flora of the Fanjab is now under compilation, and the duty
has been entrusted by the Grovemment to Mr. Drummond of the
Civil Service.

The Imperial Academy of Sciences of Vienna wished to obtain
a record of Sanskrit recitation and music for the study of ancient
texts, and Dr. Exner, who is now in India, succeeded in obtoining
the best results that are possible in Calcutta with the aid of a pho-
nograph, as selected passages were recited by the best qualified
pa^^its.

The Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society has just cele- •
brated its centenary, and the Council arranged that three^ of our
members should attend and offer it our congratulations. ^

The President announced that the Scrutineers reported the
result of the election of Officers and Members of Council to be as
follows : —

President.
His Honor Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K.C.S.I.

Vice-Presidents,

The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, M.A., D.L.,

I^ .It.A.S., F.R.S.E.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esq., I.C.S. (retired).

Secretary and Treasurer,

Honorary General Secretary : — J. Macfarlane, Esq.
Treasurer : — The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya^ '
M.A., D.L., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries.

Philological Secretary :— E. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary : — Capt. L. Rogers, M.D., B.Sc,

I.M.S.
Anthropological Secretary : — N. Annandale, Esq., B.A.
Joint Philological Secretary : — ^Mahamahopadhyaya Hara^ . :

prasad Shastri, M.A.

Oeneral Meeting, [Febraaryi 1905.

Other Members of OounciL

The Hon. Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., I.O.S.

Kumar Bramessur Maliah.

I. H. BurkiU, Esq., M.A.

H. E. Kempthome, Esq.

W. D. Dods, Esq.

The Hon. Mr. A. Earle, I.O.S.

Lt.-Ool. J. H. TnU Walsh, I.M,S.

B. 0. Lees, Esq.

H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

E. Thornton, Esq., F.B.I.B.A.

The Meeting was then resolved into the Ordinary General
Meeting.

His- ExCEiiLENOY Lobd Ourzon, G.M.S.I., G.M.I.E., Patron,
in the chair.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Thirty-six presentations were announced.

Mr. J. De Grey Downing and Oaptain G. W. Megaw, I. M.S.,
were ballotted for and elected Ordinary Members.

It was announced that Mr. B. G. Sen and Bai Lakshisankar
Misra Bahadur had expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The President announced that Mr. P. B. Bramley, Babu Gt>pal
Chandra Ghatterjee and Mr. Mahammad Bafiq elected members of
the Society on 3rd February, Ist June and 6th July 1904, respectively,
not having paid their entrance fees, their election have become null
and void under Bule 9, and that the election of Rev. S. Endle has
been cancelled at his own request.

The General Secretary exhibited two photographs of the
stone image of Buddha forwarded by the Commissioner of the
Ohittagong Division, and read the following note on it prepared
by Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana : —

This image represents Buddha sitting on PadmUsana or
lotus-seat which is defined as a particular posture in religious
meditation in which the devotee sits with the thighs crossed, with
one hand resting on the left thigh, the other held up with the
thumb bent towards the heart, and the eyes directed towards the
tip of the nose.

The image, which is a specimen of neither the Indo- Greek,
Indo-Scythiaii or Dravidian sculpture, is the representation of an
Arakanese Buddha which differs a little from the Buddhas of
Burma proper. The image must have been prepared ai)out the
year 1560 A.D., when Ohittagong was completely conquered by the
Arakanese and was made a province of Arakan. Ohittagong
remained a province of Arakan np to 1666 A.D., when it was

Febroarj, 1905.] Oeneral Meeting.

snatohed away by the Mahomedans. The towa was stormed and
the Arakanese settlers driyen out of Chittagong. After the
annexation of Arakan by the King of Burma, a large number
of fresh Arakanese Buddhists immigrated into Cliittagong at the
close of the 18th Centnry A.D. The Maghs that now live in
Ohittagong are the descendants of these last immigrants. They
know nothing of this image and there is no local ti*adition about
it. It was in fact prepared before their arrival in Chittagong,
and before the storming of the city by the Mahomedans.

According to the Burmese legends, in the reign of King
Thirimegha in the middle of the 14th Century A.D., a canioe
tooth of Buddha was brought to Tsitkain. If Tsitkain is identi-
fied with Chittagong (about which there is of course a grave
doubt), then in some future time we may expect also to find in
Chittagong the golden casket in which the precious tooth-relic
was placed.

Pandit Satis Chandra Yidyabhusana exhibited images of
five of the sixteen famous Buddhist Mahasthaviras recovered f rom-
Tibet.

. X"> y «■ .•"V /'>^V^'V./"S^'N^ ^.^ >.<• '

MARCH, 1905.

The Monthly Genei-al Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the Ist March, 1905, at 9,-15 p.m.

C. W. McMiNN, Esq., I.C.S. (retired,) Vice-President, in the
chair.

The following members were present : —

Mr. N. Annandale, Mr. R. Bum, Babu Monmohan Chakra-
varti, Mr. B L Chaudnri, Rai Sarat Chandra Das Bahadur,
Mr. J. N. Das Gupta, Mr. D, Hooper, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Dr.
H. H. Mann, Capt. J. H. D. Megaw, Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S.,
Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree, Babu Jogendra Nath Vidyabhusan,
Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhushana, Mr. E. Vredenburg.

Visitors : — Mr. D. MacDonald, Mr. S. C. Sanial, Babu Bra-
jendra Kumar Seal.

The minutes of the last Meeting wei^e read and confirmed.

Eleven presentations were announced.

Rev. A. Willifer Young, Mr. W. B Brown, Miss Cornelia
Sorabjee, Babu Sasi Bhushan Bose, Mr. S. C. Sanial, and Babu
Muralidhar Banerji, were ballotted for and elected Ordinaiy Mem-
bers.

It was announced that Dr. A. E. Caddy had expressed a
wish to withdraw from the Society.

The Chairman announced that a second Elliott gold medal
had been awarded to Babu Surendra Nath Maitra, M.A., for his
essay entitled ^^ On the Experimental Determination of the Elec-
tro-chemical equivalent of Nickel,^* submitted in competition for the
Elliott Prize for Scientific Research for 1904, unoer Rule G of
notification in the Calcutta Gazette of the 28th December, 1892.

The General Secretary read the following report of the Sub-
Committee appointed by Council to consider the style, paper
and design of the Society's publications held on Wednesday, the
22nd February, 1905, at 8 a.m.

Resolved —

1. The Conunittee is of opinion that by the establish-
ment of a quarto publication « for the larger memoirs, the
residue of small papers can be conveniently published in a single
Journal styled the ^^ tfoumal and Proceedings " of the Society issued
on the lines of the Journal of the Roval Asiatic Societv.

2. That the paper most appropriate for use in all the Society's
publications is that emplojred for the Quarterly Journal of the
Geological Society, in which photo-blocks can be printed with

Proceedings. [March, 1906.]

fair clearness on a paper which is not inconveniently thick or
smooth.

3. The Committee after seeing representatives of Messrs.
Thacker, Spink & Co., and the Baptist Mission Pi'ess, recommend
the following estimate submitted by the latter : —

Paper A. Rs. 3-8 per page for 8vo.
„ C. „ 6-4 „ „ 4to.

4. The Committee also recommend that the new paper and,
as far as possible, the types should be employed for works here-
after to be published in the Bibliotheca Indica.

The question of improving the vernacular types used in this
publication must be postponed, nothing better being available in
India, but the Committee has reason to believe that impix)vement8
will shortly be effected.

5. The present Report is submitted to this Meeting of
Council in order that if it is adopted the new arrangements may
apply to the publications of 1905. The pi-epaiution of a design for the
new printed cover is still under considei»ation, but can be easily
completed befoi*e any new publications ai-e issued.

6. The Committee were further of opinion that select adver-
tisements should appear in " Joui'nal and Pix>ceedings,'' as in the
J.R.A.S., and that the an^angements for this pui-pose should be
entrusted to Messi^. Thacker, Spink & Co., whose repi-esentative
informed the Committee that they were i-eady to undertake the
work and that the income to be derived from this source would
probably recoup the Society for a very large pi-oportion of the
cost of the "Journal and Proceedings." It is suggested that these
advertisements besides being a souixse of income would be of con-
siderable practical use to membere.

7. To facilitate the system of publishing papers, and to avoid
the delay often caused by reference to Council, in accordance with
the standing regulations, the Committee recommend that all
an'angements with regard to the publication of papers be made
by a Standing Publication Committee, composed of the Editors
of the Journal and Pix)ceedings, and that this Committee be given
the powers now resting with Council, except when the publication
of a paper involves expenditure beyond the sanctioned grant. In
such a case, the sanction of Council would be necessary befoi'e the
printing of a paper. This change of i-egulation can be introduced,
on resolution of the Council, by a single change in the wording
of the standing regulations printed in pp. 25 and 26 of the Rules, <jbc.
of the Society. ,

8. The Committee recommend the restoration of the old
practice of publishing in the Proceedings from their minutes, the
list of members at each Meeting of Council as well as extracts
when they appear to be of general interest. Such extracts might
be first read at the General Meeting following the Meeting of
Council.

APRIL, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 5th April, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fbaseb, M.A., LL.D., K.O.S.I.,
President, in the chair.

The following members were present : —

Mr. N. Annandale, Mr. R. P. Ashton, Major W. J. Buchanan,
I.M.S., Major W. J. Bythell, I.A., Babu Monmohan Chakravarti,
Mr. B. L. Uhaudhuri, Rai Sarat Chandra Das Bahadur, Mr. Hari
Nath De, Mr. L. L. Fermor, Bev. E. Francotte, S.J., Mr. N. L.
Hallward, Mr. H. H. Hayden, Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. W. 0. Hossaok,
Mr. J. Macfarlane, Mr. G. W. McMinn, Kumar Satindradeb Bai,
Gaptain L. Rogers, I.M.S., Pandit Yogesa Ghandra Sastree,
Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, Mr. H. E. Stapleton,
Pandit Satis Gnandra Yidyabhusana.

Visitors ."-Mr. A. J. F. Blair, Mr. S. H. Browne, Mr. A. G.
b'raser, Mr. E. H. Pascoe, Kumar Kshitendradeb Rai Mahasai,
Kumar Manindradeb Rai Mahasai.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Eighty-three presentations were annoxmced.

Mr. J. M. Dunnett was ballotted for and elected an Ordinary
Member of the Society.

It was announced that Lt.-Gol. H. T. S. Ramsden, I.A., had
expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The General Secretary read the names of the following gentle-
men who had been appointed to serve on the various Gommittees
for the present year : —

Finance and Visiting Committee —

Mr. N. Annandale.

Mr. W. K. Dods.

The Hon. Mr. A. Earle.

Mr. T. fl. Holland,

Mr. H. E. Kempthome.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Aautosh Mukhopadhyaya.

Gaptain L. Rogers.

Dr. B. D. Ross.

Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri.

Library OoTnmittee —

Mr. Harinath De,
Mr. H» H. Hayden.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.]

Mr. T. H. D. LaTouche.

Mr. 0. W. McMinn.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mnkhopadhjaja.

Dr. E. D. Ross.

Mahamahopadhyaja Haraprasad Shastri.

Mr. E. Thornton.

Philological Committee —

Babu Muralidhar Banerjee.

Babn Monmohan Ohakravarti.

Mr. Harinath De.

Mr. E. A. Gait.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhjaya.

The Hon. Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter.

Dr. E. D. Ross.

Pandit Satyavrata Samasrami.

Pandit Yogesa Ohandra Sastree.

Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri.

Mahamahopadhyaya Chandra Kanta Tarkalankara.

Dr. G. Thibaut.

Babu Nagendra Nath Vasu.

Mr. A. Venis.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana.

The proposed revision in Rules 5 and 7 of the Society's Rules,
of which intimation had been given by circular to all resident
members in accordance with Rule 64A, were brought up for dis-
cussion.

Mr. D. Hooper exhibited some peculiar knives from Nepal
and Coorg.

The following papers were read :—

1. Aniruddha Thera, — A learned Pdli author of SotUhem India
in the 12th Century A.D.—By Pandit Satis Chandba YidtIbhG^ana.

2. The Colouring Principle of the flowers of Nyctanthes Arhor-
tristis. —By E. G. Hill, B.A.

3. On some Forms of the Kris hilt, with special reference to the
Kris tadjGng of the Siam^e Malay States. With exhibition of speci-
mens and drawings, — By N. Annandalb, B.A.

This paper will be published in the Memoirs.

4. The Monasteries of Tibet* — By Rai Sabat Chandra Das
Bahadur, C.I.B.

5. On the occurrence of the Fresh-water Worm Ohsstogaster in
India, with notes on the habits of a species from Calcutta. — By N.
Annandals, fi.A.

6. A letter from Mr. H. Beveridge toBahu Oirindra Nath Dutt
on his paper on the History of the Hutwa Raj.

I am much obliged to you for the present ofyonr History of
the Hutwa Raj. I nave read it with interoBi. The only point on

April, 1905.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

whioh I am capable of commenting is that relating to the time of
Akbar and his father. At pace 4 you speak of the last of the Lodi
kings falling into the hands of Baber, the exact fact being that he
was killed in battle, and the battle of " Baksar '* a little lower
down is a slip for the battle of Ohansa (on the other side of the
Ganges). Yonr note at pages 48 and 49 on the Hntwa Baj in the
Ain Akbari should rather be the Hntwa R^' in the Ain and
the Akbamama, for the chief references to ELaljanpore and its
Zemindar are in the Akbamama. Blochmann's notes to which
vou refer are derived from the Akbamama, not from the Ain.
Kalyanpore is twice mentioned in the Akbamama vol. III. One
reference is at page 370 which is that mentioned by yon, though
I do not think the original Persian quite warrants the statement
that the imperialists drove Masum K. Faroukhudi over Kalyan-
pore to Mahamedabad. The other reference is not mentioned by
Blochmann, but is the more important of the two, for there Abul
Fazl refers to Saran and the Zemindar of Kalyanpore.^ It occurs
at page 397, Vol. Ill, of the Bib. Ind. ed. of the Akbamama, line
thi^ from top. After mentioning the borders of Saran on the
preceding page (396) it says that a rebel named Nur Mahammed
tried to take refuge with '* the Zemindar of Kalyanpore '* and did
not succeed. This reference is in the 28th year of Akbar's reign
corresxx)nding to 1582 or 1583 and so you will see that your date
of 16(X) for Raja Kalyan Mall is too late by about 20 years. The
Koda * or Konah mentioned in Jarrett 11, 156, just before Kalyan-
pore is perhaps the Kuadi of your page 5. By the by, Masum K.
Faroukhudi was afterwards secretly murdered by Akbar's orders.

7. Festivals^ Customs and Folklore of Oilgit.—By Munshi
Gholam Mahomad. Ckymmunicated hy the Anthropological Secretary,

This paper will be published in the Memoirs.

1 " I am indebted to the Asiatio Society's rendent MoaWi for the follow-
ing information from the Akbamamah : —

'* Noor Muhammad, the oat*law. When Khani Azam Mirza Kook took
post and reaohed the boundaries of Jaanpore, he received information that
that oai-law (Noor Muhammad) oame from Bengal by the way of Tirhoot and
made friendship with Khaja Abdul Gafoor Nagshbandi and disturbed the peacv
of the country and began to ravage the district of Saran, having settled at a
distance of 24 miles from Tirhoot. Meanwhile the royal troops arrived at the
bank of the Ganges and attempted to oonstmot a bridge over it. Under-
standing this the enemy tried to take shelter under the aamindar of Kalyan-
pur but in vain. He was arrested at Chelaran (Obamparan)."

i There is no doubt that " Ko^ah (Gawa P ) *' of Jarrett is Kua^i. Most
of the names of the Pergs. in Saran mentioned by Abul Fasl have been mis-
read by Jarrett. As for their correct reading of. my notes on the Yema-
«alar dialects of Saran in the Journal, of the Asufttic Society of Bengal, Part I,
JSfo. 8, of 1887, pp. 194-106.

G. N. DuTT.

MAY, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 3rd May, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidtabhu^aijia, M.A., in the chair.

The following members were present : —

Dr. N. Annandale, Rai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, Mr. I4
L. Fermor, Mr. J. Macfarlane, Mr, F. C. Turner, Mr. B. Vred en-
burg.

Visitor : — Mr. G. de P. Colter.

The minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.

Thirty-six presentations were announced.

Babu Kashi Prasad Saha, Babu Hemendra Prasad Ghosha,
Dr. A.. J. OUenbach, Mr. H. G. Graves, Babu Dwarkanath Chakra-
butti and Mr. T. W. Richardson were balloted for and elected Ordi-
nary Members of the Society.

It was announced that Mr. A. Tocher had expressed a wish
to withdraw from the Society.

The Chairman announced that Mr. H. E. Stapleton, Captain
L. Rogers, I.M.S., Mr. H. H. Mann, Mr. D. Hooper and Mr. J.
N. Das Gupta had been appointed to serve on the Library Com-
mittee during the present year.

The following papers were read : —

1. The Emperor Bahar. — By H. Bevbbidqe, LC.S. (retired.)

2. Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III — Notes on th^
Oriental Lizards in the Indian Mtiseum, with a List of the Species
recorded from British India and Ceylon, Part 2,^'^By Nelson
Annandale, B.A., D.Sc.

3. Tibet ^ a dependency of Mongolia (1643-1716 A.D.)— By
Rai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, C.LE.

4. SARVAJffA-MiTRA — A Tantrika Buddhist author of KSamira
in the 8th Oentury A.D.—By Pandit Satis Chandra ViDYABHu^AisrA,
M.A.

5. The Similarity of the Tibetan Alphabet to the Kashgar
Brahmi Alphabets—By Rev. A. H. Franckb.

6. A complete All-word Index to the Inscriptions of Asoka. — By
Ganqa Mohan Laskar, M.A. Oommunicated by the Philological
Secretary,

The last two papers will be published in the Memoirs.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.]

7. Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula, No. 16. — By
Sir George King, K.C.I E., LL.D., F.R.S., late Superintendent
of the Boyal Botanic Garden, Calcutta, and J. Stkes Gamble, C.I.E.,
M.A., F.R.S., late of the Indian Forest Department.

(Abstract.)

The present contribution to these materials contains the ac-
count of the genus Psychotria required to conclude the joint-account
by the authors of the natural order Rubiaceas, commenced in part
14 and continued in part 15 of this series. This account of Psy-
chotria comprises descriptions of 26 completely represented and 3
imperfectly known species ; of these the following ll species, — Psy-
chotria Kunstleri King & Gamble, P. Scortechimi King & Gamble,
P. pilulifera King & Gamble, P. Bidleyi King & Gamble, P.
multicapitata King & Gamble, P. Birchiana King & Gamble,
P. fulvoidea King & Gamble, P. Gurtisii King & Gamble, P.
Wrayi King & Gamble, P. insequalis King & Gamble, and P.
condeiisa King & Gamble, are new to science.

In addition, this fasciculus contains accounts, for which the
authors are jointly responsible, of the three following natural orders :
OampanulacesB, 4 genera and 6 species, two of the species — Pentaph-
ragma Scortechimi King & Gamble and P. Bidleyi King & Gamble, —
being new ; Vaccinia,ceaB, 3 genera and 12 species, 5 of the species —
Pentapterygium Scortechinii King & Gamble, and Vaccinium Scorte-
chimi King & Gamble, V. glahrescens King & Gamble, V, viscifolium
King & Gamble and V. Kunstleri King & Gamble, — being new ;
and Ericaceae, 5 genera and 17 species, 1 genus — Pemettyopsis King
& Gamble, — and 7 species — Biplycosia erytkrina King & Gamble,
Rhododendron Wrayi King & Gamble, B. paudflorum King &
Gamble, B. perakense King <fc Gamble and B. duhium King &
Gamble, with Pemettyopsis malayana King & Gamble, and P.
suhylahra King & Gamble — ^being new to science.

Two orders ; Valerianaceas, 1 genus and 1 species ; also
Oompositas, 23 genera and 31 species, have been described by Sir
G. King : four others ; Stylidese, 1 genus and 1 species ; Chodeno-
vieas, 1 genus and 1 species ; Epacrideas, 1 genus and 1 species ; and
Plwmhagineae, 2 genera and 2 species, have been described by
Mr. Gamble. These six orders contain no novelties.

In addition to the foregoing, an account of the order Monotro-
peas, 1 genus and species, has been provided by Lieut. -CoL
D. Prain, Superintendent of the Royal Botanic Garden, Calcutta ;
while Mr. C. B. Clarke, F.R.S., formerly President of the Linnean
Society, has prepared an account of the natural order Gentianaceas,
6 genera and 8 species, 1 genus — Microphium C. B. Clarke, —
and 3 species, — Microphium puhescens Clarke, Cancora pentanthera
Clarke, and Yillarsia aurantiaca Ridley — being new to science.

This paper will be issued as an extra number of the Society's
Journal, Vol. LXXIII, Part II., 1904.

JUNE, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Weclnesday, the 7th Jnne, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Rev. E. Francotte, S. J., in the chair.

The following members were present : —

Dr. N. Annandale, Babu Dwarkanath Chakravarti, Mr. L. L.
Permor, Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Mr, J. Macfarlane,
Mr. H. H. Mann, Major D, C. Phillott, I. A., Mr. R. R. Simpson,
Mr. H. E. Stapleton, Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhupana, and
Mr. E. Vredenburg.

Visitors: — ^The Rev. L. Delannoit, S.J., Mr. J. M, Maclaren
and Mr. E. Vieux.

The minates of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Twenty- five presentations were announced.

Pandit Nava Kanta Kavibhushan was ballotted for and elect-
ed an Ordinary Member of the Society.

It was announced that the Hon. Mr. Jiistice J. G. WoodrofFe,
Air. C. R, Marriott, and Captain Stuart Godfrey, I. A., had ex-
pressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The General Secretary reported the death of Mr. H. W. Peal,
an Ordinary Member of the Society,

The proposed revision in Rules 5 and 7 of the Society's
Rules, of which intimation had already been given by circular
to all members, was brought up for final disposal. The votes
of the members were laid on the table and the Chairman requested
any Resident Members who had not expressed their opinion, to
take the present opportunity of filling in voting papers. Five such
papers were filled in, and with the 106 returned by members,
were scrutinized, the Chairman appointing Messrs. H. E,
Stapleton and L, L. Fermor to be Scrutineers. The Scrutineerfi
i^eported as follows : —

For ... ... ... 104

Against ... ... ' ... 7

Proceedings of the Astatic iSociety of Bengal. [.June, 1905.]

RULE 5.

Present Role.

Candidates for Ordinary
Membership shall be proposed

Mode of Election ^7 ^?®' ^"^^

of Ordinary seconded by

Members. another, Ordi-

nary Member. The name of the
candidate, his proposer and
seconder, shall be laid before a
Meeting of the Council, and
shall be read at the two Ordi-
nary General Meetings of the
Society which next succeed such
Meeting of the Council, and
during the interval shall be sus-
pended in the Society's Meeting-
room. The candidate shall be
ballotted for at the second of
such Ordinary General Meet-
ings.

Proposed Rule.

Candidates for Ordinary
Membership shall be proposed

Mode of Election ^7 ^?®' *?d
of Ordinary seconded by

Members. another, Oi-di-

nnry Member. The name of
the candidate, his proposer and
seconder, shall be laid before a
Meeting of the Council, and if
approved, shall be recommended
for election by ballot at the
next Ordinary General Meeting
of the Society, The names of
candidates recommended by the
Council for election shall be
communicated to the Resident
Members of the Society, with
the usual notice of the General
Meeting, and in case any five
Ordinary Members consider it
desirable, they will be at liberty
to demand that the candidates*
certificates be suspended in the
Society's Meeting-room until
the next following General Meet-
ing, when the candidate shall be
ballotted for. Any such de-
mand for a postponement of
election made under this rule
must be made in writing, signed
by at least five Ordinary Mem-
bers, and presented at the Ordi-
nary General Meeting before the
proposed election takes place.

RULE 7.

Present Rule.

Should there be no meeting
during the Recess months of

S eptember

°SS?i?o'SSoT- "^nd October,
Ordinary Mem- the Council
bersdurlns the in v

BecesB. snail be em-

powered to
elect candidates for ordinary

Proposed Role.

Should there be no meeting
during the Recess months of

S ep t ember

°2??d°*Jo*5?oT- and October,
Ordinary Mem- the Council
bers during the ^u^ii k^ ^^
Beoess. snaii be em-

powered to

elect candidates for Ordinary

[June, 1905 ] Proa't'ditiys of the Asiatic Society of BengaJ,

Membership, who shall have
been duly pix)})osed and second-
ed at the Guneral Meeting of
the Society in August, or whose
names may be received as can-
didates during the Recess. Such
candidates shall be bal lotted for
at the Meeting of the Council
next succeeding that at which
their names and those of their
proposers and seconders shall
have been laid before the Coun-
cil, and during the interval
between the two meetings these
names shall be suspended in the
Society's Meeting-room, as pro-
vided in Rule 5 ; and it shall be
necessary for the due election of
such candidates that not less
than two-thii*d« of the Members
of Council present at the meet-
ing shall vote in their favour.
Such elections shall be reported
and confirmed at the fii*st Qene-
i*al Meeting of the Society after
the Recess.

The following papers were read : —

1. An Analysis of the Lanknvatdra Sutra. — By Prof. Satis
Ohandra VidtAbhO^ana, M.A.

2. Note on a Rock Shrine in Lower Siam. — By N, AnnaN-
OALE, B.A., D.Sc,

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

3. Religion and Customs of the TJramis or Oraons, — By Rev.
Father Dehon, S.J. Communicated by Mr. E. A. Gait, I.C.S.

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

4. Tibet under her Last Kings (1434-1642 il. Z>.).— Br/ RaiSarat
€handra Das, Bahadur, CLE.

5. Note on a Decomposition Product of a Peculiar Variety of
BundeWiand Gneiss. — By C. A. Silberrad, B.A., B.Sc, I.C.S.

Membership whose names may
be received as candidates during
the Recess. Such candidates
shall be ballotted for at the
Meeting of the Council next
succeeding that at which their
names and those of their pix)-
posers and seconders shall have
been laid before the Council ;
and during the interval between
the two meetings these names
shall be suspended in the
Society's Meeting-room. It shall
be necessary for the due elec-
tion of such candidates that
not less than two-thirds of the
Members of Council present at
the meeting shall vote in their
favour. Such elections shall be
reported and confirmed at the
first Geneiul Meeting of the
Society after the Recess.

4:^

(

JULY, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 5th July. 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fkaser, M.A., LL.D., K.C.S.T.,
President, in the Chair.

The following members were present : —

Dr. N. Annandale, Rai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, CLE.,
Mr. L. L. Fermor, Mr. D. Hooper, Mr K. N. Knox, Mr. J.
Macfarlane, Dr. M. M. Masoom, Major F. P. Maynard, I. M.S.,
The Hon. Mr. A. Pedler, Major D. C. Phillott, I.A., Captain L.
Rogers, I.M.S., Mr. S. C. Sanial, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, Mr. R. R. Simpson, Mr. G. H. Tipper, Pandit Satis Chandra
Vidyabhusana, Mr. E. Vredenburg, The Rev. A. W, Young.

Visitors: — Mr. Hallowes, Capt W. B. Rennie, LA.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Forty presentations were announced.

It was announced that Mr. L. Morshead had expressed a wish
to withdraw from the Society.

The General Secretary reported the death of Raja Jayakrishna
Das, Bahadur, an Ordinary Member, and Dr. W. T. Blanford,
F.R.S., an Honorary Member of the Society.

Read abstracts from programmes from the following Con-
gresses and Exhibition : —

1. From Congres International d'Expansion Economique
Mondiale, 1905.

An International Congress of World-wide P]conomic Expan-
sion (Congres International d'Expansion ficonomique Mondiale) is
to be held under the auspices of the Government of Belgium at
Mons in September next (1) subscribe, (2) draw up a report, (3)
send a delegate. The organisers suggest that the Society would
be particularly interested in the section which relates to the follow-
ing question : —

Which are the best ways of booking observations in uncivilised
regions in order to obtain scientific notions on the native, social
life, and manners and customs, and raise them to a higher civiliza-
tion ?

2. From Congres International pour Petude de la radiologie
et de rionisation, Liege, 1905.

An International Congress for the Study of Radiology and
lonisation is to \ye held under the auspices of the Government of

ProccpiUiKjs (tf thtf Asiafic Sorieti/ of Bengal. [July, 1905.]

Belgium at Liege in September next, in which the Society is
invited to participate.

'■■^-'^ 3. From Indian Industrial and AgiMcultural Exhibition,
Benares, 1905.

A pi\)spectus has been received of the Indian Industi'ial and
Agi'icultural Exhibition to be liekl ai Benares in connection witli
the next Indian National Congress.

The President presented the Elliott gold medals and Rs. 75 in
cash to each of the following gentlemen for their essays submitted
in competition for the Elliott Prize for Scientific Research during
1904:—

1, Babu Sarasi Lai Sarkar — for his essay entitled " On the
crystalline properties of a potassium copper ferro cyanide com-
pound," Parts I <fc II.

2. Babu Surendra Nath Maitra — for his essay entitled *' On
the Experimental Determination of the Electro-chemical, equi-
valent of nickel." (With Diagrams.)

The President announced : —

1. That the Council had appointed Pandit Satis Chandra
Vidyabliusa^a as a member of the C()ancil.

2. That Dr. Annandale had been appointed to serve on -the
Library Committee and Major D. C. Phillott, LA, had been re-
elected a member of the Philological Commitee dunng the year.

The General Secretary reported the presentation of nine gold
and three silver coins from the Bombay Branch of the Royal
Asiatic Society forwarded with their letter dated 15tli June, 1905.

Mr. J. N. Das, proposed by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, seconded by Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree ; Mr. Edgar de
Montford Humphries, I.C.S., proposed by Mr. R. Bui'n, seconded
by Mr. J. Macfarlane ; Babu Amulyacharan Ghose Vidyabhushan,
proposed by Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, seconded by
Mr. J. Macfarlane ; Mr. Hem Chandra Goswami, proposed by
Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree, seconded by !Mr J. Macfarlane ;
Mr. J. A. Cunningham, B.A., proposed by Mr. F. Turner, seconded
by Mr. G. W. Kiichler ; Mr. Jain Vaidya, proposed by Pandit Satis
Chandra Vidyabhii^ana, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane ; Pandit
Rajendra Nath Vidyabhusan. proposed by Mahamahopadhyaya
Haraprasad Shastri, seconded by Babu Muralidhar Banerjee ; Babu
Vanamali Chakravarti, proposed by Mahamahopadhyaya Hara-
prasad Shastri, seconded by Babu Muralidhar Banerjee ; and
Pandit Pramatha Nath Tarkabhushan, proposed by Babu Murali-
dhar Banerjee, seconded by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, were ballot ted for and elected Ordinary Members.

The Philological Secretary exhibited a Tibetan Scroll for-
warded by the Hon'ble Sir A. T. Arundel, and Pandit Satis
Chandra Vidyabhusana read a note on it.

The note will be published in the Memoirs.

[July, UH)5.] Prttcet'diuijs of ilif Asiatic Socit'ly of Bvuijal.

The followin«j papers wore read : —

1. The Catholic Missvm in Nt^jjal and the Nepalese Authorities
(18/// centnrtj),- By Fatiieij Felix. Communicated by the Philo-
logical Secretary.

The paper will not be published by the Society.

2. Font' new Barnacles from the neighbourhood of Java^ with
B e cords (f Indian Vedunculnte F(yrTns. — By N. Annandale, B.A.,
D.Sc, Deputy Superintendent, Indian Museuvi,

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

3. Additions to the collection of Oriental Sfuikes in the Indian
Mtiseum, Fart II. — Specimen ft from the Andainans and Nicobars. — By
N. Annaxdale, B.A., D.Sc, Deputy Superintendent ^ Indian Museum.

4. The Tibetan Version o/ the I'ramanasamuccaya — the First
Indian work on Logic proper— brought from Tibet by the late Tibet
Mim(tn, — By Satis Chandra Vidyahiiusaijia, M.A.

The paper will be published in the Jiturutd and Proceedings
for August, 1905.

6. Materials for a Flora if the Malayan Peninsula^ No. 17. — By
Sir George KiX(J, K.C.I.E., LL.D., V.R.S., late Superintendent of the
Royal Botanic Garden^ Calcutta, and J. S. Gamble, CLE., F.R.S.,
late of the Indian Forest Department.

(Abstract.)

This contribution commences with Natural Order Myrsinae
and is continued by Sapotuceiv, Fbenucese, Styracew and Oleacae,
The di*aft of Ebeiiaceie was prepared by Sir Geoi-ge King, that of
the other Orders by ]Mr. J. S. ( i amble ; but the new species are
given under their joint names.

In the Natui'al Order }fyr{iineie 7 genera are described with
80 species, of which the large genus Ardisia fui*nishes 47. The
new species are 86 in number, viz., M^esa impressinervis and paha7igi'
ana ; My rsine perakensis and Wrayi; Embelia Scortechinii, angtdosa^
Hidleyi, and macrocarpa ; Lahisia paucifolia and hmgistyla; Ardisia
chrys<»phyllifdia^ soUuioidea, /'''f*^i, lankdwimsiii, labisive folia,
montana, sinuata, platychtda, Knnstleri, Scortechinii, oblongi folia,
tetrasepa/a, biflifra, tahanica, Wrayi, minor, perakensis, Meziana,
Ridleyi^ rosea, hni'iipednurvlata. Mai)igayi, thewfolia, and bavibu-
setoriim; and Ant i strophe candntn and C nrtisii. A Tenassenm novelty
has also been descnbed FudwUa Gallatlyi. The working out of
the Malay plants of this diffi(»ult Order has been rendered easier
owing to the recent Monograph of the Order by Herr Carl Mez,
in Engler's Pflanzenreich,

In the interesting and ini])()itant Natural Order Sapotaceas
there ai-e 8 genera with 49 species, of which 25 are new, viz.,
Sidenwyhni Ih'rryanum ; Isntmndnt jurakensis and rufa ; Payena
longepi'dice'liita (Brace), Hdril'i'id/. ,.. ;.>•/'/.>•, ubtfif<ifo'ia H.i\d se'angor-
ica ; BiOi^ia nristuUitii, Ki)i[fiana (Brace), K^inMU-rl (Brace),
penice'lata, Cnrtisii^ lnurii'ilid, rnjn'rof a, perakensis, Braceana, Umgi-
stylo, cnprea. penangiann, and erythntphi/lla; Palaquinm Ridleyi,

[July, 1905.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

microphyllum^ Herveyi and steUatiwi. An Andaman Islands species
has also been included, Mijnusops ajidamanensis. Some of the
species, it will be noticed, bear the name given in the Calcutta
Herbarium bj Mr. L. R. Brace, formerly Curator ; but he merely
gave names without descriptions.

In the almost equally important Natural Order Ebenacem
there are two genera with 42 species, of which 21} are new, viz.,
Mdba Hieryiiana, cenosa^ olivacea, OUirkeana B>nd perakensis ; Dios-
pyros Wrayi, suh-rhomhoidea^ duniosa, Scortechinii^ Styraciformis^
tristis, paucifloraj cUipsoidea^ Wallirhii, toposioides^ hrarJiiata,
Kunstleri, nutans^ refl^'xa, penawjiana^ f'ufa, areolata^ Ourtisii^ and
glomerulata.

The Natural Order Styrarem gives two genera and 28 species,
of which 25 belong to Sytnplocos, The new species are 8 in
number, viz., Symplocos fulvosa, piilccru^enta. monticola^ Ridley i,
perakensis, Brandiayin, penangiana, Scorfechinii. As was the
case with Myrsinem^ so in Styraceae also, the work has been facili-
tated by the recently published Monograph by Herr Brand in
Bngler's PHanzenreich.

In the Natural Order OleacemiYiQVQ are 6 genera with 22 species,
of which 9 are new. These are: Jasminum Wrayi, Cwrtisii^
longipetalum and Scortechinii ; Osmnntnm Scorfechinii; Linociera
paludosa and caudata ; and Olea platycarpa and ardisioides.

In this part, therefore, are described 5 Natural Orders with 24
genera and 22 1 species. The number of species new to science are
115, and two new species have been also described from regions
adjacent to that to which the work refers.

The paper will be published in full as an Extra Number
of the Journal and Proceedings.

AUGUST, 1905.

The Monthly G^ueral Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 2nd August, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Bby. E. Francotts, S.J., in the chair.

The following members were present : —

Mr. J. Bathgate, Mr. L. L. Fermor, Babu Amnlyaoharan
Ghosh Yidyabhushan, Mr. H. G. Graves, Mr. T. H. Holland,
Mr. D. Hooper, Pandit Navakanta Kavibhushana, Mr. J. Macfar-
lane, Mr. H. H. Mann, Dr. M. M. Masoom, Major F. P. Maynard,
I.M.S., Mr. G. £. Pilgrim, Captain L. Bogers, I.M.S., Dr. £. D.
Boss, Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree, Mahamahopadhyaya Hara-

CoBRiOBNDUM Vol. I, part 8, p. 211.
Helicopa tndictu^ Annskudale^Hypsirhina enhydris (Schneid.)

with Bale 38.

Mr. B. G. Black.

Babu Bamani Mohan Mallick.

Babu Jaladhi Ch. Mukerjee.

With reference to the resolution of the Council regarding the
rejection of certain books from the Society's library published in
the Society's Proceedings for June, 1904, the Chairman announced
that the Council had resolved that the Libranr Committee should
settle the prices of books with authority to offer Government pub-
lications to Gh)vemment.

The Chairman presented to Bai Sarat Chandra Dass, Bahadar,
O.I.E., a diploma from the Imperial Bussian Archaoological
Society electing him a Foreign Corresponding Member.

Sri Kripamaya Dev Anang Bhim Kesori Gajapati Maharaja^
proposed by Mnhamahopadhyaja Haraprasad Shashi, seconded by

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [Aagust, 1905.]

Mr. J. Macfarlane ; Lieut.-Col. C. P. Lukis, M.B., P.R.C.S., I.M.S.
roposed by Captain L. Rogers, LM.S., seconded by Captain
. W. Megaw, I.M.S. ; Captain D. McCay, M.B., I.M.S., proposed
by Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S., seconded by Captain J. W. Megaw,
I.M S. ; Lient. C. A. Gonrlay, M.B., I.M.S., proposed by Captain
L. Rogers, I.M.S., seconded by Captain, J. W. Megaw, I.M.S. ;
Captain J. J. Urwin, M.B., I M.S., proposed by Captain L. Rogers,
I.M.S., seconded by Captain J, W. Megaw, I.M S. ; Captain
W. W. Clemesha, M.B., I.M.S., proposed by Captain L.Rogers,
I.M.S., seconded by Captain J. W. Megaw, I.M.S. ; were ballotted
for and elected Ordinary Members.

Owing to non-receipt of the MS. of the paper entitled " The
Tibetan version of the Prama^asamnccaya," by Prof. Satis
Chandra Vidyabhusai^a, read at the Jnly General Meeting, the
paper is not pnblished in the Journal and Proceedings for Angnst
1905.

The following papers were read : —

1. A Tibetan Vhart containing the charm of Vajrahhairava. —
By Prof. Satis Chandra Vidtabhushan, M,A.

The paper will be pnblished in the Memoirs.

2. History of Nyayasdstra from Japanese sources, — By Maha«

MAHOPADHYAYA HaRAPRASAD ShASTRI, M.A.

3. Notes concerning the people of Mungeli Tehsil, Bilaspore
District. — By Rev. E. M. Gordon. Communicated hy the Anthro-
pological Secretary.

4. Amulets as Agents in the Prevention of Disease in Bengal. —
Communicated hy Mb. A. N, Moberlt, I.C.S., Superintendent of
Ethnography^ Bengal,

The paper will be pnblished in the Memoirs.

5. A Short History of the hou^e of Phagmodu^ which ruled over
Tibet 07% the decline of Sakya for upwards of a century till 1432,
jj.2). — By Rai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, C.I.B.

6. Additions to the Collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum. Part 3. — By N. Annandale, B.A., D.Sc.

7. The Kantahud/iyas of Cuttack, — By Jamini Mohan Das.
Communicated by the Anthropological Secretary,

8. The Age of Jimuta Vahana. — By Pandit Pramatha Nath
Tareabhushan.

The paper will be published in the Bibliotheca Indica.

9. Sal-Ammoniac : a Study in Primitive Chemistry. — By H. E.
StapIiBton, B.A., B.Sc.

The paper will be pnblished in the Memmrs.

10. Alchemical Equipment in the Eleventh Century , A.D.-*-
By H. E. Stapleton and R. F, Azo«

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

11. Note on the Bhotias of Almora and British Oarhwal. —
By C. A. Sherring, M.A., I.C.S, Communicated hy Mr. R. Burn,
I.C.S.

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

NOVEMBER, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the Ist November 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhapadhtata, M.A., D.L.,
F.B.S E,, Vioe-President, in the chaii\

The following members were present : —

Dr. N Annandale, Mr. I. H. Burkill, Babn Manmohan
Ghakravarti, Mr. B. L. Ghaudhnri, Mr. L. L. Fermor, The Bev.
E. Prancotte, S.J., Mr. H. G. Graven, Mr. D. Hooner, Mr. T. H. D.
La Toaohe, Mr. J. Maofarlane, Major O. C. Pnillott, I.A., Mr.
G. E. Pilgrim, Major L. BrOgers, I.M.S., Mahamahapadhj'aja
Haraprasad Shastri, Mr. B, B. Simpson, Pandit Pramatha Nath
Tarkabhashan, Pandit Vanamali Yedantatirtha, Pandit Bajendra
Nath yidjabhu9ai;La Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhu^aqia.

Visitor : — ^Mr. G. de P. Cotter.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

One hundred and sixty-eight presentations were announced.

The Chairman announced : —

1. That the Council had appointed Mr. H. E. Stapleton as a
member of the Goancil in the place of Mr. B. O. Lees, resigned.

2. That Dr. N. Annandale having returned to Calcutta had
taken over charge of the duties of Anthropological Secretary from
Mr. Stapleton.

3. That Mr. L. L. Fermor had been elected to serve on the
Library Committee during the year.

The Chairman also announced that in accordance with Bule 38
of the Society's Rules, the ni^mes of Mr. B. G. Black, Babu
Bamani Mohan Mallick and BftW Jaladhi Chandra Mukerjee had
been posted up as defaulting members since the last Meeting
and were removed from the Members List.

The Chairman also announced the following resolution of the
Council regarding the submission of communications for publi-
cation in the Society's ^* Journal and Proceedings *^ and ** Memoirs,^*

** The attention of authors is drawn to Bule I of Begulations
regarding the submission of communications for publication. No
alteration or addition necessitating any considerable change of
type may be made in proofs. Should any such alteration or
addition be necessary, it must be added in a foot-note duly dated
and initialed.

Mr. L. S. O'Malley, I.C.S., proposed by the Hon. Mr.
E. A. Gait, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane; Mr. A. M. T.
Jackson, I.C.S., proposed by the Hon. Mr. H. H. Bislev, seconded
by Mr. J. Macfarlane; were ballotted for and electea Ordinary
Members.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1906.]

Dr. N. Annandale exhibited living specimens of the " Rains
Insect" {Tromhidium grandissimum).

The Anthropological Secretary exhibited weighing-beams of
the " bismer " type from different parts of India.

The following papers were read : —

1. Vidyapaft Thakur.^By G. A. Guiekson, CLE., LC.S.

2. Some remarks on the Qeology of the Oangetic Plain, — By
E. MoLONY, LC.S.

3. The NafnisU'l'Madsir. — By H. Beveridge, LC.S. (retired).

4. Notes on the Species^ External Characters and Habits of the
Dngong. — By N. Annandale, B.A., D.Sc.

5. Hedyotis sisaparensis^ a hitherto undescrihed Indian
species.— By Captain A. T. Gage, LM.S.

6. Result of the examination of the Nyaya Sutras of
Gautama. — By Mahahahopadhtata Haraprasad Shastri, M.A.

The paper will be published in the ^^ Journal and Proceedings"
Vol. I, No. 10.

7. Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula. No. 18. —
By Sir George King, K.C.I.E., LL.D., P.R.S., and J. S. Gamble,
Esq., CLE., M.A., P.R.S.

(Abstract.)

Owing to an unforeseen cause of delay, it has been found
necessary to postpone the publication of the Natural Orders No 75
Apocynaceas, No. 76 Asclepiadacem and No. 77 Loganiaceas for
a short while; consequently the present part, No. 18 of the
** Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula," contains the
orders which succeed, viz.j No. 79 Hydrophyllacesd to No. 85
Lentihfdariaceaa inclusive, together with No. 87 Bignoniaceso and
88 Pedalince». No. 78 OentienacesB has already appeared in part
17, and No. 86 Qesneracem will have to come later on with the
three orders above mentioned as having had to be postponed.

The whole of the work or six out of the nine orders now
presented : OonvolvulaceSB^ Solanacea, Scrophularineas, Orohanchacese,
Lentihulariaceas, and Pedalinesd has been done by Lieutenant-
Colonel Prain, LM.S. ; that on the Boraqinece by Sir G. King ; and
that on Hydrophyllacea and Bignoniacese by Mr. Gamble.

The nine orders include 53 genera and 150 species ; some of
the species are now described for the first time.

The paper will be published in full in an Extra No. of the
" Journal and Proceedings " for 1905.

8. Sows notes on dates of Suhandhee and Dingna^.'^By
Mahamahopadayata Haraprasad Shastri, M.A.

The paper will be published in the " Journal and Proceedings,^^
Vol. I, No. 10.

DECEMBBR 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Sooietjr was held on
Wednesday, the oth December 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Hon'ble Mk. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhatta, M,A.,
D.L., Vice-President, in the chair.

The following members were present : —

Dr. N. Annandale, Baba Muralidhar Banerjee, Major W. J.
Buchanan, I.M.S., Mr. I. H. Borkill, Baba Monmohan Ghakra-
yarti, Mr. B. L. Ghandhuri, Mr. W. K. Dods, Mr. L. L. Fermor,
Bey. £. Francotte, S.J., Mr. H. G. Grayes, Mr. T. H. Holland,
Mr. D. Hooper, Rev. B. Lafont, S. J., Mr. W. A. Lee, Mr. J. Macfar-
lane, Mr. B. D. Mehta, Mr. J. B. Nicoll, Hon. Mr. Justice F. E.
Pargiter, Mr. G. Pilgrim, Hon. Mr. H. H. Bisley, Major L. Rogers,
I.M.S., Dr. £. D. Ross, Mr. G. Saunders, Rai Ram Brahma
Sanyal Bahadur, Pandit Yogesa Ghandra Sastree, Mahamaho-
padnjaya Haraprasad Shastri, Babu Ghandra Narain Singh,
Mr. H. E. Stapleton, Pandit Yanamali Yedantatirtha, Babu
Amulja Gharan Vidyabhushan, Rev. A. W. Young.

Visitors : — Mr. and Mrs. P. Buckland, Mr. J. G. Brown, Mr.
J. M. Burjojee, Mr. Douglas H. Gampbell, Babu Asutosh
Ghatterjee, Gaptain Goldsti^am, R.E., Dr. J. N. Gook, Mr. and
Mrs. J. D* Gkiise, Mr. Holmes, Mrs. Kilbum, Golonel Macrae,
Gaptain and Mrs. Murray, Mr. O'Kinealy, Mr. H. Pedler,
Mr. W. H. Pickering, Mr. Pearre, Mr. J. Wilson, Mr. R. W.
Williamson, and others.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Thirty-fiye presentations were announced.

The Ghairman announced that Mr. I. H. Burkill had been
re-elected a member of the Library Gommittee daring the year.

The General Secretary read the following resolutions of the
Sub-Gommittee appointed by Gouncil to frame new rules for lend*
ing out manuscripts.

Loans to India,
Resolved : —

1. No manuscript shall be lent out to any member or non-*
member without the recommendation of one of the Philological
Secretaries.

The loan of a manuscript or manuscripts to non-members
must receive the sanction of Gouncil in addition to the recom-
mendation of the Philological Secretary.

In the case of non-members a security may be demanded.

2. As a rule the number of manuscripts which a member is

Proceedinys of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Decemher,

entitled to boiTow shall be limited to two, but this number may be
exceeded on the recommendation of the Philological Committee.

3. Every loan shall be reported to the CounciL

4. All manuscripts lent must be returned at the end of three
months.

5. With regard to Editors each individual case will be
dealt with on its own merits.

The conditions under which each editor may borrow manu-
scripts will be forwarded with his letter of appointment.

Loanis to Europe.

1. Loans cannot be made to private individuals but only to
Corporate Bodies.

2. Loans to Corporate Bodies in Europe must receive tlie
sanction of the Council.

3. The loan is to be made in the first instance for six
months only, and i*enewals of loan for periods of three months
only.

4. With each manuscript lent a form will be sent in
duplicate, and three forms of application for renewal : one form will
be retained by the borrower and the other duly signed by him
returned to the Society.

5. That the Corporate Body to whom the loan is made will
not be at liberty to allow the manusci-ipt to leave their premises.

General Rules,

6. Certain manuscript of special impoiiance or rarity shall
be placed by the Philological Secretaries in consultation on a
reserve list. These manuscripts will be marked in the Library
Catalogue with asterisks, and, as a general i*ule, shall not be lent
out of the Society's rooms.

7. [t 18, however, at the discretion of the Council, in very
special cases, to sanction tlie loan of such manuscript.

Form of Achiowledyment.

We have to acknowledge receipt of No ...•

in good order and condition, to be held in trust for the Asiatic
Society of Bengal and not to be removed from our premises.

We hereby undertake either to return the said manuscript by
the (the date being six months from the date of presum-
able arrival) or to make a formal application for renewal of the loan

by the (five months from the time of presumable arrival),

and we further undertake to return the manuscriptin the same order
and condition securely packed by insured parcel post by the. ... .........

if previous sanction to retain it for a further period has not been
received' by the

1905.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

Form of Applicatiofi for Refieival,

We have acknowledged the receipt of No on

the The mantiscript has been nsed for months.

The mannscript is wanted for a farther period of three
months, and we shall be obliged by the Society's sanction of thin
renewal.

Mr. E. R. Watson, proposed by Mr. D. Hooper, seconded by
Dr. N. Annandale ; Mohamed Hossain Khan Midhut, proposed by
Dr. E. D. Ross, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane ; Mr. K. Marsden,

Proposed by Dr. E. D. Ross, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane ;
[r. J. Wilson, proposed by Mr. T. H. Holland, seconded by
Dr. E. D. Ross ; were ballotted for and elected Ordinary Members

Dr. N. Annandale gave an exhibition illustrating the use of
the blow-gnn in Southern India and Malaya.

Mr. T. H. Holland gave a lecture on recent earthquakes in
India (lantern demonstration).

The following papers were read : —

1. Earth Eating and the Earth-eating habit in India, — Bij
D. Hooper and H. H. Mann.

This paper will be published in the Memoirs,

2. Formation of New Castes. — By R. Burn, I.C.S.

3. Notes on the Fauna of a Desert Tract in Southern Indin^
I and 11— By N. Annandale, D.Sc.

This paper will be published in the Memmrs.

4. Ascaris halicoris Baird. — By Dr. v. Linstow. Com-
municated hy N. Annandale.

5. Anim4ils in the Inscriptions of Piyadnn. — By Monmohan
Chakrayarti.

This paper will be published in the Meininrif.

. * ■» ' •«•■■>

h:^

LIST OF MEMBERS

OF^THB

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

On thb 31ST Dbcbmbbr, 1904.

tA&£ Ot^ OFI^ICEftS AKD MEMBERS OF COtTNClL

OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

FOR THE YEAR 1904.

President :
The Hon'ble Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S.

Viee-PresidenU :

The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukho|ta.dhyaya^

M.A., D.L., F.R.S.B.
Lieut.-Col. D. Prain, M.A., M.B., LL.D.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.

Becretaryi and Treasurer,

Honorary General Secretary : J. Macfarlane, Esq.
The Hon^ble Mr. Justice Asutosh MtikliopadhyaySy
M.A, D.L., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretariee^

Philological Secretary : T. Bloch, fesq., Plb.D.
Natural History Secretary : Captain L. Rogers,

M.D., B.Sc, I.M.S.
Anthropological Secretary : E. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D.
Joint Philological Secretary : Mahtmfthopftdhyfiya

Haraprasftd Shastri, M.A.

Other Members of Council,

T. H. D. La Touche, Esq., B.A.

Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

Arnold Caddy, Esq., M.D., F.R.C.S.

I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.

H. E. Ken^thome, Esq.

C. Little, Esq., M.A.

W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon'ble Mr. A. Earle, I.C.S.

Lieut.-Col. J. H. Tull Walsh, LM.S.

B. O. Lees, Esqt

LIST OP ORDINARY MEMBERS.

B.«Ba8idexit. N.B.«Noii- Resident. A. "Absent. N.S.— Non-Snbsoribing.

L.M. • Life Member. F.M. • Foreign Member.

N.B, — Members who have changed their residence since the list was drawn
np are requested to give intimation of snoh a change to the Honorary General
Beoretary, in order that the necessary alteration may be made in the sabse-
qnent edition. Errors or omissions in the following list shoald also be com-
mimicated to the Honorary General Secretary.

Members who are abont to leave India and do not intend to return are
particularly requested to notify to the Honorary General Secretary whether
it is their desire to continue Members of the Society ; otherwise, in accord-
ance with Rule 40 of the rules, their names will be remoyed from the list at
the eipiration ot three years from the time of their leaving India.

Date ot EiecUJon.

1903 F^b. 4.

1894 Sept. 27.

1895 Maj 1.

1903 April 1.

1901 Aug. 7.

1904 Sept. 28.
1888 April 4.

1888 Feb. 1.

1885 Mar. 4.

1899 Jan. 4.
1903 Oct. 28.

1900 Aug. 1.

R.
N.R.

N.R.
R.

L.M.

N.R.
R.
A.

1874 June 3. ; A.

1893 Aug. 31.

1884 Sept. 3.
1904 Sept. 28.
1904 Jan. 6.
1904 July 6.

1870 Feb. 2.

A.
R.
R.

N.R.

L.M.

Abdul Alim. Calcutta.

Abdul Wall, Maulavie. Banchi.

Abdus Salam, Maulavie, m.a. Calcutta.

Abul Afts, Maulavie Sayid, Rais and Zemindar.

Paina.
Adams, Margaret. Baptist Zenana Mission.

Europe.
Ahmad Hasain Khan, Munshi. JheVum.
Ahmud, Shams-ul-ulama Maulavie, Arabic

Professor, Presidency College. Calcutta.
Alcock, Major Alfred William, m.b., ll.d., c.i.e.,

F.R.s. Calcutta.
Ali Bilgrami, Sayid, b.a., a.b.s.m., f.q.s. Hy-
derabad.
Ali Hussain Khan, Nawab. Bhopal.
Allan, Dr. A. S., m.b. Calcutta, .
Allen, G. O. H., i.c.s. Europe.
Ameer Ali, m.a., c.i.e., Barrister-at-Law,

Europe.
Anderson, Major A. R. S., b.a«^ m.b., i.m.8«

Europe.
Anderson, J. A. Europe.
Annandale, Nelson, b.a. Calcutta.
Ashton, R. P. CalctUta.
Aulad Hasan, Sayid. Dacca.

Baden-Powell, Baden Henry, M.A., GLi.t:.
Europe.

fate of Bleouon.

190l'jail. -2.
1898 Nov. 2.

1891 Mar. 4.
1898 Aug. 3.
1891 April 1.
1900 Aug. 29.

1896 Mar. 4.
1869 Dec. 1.
1885 Nov. 4.
1877 Jan. 17.

1898 Mar. 2.
1902 May 7.

1894 Sept. 27.
1898 M!ay 4.

1895 July 3.

1876 Nov. 15.
1900 April 4.
1898 N^v. 2.

1859 Aug. 3.

1897 Feb. 3.
1893 Feb. 1.
1885 Mar. 4.

1895 July 3.
1890 July 2.

1897 June 2.
1895 Mar. 6.

1880 Nov. 3.

1895 April 3.

1860 Mar. 7.

1900 Aug. 1.

1901 Sept. 25.
1887 May 4.
1901 June 5.

1896 Jan. 8.
1900 May 2.
1904 Aug. 3.

Badsbab, E. J., b.a., i.g.s. Europe.

A. Bailey, Tbe Bevd. Tbomas Grabame, M.A., b.d.,

I Europe.
N.B. ' Baillie, D. C, i.c.s. Ghazipur.
N.R. ! Bain, Lieut.-Ool. D. S. B., i.M.S. Mercara.
N.R. Baker, Edward Obarles Stuart. Dibrugarh.

R. Baker, The Hon. Mr. B. N., c.s.i., i.o.s.

OalcuUa.
N.R. Banerji, Satisb Gbandra, m.a. Allahahad.
L.M. Barker, R. A., m.d. Europe.

R. Barman, Damudar Das. Gcdcutta,
N.R. I Barman, H.H. Tbe Mabaraja Radba Elisbor

! Dev. Tipperah,
N.R. ' Barnes, Herbert Cbarles, i.c.s. Shdllong,

R. , Bartlett, B. W. J. Calcutta,

R. ' Basu, Nagendra Natba. Calcutta,

R. Batbgate, J. Calcutta.
L.M. Beatson-Bell, Nicholas Dodd, B.A., i.c.s.

Europe.
F.M. Beveridge, Henry, i.c.s. (retired). Europe.
N.R. I Bingley, Major A. H., i.a. Simla.

A. Black, Robert Ghreenbill. Europe.
L.M. ' Blanford, William Tbomas, l£.d., a.r.s.m.,

* P.O.S., F.R.O.S., P.Z.B., P.R.S. EttTOpe,

R. I Blocb, Tbeodor, ph.d. Calcutta.
N.R. ' Bedding, Tbe Revd. P. O. Eampore Haut.
A. < Bolton, Tbe Hon. Mr. Cbarles Walter, c.s.i.,
' I.c.s. Europe.
N.R. Bonbam- Carter, Norman, i.c.s. Saran.
A. j Bonnerjee, Womes Cbunder, Barrister-at-Law,
MidcUe Temple. Europe.
N.R. Bose, Annada Prasad, m.a. Jalpatguri.
R. I Bose, Jagadis Cbandra, m.a., d.sc, c.i.e.,

Bengal Bducation Service. Calcutta.
R. , Bose, Pramatba Natb, b.sc, f.g.s. Calcutta.
N.R. I Bourdillon, Tbe Hon. Sir James Austin, e.c.i.e.,

c.s.i., i.c.s. Mysore.
L.M. Brandis, SirDietricb, K.c.i.b., ph.d., P.l.s., p.b.s.
Europe.
R. Brown, Major E. Harold, m.d., i.m.s. Calcutta:
R. Buchanan, Major W. J., i.m.s. Calcutta.
R. Bural, Nobin Cband, Solicitor. Calcutta.
R. Burkill, I. H., m.a. Calcutta.
N.R. Bum, Richard, i.c.s. Allahahad.
N.R. Butcher, Flora, m.d. Falwah

Bythell, Major, W. J., ».B. Cdlciutta.

1898 Sept. 30.
1896 Jan. 8.
1901 Jan. 2.

R. • Gable, Hmest. Calcutta.

B. Caddy, Dr. Arnold. Calcutta.

A. I Campbell, DunoaA. Ewrope,

1901 Mtfr. 6.

1895 July 3.

1890 June 4.

1901 June 5.
1904 July 6.

1902 -Aug. 27.
1893 Sept. 28.

1902 April 2.

1880 Aug. 26.

1903 Aug. 26.

1898 June 1.
1876 Mar. 1.
1901 June 6.
1887 Aug. 25.

1895 July 3.

1873 Dec. 3.
1901 Aug. 28.
1903 Feb. 4.
1865 June 7.

1879 April 7.

1900 July 4.

1896 Mar. 4.

1904
1904
1903
1895
1902
1895
1899

July 6.
Sept. 28.
June 3.
Sept. 19.
Mar. 5.
Dec. 4.
Aug. 30.

1900 May 2.

1901 June 5.

1902 Feb. 5.
1898 Jan. 5.
1902 July 2.
1886 June 2.

1902 Jan. 8.
1892 Sept. 22.

N.E.
R.

N.R.

F.M.
R.

F.M.
F.M.

KR.

F.M.
KR.
N.R.
N.R.

N.R.

N.R.
R.

N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
R.

N.R.
N.R.

N.R.
N.R.
N.R.

R.'

R.
R.

Campbell, W. E. M., i.o.s. Nairn Tal.
Carlyle, The Hon. Mr. Robert Warrand, c.i.e.,

i.G.s. Calcutta,
Ghakravarti, Man Mohan, H.A., b.l. Deputy

Magistrate. Chinsurah.
Chapman, E. P., i.c.s. Europe,
Charles, A. P., i.c.s. Agra.
Chaudhuri, A., Barrister-at-Law. Calcutta.
Chaudhuri, Banawari Lala, b.sc, Edin. Cal-
cutta.
Chunder, Raj Chunder, Attomey-at-Law.

Calcutta,
Clerk, General Malcolm G. Europe.
Copleston, The Right Revd. Dr. Reginald

Stephen, d.d. Lord Bishop of Calcutta.
Cordier, Dr. Palmyr. Europe.
Ci'awfoi'd, James, b.a., i.c.s. Europe.
Crawford, Major D. G., i.m.s. Chinsurah,
Criper, William Risdon, p.c.s., p.i.c, a.r.s.m.

Calcutta.
Cumming, John Ghest, i.c.s. 'Patna.

Dames, Mansel Longworth, i.c.s. Europe,

Das, Govinda. B&iiares.^

Das, Rai Bahadur Bhawan, m.a. Hoshiarpur.

Das, Raja Jay Krishna, Bahadur, c.s.i. Mora-
dabad.

Dtis, Ram Saran, m.a.. Secy., Oudh Commer-
cial Bank, Limited. Fyzabad, Oudh.

Das, Syam Sunder, b.a. Benares.

Das- Gupta, Jogendra Nath, b.a., Barrister-at-
Law Calcutta.

De, Brajendra Nath, m.a., i.c.s. Malda,

DeCourcy, W. B. Ca^har,

De, Hari Nath, b.a. (Cantab). Da^xa,

De, Kiran Chandra, B.A., i.c.s. Faridpur,

Deb, RajaBinoy Krishna, Bahadur. Calcutta.

Delmerick, Charles Swift. Bareilly.

Dev, Raj Kiunar Satchidanand, Bahadur.
Deogarh, Sambalpur,

Dev, Raja Satindra, Rai Mahesaya. Bansheria,

Dey, Nundolal. Bankipore.

Dixon, F. P. I.c.s. Chittagong,

Dods, W. K. Calcutta,

Doxey, F. Calcutta,

Doyle, Patrick, c.e., f.r.a.s., f.r.s.e., f.g.s.
Calcutta,

Drummond, J. R., i.c.s. Calcutta.

Drury, Major Francis James, m.b., i.m.s. Oal-

Date of BieoUon.

1889 Jan. 2.

1879 Feb. 5.
1892 Jan. 6.
1877 Aug. 30.
1900 April 4.

1900 July 4.

1901 June 5.

1903 Oct. 28.

1903 May 6.

1900 Mar. 7.

1900 Aug. 29.

1901 Mar. 6.

1904 Aug. 3.
1894 Dec. 5.
1898 Sept. 30.

1902 April 2.

1903 Mar. 4.

1893
1899
1902
1889
1902
1889
1869
1897
1861

Jan. 11.
Aug. 30.
June 4.
Jan. 2.
Feb. 6.
Mar, 6.
Feb. 3.
Dec. 6.
Feb. 5.

1897 July 7.
1876 Nov. 16.

1900 Dec. 5.

1901 April 3.

1898 June 1.
1898 April 6.

1898 Jan. 5.

1901 Mar. 6.

1892 Jan. 6.

N.B. Dudgeon, Gerald Oecil, Holta Tea. Co., Ld.

Palampur.
F.M. Dutbie, J. F., b.a., f.l.s. Europe,
N.R. Dutt, Gerindra Natb. Hutwa.
R. Dutt, Kedar Nath. Calcutta.
A. Dyson, Major Herbert Jekyl, p.r.c.s., i.m.s.
Europe.

R. Earle, The Hon. Mr. A., i.c.s. Calcutta,
K.R. Ede, Francis Joseph, c.e., a.m.i.c.e., f.g.s.
Silchar, Cachar.

R. Edelston, T. D. Calcutta,
N.R. Edwards, Walter Noel. Sootea, Assam.

R. Fanshawe, Sir Arthur Upton, c.s.i., k.c.i.e.,
I.c.s. Calcutta.

A. Fanshawe, The Hon. Mr. H. C, c.s.i., i.c.s.
Europe,

A. Fergusson, J. 0. Europe,

R. Fermor, L. Leigh. Calcutta,

A. Finn, Frank, b.a., p.z.s. Europe.

R. Firminger, The Revd. Walter K., M.A. Cal-
cutta.
N.R. Fuller, The Hon'ble Mi-. J. B., i.c.s. Shillong.

R. Gage, Captain Andrew Thomafl, m.a., m.b., b.sc,
P.L.S., i.M.s. Stbpur.

A. Gait, Edward Albert, I.c.s. Europe,

R. Garth, Dr. H. C. Calcutta.
N.R. Ghaznavi, A. A. Mymensing,

R. Ghose, Jogendra Chandra, m.a., b.l. Calcutta.

R. Ghosh, Girish Chunder, Calcutta.

R. Ghosha, Bhupendra Sri, b.a., b.l. Calcutta.
N.R. Ghosha, Pratapa Chandra, b.a. Vtndyachal.

A. Godfrey, Captain Stuart, i.a. Europe.
N.S. Godwin- Austen, Lieut.-Colonel H. H., p.r.s.,
p.z.s., P.E.0.8. Europe.

A. Grant, Captain J. W., i.m.s. Europe.

A. Grierson, George Abraham, PH.D., c.i.E., i.c.s.
Europe,
L.M. Grieve, J. W. A. KaUmpong.
N.R. Guha, Abhaya Sankara. Goalpara.
N.R. Gupta, Bepin Behari. Cuttack.

R. Gupta, Krishna Govinda, i.c.s., Barrister-at-
Law. Calcutta.
N.R. Gurdon, Major P. R. T., i.a. Oauhati.

N.R. Habibur Rahman Khan, Maulavie. Bhtkam-

pur,
N.R. Haigi Major Wol8elay,.i.A. Berar,

Date of £ieotion.

1904 Sept. 28.
1899' April 5.
1884 Mar. 5.

1897 Feb. 3.

1904 June 1.
1904 Dec. 7.
1892 Aug. 3.

1872 Deo. 5.

1891 July 1.

1898 Feb. 2.
1884 Mar. 5.
1901 Dec. 4.

1873 Jan. 2.

1890 Dec. 3.

1866 Mar. 7.

1903 Sept. 23.

1904 Jan. 6.

1899 April 6.
1882 Mar. 1.

1867 Dec. 4.

1904 May 4.
1896 Aug. 27.
1896 July 1.

1891 Feb. 4.

L.M.

F.M.
N.R.

R.
N.R.

L.M.
N.R.

F.M.
N.R.

N.R.
A.

N.R.
A.
R.

N.R.

1899 Aug. 30. N.R.
1902 Feb. 5. N.R.
1904 Jan. 6. I N.R.
1902 Jan. 8. ' A.
1887 May 4. ^ L.M.
1889 Mar. 6. R.

1900 Sep. 19. R.

1902 July 2. N.R.
1889 Nov. 6. A.
1904 July 6. R.

1903 July 1. N.R.
1900 May. 2. A.
1902 Oct. 29. R.
1889 Feb. 6. .A.

Hallward, N. L. GaUnUta.

Hare, Major E. C, i.m.s. Europe.

Hassan Ali Qadr, Sir Sayid, Nawab Bahadur,
K.C.i.E. Murshedabad.

Hayden, H. H., b.a., b.e., p.o.s., Geological-
Survey of India. Calcutta.

Hewett, J. F., i.c.s. (retired). Europe.

HiU, B. G. Allahabad.

Hill, Samuel Charles, b.a., b.sc. Europe.

Hoemle, Augustus Frederick Rudolf, PH.D.,
CLE. Europe.

Holland, Thomas Henry, a.r.c.8., f.o.s., f.b.s.,
Director, Geological Survey of India. Calcutta.

Hooper, David, p.c.s. Calcutta. ' [bad.

Hooper, The Hon. Mr. John, b.a., i.c.s. Allaha-

Hossack, Dr. W. C. Calcutta.

Houstoun, G. L., f.g.s., Europe.

Hyde, The Revd. Henry Barry, m.a. Madras.

Irvine, William, i.c.s. (retired). Europe.
Ito, Professor C. Bombay, »

Jackson, V. H., m.a. Sibpur.

Kempthome, H. E. ' Calcutta.

Kennedy, Pringle, m.a. Mosufferpore.

King, Sir George, m.b., k.c.i.e., ll.d., f.l.s.,
F.E.S., i.m.s. (retired). Europe.

Knox, K. N., i.c.s. Banda.

Konstam, Edwin Max. Europe.

Kiichler, George William, m.a., Bengal Educa-
tion Service. Calcutta.

Kupper, Raja Lala Bunbehari. Burdwan.

Lai, Dr. Mannu. Banda.

Lai, Lala Shy am. Allahabad.

Lai, PaniJa, m.a., b.sc. Damoh.

Lall, Parmeshwara. Europe.

Lanman, Charles R. Etvrope.

La Touche, Thomas Henry Digges, B.A., Geolo-
gical Survey of India. Calcutta.

Law, The Hon. Sir Edward F. G., k.c.m.g.,
C.S.I. Calhifta.

Leake, H. M. Saharanpur.

Lee, W. A., p.b.m.s. Europe.

Lees; R. 0. Calcutta.

Lefroy, Harold Maxwell. Mozufferptir.

Leistikow, F. R. Europe.

Lewes, A. H. Calcutta. [Europe.

Little, Charles, m.a., Bengal Education Service

yiii

1904 Oct. 31. B.

L902 July 2. B.

L869 July 7. P.M.

L870April7. L.M.

L896 Mar. 4^. N.B.

[902 July 2. A.

.901 Aug. 7. B.

1893 Jan. 11. L.M.

L891 Feb. 4. N.B.

[902 April 2. N.B.

L893Aug.31. N.B.

1895 Aug. 29. B.

1898 Nov. 2. N.B.
L889 Jan. 2. B.
[901 June 5. B.
1893 Mar. 1. NJl.

[902 May. 7. N.B.

[903 Aug. 6. B.

1892 April 6. N.B.

L901 Aug. 28. B.

1899 Feb. 1. N.B.

[899 Mar. 1. N.B.

[895 July. 3. N.B.

[886 Mar. 3. L.M.

[900 Mar. 7. B.

i900 Jan. 19. B.

[884 Nov. 5. B.

[884 Sep. 3. B.

[904 April 6. B.

[898 April 6. N.B.

[874 May. 6. F.M.

.896 July. 1. N.B.

[897 Jan. 6. N.B.

[901 Aug. 28. B.

[897 Nov. 3. B.

[901 Aug. 7. N.B.

L895 July 3. N.B.

1898 May 4. B.

1902 July 2. A.

tfN*

Longe, CoL F. B., r.e. Oahutta,

Luke, James. OalcuUa,

Lyall, Sir Charles James, m.a., k.g.s.i., c.i.e.,

LL.D., i.o.s. (retired). Europe.
Lyman, B. Smith. Europe.

MacBlaine, Frederick, i.c.s. Nadia.
Macdonald, Dr. William Boy. Europe.
Macfarlane, John, Librarian, Imperial Libraiy.

Oalcutta,
Maclagali, E. D., m.a., i.c.s. Calcutta.
Macpherson, Duncan James, m.a., c.i.e., i.c.s.

Bha^ulpur.
Maddoz, Captain B. H., i.M.s. Bancht.
Mahatha, Purmeshwar Narain. Mozufferpoi'e.
Mahmud Qilani, Shamas-ul-Ulama Shaikh.

Calcutta.
Maitra, Akshaya Kumar, b.a., b.l. Bajshaht,
Maliah, Kumar Bamessur. Howrah.
Mann, H. H., b.sc. Calcutta,
Marriott, Charles Bichardson, i.o.s. Bhagul-

pur.
Marshall, J. H. Simla.
Masoom, Dr. Meerza Mohammad. Calcutta.
Maynard, Major F. P., i.m.s. Darjeeling.
McLeod, Norman. Calcutta.
McMahon, Major A. H., c.s.i., c.i^e., i.a.

Quetta.
McMinn, C. W., b.a., i.c.s. (retired). Comtlla.
Melitus, Paul Gregory, c.i.e., i.c.s. Oauhati,
Metha, Bustomjee Dhunjeebhoy, c.i.e. Cal-
cutta.
Meyer, William Stevenson, i.c.s. Calcutta.
Michie, Charles. Calcutta.
Middlemiss, C. S., b.a. Greological Survey of

India. Calcutta.
Miles, William Harry. Calcutta.
Miller, J. 0., i.c.8. Calcutta.
Milne, Captain C. J., i.m.s. PuruUa.
Minchin, F. J. V. Europe.
Misra, Bai Lakshmi Sanker, Bahadur.

Benares.
Misra, Tuldi Bam. Bareilly.
Mitra, Kumar Narendra Nath. Calcutta.
Mitra, The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Saroda Charan,

M.A., b.l. Calcutta.
*Molony, E., i.c.s. Ohazipur.
Monohan, Francis John, i.c.s. Shillong.
Mookerjee, B. N. Calcutta.
Morshead, L. F., i.c.s. Europe.

iJsrarBSSBan'

1894 June 6.

1904 Jan. 6.
1902 April 2.
1894 Aug. 30.

1900 May 2.

1899 Sept. 29.
1886 May 5:

1892 Dec. 7.

1901 April 3.
1901 June 5.

1885 June 3.

1904 Dec. 7.
1901 Mar. 6.

1900 Pec. 5.
1889 Aug. 29.
1892 Oct. 27.
1885 Feb. 4.

1899 Jan. 7.

1900 Dec. 5.

1900 Aug. 29.
1880 Dec. 1.
1887 July 6.

1901 Jan. 2.
1880 Aug. 4.

1901 Aug. 28.
1904 Aug. 3.
1880 Jan. 7^

1901 June 5.
1899 Aug. 2.

1902 Aug. 6.
1873 Aug. 6.

1888 June 6.
1881 Aug. 25.
1877 Aug. 1.

N.B. Muhammad Shibli Nomani, Shams-ul-Ulama
Maulavie, Professor of Arabic in the Mubam-
madan Oriental College. AUgarJi.

B. Mukerjee, Harendra Krishna, m.a. Oalcutta,

B'. Mukerjee, Jaladhi Ghunder. Oalcutta.

R. Muker]ee, Sib Narayan. JJttarpara.

R. Mukerji, P. B., b.sc. Oalcutta.

B. Mukharji, Jotindra Nath, b.a. Oalcutta.

B. Mukhopadhyaya, The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asu-

tCsh, M.A., D.L., F.R.A.S., F.B.8.E. Oolcutta,

B. Mukhopadhyaya, Panchanana. - Oalcutta.
B. Mullick, Pramatha Nafh. Calcutta.
N.B. Mullick, Bamani Mohan. Meherpur.

N.B. Naemwoollah, Maulavie, Deputy Magistrate.
Bijnor.
B. Nathan, B., i.c.s. Calcutta.
N.B. NeviU, H. B., i.c.s. Naini Tal.
B.. Nicoll, John. Calcutta.
L.M. Nimmo, John Duncan. Calcutta,
F.M. Norvill, Dr. Frederic H. Europe.
N.B. Nyayaratna, Mahamahopadhyajra Mahesa
Chandra, O.i.E. Benares.

A. ' O'Brien, P. H., i.c.s. Europe.
N.B. O'Connor, Captain, W. F., e.a. Oyantse.
A. O'Dwyer, Michael Francis, b.a., i.c.s. Europe.

A. Oldham, B. D., a.b.s.m., p.g.s. Europe.

B. Oung, Moung Hla. Calcutta.

N.B. Pande, Pandit Bamayatar, B.A., i.c.s. Hardoi.
L.M. Pandia, Pandit Mohanlall Yishnulall, f.t.s.,

Muttra.
N.B. Panton, B. B. H., i.c.s. Bogra.
N.B. Parasnis, D.B. Satara.
B. Pargiter, The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Frederick

Eden, b.a., i.c.s. Calcutta.
B. Parsons, W. Calcutta.

N.B. Peake, C. W., m.a., Bengal Education Service.
Jalpatguri.
B. Peal, H. W., f.b.s. Calcutta.
B. Pedler, The Hon. Mr. Alexander, c.i.e.,
F.B.S. , Director of Public Instruction, Bengal.
Calcutta.
L.M. Pennell, Aubray Percival, b.a., Bairister-at-
Law. Rangoon, •

B. Percival, Hugh Melvile, M.A., Bengal Education

Service. Calcutta.
N.B. Peters, Lieut-Colonel 0. T., m.b., i.m.8.
Bombay.

^TBK^f^ectlon.

1889'Nov. 6.
1904 June 1.
1904 Mar. 4.
1889 Mar. 6.

1889 Mar. 6.

1880 April 7.
1895 Aug. 29.

1901 June 5.
1900 April 4.
1898 Aug. 3.
1904 Mar. 4.
1890 Mar. 5.

1887 May 4.

1884 Mar. 5.

1903 Mar. 4.

1900 April 4.

1900 Aug. 29.

1901 Dec. 4.
1889 June 5.
1903 July 1.

1896 Aug. 27.

1899 June 7.
1898 Mar. 2.

1897 Nov. 3.
1902 Feb. 5.

1900 Dec. 5.
1893 Jan. 11.
1902 Feb. 5.

1900 Dec. 5.

1901 Aug. 29.
1886 April 1.
1897 Dec. 1.
1904 Jan. 6.

1900 Mar. 7.
1885 Feb. 4.

1902 Dec. 3.

N.R.

R.
N.R.

N.R.

A.
N.R.
F.M.

N.R.

R.
N.R.

N.R.

R.
N.R.

N.R.
N.R.
IN.R.

N.R.

L.M.

N.R

N.R.

R.
N.R.

B.
R.

N.B.

Phillott, Major D. 0., t.a. Notoshera,

Pilgrim, G. Ellcock. Galcutta,

Pirn, Arthur W., i.c.s. Jharm,

Prain, Lieut.-Col. David, m.a.,m.b., ll.d., i.m.s.,

Superintendent, Royal Botanic Grarden,

Europe.
Prasad, Hanuman, Raes and Zemindar.

Ghunar,

Rai, Bipina Chandra, b.l. Mymensingh,
Rai Ghaudhery, Jatindra Nath, M.A., b.l.

Bamagar.
Rai, Lala La j pat. Lahore.
Raleigh, The Hon. Mr. T. Europe.
Ram, Sita, m.a. Moradobad.
Rapson, E. J. Europe.

Ray, PrafuUa Ghandra, D.sc, Bengal Educa-
tion Service. Europe.
Ray, Prasanna Kumar, d.sc. (Lond. ^ and

Edin.), Bengal Education Service. Dacca.
Risley, Herbert Hope, b.a., *c.i.e., i.c.s.

Calcutta.
Rogers, Charles Gilbert, f.l.s., f.c.h., Indian

Forest Department. Port Blair.
Rogers, Captain Leonard, m.d., b.sc, m.b.g.p.,

F.R.C.S., I.M.S. Calcuttm.
Rose, H. A., I.c.s. Lahore.
Ross, E. Denison, ph.d. Calcutta.
Roy, Maharaja Girjanath. Dina^epur.
Roy, Maharaja Jagadindra Nath, Bahadur.

Calcutta,

Samman, Herbert Frederick, i.c.s. Jessore.

Sarkar, Chandra Kumar. Kowkantk.

Sarkar, Jadu Nath. Bankipore.

Saunders, C. Calcutta.

Schulten, Dr. 0. Calcutta.

Schwaiger, Imre George. Delhi.

Scindia, His Highness the Maharaja. Choalior,

Sen, A. C, i.c.s. Bankura.

Sen, Birendra Chandra, i.c.s. Dinajpur.

Sen, IJpendranath. Calcutta.

Sen, Yadu Nath. Calcutta.

Seth, MesroVb , J. Calcutta.

Sharman, Pandit Gulab Shankar Dev, f.t.s.

Puchbadra,
Shastree, Pandit Yogesha Ghandra. Calcutta,
Shastri, Mahamahopadhaya Haraprasad, m.a.

Galouita.
Shastri, Hamarain. Delhi,

1902
1903
1900
1899
1903
1904
1904

Mar. 5.
April 1.
May 2.
May 3.
Aug. 26.
April 6.
June 1.

1893 Mar. 1.

1902 Sep. 24.
1895 Aug. 29.
1892 Mar. 2.
1889 Aug. 29.

1892 Aug. 3.

1889* Nov. 6.

1894 Feb. 7.

1901 Aug. 7.
1904 Mar. 4.
1894 July 4.

1897 Jan. 6.
1872 Aug. 5.

1901
1904
1898
1901
1891
1895
1904
1899

Dec. 4.
Sept. 26.
April 6.
Mar. 6.
Aug. 27.
July 5.
June 1.
Aug. 30.

1900 Aug. 29.
1904 July 6.
1904 Jan. 6.

1868 June 3.

1898 April 6.
1904 July 6.

1893 Aug. 31.
1878 June 5.

N.R.
N.R.

N.R.

R.
L.M.
N.R.

N.R,

N.R.

N.R.
N.R.

R.
N.R.

R.
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.

F.M.
N.R.
N.R.

R.
N.R.

N.R.
N.R.

1904 May 4 | N.R.

Shastri, Rajendra Chandra, m.a. OalciUta,
Shaun, Montague Churchill. Europe.
Shrager, Adolphe. Calcutta,
Silberrad, Chas. A., i.c.s. Banda.
Simpson, J. Hope, i.C.s. Allahahad,
Simpson, Maurice George, m.i.e.e. Calcutta.
Simpson, Robert Rowell, b.sg.

Calcutta.
Singh, Maharaja Kumara Sirdar Bharat,

I.c.s. Ghazipur.
Singh, Kumar Birendra Chandra. Calcutta.
Singh, Lachmi Narayan, m.a., b.l. Calcutta.
Singh, The Hop. Raja Ooday Pratab. Binga.
Singh, H.H. The Maharaja Prabhu Narain,

Bahadur. Benares.
Singh, H.H. The Hon. Maharaja Pratap

Nai*ain. Ajodhya^ Oudh.
Singh, H.H. The Hon. Maharaja Ramesh-

wara, Bahadur. Darbhanga,
Singh, H.H. . Raja Vishwa Nath, Bahadur,

Chief of Chhatarpur.
Singha, Chandra Nai*ayan. Calcutta.
Singha Kumai* Kamlananda. Sriimgar.
Sinha, Kunwar Kushal Pal, m.a. Narki

P.O., Agra Bistnct.
Sircar, Amrita Lai, f.c.s. Calcutta.
Skrefsrud, The Revd. Laurentius

Rampore Haut.
Spooner, D. Brainerd. Europe.
Stapleton, H. E. Calcutta.
Stark, Herbert A.,'B.a. Cuttack.
Stebbing, E. P. Dehra Dun.
Stein, M. A., ph.d. Peshawar,
Steinberg, Alfi-ed Frederick, i.c.s.
Stephen, Hon'ble Mr. Justice, H. L.
'Stephen, St. John, b.a., ll.b. Barrister-at-

Law. Calcutta.
Stephenson, Captain John, i.M.s. Europe.
Streatfeild, C. A. C, i.c.s. Naini TaL
Stuart, Louis, i.c.s. Orai.

Tagore, The Hon. Maharaja Sir Jotendra
Mohun, Bahadur, k.c.s.i. Calcutta.

Tagore, Maharaja Prodyat Coomar. Calcutta.

Talbot, Walter Stanley, i.c.s. Srtnagar^
Kashmir.

Tate, G. P. Seistan.

Temple, Colonel Sir Richard Oamac, Bart.,
C.I.E., i.A. Port Blair.

Thanawala, Framjee Jamasjee. Bombay,

Olavi.

Europe.
Calcutta.

DSteoTBlSottonr

1875 J^e 2.

1898 Nov. 2.
1847 June 2.

1891 Aug. 27.
1904 June 1.

1899 Mar. 1.
1861 June 5.

1893 May 3.

1898 Feb. 2.

1900 Aug. 29.
1890 Feb. 6.

1902 May 7.

1902 June 4.

1901 Mar. 6.

1894 Sept. 27.

1902 Oct. 29.

1901 Aug. 7.

1900 Jan. 19.

1901 June 6.
1889 Nov. 6.

•

1900 April 4.

N.R.

R.
L.M.

F.M
N.R.
R.
L.M.

Thibaut, Dr. G., Muir Central College.

Allahabad.
Thornton, Edward, f.r.i.b.a. Calcutta,
Thuillier, Lieut.-Genl. Sir Henry Edward

Landor, kt., c.s.i., p.e.s., r.a. Europe.
Thurston, Edgar. Europe,
Tipper, George Howlett, p.g.s. Calcutta,
Tocher, A. Calcutta.
Tremlett, James Dyer, m.a., i.o.s. (retired).

Europe,

N.R. Vanja, Raja Ram Chandra. Mayurhhanga,

District Balasore,
R. Vasu, Amrita Lai. Calcutta,
A. Vaugham, Major J. C, i.m.s., Europe.
N.R. Venis, Arthur, m.a., Principal, Sanskrit
College. Benares,
R. Vidyabhushan, Jogendra Nath Sen.

Calcutta,
R. Vidyabhushan, Pandit Satis Chandra, m.a.
Calcutta,
N.R. Vogel, J. Ph., PH.D. Lahore.
L.M. Vost, Major William, i.m.s. Muttra,
R. Vredenburg, E. Calcutta.

A.
R.
R.
R.

N.R.

1865 May 3. , A.
1874 July 1. A.

1902 April 2.
1904 Mar. 4.

1900 Dec. 5.
1894 Sept. 27.

1894 Aug. 30.
1898 July 6.

A.
R.

N.R.
R.

Walker, Dr. T. L. Europe.

Wallace, David Robb. Calcutta,

Walsh, E. H., i.c.s. Calcutta.

Walsh, Lieut-Col. John Henry TuU, i.m.s.

Calcutta,
Walton, Captain Herbert James, m.b., p.r.c.s.,
• I.M.S. Bombay.

Waterhouse, Major- General James. Europe.
Watt, Sir George, Kt., c.i.e. Europe.
Wheeler, H., i.c.s. Europe.
Wood, William Henry Arden, m.a., f.c.s.

F.R.G.s. Calcutta,
Woodman, H. C, i.c.s. Europe.
Woodroffe, The Hon Mr. Justice Jokn

George, Barrister-at-Law. Calcutta.
Wright, Henry Nelson, b.a., i.c.s. Allahabad.
Wyness, James, c.E. Calcutta.

• ••

XllI

SPECIAL HONORARY CENTENARY MEMBERS.

18841^1. 15.
1884 Jan. 15.
1884 Jan. 15.
1884 Jan. 15.

Dr. Ernst HaBckel, Professor in the University of

Jena.
Charles Meldrom, Esq., c.M.a., m.a., ll.d., f.r.a.s.,

' F.R.s. Mauritius,
Professor A. H. Sayce, Professor of Comp. Philology.

Oxford.
Professor Emile Senart, Member of the Institute of

France. Paris,

HONORARY MEMBERS.

ISt^THeoHonT'

1848 Feb. 2.

1879 June 4.

1879 June 4.
1879 June 4.
1881 Dec. 7.

1883 Feb. 7.

1894 Mar. 7.

1895 June 5.

1896 Feb. 5.

1896 Feb. 5.
1896 Feb. 5.

1899 Feb. 1.

1899'Dec. 6.

1899 Dec. 6.

Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, g.o.s.i., c.b., m.d., d.c.l.,

LL.D., F.L.S., F.a.s., F.R.O.S., F.R.S. Berkshire,
Dr.Albert Giinther, m.a., m.d., ph.d., f.z.s., f.r.s.

Surrey,
Dr. Jules Janssen. Paris,
Professor P. Regnaud. Lyons.
Lord Kelvin, a.c.Y.o., d.c.l., ll.d., f.r.s.e., f.r.s. Olas-

goto,
William Thomas Blanford, Esq., ll.d., a.r.s.m., f.q.s.,

F.R.G.S., F.Z.S., F.R.S. London,
Alfred Russell Wallace, Esq., ll.d., d.c.l., f.l.s.,

F.Z.S., F.R.S. Dorset,
Mahamahapadhyaya Chandra Kanta Tarkalankara.

Calcutta.
Professor Theodor Noeldeke. Strasshurg,
Lord Rayleigh, m.a., d.c.l., d.sc, ll.d., ph.d., f.r.a.s.,

F.R.S. Witham, Essex.
Lt.-Genl. Sir Richard Strachey, r.e., o.c.s.i., ll.d.,

F.R.Q.S., F.G.s., F.L.6., F.R.S. London,
Charles H. Tawney, Esq., m.a., o.i.e. London.
Lord Lister, f.r.c.s., d.c.l., m.d., ll.d., d.sc, f.r.s.

London.
Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b., m.a., m.d., d.c.l., ll.d.,

D.sc, F.L.S., F.R.S. Oamhridge.
Professor F. Kielhom, pJ.d., c.i.e. Oottingen.
Professor Charles Rockwell Lanman. Massachusetts ,

U.8.A.
Dr. Augustus Frederick Rudolf Hoemle, ph.d., c.i.e.

Oxford,
Professor Edwin Ray Lankester, m.a., ll.d., f.r.s.

London,
Sir George King, k.c.i.b., m.b., ll.d., f.l.s., f.r.s.

London,

»v

Date of fileotlonT

1899 Dec. 6.
1899 Dec. 6.

1901 Mar. 6.

1902 Nov. 5.
1904 Mar. 2.
1904 Mar. 2.

1904 Mar. 2.
1904 Mar. 2.
1904 Mar. 2.
1904 Mar. 2.

1904 July 2.

Professor Edward Burnett Tylor, d.c.l., ll.d., p.e.s.

Oxfordr,
Professor Edward Suess, p.h.d., For. Mem. b.s.

Vienna.
Professor J. W. Judd, C.B., ll.d., f.b.s. London,
Monsieur R. Zeiller. Paris,
Professor Heinrich Kern. Leiden.
Professor Ramkrishna Gropal Bhandarkar, c.i.e..

Poona.
Professor M. J. DeGoeje. Leiden.
Professor Ignaz Goldziher, Budapest.
Sir Charles Ljall, m.a., k.o.s.i. London.
Sir William Ramsay, ph.d., (Tub.) ll. d., sc.d. (Dubl.)

F.vaS., IT. I.e.

Dc. George Abraham Grierson, ph.d., c.i.e., i.c.s.
London.

ASSOCIATE MEMBERS.

Date or ElecUon.

1874
1875
1875
1882
1884
1885
1886
1892
1892
1899
1899
1899
1902

April 1.
Dec. 1.
Dec. 1.
June 7.
Aug. 6.
Dec. 2.
Dec. 1.
April 6.
Dec. 7.
April 5.
April 5.
Nov. 1.
June 4.

The Revd. E. Lafont, c.i.e., s.j. OalcuUa,

The Revd. J. D. Bate, m.r.a.s.- Kent.

Maulavie Abdul Hai. Oalcutta.

Herbert, Giles, Esq. Europe.

F. Moore, Esq., F.l.s. Surrey.

Dr. A. Fuhrer, Europe.

Rai Bahadur Sarat Chandra Das, c.i.e. Calcutta.

Pandit Satya Vrata Samasrami. Oalcutta.

Professor P. J. Briihl. Sihpur.

Rai Bahadur Ram Brahma Sanyal. Oalcutta.

Pandit Visnu Prasad Raj Bhandari. Nepal.

The Revd. E. Francotte, s.J. Oalcutta.

The Revd. A. H. Francke. Leh.

LIST OF MEMBERS WHO HAVE BEEN ABSENT FROM
INDIA THREE YEARS AND UPWARDS.*

* Rnle 40. — After the lapse of three yeai*s fi-om the date of a
member leaving India, iJ no intimation of his wishes shall in the
interval have been received by the Society, his name shall be re-
moved from the List of Members.

The following members will be removed from the next Mem-
ber List of the Society under the operation of the above Rule: —

Edwin Max Konstam, Esq.

Michael Francis O'Dwyer, Esq., b.a., i.c.s.

Alfred Frederick Steinberg, Esq., i.c.s.

LOSS OF MEMBERS DURING 1904.

By Retirement.

T. W. Arnold, Esq.

The Hon. Dr. Gnrudas Banerjee, d.l.

Sir John Eliot, f.b.s.

John Champion Fannthorpe, Esq., i.c.s.

E. V. Gabriel, Esq., i.c.s.

A. Garrett, Esq., i.c.s.

Babn Roormall Goenka.

The Hon. Mr. W. 0. Maopherson, c.s.i., i.s.c.

By Death.
Ordinary Members,

Dr. U. 0. Mukerjee.

A. T. Pringle, Esq.

Harjeebhoy Manickjee Rustomjee, Esq., c.i.b.
Dr. Mahendralal Sircar, m.d., c.i.e., d.l.
Dr. Charles Robert Wilson, m.a., p. litt,

Honorary Member,
Dr. Otto von Bohtlingk.

Oorrespondtng Member,
Dr. Emil Schlagintweit.

Bt Removal.

Under Bule 9.

P. B. Bramley, Esq.

Babn Gopal Chandra Chatterjee.

Mahammad Rafiq, Esq., Barrister-at-Law.

Under Etde 38.

Babu Manmatha Nath Chakravarti.

Captain W. A. Cuppage, i.a.

Rai Narsingh Chunder Dutt, Bahadur.

B. Suryanai-an Rao, Esq., b.a.
Babu Pumendu Narayan Singh.
Lala Shyam Sunder Srivastavya.

Under Bule 40.

Dr. Frank Gerard Olemow, m.d., Edin.
Sir Alfred W. Croft, m.a., k.c.i.e.
Lieut. M. LI. Ferrar, i.a.
A. J. Grant, Esq., i.c.s,

( •

[▲PPlUfBIX.]

ABSTRACT STATEMENTS

RECEIPTS AND DISBURSEMENTS

OP THE

Asiatic Society op Bengal

POK

THE YEAR 1904.

rmi

190j^.

STATEMENT
Asiatic Society

Dr.

To ESTABLISHMBNT.

Bs. As.

Bs. As. P.

Salaries

• • •

*t(< ot

8,460

7 11

Commission

• ••

••• •••

375 11

Pension

• « •

••< •••

112

3,948 8 10

To CONTINOENCIBS

•

Sfcationery

•t*

•

133 14

Taxes

■••

884

PostAge

•••

666 13

•

Freight

■ • t

128 15

Meeting

•••

105

•

Auditor's fee

• • •

100

Insurance fee

•••

312

Electric Ponkhas and Light

218

Bepairs

••■

2,686

Petty repairs

■ • ■

Building

•t*

■

Miscellaneous

• ■

459

5,701 11 1

To Library 'AND Oolleotions.

Books

•••

!•• •••

2,185

Binding . .

•••

• • • • « •

599

Oatalogue

•••

• t • ■ • ■

Gleaning, &c., of Pictures

' •• •••

1,306

Picture Frame (Freight and

other charges)

566

•

Furniture

• • •

••• •••

358

•

5,040 15 9

•

To PUBLlCATIOMfl.

•

Journal, Paart I

t • t

• • • •••

1,436 14

Journal, Part II

•• •

• •• • ••

1,381

Journal, Part III

•• t

• • t • ■•

854 10

Proceedings

•••

• It • ••

752 14

4,425 8 9
200 2

To Printing chargee

1 of Circulars, Beceipt-forms,

&c.

•

„ Personal Account (Writes-off and Miscellaneous)

•

644

•
•

To EXTBAORDINABY BXPENDITURI

Boyal Society's Scientifio Oatalogue

1 • •

6,842 10

Balance

•

• •

1,92,939 7 6

Total Rb.

• •

•

2,18,742 1 8 .

zix

No. 1.
of Bengal.

1901

Cr.

By Balance from laafc Report

Be. Am. P. Bs. Am. P.

1,81,826 9 6

Bt Cash Beceipts.

Publioatioxui sold for oash

Interest on InvestmQnts ... ..•

Bent of a Boom on the Society's ground floor

Allowance from Government of Bengal for
the Pnblication of Anthropological and
Cognate snbjects ... ... ..

Allowance from Gk)yt. of Assam for Do. Do.

Grant from GoTomment of India for repair-
ing the Society's bnilding

Miscellaneons

«t*

790 6 8

6,786 8

780

2,000

1,000

10,000

80 2

. By Extbaobdinabt Biceipts.

Sabsoriptions to Boyal Society's Scientific
Oatalc^^e ••• ... ... ...

21,387 8

6,352 4 6

Admission fees
Subscriptions
Sales on credit
Miscellaneous

Bt Personal Account.

•••
...

...

1,068

8,704

348 8

85 11

10,176 3

Total Kb.

2,18,742 1 8

Abuto^h Mukhopadhyat,

Honorary Tr€a9urtr^

Atioete Society of B&ngaU

. STATEMENT
190^. Oriental Publication Fund in Acct.

Dr.

To Oa8H Expenditure*

Bb. As. P. £b. As. P.

Printing charges ... ... •• 10,763 11

Editing oharges ••• — ••• 4,971 5

Salaries ... ... ..• 1;412 10 2

Freight ... ... ... 1 '2 8

Contingencies •.• ... •.. 11* 1^

Stationery ... ... ... " «l U 4

Postage ... ••• — *08 6 6

Commission on collections ••• ... 17 9 5

Binding ••. ••• ••• 2 6

17,904 10 6

To Personal Account (Writes-ofF and Miscellaneous) ... 103 2

Balance ... ... 5,097 1 3

Total Bs 23,104 18 8

STATEMENT

190 4- • Sanskrit Manusc7%pt Fund in Acct.

Dr.

To Cash Expenditure.

Bs. As. P. Bs. As. P.

Salaries ... ... .•• 1|182

Travelling charges ... ... ... 786 1 6

Postage ... ••. •*• 8

Stationery ... ... .** 8 11

Purchase of Manuscripts ... ... 3,724 4

Binding ... ... — 10

Contingencies ... ... ... 846 14 9

6,043 2 3

Balance ..*. ... 8,678 5

Total B9. ... 9,621 2 8

No. 2.

with the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 1904*

Cr.

Bs. Am. p. Bs. As. P.

By Balanoe from last Report ... ... ... 11,241 3 8

Bt Gash Beoiipts.

GoTemment Allowance ... 9,000

Pablioations sold for oash ... ... 1 ,888 18 8

AdvanceB reoovered ... ... 88 14 8

10,427 U 6

Bt Pkbsonal Account.

Sales on credifc ... ... ... ... 1,435 14 6

Total Bs. ... 23,104 13 8

ASUTOSH MOKHOPADHTAY,

Honorary Treasurer y

Asiatic Society of Bengal,

No. 8.

with the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 190^.

Cr.

Bs. As. P. Bs. As. P.
By Balance from last Beporfc ... ... 6,387 14 8

Bt Gash Beciipts.

Gk>Temment Allowance ... •.. 8,200

Publications sold for cash ... ... 14

3.201 4

Bt Pbbsonal Accouvt.
Sales on credit ... ... ••* ••• 32

Total Bs. ... 9,621 2 8'

AjUTOSH ICUKHOPADHTAT,

Boikorary Tr$a9ur$r,

A»iaHe BoeUty of B0ngal,

xxu

STATEMENT
190^. Arabic and Persian MSS. Fund in

Salaries

Oontingenoies

Purchase of Manusoripts

Postage

Trayelling charges ...

Dr.

To Gash Expenditure.

Bs. As. P.

265 16 3
10

176 15
2 10

189 8

Balance

Bs. As. P.

Total Bs.

684 7 3
6,865 8 9

7,000

1904,

. Dr.

To Balance from last Report

STATEMENT
Personal

Bs. As. P.

To Gash Expenditure.

Advances for purchase of Sanskrit Mann-

BcnpvSi ovO. ••• ••• ••* •••

To Asiatic Society .. ... ... 10,176 8

„ Oriental Publication Fond ... ... 1,435 14 6

„ Sanskrit Manuscript Fund ... ... 32.0

Bs. As. P.
7,794 6 2

4,932 8 1

11,644 1 6

Total Bs.

24,370 14 9

ZXlll

No. 4.

Acot. with the Asiatic Society of Berigal.
1904..

GcMremment Allowance

Cr.

Bt Gash Bsciipts*

Bs. As. P

7,000 .0

Total Rs.

7,000

ASUTOSH MUKHOPADBYAYi

Honorary Treasurer^

Asiatic Society of Bengal.

No. 3.
Account.

By Caah Receipts
Asiatic Society

»i

Oriental Publication Fund

By Balance.

Due* to the
Society.

Due by the
Society.

Kb. As.

Rs.

As.

Members ...

6,194

200

Subscribers

•**

• • •

• ■ ■

Employes ...

100

ICiscellaneous

14
1

6
8

6,344

881

Total Bs.

1904,.

Bs. As.

Bs. As. P.

*••

644
108 2

18,660 U 11
747 2

4,968 10
24,370 14

AsUTOSH MUKHOPADBTAY,

Honorary Treasurer,

Asiatic Society of Bengal.

XXIV

1904-.

STATEMENT
Invest-

Dr.

To Balance from last Report ...

TOTAX Bb.

Value. 0o8t.

Bb. Ab. p. Bb. Ab. P

1,8S,800 1,88,104 2 7

14,000 18.848 6 10

2,02,800 2,01,962 9 6

PlftMAVSHT.

Tbhpobabt.

FUKDf.

Value

•

Cost.

Value.

Oost.

Total OoBt.

Asiatin Society
Trust Fond

Rs.

1,48,600
1,400

RS. 1

1,46,148

1,839

6
12

P.
8

Rs.

48,300

• a a

48,475

• * a

A.
6

Rs.

1,96*618
1,889

18
6

1,60,000

1,40,482

48,800

48,476

1.97AM8

1904-

STATEMENT

Trust

•

To Pension

Balance

Dr.

•a. •••.
a*. • • •

Total Rb.

• ••
«••

•••

Kb. As. P.

1,466 11 10

1,488 11 10

xxr

No. 6

ment.

Cr.

By Gash
„ Balance

»i»

rOTAL Rs.

1901

Yalne. Ooet.

Bs. Ab.P. Bs. As. p.

4,000 8,904 6 8
.. ),08»800 1,07,966 8 2

.. 2.02,800 2,01,952 9 6

Ajutosb Mukhopadhtat,
Hony. Treasurer i
Asiatic Society of Bengal,

No. 7.
Fund.

1904.

Cr.

By Balance from last. Beport
„ Interest on Inyeetment

Total Re.

Bs. As. P.

1,484 11 10

1,488 11 10

AbUTOSH MaKHOPADBTAT,

Hony, Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

XXVI

1904'

To Balance from last Report

Dr.

Rkckiptb.

To Aiimtio Society ...
M Oriental Fublication Fnnd ...
„ Sanakpt Mannecript Fnnd ...
„ Arabic and Pemian Mannsoript Fnnd
,, Personal Acoonnt
„ Investment •..

„ Tmst Fnnd

Total Bs.

STATEMENT

Cash

Bb. As. p.
26,739 6 2
10,427 11 6

8,201 4

7,000
18,660 11 11

8,994 6 8
49

Bs. As. P.

4991 16 11

70,072 6 10

76,064 6 9

1904.

STATEMENT
Balance

To Gash ...
„ Investments

I, Personal Aooonnt

Bs. As. P.

6,614 9 8

... 1,97,968 8 2

4,968 10

Bs. As. P.

2,09,486 18 8

Total ^,

2,09,486 18 8

We have examined the above Balance Sheet and the appended detailed
aooomts with the books and vonohers presented to ns, and certify that it is in
accordance therewith, correctly setting forth the position of the Society as at
the 8Ist December, 1904.

OiLCUTTA,

Fehfuary 2Afh^ 1905,

Mbuoens, Kino and Simson,

Auditorg,

XXVll

No. 8.
Account.

190^.

Cr.

EXPRNDITURK.

By Asiatic Society ...
,, Oriental Pdblication Fond ...

Sanscrit Mannscript Fand ...

Arabic and Persian Manasoript Fand

„ Personal Aoconnt
„ luTestment
„ Trast Fund

Balance
Total Rs.

Bs. As. P.

26,158 10 8

17,004 10 5

6,043 2 3

6B4 7 8

4,932 8 I

13,848 6 10

Bs. As. P.

68,649 18 1
6,514 9 8

7n,064 6 9

ASDTORH MUKHOPADHTAY,

Hony, Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

No. 9.
Sheet.

Cr.

By Asiatic Society ...

„ Oriental Publication Fand ...

„ Sanflkrit Manuscript Fund ...

Arabic and Persian Manuscript Fund

Trust Fund

Total Rs.

Rs. As. P.

... 1,92,989 7 5

5097 1 3

3,578 5

6,865 8 9

1,455 11 10

]90i.

Its. As. P.

2,09,435 13 8

2,09,436 IS 8

Arutosh Mukhopadhtat,

Hony. Treasurer y
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Library.

Tlie following new books have been added to the Library
from January to April 1905. The continuations of all the serials
and works in progress have been received.

Abdul Wftlif 3/^ti/(ir2. Ethnographical Notes on the Muhamma-
dan Castes of Bengal. {^Bomhay, 1904.] 8^

llepiiuted from the Journal of the Anthropological
Society of Bombay, vol, VII,

Freed, by the Author,

Abdur Rahman, H. ^^j*^ [Almoi-taza or life of Hazrat

Ali, the fourth Chalif, with a map of Arabia. In Urdu.]
\^Amrit8ar, 1901.] 8*.

. J^ Jh <//*. [Ai-abi Bol ChaL Parts I— II. A

Ti^atise on current Arabic dialect in Egypt and Syria, In
Urdu.] [Amritsar, 1904.] 8".

. cjl*^ . [As-Siddiq or the life of Abu Baki*,

the Just, 1st Chalif, with a map of ancient Arabia. In Urdu.]
[Amritsar 1901.] 8^

UtwU^ . [Kitab un Nahv. A Treatise on Arabic
Syntax. In Urdu.] [^Amritsar, 1903.] 8\

. «JyAJlwlX^. [Kitab us Sarf. A Treatise on Ai*abic

Etymology. In Urdu.] [A7nrit8ar, 1904.] 8^

Aj^'oILi dXj ^yL. [Safamamai Beladi Islamai. Part I.

In Urdu.] [Amritsar, 1905.] S\

Presd, by the Author.

Abal Fa2l Allami, Shaikh, (r) ^iSj^^ii^l- [Persian Ms.
of Ain-i Akbari. voL II.] 8**.

Presd, by Syed Shamsul Huda.

AmCighinO, Florentine. Paleontologia Argentina.
La Flata, 1904. S\

Presd, by the Universidad de la Plata*

Ananda Banga Pillai. The PHvate Diary of Ananda Hanga
Pillai, D abash to Joseph Francois Dupleix, Gx)vemor of
Pondicherry. A record of matters political, historical, social,
and pei*sonal, from 1736 to 1761. Translated from the
Tamil... and edited by Sir J. F. Price... Assisted by K, Banga-
chari. vol. I, etc. Madras, 1904, etc, 8®.

Presd. by the Qovemment of Madras
Dupleix and Labourdonnais. Les Fraucais dans Tlnde.

... Extraits du journal d'AnandarangappouUe... — 1736-1748.
— Traduits du tamoul par J, Vinson. Paris, 1894. 8®.

Presd, by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Arabian Nioht's Entertainments. The Book of the Thousand
Nights and a Night. Translated from the Ai*abic by Captain
Sir R. F. Burton. Reprinted from the original edition and
edited by C. Smithers. Illustrated .. ,by A. Letchford. vols. I.
and II. London, 1897. 8°.

Presd, by H.H, the Maharaja of Ttppera.

ARCHiBOLoaiGAL SuRYEY OF India. Annual Report, 1902-03, etc.
Calcutta, 1904, etc. 4P.

Presd, by the Survey.
-General Index to the Reports of the Archeoological

Survey of India, Volumes I to XXIIl. Published under the
superintendence of Major-Genei'al Sir A. Cunningham, by
V. A. Smith. With a glossary and general Table of Contents.
Oalofitta, 1887. 8^

The Art-Journal. New Series, voL VI. London, 1860. foL

Presd, by HM, the Maharaja of Ttppera,

Atharva Veda BhI^ya. The Atharva Veda Bha^ya. ...Trans-
lation and with the Commentary in Sanskrit and Hindi by
Giridhari Lala Shastri, Farrukhabad, [ ] 8^

Presd, by the Translator,

AvESTA, Pahlavi and Ancient Persian studies, in honour of the
late Shanii^-ul-Ulama Dastur Peshotanji Behramji Sanjana.
First series, etc. Strassburg, 1904, etc. 8°.

Presd, by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay,

Bernier, Fraii9oi8, Travels in the Mogul Empire, A.D. 1666-
1668... A revised and improved edition based upon Irving
Brock's translation by A. Constable. Westminster, 1891. 8°.

Presd. hy H.H. the Maharaja of Ttppera.

Bernoulli, J. J. Die erhaltenen Darstellungen Alexanders des
Grossen. Ein Nacbtrag zur griecbiscben Ikonograpbie.
Miinchen, 1905. 8^

BoyU^i De. Oeneral. Le Palais d'Angkor Vat, ancienne
residence des rois Kbmers. Hanoi, 1903. 8®.

♦ .

Bhftt^ Braja Nfttb. Maricbik6. A gloss on Brambasutra...
Edited by Ratna Gopal Bbaf^a. Fasc. I, etc,
Benares, 1905. etc, S\

Ohotckhamha Sanskrit Series, No, 86.

Bhattamalla. Akbyatacandrika. ...Edited by S. P. V. Banga-
natbasvami Ayyavaralugfaru, Benares, 1904. 8^

Ohowkhnmha Sanskrit Series, No, 82,

Blagdon, Francis William.* A Brief History of Ancient and
Modei*n India from tbe earliest period of antiquity to tbe
termination of tbe late Mabratta War. London, 1805. fol.

Presd, hy H,n, the Maharaja of Tippera,

Breslau. — Stadthtbliothek. Verzeicbnis der arabiscben, persis-

cben, tiirkiscben und bebraiscben Handscbrift^n der Stadt-

bibliotbek zu Bi'eslau. Von C. Brockelmann.
Breslau, 1903. 8^

British Museum. Tbe Coins of tbe Mogbul Emperors of Hindu-
stan... By S. Lane-Poole. Edited by R. S. Poole.
London, 1892. 8^

Presd, hy H,H, the Maharaja of Tippera,

Cachari First and Second Reader. Shillong, 1904. 8*.

Presd, hy the Oovt, of Assam,

Cape Town. — Geological Commission. Index to tbe Annual
Reports... for tbe years 1896-1903. Compiled by E. H. L.
Scbwarz. Cape Totcn, 1904. 8^^.

Presd. hy the Geological Commission, Cape Toivn,

OasteXf R. Le P^ril japonais en Indo-Chine. Reflexions poli-
tiques et militaires. Paris, [1904.] 8^.

Ohantepie de la Sanssaye, P. D. Manael* d^blstoire des reli-
gions. Tradnit de V allemand, etc. Paris, 1904. 8°.

CoNORts International de Botanique \ Vienne 1905. Texte
synoptiqne des documents destines a servir de hkae anx
d6bats du Gongres International de Nomenclature Botanique
de Vienne 1905', presente au nom de la commission intorna-
tionale de nomenclature botanique par J. Briquet.
Berlin, 1905. 8^

Presd, hy the Congress,

Oordier, Henri. Histoire des relations de la Gbine avec les
puissances ocoidentales, 1860- 1902, 3 vols.
Pam, 1901-1902. 8^

Ooyajee, J. C. Tbe Spirit of tbe Gatbas. A lecture.
[Bombay, .] 12^.

The Oatha Society's Publications. No, 1,

Presd, by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay,

Donsson, Paul. Erinnerungen an Indien....Mit einer Karte,
16 Abbildungen und einem Anbange. — " On tbe Pbilosopby of
tbe Vedanta in its relations to occidental Metaphysics."
Kiel, Leipzig, 1905. 8®.

Doumer, PauL L'Indo-Cbine fran9aise — Souvenirs.
Paris, 1905. 4".

D'Oyly, Sir Charles. Views of Calcutta and its environs,
London, 1848. fol.

Presd, by H,H, the Maharaja of Tipper a.

Drahyayaqa. The Srauta-Sntra of Drfthjaja^a with tbe Com-
mentaiy of Dhanvin. PJdited by J. N, Reuter. Part I, etc,
London, 1904, etc. \\
Reprinted from the * Acta Societatis ^cie7itiaru7n Fennicas,''

Presd. by Messrs. Luzac 8f Co,

Duckworthi W. L. H. Morphology and Anthropology. A band- '
book for students. Cambridge, 1904. 8°.

Dupuy, J. Tb. La Peste. fitude critique des nioyens propbylaeti-
qiies aotiiels. Ptnu's, 1904. 8°.

Datton, Clarence Edward. Earthquakes in the light of the New
Seismology. London, 1904. 8°.

Encyclopedia Britannic a. Tenth edition... New volumes. (Maps
—Index.) 11 vols. Edinburgh, 1902-03. 4**.

Filclmer, Wilhelm. Ein Ritt iiber den Pamir. Berlin, 1903. 8''.

Firdansi. Shih Nimeh. Translated into Guzarati from
Firdousi from the commencement up to the reign of King
Minocheher, with an appendix containing an account of the
Kings according to the Avesta Pahlavi and oth^r Persian books,
by Jivanji Jamshedji Modi. [Bornbay], 1904. 8°,

Presd, by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay,

FoiT68t| G. W. A History of the Indian Mutiny. Reviewed and
illustrated from original documents. 2 vols.
Edinburgh, Lofidon, 1904 8°.

Fonchori A. L'Art greco-bouddhique du Gandhara. £tude sur
les origines de Tinfluence classique dans Tart bouddhique
de rinde et de TExtrdme-Orient. Vol. 1, etc.
Paris, 1905, etc. 8®.

Publications de VHcole Frangaise d' Extreme-Orient,

itude sur Ticonographie bouddhique de Tlnde d'apres

des textes inedits. Paris, 1905. 8^.

Presd. by the Author,

Obillard, L. Nankin d'alors et d^aujourd *hui. Aper9u historique
et geographique. Ohang-Hai, 1903. 8°.
Varietes Sinologiques, No. 23.

, Nankin port ouvert. Ohang Hai, 1901. 8°,
VarietSs Sinologiques No, 18.

Oftlpilly Stanley Leman. Cortois and Yilain. A study of the
distinction made between them by the French and Proven9al
poets of the 12th, 13Ui and 14th centuries. A thesis, etc.
New Haven, Oonn, 1905. 8®.

Presd. by the Yale University,

A Genei^al History of Quadrupeds... The fourth edition.
New-Oastle-upon-Tyne, 1800. 8®.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tiitpera

Geological Survey of the Dominion of Canada, Map showing
mounted Police Stations in the North- West territories.
1904 S-sh. foL

Presd, by the Swrvey.

Oibbon, Edward. The History of the Decline and Fall of the
Roman Empire... Edited... with introduction, notes, appendices,
and index, by J. B. Bury. 7 vols. London, 1900-1902. 8^

Oriinwedol, Albert. Buddhist Art in India. Translated... by A.
G. Gibson. Revised and enlarged by J. Burgess.
London, 1901. 8**.

Presd. hy H,H, the Maharaja of Ttppera,

HSBCkel, Ernest. The Wonders of Life. A popular study of
Biological Philosophy. . Supplementary volume to ** The Rid-
dle of the Universe ''...Translated by J. McCabe.
London, 1904. S"".

Presd, by the Author,

Hamilton, Anthony. Memoirs of Count Grammont... Edited,
with notes, by Sir Walter Scott. With portrait of the author
and... other etchings by L. Boisson after original designs by
0. Delort. Londofi, 1896. 8''.

Presd, by H,^, the Maharaja of Tippera,

Harconrt, Lieut, A. The New Guide to Delhi. Allahabad, 1866. 8°.

Hava, Bev. Fr. J. G. Arabic-English Dictionary for the -use of
students, ^eyrut, 1899. 8°.

Havelly E. B. A Handbook to Agra and the Taj, Sikandra, Fateh-
pur-Sikri and the neighbourhood... With... illustrations, etc*
London, 1904. 8^.

_itt, W. Carew. Faith and Folklore. A Dictionary of National
Belief, Superstitions and Popular Customs, past and current,
with their classical and foreign analogues, described and illus-
trated, etc, 2 vols, London, 1905. 8®.

in, Sven. Scientific Results of a journey jn Central Asia
1899-1902. Text, voL 1, etc. Maps, voL 1, etc,
Stockhohn, [1904, etc] 4P.

Horzogi Maximilian and others. I. Does Latent or Dormant
Plague exist where the disease is endemic. By M. Herzog
and G, B. Hare. II. Broncho- Pnnemonia of Cattle : Its asso-
ciation with B. Bovisepticns. By P. G. WooUey and W.
SorrelL III. Report one Pinto — Pano Blanco. By P. Gr.
Woolley. IV. Notes on Analysis of the water from the
Manila water-supply. By C. L. Biss V. Frambcesia: Its
occurrence in Natives or the Philippine Islands. By P. G,
Woolley. Manila, 1904. 8®.

Presd, by the Bureau of Oovt Laboratories, Manila,

Hilal al-Bftbi The HistoHcal Remains * of Hilil al-Sftbi. First
part of his Kitab al-wuzara. — Gotha Ms. 1766 — and Fragment of
his History 389-393 A. H.— B. M. Ms., Add 19,360.— Edited
with notes and glossary by H. F. Amedroz. Leyden, 1904. 8®.

Hirsch J. Auctions-Catalog von griechischen und romischen
Mnnzen schonster Erhaltung. No. XII. Munchen, 1904. 8®.

Pregd, by ihe Publisher.

Hirth, F . China and the Roman Orient : researches into their
ancient and medisBval relations as represented in old Chinese
records. Leipsic, Munich, 1885. 8®.

Hochrentiner, B. P. G. Plantee Bogorienses exsiccate?. NovaB vel
minus Cognites quie in Horto Boianico coluntur.
[Batavia,] 1904. 8^.

Presd, by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzorg,

Haisman, M. La Belgique commerciate sous Tempereur Charles

VI. La CompAgnie d'Ostende. Atude historique de politi-
que commerciale et coloniale. Bruxelles, Paris, 1902. 8**.

Huuter, Sir William Wilson. A Brief History of the Indian
Peoples... Twenty-third edition, etc. Oxford, 1903. 8**.

Ibu Thofa'il Hayy Ben Yaqdhan. Roman philosophique d'Ibn
Thofa'il. Texte arabe public d'apr^s un nonveau manuscrit
avec les variantes des anciens textes et traduction fran9aiBe par
L. Gauthier. Alger, 1900. 8°.

Jacki R. Logan. The B|ick Blocks of China. A narrative of
experiences among the Chinese, Sifans, Lolos, Tibetanos
Shans and Kachins between Shanghai and the Irrawadi.
L(mdmi, 1904. 8°.

JackSOn» Sir Chai'les, A Vindication of the Marquis of Dnl-
housie^s Indian administration. Jjondoii, 1865. 8^.

JlMASP. Pahlavi, Pazend and Persian Texts with Gujarftti trans-
literation of the Pahlavi Jamaspi, English and Gujarftti trans-
lations with notes of the Pahlavi J&maspi, Gujarftti translation
of the Persian Jftmftspi and English translation of the Pazend
Jftmftspi by Jivanji Jftmshedji Modi. Bombay, 1903. 8®.

Presd, by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

Janet, Cherles. Anatomie du gaster de la Mjrmica Rubra,
Paris, 1902. SP.

-. Essai sur la constitution morphologique de la t^te

de rinsecte. Paris, 1899. 8®.

-. djtudes sur les f ourmis, les gudpes et les abeilles. Note

14. Rapports des animaux mynn^eophiles avec les fourmis.
Limoges, 1897. 8°.

. Observations sur les gufipes. Paris, 1903. 8®.

. Sur les rapports des Lepismides myrmecophiles avec

les fourmis. Paris, 1896. 8°.

Extrait des Comptes rendus hebdoviadaires des Stances
de VAcadSmie de Sciences,

Presd, by the Author,

Jivanji Jamshe^ji Modi. The Ancient Iranians according to
Herodotus and Strabo. A comparison with the Avesta and
other Parsee books. Bombay, 1904. 8^

Presd. by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bomhay.

Jor6t» Charles. Les Plantes dans Tantiquit^ et au Moyen Age.
Histoire, usages et symbolisme, etc, Paris, 1904. 8°.

Jnmpf Captain R. Views in Calcutta. London, 1S37 . 4^

Presd, by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Kittel, Br. F. A Grammar of the Kanna^a language in English
comprising the three dialects of the language — ancient,
mediaeval and modem. Mangahre, 1903. 8°.

, William. The Private Life of an Eastern King.
Compiled for a member of the household of his late Majesty,
NuBsir-u-deen, King of Oude,...New edition, revised.
London, 1856. 8^.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Kuinait. Die Hftlimijjat des Kuiuait. Heraus^geben, iibersetzt
und erlautert von J. Horovitz. Leiden, 1904. 8^

Ii66- Warner, Sir William. The Life of the Marquis of Dalhousie.
2 Tols. London, 1904. 8^

Lodge» Edmund. Portraits of Illustrious Personages of Great
Britain... with biographical and historical memoirs of their
lives and actions. Text, 4 vols. Plates, 1 vol.
London, 1823-25. 4^ & fol.

Presd. by HM, the Maharaja of fippera.

Loti» PieiTe, pseud, [i.6. Jnlien Viaud]. Vers Ispahan. Gin-
quieme Mition. Paris, 1904. 8**.

LiibkO, Dr. Wilhelm. Outlines of the History of Art.. .Edited,
minutely revised and largely rewritten by R. Sturgis. 2 vols.
Lofidofi, 1904. 8°.

Ludwif » Ernest. The Visit of the Teshoo Lama to Peking. Gh'ien
Lung's Inscription. Translated by E. Ludwig.
Peking, 1904. 8**.

Presdi by the Translator,

HcOollOChf J. R. A Treatise on the principles Rnd practical
influence of Taxation and the Funding system.
London, 1845. 8°.

Presd, by H,H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Macg60rge» G. W. Ways and Works in India, being an account
of the public works in that countrv from the earliest times up
to the present day. Westminster, 1894. 8°.

HcMinn, Chailes W. Famine Truths,— Half Truths,— Untruths.
GahuHa, 1902. 8^.

Presd. by the Author.

Halleson, Colonel G. B. The Decisive Battles of India from 1746
to 1849 inclusive. With a portrait. . . a map, and. . . plans. Second
edition, with an additional chapter. London, 1885. 8^.

Presd, by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera,

Manusanhita or Institutes of Manu. Commented and edited by
Pandit Gangadhur Kaviratna Kaviraj.
[Baharampur, 1883.] 8®.

Martin» Montgomery. The History, Antiquities, Topography, and
Statistics of Eastern India ; comprising the districts of Behar,
Shahabad, Bhag^lpoor, Goruckpoor, Dinajepoor, Pumiya,
Bnngpoor and Assam, etc., VoL II. London, 1838. 8°.

Presd, by H,H. the Maharaja of Tippera,

Meorwaldt, J. H. Handleiding tot de beoefening der Bataksche
Taal. Leiden, 1904. 8**.

Presd. hy the Directeur de V Enseignement des cultes et de V
Industrie aux Indes nSerlandaises,

Morgan, J. de. Fouilles 4 Dahchonr en 1894-1895.
Vienne, 1903. foL

Nilakantlt^a Tamivara. The Advaita Parijata^... published by
R. Shankar Wariyer. Bombay, 1901. 8**.

'"' ^^unwi^f etc. [S^ri Soubhi^gra Lahari, ffri

Vif^unavaratna/stutiQ, Advaitakatd Ary^^ti and S^ri Hari-
bhaktimaranda Stuti.] Benares, 1902. 8°.

Presd, by the Author.

O'Oonnor, V. C. Scott. The Silken East. A record of life and
travel in Burma.... With... iUustrations, etc. 2 vols.
London, 1904. 8®'

Oldham, G. F. The Sun and the Serpent A contribution to the
history of Serpent- Worship. London, 1905; Si*.

Presd, by the Author,

Orloff, N. A. Die Eroberung der Mandschurei durch die Trans-
baikal-Kasaken. im Jahre 1900....Deutsch von Ullrich, etc,
8trassburg, 1904. 8°.

Perrot, George and Ohipiez, Charles. A History of Art in Ancient
Egypt From the French... Illustrated with... engravings...
and ...plates. Translated and edited by W. Armstrong. 2
vols. Londoti, 1883. 8**.

. A History of Art in Ghaldasa and Assyria. From the
F^nch . . . Illustrated with . . . engravings . . . and . . . plates. Trans-
lated and edited by W. Armstrong. 2 vols. Lonc^, 1884. 8°.

. History of Art in PhcBnicia and its dependencies. From

the French . . . Illustrated with . . . engravings . . . and . . . plates.
Translated and edited by W. Armstrong. 2 vols.
London, 1885. 8^.

Presd. by H.H, the Maharaja of Tippera,

Petridi W. M. Flinders. Methods and Aims in Arch89ology...with
...illustrations. London^ 1904. 8^.

PfeffeFi Ihr, W. The Physiology of Plants. A treatise upon the
Metabolism and sources of energy in Plants... second fully
revised edition, translated and edited by A. J. Ewart. With...
illustrations. 2 vols. Oafordy 1900. 8^.

PiaBSetflky, P. Hussian Travellers in Mongolia and China...
Translated by J. Oordon-Cumming. 2 vols. London, 1884. 8^.

Piette, Edouard« Consequences des mouvements seismiques des
regions polaires. Angers, 1902. 8^.

. fttudes d'Ethnographie pr^historique : — VI. Notions
compl^mentaires sur TAsyli^n. VII. Classification des
sediments formes dans les cavemes pendant Vige du renne.
Paris, 1904. 8**.

Extratt de ^^ VAnthropologte,**
. Gravure du Mas d'Azil et statuettes de Menton.

Parts, 1902. »*.

Extratt des Bulletins et Memoires de la 8oci6t4
d^Anthropologte de Paris, 1902,

Les Causes des grandes extensions glaciaires aux

temps pleistoodnes. Paris, 1902. 8^.

Extratt des Bulletins et Memoires de la Societe
d'Anthropologie Paris, 1902,

. Notice sur M, Edouard Piette. Vannes, 1903. 8°.

. Sur une gravure du mas-d'AziL [Paris,] 1903. 8°.

Presd. by the Authyr,

Pit. Eenige proeven met phosphorzuur-bemesting.
Batavia, 1906. 8^.

Presd. by the Botanic Institute, Buitenzorg.

Police Commission. Report of the Indian Police Commission
1902-03. With Resolution. Simla, 1903, 4**.

QnirOS, Pedro Fernandez de. The Voyages of Pedro Fernandez
de Quiix)8, 1595 to 1606, Translated and edited by Sir C.
Markbam. 2 vols. London, 1904. 8^.

Hakluyt Society's Publications, Second series. No, 14,

Presd. by the Goremment of India, Home Department,

Beillftohy Solomon. La Collection Piette an mus^e de Saint*
Germain. Paris, 1902. 8^.

Extrait de la Bevue Archiologique,

Pre$dm hy the Author,

Ribbei CarL Zwei Jahre nnter den Kannibalen der Salomo-
Inseln. Beiseerlebnisse nnd Schildenmgen von Land und
Lenten. Dresden-Blaseintz, 1903. 8°.

Bickaixbly B. India ; or Facts submitted to illustrate the charac-
ter and condition of the native inhabitants, with suggestions
for reforming the present system of Government. Vol. I,
Vol n, Pts. 2-3. London, 1829. 8°.

Presd* hy H,H. the Maharaja of Ttppera,

RitChiOi Leitch. Wanderings by the Seine, from Rouen to the
Source.. .With. ..engravings m)m drawings by J. M. W. Turner.
London, 1835. 8^.

SmCO, Federico. I MoUuschi dei terreni terziarii del Piemonte
e della Liguria,...Gonsiderazioni generali. Indice generale
deil'opera. Torino, 1904. 4^ *

Presd, hy the Author.

•

8alt| Henry. Twenty-four views in St. Helena, the Cape, India,
Ceylon, The Bed Sea, Abyssinia and Egypt. From drawings
by H. Salt Text and plates. London, 1809, 1822. 4 & fol.

Presd, hy HM, the Maharaja of Tippera.

Sankftraniindai S^ri Brahmasutradipika... Edited by Bama SAstri
Tailanga. Fasc. 1, etc Benares, 1904, etc. BP.

Benares Sanskrit Series, No, 91,

Bchimperi Dr. A. F. W. Plant-Geographv upon a Physiological
Basis.. .The authorised English translation by W. B. Fisher
...Bevised and edited by P. Groom. ..and I. B. Balfour. With
^..illustrations. Oxford, 1903. 8^.

gCOtt, Bev. J. E. In Famine Land. Observations and experiences
in India during ike Great Drought of 1899-1900.
New York, London^ 1904. 8^.

Shakespeare, William. The Pictorial Edition of the works of
Shakespeare. Edited by C. Knight, 8 vols. London, ( ). 8°.

Presd. 6y H.H. the Maharaja of Tifpera.

Smith, Vincent A. The Early History of India from 600 B.C. to
the Muhammadan Conquest, including the invasion of Alex-
ander the Great. Oxford, 1904. ff*.

Sdrensen, S. An Index to the names in the Mahabharata with
short explanations and a Concordance to the Bombay and
Calcutta editions and P. C. Roy's translation. Pt. I, etc.
London, 1904, etc. 4?.

Spillmann, Joseph. Durch Asien. Ein Buch mit vielen Bildem
fiir die Jugend...Zweite, vermehrte Auflage. 2 vols.
Freiburg i. A, 1896, 98. 4^

Stein, M.A. Map showing portions of the territory of Khotan
and adjoining regions... 1900- 1901. ( ) [1904.] S-sh. foL

Presd, by the Author^

-Sand-Buried Ruins of Khotan. Personal narrative of a

journey of archaBological and ge^raphical exploration in
Chinese Turkestan. London, 1903. 8^.

Stockholm. — Acadhnie Boyal Suedoise des Sciences, LesPrix Nobe
en 1901. Stockholm, 1904. 8**.

Presd. by the Academy.

BtTOXig, Richard P. Protective inoculation against Asiatic .Chol-
lera. — ^An experimental study. Manila, 1904, 8^.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No, 16.

-Some Questions relating to Virulence of Micro-organisms,

with particular reference to their immunizing powers.
Manila, 1904. 8^

Bureau of Oovernment Laboratories, Manila, No. 21,

Presd, by the Bureau of Oovt* Laboratories, Manila »

Subha^ita-Samoraha. Edited by Cecil Bendall. Lot^vain 1905. 8^.

Extrait du ' Museon * Nouvelle Sdrie, IV- V.

Presd. by the Editor.

Tantbakalpadeuma?. mir mvfin i [Tantrakalpadrumab. Com-
piled by Nilakamala Vandyopadhvava and revised by Pa^^^it
oyftma Charan Kaviratna. Parts 4, 6 and 7.
OaZcu^a, Banaref, 1900, 1903, 1906. 8^.

Presd, by Babu KaUkrisna Banerjee.

VamMry, ArminitiB. The Story of m^ Strorales. The Memoirs
of Arminius YamMrj. 2 vols. Londoriy 1905. 8^.

Vftnsittftrt, Henrj. A Narrative of the Transactions in Bengal,
from the year 1760 to the year 1764 daring the Gbvemment
of Mr. H. Yansittart. Published by himself. 3 vols.
London, 1766. 8^.

Freed, by H.M. the Maharaja of Ttppera,

YRNKATi^DHVABi. Lak9miBaha8ra...with the commentary called
Bftlabodhini by Srinivasa Pa^^it or Ravji Maharaja. Edited
...by Bama Sllstri Tailanga. fasc. 1. etc,
Benares, 1904, etc. 8°.

Ohowhhamba Sanskrit Series, No, 84,

VienXf E. F. The Manufacture of Pottery in India.
Bombay, 1905. eP.

Beprinied from the ** Indian Textile JoumaV^

Presd, by the Author,

Virarajendra Wadiar, Baja, [Rubbing of an Inscription re-
cording an Elephant hunt of Baja Virarajendra Waidiar, the
mler of Coorg from 1780-1809. With a translation.] fol.

Presd* by the Oovt, of India, Home Dept,

Voolcker, John Augustus. Report on the Improvement of Indian
Agriculture. London, [1893.] 8**.

Presd. by H,H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Wetmore, Monroe Nichols. The Plan and scope of a Yergil
Lexicon, with specimen articles. A thesis, etc.
New Haven, Oonn,, 1904 8°.

Presd. by the Yale University.

Wherry, Wm, B. Some Observations on the Biology of the
' Cholera Spirillum. Manila, 1905. 8^.

Bureau of Oovemment Laboratories, Manila, No. 19*

Presd. by the Bureau of Oovt, Laboratories, ManiUi.

Wiffma&i H. J. Rorako— Ormogarpum Qlabrum T. et B. var.
Minahassana. Batavia, 1905. SP.

Presd. by the Botanic Institute of Buitentorg.

WilliamB, H. W. Select views in Greece with classical illustra-
tions. 2 vols. London J 1829. fol.

VinisOIly Professor. Scotland IlluBtrated in a series of eighty views
from drawings by John C. Brown, William Brown, and other
Scottish artists, with letter-press descriptions and an essay on
the scenery of the Highlands. London, 1850. 8°.

Presd, hy H,H, the Maharaja of Tipper a.

WollastOlIt Arthur N. A Complete English-Persian Dictionary,
etc, London, 1889. 4®.

Wtl8t6nfeld, Lr, Ferdinand. Yergleichungs-TabeUen der muham-
madanischen und christlichen Zeitrechnung nach dem ersten
Tage jedes muhammedanischen Monats berechnet und im
Axiftrage und auf Kosten der Deutschen Morgenlandischen
Oesellschaft herausgegeben von Dr. F. Wustenfeld.
Leipzig, 1903. 4**.

Wycherloy) William. The Dramatic Works of Wycherley, Con-
greve, Vanbrugh and Farquhar. With biographical and cri-
tical notices by L. Hunt. A new edition. London, 1855. 8®.

Presd, hy H,H. the Maharaja of Tippera,

Zendavesta* The Pahlavl version of Yasna IX. Edited with
collation of MSS. A literal Translation into English,. ..notes
and an introduction by Manekji Bamanji Davar.
Leipzig, 1904. 8®.

Presd, hy the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

^^^^^^ >^ "^t^ x^ -^ '^J

Library.

The following new books have been added to the Library
from May to Jnne 1905.

AnavamadarsI SarigharSya. Daivajna Kamadhenu, a treatise
on Astrology.. .Edited by the Very Rev. 0. A. Seelakkhandha...
and Seetarama Upadhyaya. Fasc, I, etc, Benares, 1906, etc. 8°.

Benares Sanskrit Series, No. 97.

AiggirS and othebs ^iffhrf WOTW» I [A collection of twenty-
seven Smrtis of Anrira... Edited by the Pandits of Ananda-
<rama.] [Poana, 1906.] 8.°

Aboh^oloot. Annnal Report of the Director-General of Arch*
flBology, 1903-04, Part I, etc. Calcutta, 1906, etc. fol.

Presd, by the Director-Oenerdl of Archsoohgy,

^i Sitaram Eothare. Hindu Holidays, as originally con-
tributed to " The Times of India." Bombay, 1904. 8°.

Bbnabes. — Sanskrit College. List of Sanskrit, Jaina and Hindi
Manuscripts purchased by order of Government and deposit-
ed in the Sanskrit College, Benares, during 1902. Nos. 6 <fe 7.
Allahabad, 1904^. «".

Presd. by the Oovt. of the United Provinces"

BoABD 09 ExAMiKBRS. Catalogue of books in European Lan-
gnsma in the Library of the Board of Examiners, late College
of Fort William. Prepared under the superintendence of
Lieut,-Ool. Ranking. [With two indices.] 3 pts.
Oalcuita, 1903. 4''.

C atalogue of books in Oriental Languages in the Library
of the Boiud of Examiners, late GoUeffe of Fort William.
Prepared under the superintendence of Lieut.-Gol. Ranking.
[With two indices.] 3 pts. Calcutta, 1093. 4^

Presd, by the Board of Examiners, Fort W&Uatn.

BuxHOS Aires, Demografia. Afio 1901, etc. La Plata, 1904, etc. 8^
Presd. hy the Direcdon-Oeneral de Estadistica, Buenos Aires.

Ootton, Julian James. List of inscriptions on Tombs or Monu-
ments in Madras, possessing historical or archaeological in-
terest. Madras, 1905. fol.

Indian Monumental Inscriptions, vol, 3.

Presd. by the Oovemment of Madras.

Earlt Dutch and English Voyages to Spitsbergen in the seven-
teenth century, including Hessell GFerritsz. " Histoire du
Pays nomm6 Spitsberffhe," 1613, translated into English
...by B. H. Soulsby...and J. S. Van der Brugge. '' Joumael of
Dagh Register " Amsterdam, 1634. Translated into English
...by J. A. J. de Yilliers... Edited with introductions and
notes by Sir W. Martin Conway. London, 1904 8^.

Hakhiyt Society^ s Publications, 2nd Series, No. 11.

Presd, by the Ghvt. of Indda, Home Dept*

Fatoa of British India, including Ceylon and Burma... Butter*
flies. Vol. I. by Lieut. -Col. O. T. Bingham.
London, 1905. ff.

Presd. by the Oovt. of Bengal,

Haas» W. R. Tromp de. Uitkomsten van de aftappingsproeven
met Hevea Brasiliensis in den Cultuurtuin t^ Tjikeumeuh

SMlaan gedurende de laren 1900, t/m, 1904, etc,
atavia, 1905, etc. 8*.

Presd, by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzorg*

Hakltitt Society. Prospectus and List of Members, 1904
London, [1905.] 8^

Presd. by the Oovt. of India, Homa Dept.

Henog, Maximilian. The Plague: Bacteriology, Morbid Ana-
tomy, and Histopathology, including a consideration of in-
sects as plague carriers. Manila, 1904. 8^.

Bureau of Oovt. Laboratories, Manila, No. 23.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Holdich, Colonel Sir Thomas Hun^rford. India... With maps

and diagrams. London, 1904. ^. ,^ , . ,

Part of " The Begions of the World," edited by H. J. Mackinder.

Jame8» S. P. and lastODi W. Glen. A MonogrM)h of the Anophe*
les Mosquitoes of India. Calcutta, 1904. 4 .

Kalidasa. Kalidasa's Abhijfianasliakiintalaiu. Translated in Eng-
lish verse bj Kalikes Bandjopadhjaj. Oalcutta^ 1901» 8^.

Pread. by the Author,

Koehler, B. and Vaney, C. An Account of the Deep- Sea Holo-
thurioidae collected by the Bojal Indian Marine Survey
Ship Investigator. Ocdcuttaj 1905. 4P.

Presd, by the Indian Museum*

LiNODiSTio Survey op India. Report on the Progress of the Lin-
guistic Survey of India, presented to the Fourteenth Inter-
national Congress of Orientalists. [By Dr. G. A. Grierson.1
[1906.] fol.

Presd, by the Author,

Manila. — Bureau of Forestry. Ueport of the Chief of the Bureau
of Forestry of the Philippine Islands for the period from Sep-
tember 1, 1903 to August 31, 1904. ManUa, 1905. 8°.

Presd, by the Ohief of the Bureau of Forestry^ Manila.

Mann, Harold H. Agriculture as a science. A lecture, etc
[ Calcutta^ 1905.] 8^

Presd. by the Calcutta University Institute*

Haxwell-Lefroy, H. The Dusky Cotton Bug. The Bed Cotton
Bug. The Cotton Leaf Hopper. The Success Knapsack
Sprayer. The Six-Spotted Lady Bird Beetle. A Simple
Spraying Apparatus. The Preservation of Seed from Insect
Attacks. Kosin Washes as Insecticides. Kerosene Emulsion.
Crude Oil Emulsion. Lead Arseniate.
\Bovnhay, Pusa, 1904-05.] 8**.

Presd, by the Author*

Meldolai Raphael. The Chemical Synthesis of Vital Prodncta
and the inter-relations between organic compounds.
London, 1904. 8"*.

Merrill, Elmer D. A Review of the identifications of the species
described in Blanco's Flora de Filipinas. Manila, 1905. 8^
Bureau of Oovemment LaboratorieSj Manila No, 27.

Presd. by the Bureau9
Moore, F. Lepidoptera Indica. 5 vols* London^ 1890-93. 4^

Vevill, H. B. District Ghtzetteers of the United Proyinces of
Affra and Oadh, vol. xzxiy. Naini Tal, vol. xli. Hardoi,
vol. xlyiii. Bara-Banki. Allahabad, 1904. &".

Presd, by the Oovemment of India, Home Dept,

B^aunak. The Bfhad-devata attributed to ?aimaka. A summary
of the deities and myths of the Big-yeda. Critically edited
in the original Sanskrit with an introduction and seven appen-
dices and translated into English with critical and illustrative
notes by A. A. Macdonell. 2 pts. Oambridge, Mass, 1904« 8^.

Harvard Oriental Series, vols, b Sf 6.

Pread. by the Harvard University,

Waddell, Lieut,-Gol. L. Aastine. Lhasa and its Mysteries. With
a record of the expedition of 1903-1904... With... illustra-
tions and maps. London, 1905. 8^.

ii, Hans J. Beitrag zur Ethnologie der Ohingpaw (Eachin)
yon Ober-Burma. Leiden, 1904. 4°.
Internationales Archiv fur Ethnographie Supplement zu Bd. XVI,

Wherry, Wm. B. Olanders: Its diagnosis and prevention.
Together with a report on two cases of human glanders occur-
ring in Manila, and some notes on the Bacteriology and Poly-
morphism of Bacterium Mallei. Manila, 1904. 8^.
Bureau of Oovemment Laboratories, Manila, No, 24,

Presd. by the Bureau,

The following new books have been added to the Library from
July to August, 1905.

Annandale, Nelson. On Abnormal Ranid Larvse from Noi-th-
Eastern India. London, 1905. 8°.

Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, 1903, Vol. L

Fresd, by the Author,

Bose, Chuni Lai, Itai. Combustion... An address, etc.
Calcutta, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Calcutta University Institute.

Cachari Primary Arithmetic. (Paiseb banta sygang.) Part I,
etc. ShilJimg, 1905, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Chief Commissioner of Assam,

Chapman, Sydney J. The Lancashire Cotton Industry. A
study in economic development. Manchester, 1904. 8°.

Publications ff the University of Manchester. Economic
Series, No, 1,

Presd, by the University,

Colo MHO Muskum. Spolia Zeylanica. Vol. I, etc.
Co^omho, 1903, etr. 8°.

Davenport, C B. Statistical Methods with special reference to
Biological variation... Second, revised edition.
New York, 1904. 8^.

Ddrcle, C. Do la pratique de notre medecine chez les Ai'abes.
Vocabulaire arabe-fran9ais d'expressions mcdicales, etc.
Ahjer, 1904. 8°.

Eitel, Ernest J. Feng-Shui : or, the rudiments of Natural
Science in China. London, 1873. 8°.

Freer, Paul C. The preparation of Benzoyl-Acetyl Peroxide, and
its use as an intestinal antiseptic in cholera and dysentery.
Manila, 190i. S^.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No, 2,

Presd. by the Bureau,

Haeckel, Ernst. Der Kamp urn den Entwickelungs-Gedauken.
Drei Vortrage....Mit...Tafeln, etc, Berlin, 1905. 8^

Presd, hy the Author,

Hahn, B't. Ferd. Kurukh Folklore in the original. Collected
and transliterated bj Revd. F. Hahn. Calcutta, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Qovernmevt of Bengal.

Herzog, Maximilian. A Fatal infection by a hitherto undescrib-
ed chromogenic bacterium : Bacillus aureus fcetidus.
Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Qovernment Laboratories, Manila, No. 13.

■The Plague : Bacteriology, morbid anatomy, and histo-

pathology, etc. Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Qovernment Laboratories, Manila, No. 23.

fLerzogf Maximilian, and others. I. Does Latent or dormant
plague exist where the disease is endemic. By M. Herzog and
C. B. Hare. II. Broncho-pneumonia of cattle: its associa-
tion with B. Bovisepticus. By P. G. Woolley and W. SorrelL
III. Report on Pinto-Paiio Blanco. By P. G. Woolley. IV.
Notes on analysis of the water from the Manila water supply.
By C. L. Bliss. V. Frambaesia : its occurrence in natives of
the Philippine Islands. By P. G. Woolley. Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 20.

Jobling, James W. and others. Texas fever in the Philippine
Islands and the Far East. By J. W. Jobling...and P. G.
Woolley... The Australian Tick — Boophilus australis Fuller —
in the Philippine Islands. By C. S. Banks.
Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 14.

Jobling, James W. Preliminary Report on the study of Rinder-
pest of cattle and carabaos in the Philippine Islands.
Manila, 1903. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 4.

Presd. by the Bureau,

KftlidaSft. Kalidasa. A complete collection of the various i*ead-
ings of the Madras Manuscripts, By the Rev. T. Foulkes.
8 vols. Madras, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Government of Madras,

Eftllsafikara SiddhSnta Vagijia. Krodapattrasa Agraha or criti-
cal notes on Anumanajagadisi, Pratyakshannmanagadadhari,

Pratyakshanumanamathuri, Yyutpathivada, Saktivada, Muk-

tivada, Sabdasaktiprakasika and Kusumanjali... Edited by
Pundit Yindhyesvariprasad Dvivedin...and Nyayacharya
Vamacharana Bhattacharya. Fasc. I, etc.
Benares, 1905, etc. 8^

Chowkhamba Safiskrit Series, No, 90.

Kirkby, William. Practical Prescribing and Dispensing for
medical students. Manchester, 1904. 8"^.

Publications of the University oj Manchester, Medical Series,
No, 2,

Presd. by the University.

Landon* Perceval. Lhasa. An account of the country and
people of Central Tibet and of the progress of the Mission
sent there by the English Government in the year 1903-04,
etc. 2 vols. LondoJi, 1905. 8^

Little, A. G. Initia Operum Latinorum quae saeculis xiii, xiv,
XV, attribuuntur secundum ordinem alphabeti disposita,
Manchester, 1904. 8°.

Publications of the University of Manchester, Historical Series,
No. 2.

Presd. by the University,

Lorini> Eteocle. La Persia economica contemporanea e la sua
questione monetaria. Roma, 1900. 8°.

McGregor, Richard C. I. Birds from the Islands of Romblon,
Sibuyan and Cresta De Gallo. II. Further Notes on birds
from Ticao, Cuyo, Culioti, Calayan, Lubang and Luzon.
Manila,l90o. 8°.

Bureau of Qoverntnent Laboratories, Manihi, No 2o,

Presd. by the Bureau,

Madras District Gazetteers. Madras, 1904, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Oovernment of India, Home Department,

Manila, — Bureau of Government Laboratories. I. Description of
new buildings. By P. C. Freer. II. A Catalogue of the
Library. By Mary Polk. Manila, 1905. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila^ No. 22.

Report of the Superintendent of Government Laboratories

in the Philippine Islands for the 3 ear ended September Ist,
1903.

From Fourth Annual Report of the Philippine Commissi'tn,

Third [etc."] Annual Report of the Superintendent of the
Bureau of Government Laboratories for the period from Sep-
tember 1st, 1903, to August 3l8t, 1904 [etc.],
Manila. 1905, etc. 8^

Presd by the Bareuu.

Merrillf KImer D. A Dictionary of the plant names of the
Philippine iBhmds. Manila, 1903. 8®.

Bnroan of Government Laboratories, Manila, No, 8.

■A Review of the identifications of the species described

in Blanco's Floi a de Filipinas. Manila, 1905, 8°.
Bureau of Government Lahoratories, Manila, N(k 27,

MnSjn'ave, W. E. and Olegg, Moses T. Trypanosoma and
Trypanosomiasis, with special reference to SuiTa in the Philip-
pine Islands, Manila, 1903. 8°.

Bureau of Government Lahoratoriea, Manila, No. 5.

Pi. I. Amebas : their ciiltiyation and etiologic signifi-

cance. By W. E. Musgrave and M T. Clegg. Pt. II. Treat-
ment of intestinal Amebiasis — amebic dysentery — in the
tropics. By W. E. Musgiaye. Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Governme^it Laboratories, Manila, No, 18,

Presd. by the Bureau,

Nevill, H. R. Partabgarh. AUahabad, 1904. 8°.

District Gazetteers of the United Province oi Agra and Oudh^
Vol, XLVIL

RaiBaieli. AUahabad, I90b. 8°.

District Gazetteers of the United Provinces of Agra and Oudk,
VoU, XXXTX.

Presd. by the Government of India, Home Department,

Neville, Ralph. Garden Cities. A Warbnrton Lecture, etc,
Manchester, 1904. 8^

Manchester University Lectures, No, 1,

Presd, by the University.

Nityasvarftpa Brahmacari. ^^:tw firfx^v [Parapak^a giri-

bajrah by Nityasyaropa BrahmacAri.]
Brindavana, 1905. 8'^

Presd, by the Authiyr.

Olofsen, O. Through the unknown Pamirs. The second Danish
Pamir Expedition 1898-90.... With maps and... illustrations.
Lcmdan, 1904. 8^

Owen's College, Manchester, Historical Essays by Members of
the Owen's College, Manchester, published in commemoration
of its jubilee, 1851-1901. Loiidm, 1902. 8°.

Studies from the Biological Laboratories. (Studies in
Biology) etc. Vol. I, III, etc. Manchester, 1886, 1895, etc. 8°.

Studies from the Physical and Chemical Laboratories,

etc. Vol. I, etc. Manchester, 1893, 8°.

Studies from the Physiological Laboratory, etc. Vol. I, etc.

Manchester, 1891. 8°.

Studies in Anatomy, etc. Vol. II, etc.

Manchester, 1900, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Victoria Unirersiti/ of Manchester.

Penny, Tier. Fi-ank. The Church in Madras, being the history
of the ecclesiastical and missionary action of the East India,
Compn^y in the Presidency of Madras in the seventeenth and
eighteenth centuries., .With illustrations. Lomion, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Government of India^ Home Department.

Rajaram RSmkrish^a Bhagawat. An Attempt to analyse the

Maha-Bharata — fi'om the higher Brahminical standpoint.
Bombay, 1905. 8°.

Khordeh — A vesta searched. I. Mihr Ya^t — from the

Brahminical standpoint. Bombay^ 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Author^

Readymoney, Xasarvanji Jivanji. A University for Research-
Record and Instructions. Nature- History Museum and des-
criptive defining Xature-History tables illustrated : or Nature-
History Research thinking tables and investigating or sorting
tables for separating difEerent subjects. Bombay, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Riyenburg, Rev. S. W. Phrases in English and Angami Naga.
Kohl ma, Assam, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Chief Commissi(mer of Assam.

Sherman, Penoyer L. The Gutta Percha and Rubber of the
Philippine Islands. Manila, 1903. 8°.

Unreau of Government Laboratories, Manila, Xo, 7.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Smeeth, W. F. The Occurrence of Secondary Augite in the
Kolaf Schists. Bangalore^ 1905, 8^

Mysore Geological Departmentj BulletiUy No. 8,

Presd, hy the Mysore Oeological Department,

Smith, W. Robertson. Lectures on the Religion of the Semites.
First Series. The fundamental institutions... New edition.
London, 1901. ff".

Burnett Lectures, 1888-89.

Stebbing, E. P. A note upon the " Bee-Hole '* borer of teak in
Burma. Calcutta, 1905. 8^

Presd, by the Author,

Btronff, R« P. Preliminary Report of the appearance in the
Islands of a disease clinically resembling glanders.
Manila, 1904. 8^

Bureau of Oovemment Laboratories, Manila, No 1,

•Protective Inoculation against Asiatic Cholera — an experi-

mental study. Manila, 1904. 8^.

Bureau of Oovemment Laboratories, Manila, No 16.

Some questions relating to virulence of micro-organisms,
with particular reference to their immunizing powers.
Manila, 1904. 8*.

Bnreau of Oovemmsnt Laboratories, Manila, No. 21,

Presd, hy the Bureau.

SydOW, P. and H. Monographia Uredinearum sen specierum
omnium ad hunc usque diem descriptio et adumbratio system-
atica. Vol. I, etc. Lipsiae, 1904, etc, 8°.

Tftit, James. MedioBval Manchester and the beginning of Lanca-
shire. Manchester, 1904. 8®.
Publications of the University of Manchester, Historical Series,
Nol.

Presd. by the University,

YallabhScharya, Sri. A^u Bhashya, on Brahmasutra...With
a commentary called Bhftshva PrakaBa by Goswami Sri
Purushottnmjee Maharaj. Edited by Ratna Gopal Bha^ta.
Fasc. I, etc, Betmres, 1905, etc. 8®.

Benares Sanskrit Series, No, 99.

Watson, C. C. Ajmer-Merwara. Text and Statistical tables.
Ajmer,l904t. 8°.

Bajputana District Oazetteers,

Presd, by the Oovemment of India^ Home Department.

. • J

Wegener, Br. Georg. Tibet und die englische Expedition. ..Mit
zwei Earten und acht Yoilbiidem. Halle a./Sf., 1904. 8®.

Weintz, H. J. Hossf eld's Japanese Grammar comprising a
manual of the spoken language in the Roman character, etc.
London, 1904. 8°,

Weismann, Angast. The Evolution Theory... Translated by J. A.
Thomson... and M. B. Thomson. Illustrated. 2 vols.
London, 1904. 8®.

Wherry, William B. Glanders : its diagnosis and prevention, etc.
Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Oovemmmit Lahm'at cries, Manila, No. 24,

-Some observations on the biologj of the cholera spiril-

lum. Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Qovemment Laboratories, Manila, No, 19,

Woolley, Paul G. Report on Bacillus violaceous [wc] Manilae :
A pathogenic microorganism. Manila, 1904. 8 .
Bureau of Qovernmerit Laboratories, Manila, No. 16,

Presd, by the Bureau.

Wright, G. A. and Preston, 0. H. Handbook of Surgical
Anatomy... Second edition. Manchester, 1905. 8°.

Publications of the University of Manchester, Medical Series,
No, 3,

Presd, by the University.

Wylie, A. Notes on Chinese literature: with introductory re-
marks on the progressive advancement of the art -, and a list
of translations from the Chinese into various European lan-
guages... New edition. Shanghai, 1901. 8°.

Li BRAINY.

The following new bookR have been added to the Library
during September, 1905.

Amira, Karl y. Konrad von Manrer. Gedacbtnisrede, etc.
Munchen, 1903. 4*.

Presd. hy the JC. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Munchen,

Baron, Kr, and Wissendorff, H. Chansons nationales lalavien-
nes. vol. I, etc. Mttau, 1894, etc. 8°.

Presd. hy the AcaMmie ImpSrtale dea Sciences de St, Peterahourg,

BSlschOy Wilhelm. Die Abstammnng des Menschen. Zwanzigste
Auflage. Stuttgart, [1904.] 8^

Presd. hy " Kosmos, Oesellschaft der Naturfreunde,^* Stuttgart.

BriggS, Ella Marion. The Life History of Case Bearers.
Brooklyn, N. F., 1905, etc. S"".

Oold Spring Harbor Monographs, IV.

Presd, by the Brooklyn Itistittite of Arts and Sciences,

Bbitish Museum, — Natural History. Gaide to the Gallery of
Birds in the department of Zoology, etc. London, 1905. 4°.

Presd. hy the Museum*

Brussels. — Institut Intemattonal de Btbliographie. Manuel du
Repertoire bibliograpbique universel.
[Bruxelles,'] 1906. 8^

Presd. by the Institute

California Academy op Sciences, San Francisco. Constitution
and Bye-laws, etc. Sarh Francisco, 1904. 8°.

Presd. hy the Academy*

Oahada. — Defartment of the Interior. Belief map of the Dominion
of Canada. 1904u 8. sh. foL

Freed, hy the Department,

4larvaUlO| Oyro Angnsto de. Collection Cyro Angosto de Car-
Yalho ; monnaiee et mMaiUes portuffaises. [Sale cataloflrae.!
Ameterdam, 190b. 8P.

Freed, hy Herr J. Bchtdman.

<k>nard, Henry S. The Waterlilies. A monograph of the genus
Nymphaea. [BalUmore,'] 1905. 4^

Freed, hy the Oamegte Ineiitution of Waehtngton,

4k>ttOII, Julian James. List of Insoriptions on tombs or monu-
ments in Madras, possessing historical or arohsBological
interest. Madrae, 1905. 4^

Indian Monumental Ineerijptume^ vol. HI.

Freed, hy the Oovt. of Madrae.

•OortisSi Samuel Ives. Primitive Semitic BeUgion to-day. A
record of researches, discoveries and studies in Syria, Palestine
and the Sinaitio Peninsula. Ohicago, 1902. 8^

Daaiig. — Naturforeckende OeeeUechaft. Eatalog der Bibliothek.
etc. Heft I, etc.

Dangig, 1904, etc, 8^

Freed, hy the Society.

Simon, Abigail Camp. The Mud Snail ; Nassa obsoleta.
BrooWwn, ^.r., 1906. «".

Odd Spring Sarbor Monographe. V.

Freed, hy the Brooklyn Inetitute of Arte and Sciencee.

Ekoli8H-Oabo Dictionary by members of the Ghffo Mission of the
American Baptist Missionary Union, Tura, Assam. [By
M. C.Mason.] Shillong, 1905, 8^

Freed, hy the Chief Oommieeioner of Aeeam.

Folkmar, Daniel. Album of Philippine Types... Christians and
Moros... Eighty Plates, representing thirty-seven provinces
and Islands. Prepared and published under the auspices of
the Philippine Exposition Board by Daniel Folkmar.
Manila, 1904. Obi. fol.

Presd. by the Philippine Chvt,^ Manila,

Foster, J. E. Churchwarden's Accounts of St. Maiy the Greats
Cambridge, from 1504 to 1635. Edited by J. E. Foster.
Cambridge, 1905. 8®.

Pretd, by the Oamhridge Antiquarian Society.
Fraser, J. Ot. Totemism. Edinburgh, 1887. 8^

Friedrichi Johann. Qed&Qhtnisrede auf Karl Adolf von Cornelius*
Munchen, 1904. 4f.

Heigelf K. Th. von. Zum Andenken an Earl von Zittel.
MUnchen, I904i. 4^

Pread, by the K, B. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Mimchenm

HtOOn-Ohan. The Arakanese Calendar with the corresponding
dates in Burmese and English, 1820-1918. Ahyab, 1905. 4^

Presd, by the Author.

Jyotifl'chandra Bhattacherjee. ti l t ii ^^ ii n i [Lil&vasana.]

[OaZctt«a, 1905.] 8^

Preid, by the Author.

KalOCSinssky, Alexander v. tTber die Akkumulation der Son*
nenwarme in verschiedenen Flussigkeiten.
Leipzig, 1904. 8^

Sonderahdruck aus dem Mathemaiiachen und Naturwisaenschaftlichen

Beriehte aua Ungam, XXL

Presd, by the Author.

Kminbaclier, K. Das Problem der neugriechisohen Schrift*
sprache. Munchen, 1903. 4®.

Presd, by the K, B. Akademie der Wissensohaften zu Munehen.

La Flotte, de. Essais hlBtoriqnes snr Tlnde, pr6c6d68 d^nn
Journal de voyages et d'tme desoriptioii g^ographique de la
cote de Coromandel. Paris, 1769. 12^

Meyer, M. Wilhelm. Weltschopfnng. Wie die Welt entstanden
ist. Stuttgart, [1906 P] 8**.

Wie kann die Welt einxnal nntergehen P StuUgart, [1905 P] 8''.

Presd. by " Kosmos, QeseUachaft der Naturfreunde,''* Stuttgart.

NtItabindu. [Buddhist Text-book of Logic, composed by
Darmkirta with a commentary thereto.] Nyayabindn-tika,
[composed by Darmottar. Tibetan translation edited with
introduction by F. I. Sherbolski.] Ease. I. etc,
St. Petersburg, 1904, etc, fol.

Presd. by the Acadimie Impiriale des Sciences de St, PStersbourg.

Pringsheim, Alfred. Ueber Wert and angebliohen Unwert der
Mathematik. Mimchen, 1904. 4°.

Presd, by the K, B. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu
Munchen,

Smallwood, Mabel E. The Salt-Marsh Amphipod: Orchestia
palustris. Brooklyn, N,Y,, 1905. 8®.
Oold Spring Harbor Monographs, III,

Presd, by the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences,

Wildeman, E. de. Mission Emile Laurent— 1903-1904— .

inumdration des plantes r6colt6es par Amile Laurent avec la
collaboration de M. Marcel Laurent pendant sa demi^re mis-
sion au Congo. Bruxelles, 1905. 4°.

Presd, by the Oongo State^

WillCOCks, Sir William. The Nile in 1904.
London, New York, Cairo, 1904. 8^

Presd, by the Govt, of India^ Home D^t.

WollastOBf Arthur N. A complete English-Persian Dictionary
compiled from original sources. London, 1904. 4°.

Woolley, Paul G. and Jobbing J. W. A Report on Hemor-
rhagic Septicaemia in animals in the Philippine Islands.
Manila, 1904>. 8°.

Bureau of Oovemment LaboratoneSy Mamla, No, 9.

Presd. by the Bureau*

ZartUflht-i-Bahrfim ben Pajdfl. Le Liyre de Zoroastre—
Zar&tnsht N&ma— de Zartosht-i-Bahrim Ben PajdA^
public et tradnit par F. Rosenberg. St. PStershourgj 1904. 8®.
Presd, by the AcadSmie ImpSriale des Sciences, 8t, Petersbourg,

Zell, Th. 1st das Tier nnyemiinftigP Neae Einblicke in die
Tierseele. Stuttgart, [1903.] 8^

Presd. by " Kosmos, Qesellschaft der Naturfreunde,^* Stuttgart,

LlBI^I\T.

The following new books have been added to the Libittry
Irom October to December, 1905.

Annandale, Nelson, and Robinsoili Herbei*t 0. Fasciculi
Malayenses. Zoology, Part I., etc. Anthropology. Pai*t I.,
etc, London^ New York, Bombay, 1903, etc, 4®.

Freed* by Dr. N, Annandafe,

Arnold* E. Vemon. Vedic Metre in its historical development.
Oambrtdge, 1905. 8°.

Batayia.— De^ar^men^ van Landhouw. Het bestellen van Katt^eii-
zaden nit Amerika. Bataviay 1905. 8^.

Freed, by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzi^g.

BeUt G. A. Manual of Colloquial Tibetan. Oalcutta, 1905. H"".

BiNOAL District Oazetteebs. Oalcutta, 1905, etc. 8^

Freed, by the Oovemmtnt of Bengal.

Bhagavadqita. Die Bhagavadgitft aus dem Sanskrit ubersetzt
mit einer Einleitung iiber ihre urspriingliche Oestalt, ih]*e
Lehren und ihr Alter von Richard G^rbe.
Leipzig, 1905. 8°.

BlOChet, E. itudes de grammaire pehlvie. Farts, [1902.] 8^

Bowroy, Thomas. A Geographical Account of Countries round
the Bay of Bengal, 1669 to 1679.... Edited by Lt.-Gol. Sir
R. C. Temple. Oambridge, 1904. SP.

Hakluyt Society* s Fvhlications, 2nd Series, No, XII,

Fresd. hy Oovemment of India, Home Department.

Bradlay-Birt, F. B. The Story of an Indian Upland... With...
illustrations and a map, etc. London, 1905. 8^.

Butterwortll, Alan, and Venngopaal Ohetty, V. A Collection
of the Inscriptions on Copper-plates and Stones in the Nellore
District 3 pts. Madras, 1905. 8°.

Presd, hy the Govt, of Madras.

Caspaxi. A Grammar of the Aiubic Language, translated f mm
the German... and edited... by W. Wright. Third edition,
revised by W. Robertson Smith and M. J. de Goeje. 2 vols.
Oamhridge, 1898. S\

C- AN ADA. — Dept of the Interior, Statistics of the Dominion of
Canada. [With resource map] [Ottawa, 1905.] 8°.

Presd. by Dept, of the Interior, Canada,

Oollins, F. Howard. Author and Printer. A guide for authora,
editors, printers, correctors of the press, compositors, and
typists... Second impression. London, 1905. 8®.

Copelandy Edwin Bingham. I. The Polypodiacefie of the Philip-
pine Islands. II. New species of Edible Philippine Fungi.
Manila, 1905. 8^.

Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila, No. 28.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Crawley, Ernest. The Mystic Rose. A study of primitive
marriage. London, 1902. 8\

Dingelstedt, Victor. East and West. [Edinburgh, 1905.] 8*.
Reprinted from the Scottish Qeojraphical Magazifie.

Presd. by the Author.

Dongfhty^ Charles M. Tt*avels in Arabia Deserta. 2 vols.
Cambridge, 1888. 8°.

ElphlDStOne, Mountstuart. The History of India. The Hindu
and Mahometan periods... With notes and additions by
B. B. Cowell... Ninth Edition. L<mdon, 1905. &^.

Foacher, A. fitude sur riconographie bonddhiqae de Tlnde
d'apres des textes inedits. Pans, 1905. 8^.

BibUothique de VFiCole des Haut^s etudes. Sciences Belig lenses.
Vol 13, pt. 2.

Oil68, Herbert A. An Introduction to the history of Chinese
Pictorial Art... With illustrations. Shanghai, 1905. 8®.

Oibson, Margaret Dunlop. Catalogue of the Ai*abicMSS. in the
Convent of S. Catharine on Mount Sinai. London, 1894. 8^.

Studia Sinai tica. No, III.

Olada, Alfredo F. Proyecto Ae una estacion de secranda claae.
Ira Ptete, 1904. 8^

Pre$d. hy (he Universidud de La Plata.

Olaser, Eduard* Suwik ' imd al— 'Uzzft nud die altjemenischen
Insobriften. Munchen, 1905. 8^.

Presd. by the Author,

Qom4l61, Carlos. Proyecto de puente de mamposteria.
La Plata, 1904. 8'.

Presd. hy the Universidad de La Plata,

Harts, Gerald Berkeley. The Old Colonial System.
Manchester, 1905. &".

Pvhlicatums of the University of Manchester Historical Series, No, 3,

Presd, by the University,

H08t6Ilt H. Dolmens et Cromlechs dans les Palnis.
BruaeUes, 1905. 8^

Extrait des *' Missions Be^yes de la Gompagnie de JSsits.*'

Presd, hy the Author.

JcHkg, S. W. K. de. Het Drogen van Cocabladeren.
Batavia, 1905. 8^.

Presd, by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzerg,

KrftUO, Arthur. Die Pariayolker dei* Gegenwart. Inaugui*}d —
Dissertation, etc, Leipzig, 1903. 8*.

LftWSOn, Sir Charles. Memories of Madras. London, 1905. 8*.

L6p6f01161ir, Parfait-Charles, La France et le Siam.
Pam, 1897. 8**.

Presd, by the Societe Acadetnique Indo-Chinoise de Franct,

Lt 8trftllg6» G. The Lands of the Eastern caliphate, Mesopo-
tamia, Persia, and Central Asia from the Moslem Conquest to
the time of Timur. Cambridge, 1905. 8^.

Cambridge Geographical Series.

LtwiSi Gilbert N, I. Autocatalytic decomposition of Silver
Oxide. II. Hydi*ation in Solution. Manila, 1905. 8?,

Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila, No. 30.

Presd, by the Bureau.

IiOUcUrya, Sri, and Varadagttru, Sri. Tattvasekhara. B7
Sri Lokacharya. Edited by K. K. V. 8 A. Bftmannja Das
of Kinchi and Tattvatrayachulukasangraha hy Kumara
Vedantacharja Sri Varadaguru, edited by Acharya Bhatta-
nathaswamy. Benares^ 1905. 8®.

Benares Sanskrit Sertes, No. 106.

UllSihWgt Miliar. Peter Artedi. A bi-centenary memoir wntten
on behalf of the Swedish Royal Academy of Science...
Translated by W. E. Harlock. Upsala, Stockholm, 1905. S^.

Presd. hy the Academy^

Low, Lyman H. Collections Lyman H. Low, Jac N. van Gelder
et d'un amateur anglais. Monnaies et medailles de TAmeri-

?ne, de TAsie, de TAfrique et de TAustralie.
Amsterdam, 1905.] 8**.

Presd. hy Herr J, Schu/mnn,

Malcolm, Napier. Five years iu a Peraian Town.
London, 1905. 8°.

MigUBZf Adrian Peroyra. Proyecto de edificio para facultad de
ingenieria. La Plata, 1904. S^.

Piesd. hij the Umversidad de La Plata.

Mim Huseyn, of Hanwddn. The Tarikh-i-Jadid or new History
of Mirza 'Ali Muhammad the Bab... Translated from the
Persian... by Edward G. Browne. Oambridye, 1893. 8°.

BCtrfty Sarat Chandi'a. A few Biliari folkloi^ parallels. The
Singing games of Bihar. The Identity between a Panjabi
and a Bengali accumulation di'oll. Note on a new type of
Indian folktales, etc. Bombay. 1903. 8**.

From the Journal of tlve Anthropological Society of Bon\hay,
An ancient Indian dt^ma of the tenth century A.I).

[Oalmtta, 1903.] 8°.

Bihari life in Bihari nui-sery rhymes.

[Calcutta, 1903.] **.

-. Bihari life iu Bihari riddles. [Bombay, 1905.] 8^.
From the Journal of the Anthrcpologtcal Society of Bombay,

Further notes on Rain-compelling and Rain -stopping

Charms. [Bombay, 1905.] 8^.

From the Journal of the Avthropological Society of liombay.

mtra, Sarat ChHtidm. Note on Claj-eating as a racial charac-
teristic. [Bcmbay, 1905.] 8°.

From the Journal of the Anthropological Society of Bombay,
Note on the Egyptian origin of an incident in Indian

folktales. [Bambayy 1905.] 8°.

From- the Journal of the Anthropological Society of Bombay,

On the Bihari custom of placing expiations on the

orossways. ^Galcutta 1905.] 8*.

. Sun-worship in Bihar. [GcUcuttaj 1904.] 8°.

Presd. by the Author,

Muhammad B. al-Hasan B. IsfiBundiyar. An abridged transla-
tion of the History of Tabarist&n... based on the India Office
MS. compared with two MSS. in the British Museum, by
Edward G. Browne. London, 1905. 8®.

E. J. W, Gtbb Memorial, Vol. IL

Presd, by Mr. Bernard Quaritch,

Mnrrayf John. A Handbook for Travellers in India, Burma and
Ceylon... Fifth edition. London, 1905. 8®.

Navill, H. R. Sitapur. AUaJiabad, 1905. 8^

District Gazetteer's of the United Provinces of Agra and Oudh,
Vol. XL.

Presd, by the Oovemment of India, Home Department.

Nobel Foundation. Code of statutes, sstochholm, 1901. 8^

Presd. by Knngl. VetenskapS'Akademie.

RapSOIlt £. J. Indian coins and seals. Pt. YI.
[London, 1905.] 8°.

From the Joni-nal of the Royal Asiatic Society, October 1905.

On the alphabet of the Kharo^the documents.

Paris, 1905. 8°.

EaUrait du tome I des Actes du XlVe Congris International
des Onentalistes,

Presd by the Author.

Railliay» W. Decomposition of water by radium.
Upsala, Stockholm. 1905. 8*

Meddelanden fran K, Vetenskapsakademiens Nobelinstitut Band J.,
No.l.

Presd. by the Academy.

Batbgen, FHedrich. The Pi*eservation of Antiquities... Ti-ftus-
lated...from the German, etc, Camhridgej 1905. 8^.

Bawlinson, George. The Sixth Great Oriental Monarchy or the
Geography, History, and Antiquities of Parthia, etc.
London, 1873. 8^

Religious Systkms of the World. A contnbution to the study
of compai^tive Religion. A collection of addi^esses, etc,
London, 1905. 8°

Seebohm, Frederic. The Tribal System in Wales... Second edi-
tion. London, 1904. 8®.

8keat, Walter. Fables and Folk-Tales fix>m an Eastern Forest.
Collected and translated by W. Skeat, etc.
Cambridge, 1901. &",

Smith, W. Robertson. Kinship and Marriage in Early Arabia...
New edition. With additional notes by the author and by
Professor I. Groldziher... Edited by Stanley A. Cook.
London, 1903. 8°.

Sottas, Jules. Histoire de la compagnie Royale des Indes orien-
tales 1664-1719. ...Ouvrage accompagne...d'un appendice de
technique navale. Paris, 1905. 8 .

8t6rlill^, Bev. R. A Grammar of the Arabic Language.
London, 1904. 8^

Strong, Richard P. The Clinical and Pathological significance
of Balantidium coli. Manila, 1904. 8^.

Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila, No, 26.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Suess, Eduard. The Face of the Earth. — Das Antlitz der Erde —
...Translated, etc. Oxford, 1904, etc. 4**.

Tonnant, George Bremner. Lux et Veritas, and other Sonnets.
New Raven, 1905. 8^

Yale University Prize Poem, 1906.

Presd. by the Yale TJniversity.

Thompson, Millett T. Alimentary Canal of the Mosquito.
Boston, 1905. 8^

From the Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History.
Vol. 32, No. 6.

Presd. by the Author.

Vedavyasa, m^jt^ll^ [The Vayupuranaip.... Edited by Pandits
of the Anandasrama Sabha.] Poona, 1905. 8°
Anandasrama Sanskrit Series, No. 49.

Vinogradoff, P. The Growth of the Manor. London, 1905. 8°.

Warren, WiUiam F. Problems still unsolved in Indo-Aryan
Cosmology. [New Haven,'] 1905. 8°.

From the Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol, 26,

Presd. by the Author.

Wilkeiii Br. O. A. Ueber das Haaropfer und einige andere
Tranergebranche bei den Volkem Indonesien's. 2 Heft.
Amsterdam, 1886, 87. 8*.

Separatahdruck von der " Bevue Coloniale Internationale.^*

WilkillSOn, B. J. Malay-English Dictionary.
8ingap(/re, 1901-03. 4°.

WitherSf John William. Enclid*s parallel Postulate : its nature,
validity, and place in geometrical systems.
Chicago, 1905. 8^

Presd, by the Yale University.

JOURNAL

OP THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

Ifew Series.
Vol. 1.— 1908.

Four neio Copper-PlcUe Charters of the Somavamit Kings of Koiala
(and KafaJca ?) . — By Ganqa Mohak Laskab, M.A,

These four ctartera, each consisting of tliree copper-plateB,
were sent a few months ago from the Pa^nft State in the Central
Provinces to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, and the task of deci*
phering them was entmsted to me. They form an addition to the
series of six charters of the Somavaifi^i Kings edited or re-edited
by Mr. Fleet in the Epigraphia Indica (Yolnme III, pages 323 to
359). Fonr of the published chai^ters were granted by Maha-
Bhayagapta I, one by Maha-S^iyagnpta and the last by Maha-
Bhayagapta II. Of the fonr new charters one belongs to the first
and the remaining three to the second of these kings. Thus we
now possess fiye land-grant charters of Maha-Bhayagupta I, four
of his son Maha-ffiyagupta and one of the latter's son Maha-Bhaya<
gupta II. A copper-plate charter granted by Punja, a feudatory
chief under Maha-Bhayagupta II, in the 13th year of the latter*8
reign, has been edited by Dr. Kielhom in Epi. Indica, Volume IV .
(page 254, &c.).

The language and forms of expressions of the new charters
are much the same with those employed in the old ones. The
characters in which they are inscribed are the same. Thdy do not
bring out any new important facts about the history or the identifica-
tion of the g^rantors, except the names of the yillages granted and
a few other minor details scarcely worthy of notice. The his-
torical and palaeographical remarks made by Mr. Fleet on the
old records apply equally to the new ones. Yet a few words may
not be unnecessary to serye as an introduction to the account of the
newly-discoyered copper-plates giyen in the following pages.

Mr. Fleet calls his charters as A, B, Q, D, E and F ; the. new
ones may be named G, &, I and J respectiyely. These ten
charters, together with the one granted by Punja, are the
only records that we possess of this dynasty. They disclose

2 Oharters of the SomavamSi Kings, [January, 1905«

to TIB the names of fonr -successive kings, viz., (1) S'ivagnpta,
(2) Maha-Bliavagnpta I dlids Janamejaya, (3) Maha-S'iya-
gapta dUas Yayati, and (4) Maha-Bhavagnpta II alias Bliima<
ratha. Each of the fiwt three was the father of his snccessor.
They call themselves as members of the Somaknla (Itmar race)
and as the * lords of the three Kalingas.' They grant lands
in the different districts of the Ko^la country. In the grants
B, C and D, issued in the thirty-first year of his reign, Maha-
Bhavagupta is referred to by the title Ko^alendra (lord of KoSala).
Charter J is said to have been written by a clerk of the office of the
* minister for peace and war ' of the Ko^la country. These facts
prove beyond doubt that these kings ruled over the Ko^ala country,
or at least a part of it. About five of the copper-plate charters were
found in the Native State of Pa^na in the Central Provinces, and
the remaining five in the neighbourhood of Kataka (or Cuttuk).
The charters of Maha-ffivagupta and his son are issued from
Yinitapura and Yayatinagara, towns or a town on the Mahanadi
river. The village granted by the charter E is said to be situated
in Dakfi^a-Tosala* which may be a mistake for Dak^i^a^
Ko^la or Southern Ko^la. These facts show that it was Dak-
ffhina-Koi^la (or southern Ko^ala), identifiable with the south-
eastern parts of the Central Provinces, which was included in
.the kingdom of these kings.

Mr. Fleet thinks that these kings ruled over Orissa also and
had their capital at Ka^ak (Cuttack), and that both Viaitapura and
Yaygtinagara, the issuing places of the charters of Maha-S^vagupta
.and his son, were identical with it. His view is . based upon the
word " Vijaya-kataka," which is applied to the issuing places of
Maha-Bhavagupta I's charters. He considers it to be a proper
name denoting the modem town Cuttuk. The collocation of words
in which the term occurs would suggest another meaning. The ex-
pressions ^i^«i^Ki4i(\iiv^4iift fr^rcrwni and ^rn^r^iowTf^if-

* The word Tosali as the name of some ooantry in or nonr Orissa is as
>old at least as the third century B.C. The two separate edicts of Asoka
fonnd in the version of Dhaali in Orissa are addressed to the officials at
Tosali. The expressions " Ubhaya Tosalyiqi " (i.e., in both divisions of
Toflttli) and " Dak9i9a Tosalyiiqi Franga (doubtful) vi^nye " (i.0., in the Fri&ga
vifaya or district in Southern Tosali) occur in an old copper-plate grant found
in acme Native State in Orissa. It is written in the old Gupta characters
and cannot be of a date later than the 5th Century A.D. It is clear from the
above tKat Tosali was a country very near to, if not comprised in, the posses-
■iona of the Somavaqifi kings nnder notice. So we cannot be free from doubt
when we take Dak^i^n Tosalii as a mistake for Dnk^ina Eo^ala (Southern
Kosala). Only two small fragments of the plate mentioned above were found.
The inscription was very sadly damaged. The name of any king could
not be found. The few words that could be satisfactorily deciphered convinced
me that it was certainly a land-grant charter. A senl was received with the
above fragments. It was circular in shape and had a diameter of two-and-a-
half inches. One face of it 'contained in its upper half a female fignre, seated
on a lotus, with two elephants (one on each side) having their trunks up-
lifted over her head. This emblem is similar to that found on the seals of
the Somavaiiili kings under notice. There was a line of writing below the
emblenii but it was too much damaged to be dicipliered.

Vol. I, No. 1.] Ohariers of the Somavamii Kings, 3

4t^llft Pimw^fEl^ wonld, as they stand, mean ' from the glorious
camps of victory pitched at Murasima and jrama, respectively/
or " from the camps of victory of the glonous king ( ^it^nft )
who was residing at Murasima and Arama, respectively." Mr.
M. M. Chakravarti, who assigns the charters to the 12th century
leather than to the 11th as done by Mi\ Fleet, objects to Mr. Fleet's
interpretation of the term and considers that these kings conld
not rule in Orissa, for at that date kings of the Grangavaxp^
dynasty were masters of that province.

The title Tri-Kalingadhipati (lord of the three Kalingas) used
by these kings requires a little consideration. The word Tri-
Kalioga is a vague term to us. But it seems to be sure that it
included the whole of Kalibga with at least a few districts in the
neighbourhood. Now Kalinga was a strip of country between the
sea-coast and the Eastern Ghats. It extended to about 'Vizaga-
patam in the south. Its northern limit is said in the Mahabharata
to be the river Vaitarani (mod. Bytemi), which river and the
Kalihga people the Pan<}avas ai^e described to have reached at the
same time on their southward progress from Bengal in the course
of pilgrimage. According to this account, Kalinga would includa
a considerable portion of Orissa. But the limits of countries fluctu-
ated from time to time and there is no certainty that the same
river was the northern boundary of Kalinga also at the time of
the inscriptions under notice. Be that as it may, we find in these
inscriptions some points which would indicate that Koiala was
included in the countries known as Tri-Kali6ga (or the three
Kaliogas). The grantors of these charters have the title Tri-
Kalihgadhipati attached to their names, but not the title Ko^alendra
(lord of Koiala), although they were undoubtedly the masters of
the Ko^la country. Indeed, by the latter title Maha-Bhavagupta I
is referred to in charters B, C and D. But this title is not used
along with their names nor is it joined to the title Tri>KaliAga-
dhipati, which is almost invariably prefixed to their names.
This seems to show that the title Tri-Kalifigadhipati was thought
sufficient by these kings to imply their possession of Ko^ala also.
It is therefore probable that Ko^ala, {i.e., Southern Kolala) was
included in Tri-Kalinga (three Kaliiigas). Thus we see that they
possessed at least a part of Tri-Kalinga and therefoi^e the title
Ti*i-Kalingadhipati was not altogether an honoHfic one as thought
by Mr. M. M. Chakravai'ti. I do not mean to say, however, that
the whole of Tii-Kalinga was under their rule. That these kings
held sway over what is now called the Patna State is certain. Two
of the visayas or districts ai^ called Telatatfa and Ongatata (see
Table). These names imply that they were on the banks of the
Tela (Mod. Tel) and the Ong^ (Mod. Ong) river. These rivers
flow across the Patna State into the Mahanadi and are found on the
maps. Hence the Pafna State or a considerable part of it formed
pax*t of their kingdom.

If Mr. Fleet's identification of Vinltapura and Yayfitinagara
with the to^vn of Ka^ak (Cuttuk) be correct, we may notice this
fact. The issuing places of Maha-Bhavagupta I's chartei's are

4 Oharters of the SomavamSi Kings, [January, 1905.

.described as f^^K^ W9^ \ The charters granted in the 8th and 9th
years of his son Mahfi-S'ivagupta (Yayati) are issned from Vinita-
pnra ; while the charters granted in the 24th and the 28th years
of the latter's reign and the one granted by his son are issued
from Yayatinagara. Taking Mr. Fleet's view to be correct, we
may say that Maha-S^ivagnpta, who was otherwise called Yayati,
changed the name of his capital and called it after his own name
as Yayatinagara Q city of Yayati '), and his son also continued the
new name.

No grants of S^ivagupta, the first king, has come down to us.
He is not called Trikaliibgadhipati, nor is the word Maha (the
Great) prefixed to his name. This shows that the powers and

Possessions of this dynasty were increased by Maha-Bhavagupta I.
[is son Maha-S'iyagupta is said in one of the eulogistic verses
to have defeated Ajapala (a king probably) in battle and to have
captured thirty- two big elephants. From the third plate of
Charter H, which is the worst executed of the charters, it ap-
pears that he defeated the Gedts and devastated their country
(Pahala).

. I have made a tabular abstract of the whole series of ten
charters. This will facilitate their comparative study and will
save the trouble of going through the records themselves. The
abstract is appended with this paper.

Some Details jxym/mon to the new Oharters (Q, H, I, and J),

As already stated, they were found somewhere in the Native
State of Patna attached to the Sambalpur district in the Central
Provinces. Each chai*ter consists of three plates strung together
by a thick ring, the ends of which are joined in a circu-
lar seal. The seal bears in relief a seated female figure with
two elephants with uplifted trunks. Other details of the seals
cannot be well distinguished owing to the rust that has aooum-
culated upon them. The inscriptions are on both sides
of the middle plate and on the inner sides of the first and the
third plate. In J, the inscription extends to the outer side of
the third plate. The characters employed are Nagari of the north-
em type and belong to that particular variety of it to which the
name of Kufila has come to be applied. The engraving is usually
deep and legible ; the letters do not usually show through on the
opposite sides of the plates. The language employed in these re-
cords is Sanskrit ; and except for the benedictive, imprecatory and
eulogistic verses, they are generally in prose throughout. A point
of orthography common to all these records is the use of v for b,

•

O, — PapnA OoppeT'Plate Grant of the 6th year of MahdrBhava-

gupta^s reign.

The plates, the ring and the seal together weigh 2 seers and
12^ chhataks (i.e., a little more than 5^ lbs.). Bach of the plates
meaAures about 7|'^ by 5". The ring is about half an inch in

Vol. I, No. 1.1 Ohariera of the Soniavatnsi King^. ^

IN. 8.-]
thioknesB and 4/' in diameter. The seal is If in diameter. In relief
on a oountersonk surface it shows a seated female figure, perhaps
of the goddess Lak^mi, with two elephants. The plates are al-
most smooth ; only the middle one and a side of another have their
ends raised into rims to protect the writing. The inscription,
which is deep, is in a state of perfect preservation. Although the
engraving is deep, the letters do not show through on the reverse
sides of the plate^ as the latter are substantial. The characters
are ' Kutila.* They include forms of decimal figures for 6, 13 and
5 in lines 42, 43 and 46 respectively.

The avagrdha does not occur in this record. Final forms oc-
cur of ^ in Kaiakat (line 1), vaset (line 24), dadyat (line 26),
Samvat (line 42) ; and of n in adin and sarvvHn (line 7), in etan
ajid j>&rthivendrSn (line 37). The language is Sanskrit, and except
for &B benedictive and imprecatory verses fi-om lines 20 to 40,
ttie whole record is in prose. The rules of Sandhi are neglected
in several places. There are several spelling mistakes which must

have been due to the Kayastha (or clerk), e.g., KW^ , nK%T , the

use of u for u and several others. The average size of the letters is
about f of an inch. V is used for b throughout. B is used for
I in pravarggayanti in line 27.

This charter is the second of the two (A and G) issued in the
6th year of Maha-Bhavagupta's reign. In lines 16 and 17, the

village granted is said to have been made revenue-free ( Jf^ftW^ ) ;
yet in the concluding two lines a nominal revenue of five silver
coins a year seems to be fixed as the king's share. The charter is
moreover called in line 45 to be a revenue-charter (Kara-S^Ssanam).
Charter. A also conveys lands subject to a similar yearly payment.
In lines 19 and 20, we find the expression ^^ prattvarfa-ddtavya-'
rUpyakH§(apalakaradSnafn vtniscitya*

Abstract of the Contents of G*

From the victorious camp located at Murasima [or from the
victorious (city of) Kataka] —

[11. 1-4] The most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahesvara,
the Paramabhattaraka, the Maharajadhiraja, the ornament of the
Somakula, the lord of the three Kalingas, the Parame^vara, the
glorious Maha-Bhavagupta-rajadeva, who meditates on the feet of
the Paramabhattaraka, the Maharajadhiraja, the Parame^ara, the
glorious

[D. 4-6] S^ivaguptadeva, [" being in residence at Murasima,'*
(this is to be put here if the interpretation of thedescnption of the place
of issue given above in the 1st line of the Abstract be objected to)],
being in good health and having done worship to the Brahmans of
the Pteitala village in the Pota district (vi^aya),

[IL 5-8] issues this command to the cultivators and other in-
habitants of the village as well as to all the dependents of the king who
may be living from time to time in that district, such as the Sam4-
hattps, &c.

6 Charters of the SomavamSl Kings. [January, 1905.

[U. 8-18] "Be it known to you that for the increase of the reli-
gious merit and glory of our (^^^ ifTlfrPnits ) godly parents as well as of

our own selves, this village, — with everything included within its four
boundaries, with its hidden treasures and deposits, with the freedom
from all lets and hindrances, with the power to receive all extra cesses,
with its ditches and deserts, with the exemption from the entrance
into it by regular and irregular troops — is granted by us with liba-
tions of water, after being made revenue-free — to be enjoyed as
long as the moon, the stars, the sun and the earth endure,

[11. 11-14] to Bhattaputras (Sri) Ke^ava and (S'ri) Apya, sons
of Bhatta Daddi, belonging to the Kauiika gotra, with the pravaras
Audala, Devarata and Vi^vamitra, students of the Kanva S&hha^
immigi'ants fi'om Kommapira and inhabitants of Loisrga.

[LI. 17-18] Knowing this you should live in happiness, render-
ing unto them (the donees) the taxes, gold and other shares of their
enjoyments.

[LI. 18-40.] In these lines are contained the mandate to future
kings for the preservation of the grant and the usual imprecatory and
benedictive verses (for which see the translation of J.) . [LI. 40-46] .
This charter was written by Kayastha Koigho^a, son of Ballabha-
gho^a and a writer attached to the office of the Mahasandhivi-
grahin Malladatta, son of Dh^adatta, on the thirteenth tithi of
the bright fortnight of the month of K3rtika in the sixth year of the
victorious reign of Paramabhattaraka, Maharajadhiraja, the
Parame^vara, the glorious Janamejayadeva. Or (dated) in figures,
Saipvat 6, Kartika sudi 13. This i*evenue-charter is granted after
the fixing of the yearly revenue as five silver coins.

/f. — PUfnH CoppeT'Flate Orant of the 8th year of (YaySti) Mahd-

Stva^uptd's reign.

The weight of the plates, the ring and the seal together is 3
seers and 6 chhataks (or about 7 lbs). Each of the plates measures
8" by 5|." The ring is 4^" in diameter. The usual device on
the seal is visible. The interiors of the letters show marks of the
working of the engraver's tools. The engraving is deep ; but it
has been done with extreme hsbste and carelessness, so that many
letters and sometimes whole .words have been omitted thix)ugh
mistake. The i^ecord is full of spelling mistakes and other gross
inaccm^acies. The mateiial is veiy soft ; so that the edges of the
engraved lines have been pi^ssed up considerably above the sur-
face of the plates. For these reasons it has not been possible to
i^ad the i*ecord completely and in certain parte, especially towards
the end, the meaning has I'emained obscure. The characters include
decimal figui-es for 8 and 13 in lines 39 and 40 respectively. The

avagraha occui-s in t|i(tsfMVi|% in line 13.

Abstract.

It is issued from Vinitapui'a* The place of issue is mentioned
in the words (Vinitapurat Kafakat), which incline one to Mr. Fleet's

Vol. I, No. 1.] Charters of the SomavamSi Kings. 7

view abont the identification of Vinltpura with Cuttak ; for the
word * Katakat ' looks as if it were in apposition with Vinitapnra.
The woi'ds may, under this view, be translated as " fix)ra Vinitpni'a,
which is Kataka."

This inscription puri>ort8 to (Tonvey lands on the northern pai't
of the DaJSnariya river (or the river of the Da^arna country),
belon^ng to the village Talakajja in Sanula (or Sanfla) Visaya
(district) in the Kolala country — to a Brahmana, named Kamadeva,
grandson of Har^a and son of Nara«iipha, an immigi*ant fixjm
Maddhila and a resident of .Talajad^a in Ko^ala, having the prava-
ras Gotrapa, Kasyapa, Vatsa and Xaidhmva, and a student of the
Madhyandina SdkM of the Vajasaneya (Saqfihitd).

Lines 15-36 contain the usual injunction to futui'e kings with
the benedictive and imprecatory verses about the merits of the pre-
servation and the demerits of the confiscation of granted lands.

Lines 36-41 tell us that it was written by Uccavanaga (or
Utsavanaga ? ), the JJtthitasani ( ? ), son of Samamphenallava ( ? ),
by the command of the ranaka Dharadatta, the Maha-Sandhivigra-
hin, in the 8th year of the victorious reign of Yayatideva, and
that it was engraved by Vijnani M&dhava, son of Vasu.

Lines 40-42 contain a verse setting forth the transitoriness of
life and its pleasures and enjoining the preservation of the good
works of others. The next lines are very obscui^. They speak of
a powerful Kosala king of the Somavaipla (referring probably to

Maha-S^ivagupta himself) who defeated probably the Cedis (^iJVvTVr

may be a mistake for ^Jl^fif ). The last two words of the recoixl

speak of the devastation of some place, pix)bably Dffhnhi or the

Ced'i country (*'¥^V f^9l4IV4K "made Dahana or Dahala

uninhabited"). The same king probably was the author of tKe
devastation.

/. — Pd(na Capper-Plate Grant of the 24th year of YaySti-Mahd-

Sivngapta^s reign.

Each of the plates measures 8^" by 6|". The ring is 5|" in
diameter. The diameter of the seal is 2j". It contains the usual
female figui^e. The weight of the plates, the ring and the seal
together is 4 spcrs and 5 chataks (or nearly 91!)). The chai^acters
includes decimal figures for 24 and 5 in line 62. The virdma occurs

in ^TKHf (1. 12), nvrc| and W^rcnf in line 13, and in IVHT^hr in line
24. It is mistakenly omitted in ^Ifni and ^pT^f ^^ \ineH 56 and 57
respectively. Final forms occur of n in ^JWI^Tif (1. 18) ^3[TW, ^WTW
(1. 19) and IffHjnr (20) ; and of m (ir) with a virama below*
in ^IVIiK^H in the last line. The avagraha occui's wrongly in
ftWTSWTT^ in line 19 and correctly in S^|^^sfHn% in line 38.
The average size of the letters is } of an inch. As for the ortho-
graphy, we may notice the use of A (v) for anusvUra in ^QftvuAl

8 Charters of the BomavamH Kings. [January, 1905.

in line 61 and the nse of n {^) for anu9v^ra in iflif in line 9. F is
nsed for h as osaal in these records.

The wordings of the present record are almost identical with
those of J. Both the donor and the donee are the same persons
with those in charter J. Both these charters were issned from the
same place Yavatinagara. The onlj difPerence lies in (1) the
names of the villages granted, (2) the names of the writers and
engravers and (3) in the dates. The present charter does not con-
tain the verse in praise of the Sandhivigrahin (who is however a
different person here) which is fonnd in J toward the close.

This charter purports to convey the (lines 25-26) village of
Pela^ell in the Telatafta vt^aya in the Kosala country to Bhatfa*
Mahodadhi.

[LI. 69-64]. — " This charter was written by the Kdyastha
Tathagata, a writer belonging to the office of the Mahasandhi*
vigrahin, the BUndka Dhftradatta, on the fifth ttthi of the bright
fortnight of the month of Aj^adha in the twenty-fourth year of the

prosperous and victorious reign of the glorious Yayatideva."

It was engraved by Vtjndni Vasuka.

For the translation of this record, reference is made to the
translation of J, with which it is identical in almost all parts.

J. — PStnd GoppeT'Plate Grant of the 28th year of TaySti'MahU"

Stvagupta^B reign.

Each plate measures 9J" by 7." The ring is slightv above J"
in thickness and is 4|" in diameter. The diameter of the seal is
2\." It contains the usual female figure, etc. The weight of the
the whole is 4 seers and 5 chataks (or about 9 lbs). The
inscription extends to a portion of the outer side of the third
plate. The average size of the letters is about f ". The engraving
is good and fairly deep ; but the plates being substantial the letters
do not show through on the reverse sides, except very slightly on
the outer side of the first plate. Final forms occur of n (i|) in

^\mm (line 14), sj^^^TT'l, fWHiT,— ^Cipi[(line 22), ^f^HjfiT (line 24),
T^Wt^ (line 63) and-^Jp[ (line 64) and of ( ir) m in Vf^fVUH, (lui© '5),
in which last instance the vtrilma is put below it.

The final form of t (if) is found in the following ligatures : —
ift (line 12), rfm (in line 18), m (in line 24), ig in (line 73). The
vir/lma occurs in WTO^ (112) ; while in several cases it has been

omitted through mistake: e.g., in MT<fhl (^^® •^2)» ''WlJ, fTO^
(line 13) and fl[*^ (line 14). The avagraha occurs incorrectly in
ftniTWnn^ and correctly in ^r^Sfrf^fl(flf^ (line 73). As regards
the orthography, we may notice that IfpJ is written for IfHI, and

f^f^H for 1^^fl[1l I The use of v for h is usual.

As this recoi-d is the longest of the four charters under notice,
I give its full translation, to which reference is made for the mean-
ing of the rest.

Vol. I, No. l.J Charter'^ of the SouMCiunsi Kings, 9

[-V. 5.]

Full Translation of J.

EL. 13] Om Hail! From that glorious town of Yay&tinagara,^-
L. 1-4] — where the enjoyment of love is being continnallj
intensified and still more intensified by the close embraces (of
lovers), by which fatigae is removed, in which hissing sound often
appears and in which hairs often stand on their ends, although
such enjoyment suffers interruptions as the ardent young couple
show their skill in the various pi'ocesses of conjugal enjoyment
with their eyes dilated (with excitement) and with their minds
subdued and fascinated by amorous thoughts ;

[LI. 4-7.]— where, even in the midst of quaiTels arising from
jealousy, lovers, beaten by lotuses fi*om the ears of women who
nave cast the beauty of the celestial damsels into shade by the
greatness of their endless and peculiar charms, have all their men-
tal anguishes roused to action by the enti^nce of the sharp arrows
of Cupid, with their hairs standing on the ends (lit. sprouting up)
on account of the sprinkling of the di'ops of sweat (from the persons
of the objects of their love) ;

[LI. 7-11.] — where, at the tops of houses beautifully white-
washed, the places of assignation of unchaste women and their
pearl ornaments were whitened by the clusters of rays issuing from
the club-like tusks of very lofty elephants — the rays which rendered
the autumn moon useless in the matter of dispelling darkness ;

[Lines 11-13] (and) where the fatigue of the women enjoying
conjugal caresses with ardent attachment is removed by the breezes
8urchai*ged with the particles of water sent up by the breaking and
swelling of the high waves of the Mahanadi.

[Lines 13-16] There was on the earth a beautiful king named
Janamejaya, who had a pure and mild appearance and a lotus-like
face, who had subjugated by the force of his arms all his enemies,
and whose spotless fame, well known throughout the three worlds,
covered the eight quarters like a canopy.

[Lines 16-18] From him sprang King Yay&ti, whose glory was
sung in all the thi'ee worlds, who defeated his enemies with con-
tempt as it were, and whose sword had its sharp edge made rugged
with the pearls coming out of the foi^eheads of the elephants rent
asunder by it ;

[LI. 18-21.] whose sword rent asunder with its point the
foreheads of a large number of elephants, fi'om whicj^ heaps of pearls
came out and adoi'ned the bosom of the damsel of the eai'th in every
battle ; the dusts of whose lotus-like feet, as pure as the rays of the
gems in the head-dresses of kings constantly bowing down at his
doors, assumed, through equality, the lustre of these (i.e. the gems) ;

[LI. 21-24.] who, having defeated Ajapala in battle, aston-
ished the heavenly damsels by capturing alive with a smiling
face, thirty-two big elephants, named Kslmadeva, etc., Mrhose riders
had been killed, — elephants who had sharp and huge tusks
and whose temples were discharging ichor and therefore abounded
with flocks of greedy bees getting intoxicated (by draughts of the
fragrant fluid).

10 Charters of. the Somavamii Kings, [January, 1905 ^

[LI. 26-29.] The most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahe-
4 vara, the Paramabhattaraka, the Maharajadhirapja, the Parame-
svara, the ornament of the Somakula, the loi*d of the three Kalingas,
the glorious Maha-S'ivagupta-raja-deva, who meditates on the feet of

[LI. 24-27] the most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahesvara,
the Pai-amabhattaraka, the Maharajadhiraja, the Parame^vara, the
ornament of the Somakula, the lord of the three Kalingas, the
glorious Maha-Bhavaguptarajadeva,

[LI. 29-83] being in good health and having done worship to the
Bi-ahmans of the distnct at the village of Lluttaruma of Telatatta
Visaya or district in San^avati, issues a command to all the de-
pendants of the king such as the savidhatrs (^ur^fn),* the sanni-

dhcitrs (^ftpfni). the Niyukt&dhikHnkds {^(^wfH^ii^^), the Dantfa-

p&sikas {^^R^fwu^), the Pi^unas (f^n^), the Vetrikas (%f^), the

Avarodhajanas (W^^ftWff )? the Banakas (K^^), the BAjahallahhas

(^WW^H) (fee. (in the following words) : —

[Lines 33-43]. *' Be it known to you that for the enhance-
ment of the religious merit and glory of ourselves and our parents,
this village, extending to its foui* boundaries — with its hidden trea-
sures* and deposits, with the right to tines for the ten offences, with
the freedom fi'om all lets and hindrances, with the right to mango-
trees and honey-combs, with its ditches and ban*en lands, with
its lands and waters, with the privilege that it shall not be entered
into by the regular and iii'egular ti-oops — is, by a copper-plate
charter, granted by us as revenue-free, with libations of water,
to be- enjoyed as long as the moon, the stars, the snn and the earth
exist,

[Lines 37-40] to Bhatta Mahodadhi, son of Siddhesvara and
grand-son of Parame^vai-a, an inhabitant of Ntaradi in the Lavada
district (vimyo), an immigrant from Kasili in the Sravasti
Mawfala, a member of the Kausika gotra, with the pravaras Devarata,
Audala and Vi^vamitra and a student of the Gautama ia]dk(i-

[Lines 43-44]. Being aware of this, you should dwell in hap-
piness rendering unto him the rents and other shares of enjoyment
due to him."

* Vm^C — {Lit. those who colloctod). Prob. piirroyors or colleotura
of revenue. •

^f^pff^ — Tho.^e whose duty was to keep near. Prob. Usherors.
fil^WlfN^lfil^ ^''^^'^^^ ^^ oharge of the Appointment Department.
^lfm(f(^— Those whose daty was to pnnish the wrong-doers.
fin5PW— Spies.

9f^iV~^it. an officer who held a cane. Prob. Chamberlain.
^^0 ^ ^* l — Officers employed at the harem.
Improbably a title of high distinction,
r— Favourites of the king.

Vol. 1, No 1.] Charters of t/ie Soviavamsi Kings, 11

IN. 8.-]

This my grant should be preserved like their own grants by
f utore kings also, from a regard for religious laws and niy own
earnest I'equest.

L.46. Thus it is said in religious books : —

[Lines 48-49]. Land has been given by many kings com-
mencing with Sagara ; whoever at any time possesses the earth,
to him at that time the rewtu-d accrues.

Lines 49-50]. "The giver of land enjoys happiness in heaven
for 60,000 years ; while both the contiscator and the person who
acquiesces in so doing go to hell.

[Lines 51-52] . Gold is the first ofFspi-ing of fire ; the earth is
the daughter of Vi^nu ; and the cows are bom of the sun." He w^ho
gives gold and cows and lands, by him, by that act, are given all
the three worlds.

[Lines 52-54]. Fathers (in the world of the dead) clap their
hands upon their arms, and grand-fathers leap from joy, saying,
'* A giver of land has been bom in our family ; he shall become
our deliverer."

[Lines 54-55]. Both the giver and the receiver of land are
doers of meritorious works and will certainly go to heaven.

[Lines 55-56]. A confiscator of (gifted) lands is not purified
even by the excavation of a thousand of tanks, by the pei-formance
of a hundred of vQjapeya sacrifices and by the gift of a cix)re o*
cows.

[Lines 56-57]. He who steals a piece of gold or a cow or even
half-a-finger s breadth of land is consigned to hell till the destruc-
tion of the world.

[Lines 57-59]. That ignoi^ant fool who confiscates or causes
the confiscation of lands is, being tightly bound in the fettera of
Varuna, reborn of lower animals.

[Lines 59-60]. He who confiscates lands given by himself or
others becomes a worm in the ordure and stinks there with his
ancestors.

[Lines 61-62]. The sun, Varuna, Vifuu, Brahma, Soma, the
god of fire and the great god S'ulapaai welcome the giver of land
(as he goes to heaven).

[Lines 62-63]. Ramabhadi-a again and again requests all the
future kings, saying, " This biidge of religion is common to all
men ; it is to be observed by you in all times."

[Lines 64-66]. Thinking that wealtli as well as human life
are as unstable as a drop of water on the leaf of a lotus and under-
standing all that has been said above, men should not destix)y the
good works of othei's.

[Lines 66-69]. He who surpassed the preceptoi^ of the kings
of the gods and of the demons (i.e., Vfhaspati and S'ukracarya) in
wisdom and pride, who bore with pei-f ect ease the heavy bui-den of
the state affaii-s imposed by the king and who had both policy and
prowess as his dear and constant friends, — that fortunate person
of the name of (S'ri) Singhadatta (Siiphadatta) was the holder of
the post of " the minister of peace and war." (V^f'llim^)

[Lines 69-71]. This charter, wi-itten by Kayastha Suryasena

l2 Oharters of the Somavamdi Kings, [January, 1905.

belonging to the office of (or a servant of) the ' minister of peace
and war of the Kosala country, is to last as long as the moon,
the sun and the stara endure.

[Lines 71-74] . On the fifth ttthi in the bright fortnight of the
month of Bhadrapada in the 28th year of the victorious reign of
the most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahe^vara, the Maha-
rajadhir&ja, the Parame^vara, the ornament of the Somakula
(lunar race), the lord of the three Kalipgas, the glorious Yayati-
deva. Or, in figures, Saqivat 28, Sudi 5.

[Lines 74-75]. Engraved by Vtnali (Vijnanl) Madhumathana.

[Transoriptiont off all the following cbarten are from the original platea ]

G.
First Plate.

[1] ^ ^if% I ^fewnTrnftrensft^Rcft f^ijiniCTri^ ir:[-
[2] |R7i^TnTnTfw:T«iini^'W^f«^^ ^iL[-

[4] fir qi3im*n*<»w^^i[T«r^^: I* fw^^ I* TftafTftiro[-

[7] fvp^^ ^kfvlix^KtH9i^xT^^w^v^^ ^ssrf^ ^i«iin?>q^[-

[9] nftf^: ^ftrftf: ^^wnnfqqf^: ^T M ft^ iqi< l^qf{-
[10] fnar: ^Brmww: ^i«it[^JiR:- ^ftf^rftntfi^Heii^ii^gQ-

N,B. — The letters aiid aigns onclosod within brackets [ ] ste sapplied bj
me.

1 Bead {%. * This mark of punctuation is unnecessary.
& Read VKl9^, ^ l^his mark of punctuation is nnneoessary.
^ ^^^ VTqrtnr . ^ Read if^. "7 Read Jf9, ^ Read ig.

Vol. I, No. 1.] Oharters of the SoinavainH Kings. 13

[N. S.-]

[11] ^ftrmiPBr'Ti: %Tf%ipii^>nHit T^^^^^m^ftPBifi^^nr^f-]
[12] ciiirt ^i^igmiaiunft^ t ^ifWfrcftf^^ihn^t ^f [-]

[18] WNlW^l^it Vf1STr^[-]

Second Plate (a).

[14] %ipi^^iJiwiTf] Hf^rfl^^awiTf] frftwmTO*i^:[-]

[16] frTTT^^^ii^iqSrqQv^'T^m^MHt^n^*' ^i?t^^in^T[-]

[16] fR^aftnwi'Ri *^^nct«ftrei% ^ w ?i w5|TniF?tw[-]

[17] w ufiiMift^r f<iraiw ^r^tnfKl*^WNi*ifiri<8iifiE[-]

[18] VI] qi vfj^TW^J • sS'T irf^Tl^^firfir i wftfHV qjl[-]

[19] fflfwWflinwftwT >i*!^^:^T^w^fg?cNw fr[-]
[20] ^f^fwigm^r^tm artntfhB[*] n^ww i

Here follow the miaal yeraes, being thirteen in ftll. Twelve of these
ooour in Plate A {$ee Bpi. Ind. Ill, p. 348), and for the remaining one, see

traneoription of Plate J, lines 56-57, Qfif fto. The last of these Terses end
in the words ^hf W: ftlfh^ I

Third Plate. [11. 36-46.]

[40] ^PNNt ftwrhJiT if!f iR^Hf ncv»iTTi:i^Tftf^nnR:ilw[-J
[41] i: ^*N^[iN^^^ ft«rinciw ^f«nn^* ^ »• VTf*[-J
[42] v»n^rftraii^pnfhiirt 'nrn^! ww^*" < vrNrv 9fi[

[48] t,^ ftiftl^fif?^ W^ »?Tl^f5^ftllFT^«TW^'ftW??r[-]

[44] ffB?nrfOT:apiri'rwv>«wt« wigwNiB^'r i ^«t^[-]
[46] y tinr nxm^ v?:ii wurtt^ fn^^j <iimwfa<t
[46] ^^' inmri

1 Bead ^. > Bead ||. > Read ^ * Bead jf. ( Bead jf.
• Rend nr. 7 Kead ft. 8 Read ^*^7{^. • This mark of punctua-
tion is nnnooessary. 10 Read ^^,

14} Charters of the SomavatpH Kings. [January, 1905.

H* .

First Plate.

[1] *# ^rftcf I ^tftf«r^*^Tc[ '«2r?iiTc(in:r»?]i?i^*^qi:wf[-]
[2] fT^«fiTTKT»nftn[T«r^^TTH^innnr«J^«n[^T]^«iT^ I

[6] ^\i. \ ui i^^fN^TcTiifiR ^5:¥ft^^*r^f^"

[7] ■ w^J KiHI^iij^bfj ^ ftir^irs

[10] ^«^«wr^^T«rnr i ^fNi^r^wre i Tw^$ 'r[-]
[11] ?^T5erw [frftf^nnj] Tj^'ii^r^iJiwsfcrnc^raRf^feT^i?-

[12] mtf ?TTmfir^i:T?f!^iBf5iniT«ft5firo5^ ?n«rtira^TT[-]
[18] w^^m ^f«ii«ft^2r icwwJi«r ^^Tft^J?Tn^RfTT^[-]

* This record is quite full of mistakes and omissions. The sliort u is
almost throughout expressed by the long one. In the footnotes only the
most salient mistakes are corrected.

1 We have both the plain symbol as well as the letter for ^.
% Read ft". » Bead w for q. ♦ Bead ^, h Read IT I
^ Bead %, ^ Bead %, 8 short n for long u.

* Bead fi(. ^^ Bead short u for long a. H Bend short u for long u.
IS Bead K. ^' Omit the visarqa, 1^ This sign of punctuation is

unnecessary. 1* '*5^'' These two letters are doubtful, and may also be
read ^f^, i|f^. ^^ Read ^ | i*! Should probably be corrected to j^

18 Omit the sign for long a . Probably the next word should be ^1^9.

19 Should be ^ | tlji | lHmfHn> | ^ Read f^. <1 Bead ^.
MBead f|(.

Vol. I, No. 1.1 Oharters of the Somavam.4t Ktnas. 16

Second Plate (a).

[14] HhrHwrift* ^^:^ H^5 5^ nrfif^^^jfWft i nrff-

[16] ^Tjqr^^ I ?T^Ttr>^ ^w^

Here ocoar the same thirteen verties as are foand on Plates G and nre
referred to after 1. 20 of the transoripts of G. Lines 16-86 are as foil of spel-
ling mistakes as the rest of this charter (H).

Second Plate (h). [11. 28-40.]

[85] irewn^[.]

[86] «g^xi^OTyfT?: ^*(^(<»^irH >i^ Mii^<i<'<in^gi^rd [-3

[87] ^«irf^ftT1PTf^^fa^??«l*« ifd^^iTI^ fSsriiRjai5'^^[-]
[38] ^^^r^% H^^JTfwcHT^ ^wr^ ^^"^^^T^^ -^if ^« ^

[39] Trm 5^ \^ f^fecrftrr ^t^wt^'t ^7TT'irf5«ftqfT^nir[-
[40] ^wtwi:^t?^i9f K%ir I ^2rf^^**eTT««Pl^^3^?r«DT^fr

Third Plate.
[41] ^TiqNTW^'T I ^^^f^^""! f^l^ft W^^n^^ WTTO%-

[42] ^t'C^Tq^^TTHnftftcf «i4i|5Htifd^'^ H^TUrftTf^Tt

[48] wft^wi: 'iPHif^ nrqfHfifirft^>tgT xf^i l ^♦j; ^l?: ^[-]

[44] Hj^mwrg: mwn^if Onrq^^iir i vi ^rt^

[46] irwrna^f^ f4ri(«r ^^Wxf'W^iTT^ft^Tt i ^wtt

[46] uftt^q^a^Ter^ ^VE^f^fmjfa^ iEjfi?^

1 Read ^; 9 Omit the r-sfcrokens. & Omit the r-strokens.

* Read ^. ^ Read ^. « Rend i^fd^. 7 Read ^gi. " Read ^R|

' Read ^ 10 This is donbtful, probably fp| is to be read. If so, the

oorreot form here would be ^fiV9rrafl|- | *l Probably ^H^^^f* fWUffr

Ifnitw is correct ; the word (^m^ means an artist.

16 Oharters of the Somavamsi Kings. [January, 1905.

[47] filT^fifra ^J^J r*l^^4inimMlH5f

[4i8] 5: I 2f9ITerQ% ft^ft^Tff^l I il^Jlill^flydlltfl

[50] ^^mc I

^.B.— -The transcription of the third plate of H is full of doubtful points
here and there : in some places, they are altogether obscure. This plate, or
rather the whole record, was very hastily and carelessly inscribed.

Chabteb I.
Plate I.

[1] ^1^ ^w% $??finnRpnwr'^5 ^BnflH^VB5«it *

[4j] ^» w^^- ^HH g^i^^ I *^^l5tMft5l*I^M[-]

[6] ??t»??Tinw^«'inf^5f«it%^hRf^t^«T iRirfir'i: .
[6] ^^q^w^en: I UTO^ ^ftrttf^erw^rcftaTTfir[-]
[7] m^fwwLO ^N«^»i^rT^t|ir^^fiprfcitt'n[-]

[9] g^fylii^^^ T^^^^^<^<i^iH^14t ? fr4^ [i] ^^^

[10] ^«^«r^ firipr ^wx^jRiBpf ^«rn5i^tg^w[-]

[11] ^'iiirraT^^KipTO^j 1 **iTTnfl?nf^lF*nFT^iTH![-]

[12] iwft^i:^f|[^KTc[ I qf^^werrafBKn^ifT'rt ^i?iinrt^:

[18] ftRTt iT^fj: I ^w\\ ^2iqT^«r;rr^T^ g ^'^'3nrirftj[-]

[14] cf5wriitf^cn«r^H i^^^y^Hfnf^cTlf^iif ? i xjm

2f.B.**The letters and signs enclosed within brackets [ ] are supplied
by me.

1 Read ^. > Metre : STardAlavikridita. ft Bead i^^gir. ^ Metre :

Upajati of Indravajrtl and Upendravajr^. ( Omit the sign of long a.
^ Metre: Ynsantatilaka.

-y- ^ -

iie'

•f- ^- •t.'- . Ai-w i „>

r^jKTS _.

:^r

[19]

[21]

[22]
[23]
[24]
[261
[26]

[27]
[28]

[29]

[80]

[81]

«i«4ifHtWM»^m|

[201 ^"^V

I Metre : YMantatilaka. * Metre : Sragdhara ' Ke»d

♦ Bead ^fflf^ltf «B in J. * Read ff^ |

18 Oharters of the Somavamil Kings. [Jannaiy, 1905

Plate II (6).

[82] er: i trgt^tirnr^^ ^iwto^j wrw^ncj ^^nwrwH

[88] ^! icrfirfiif«nr^fHfir%w. ^finnrNw ^^iia[-]

[84] ^^h^TTf^vftr^nniTur JuanRtn^ranfipi' '^T^f%iT[-]

[85] ^i% «ftifii^ftr^iidi*i ^ N ^i n<nii [*^ ]^ipg<tm<tnii

[86] TiTT^lpisrw^ Praf^itl<ii*« wj«n4<^l4y% ^-]

[8 7] ^^inmrgiGiR: ^w^s^cni^iii fwf^^*<*i^lMHlJu[-]

[88] ^ ?ncrrPrahT?iT«Ri ^na^nctsftf^ra^ cn«TOra[-]

[89] %'n'inflii<«r yfdmf^d iCfCR^nv ^f^RwnT[-]

[41] T^^w^ftr[i] wftfw ^jjrftMftrf^inRwfNT n^-
[4i2J ^ ( 4<t<^gOtii^ <a^Pfir<<<>i3vmi^Mi [i] ^rerrthf H*r[-]
[43] in^

N,B, — Here ooour the luiaal verses, for whioh see lines 47-66 of the teit
of J below.

Plate III.
[69] Mi*<!Hl^^i 'TWHfR:«IWTT5CT^rf^^:T«rq^c5lw[-l

[60] . i; ^ft'qpifira^ f^ftff rf^qffcf ^ftT^^rfif^tn^-]
[61] 4J*ii^Pt^^ crqgr^?i r4%t^rd^** » <<iV ^iHi^swuM ' ^g fir-
[62] ^ M^^ ^wrrmfi? wm^ ^^ ^nrr? 5ftr * f^J%<-]

fwf in[-]

[64] ^in^RH cHflrni^^ ft^ ft* ^g ^^nWid^t I

^ For ^^^nr ^^TW read ^^^lljl^^. There is a i
whioh may atuid for the e- sign. > Head ^vfM(f)| ^4811^
« Bead Aiirflr. iBead4^i|^|

6L I, No.' 1.] Charters of the SomavamH Ktngi, 19

First Plate.

iwt[-]
[5] ^**9i(^f449i[T]%iiif^fn^«eirH wrf^j ii^t^w[-]

[11] ^^nn^K^nfiiids I *^^i*i<\a^di:v**lP«i[-]

[12] 0'^^e(*i1^Mr^iiiTc[ [ I ] ^ n*i WH I wOifJT^fT'mt «rm[-]

[13]. ^: ftHRi" H^flfs n ^TWT^ ^^Tf&|i|IIil^ ( ^^^laR«|4|y[-]

[14j] ffrgrsgrirfftf^gr i* > ^iHi^r<^^M^^fiir^d^rMiil s I

[15] Tmr «r«i? if^ KTftcnT^'*fft:^?t'n^^»r^[^ «i^-]
[16] irarrei: ^T<i n f ridifi^r<fm^4is^4jn^nm^M^i^[ -]

[17] ^^ ^4.48^Hli « [ I ]<!W^[t]^ '^ll^^**«Jnd^^r<i^[*]llT(-]

0iPinAi[-]

I Represented by a aymbol. > Metre : I(|ilif)|ii1f^l|.
8 Metre : l^nj T l0(flJ1ffa. * Bead #. 6 Bead Mf^Hf^H <
^ Read ^ff^. "^ Upajiiti of Indravajri and UpendravajrA.
8 Bead ^ for ^ ^ Bead ifjlsir I ^^ Metre ! SardfLlavikridita.
11 Bead ^. IS Metre: Sarddlavikrldita. iS Bead in | 1« Read

20 Oharters of the Somavamst Kings, [Jantfary, 1905.

Second Plate (a).

[20] ^T]icwiR:ifinrftrckaiT[ * ]^TmnT^[: i ] «r5TnTn«mtiB^!

[21] er^nr cnfftiw^ ?^: n •m^mY^Tp!wraTg[«^?^5^^[-]
[22] (H^HMcii^ii f^^^pcffifwi^ *ftprOT^nKT^«ifm[-]

[23] 5^^^ f^fin* CTnn^RTT^ Tf^rerg^f^^j^W^iirv ^ [-]
[24] ^Tf«f«:^«iifNnij ii?:fiRr?TcTTrtT^*nif^« ii «tofwt[-]
[26] twi: TTi:^w?T^:^ ^rTnTnTftRj9nr^%'ffi:Bt»?|w[-]

[2Q] fcrm^r^i ^ n5ii?i rwfiT'ftHTTWrgH^TT^^T?Tf[-]

[27] urw^CT^ it'R^^POTHf r?:^5RPrT?:wTftiTi5inT[-]

[28] \$tT^ ^'^g5mftra^"f^^n!i^ift[M(d«n44^ inii«i(jH[-]

[29] ^«%: fn^ I ^^^^m tI^ctj f%irq^irffl^^wf

[30] qT% «r«;«i*n*i*ii^iiiT«n^«i «»?iTwrftniTJEpr^ [-]

[82] w^si^irwT^ « ae^Ta ^^ ^ ^ ><i ^^V ^*l! «jrTi[nTO[-]

[33] fef f^^cwn^ w?Tt T^wfin^r irrRs ^^ftu ^[-]

[34] fnftr? ^^ttn^ro: ^wrif^ifWeTJ wqrft^^wt-]

[86] wfrer: i«> ^j^mnwt ^T«w^: ?nwrir [ - ]

Second Plate (5).

[86] T[:]^«r^nBif: ^^•if«r5rtrf^u%ti: ^fii[.]
[87] '^mHnr ^^^r^'^^T^ft'STft^^rsR^cnr 3iWr«n[-]

1 Metre : STarduWikriditam. « Metre vaaantatilaka. 8 Read ^.
♦ Read ftrH I ^ Bead ftfur. « This mark of pnnotuation is mmeces-
■ary. *» Read ^. 8 fl^ 9 Thfa mark of punctuation is unneoeaBary.
10 Tngtead of if^V read ^ \

Vol. I, No. 1.1 Oharters of the Somavamit Kings. 21

[89] ii3|^i.4\iiii0<mir iri:3^[*ni*iH?f^**^ii^T[-]
[40] ir vpsft^Rihq* ^?^nni:T^^i55Rfil]^tP5{[-]

[42] ^ ^sw^fft-^firesi^ crTiii«in¥PhrFin?tw^ ^ftnn^-]

[43] cT i[?ir?rjr<ir ^^fw^^^iiiTlJW I4rif^*4i[-]

[44] iPRf|phf|p TO ^r^ra^rafirf^ 1 HTf^rfti[-]

[45] ^ ^Fcrfif^ft'W^jfNT ^4<ifiicn^4ji ^g[-]

[46] Thn^ ^^ftift^jin^rfhn i erin^ irftnttw f^

[47] ^r]f[w ^T ?:i«rfv. ^^mf^ftfj i ^r5T 'rei ^«r^

iljft^WR© ^[-]

[48] ^ ^v ^^ I Vr ^j^vniqrT ^« ^^5^ irrfS^; ^rt[-]

[49] nm ^iWRi^^ m?fy\j^n^ i ^irf^^^^rrwiftr ^[-]

M
[50] ^ »fN^ ^jfi?^: I ^n^HT ^iT55R«fiT ^ ^^3hf «n['Pii[-]

[51] S^^ I ^ia^^:ir«f xro^ «w ^^ft^^ «.^^[t]hi iw 't-

Third Plate (a).

[52] vT^'f JTT^ ^nfl^ ?W^ [ I ] ^T fH^^«r k^t^ ^®ii

[54] « ^^m\ xPtmCo [i] "^ilfiT'T! iiroAiyira ^^ ^

I Bead— If^nril' I * Read I f imr^ ii ^ r - I * Metre : AnoBhtiibh.

♦ May be corrected to ^fT^n^^ *" ^^®®* *"* ^®"®" ®'^*^ ^ *^"^^
also may be retained meaning * longlaiting," egpecially as all the versions
show this form.

» Metre : Annshtubh. . • Read wffW^ I '^ Metre : IndravajrA.

« Read ^tVn • Metre Annshtubh. W Omit one perpendioalw.

1^ Metre : Annahtabh.

^^ charters of the Somavamii Kings. [Jannaiy, 1905.

, [55]- % [i] 53»ft i^ ■j^BWt^^ f^nra ^pbnfti^ [i] 'ei^rJiTit

[56] ^i »i ^<m^« i n [ I ] Jrat ^ftfsir[^]»ln ^t^tt t w^l^ i

[67] »5M>«^*»Tij?f [ I ] T^w^^iwi'nfar ^n^^Tipf'^i^ i

[68] ncTT ^jjfinc'in^ g Trftcn [ i ] tt&t th^st^t^ ir^

[59] ir^ ^TTOJ iTT^ faJJlU fif ^ Jt^T^ [l] V^ ' ^lMi.^ '^WT

[60] ^sft Tt^ ^w^xT ^ U^m wfir^T^^ fq?jftr[t] fi^

[61] f^^>" w^rft ftw^^jf^ g |*jlgdi^*i ' ** [ I ] ^;^nn[-]

[62] ftw wr^T«rtifKf*rf ^ftr^ i [ i ] '^tiwinil [5]t[]

[64j] «r: inf^^n^ ^ ^ ^n^ ?:wwfs i ^^^ft^ wfm-

[65] ^^ijft^vhrt fi?'n?5fi|5w ^^^w^ [ I ] ^RTO-

[66] ^:^^?ngr 1^51 Tfr ijw: ir^^iiWt MNtj [ i ]

^'i|TT<lTO[-]

[67] S^TQTTftnrfl^^BlTfwnift f^lrft TT^Rtfir2TTTW3HTOT[-]

[68] g^ ^^T^flfN^T 1 I ] i«ai^fl^n<<B*i<^*irM *®5^-

iran^-]

A- Mettle : Anafihtubh. « Metre i Annahtubh. • 8 Read ^^.

♦ Bead ^. B Bead ^. « This sloka has six feet : metre ^fH^W.

I Bead-^riri'. ^ Metre[: Annehtubh. 'Read^. lOReadufT

II Metre : Anushtubh. W Read ^ W Bead .19 ^. | !♦ Read VjHl

1* Metre : S'Alini. 16 Metre : PnshpitagrA, H Metre SardAlarikrliJita
1" Read m fnr nfmaA^Am^

1* Read i^for anwsrira

Vol. I, No. 1. Charters of the SomavatnH Kings, 23

[69] 5wr ^ gftin^tid^iOnnwm^ : ^ftftif^wnw. [ I ]

* •

Third Plate (6).

[70] m^mu ^?r%JT fjrftpf m\w mt^^ «iNV«^i9ai[-]
[71] T* » incwn^w: M<44*igK^*<^iii»iirMii«iMi5i[-]

[73] wii^rnff^iuiwi4*iK*Ri5>^ ^«i<(^^* nnnreRiS"
[74] • f^cPTO ft^ wv^ *iii|*fM ^rm^ R^ hur^
[76] ' gftr ^ ftif I i^T*t wi7tr%^>^^?tftefif I

1 Probably ^l|fi1^^f^r^V((^^1ll% is the correct eipreflsion, meaning
*' belonging to the office of the minister of peace and war of the Kosala
country."

^^mm — The sign of i^is not very distinct; it looks more like the

sign of a full stop. The word must, however, be either Ifffli or ^Unr.
It is derived n\08t probably from root ^f^^. It is equivalent in meaning to
3|fi|l|^ in line 42 of A, line 47 of B, line 40 of G. The three letters may also
be read as ^WIT, a mistake for ♦rT, a servant.

t Bead ldw^[^ | Bead— #t^

4 E, F and H have flnfT^f which is probably the correct form. This
was probably an official title. I has flflfflr.

I Read 4H^|

^•^ ■^■WN*»'^S#»-»

Vol. I, No. 1.]

[N. 8.]

Qri

1
1

f
1

Ingrayor.

No.

Place of
find.

Remarks.

• •ft

I
A

Pitna.

•

Mal^

▼ag

aliw

In A and
G, the
grnnts are
mnde sub-
ject to the
payment
of a small
revenue.

•

II
G

■

(
)

• ■ •

Bo.

•

tfadhava
0on of

Yisn.

Ghan^wir

(near

Ka^k).

In B, 0, D,
the other
name Ja-
namejaya
is not men-
tioned.

j»

Prob. near
ETa^k.

Do.

•

V
D

Katftk.

Do.

YiinSn!
tf&dhava,

son of

Vasn.

VI
H

•

Pfttni.

•

This IB the
obscurest .
of the
charters.

■

Charters oj
A Tabular Abstract o

ages
ited.

The dis.

trict or

Vishaya.

.nda-
ma).

Masa^a.

CotiDtry

Lhell
>eU.

TelfitiiHa.

Dakshi^a

Totala.

[Prob. a

mistake f <
EofeaU,
Fleet].

Koiala.

ta-

»»

in ^a^^a-

▼ati.

imi.
a).

9AkhADga.
dyanhA.

«•

Gidan^a

(Mandala),

he Somavamsi Kings.

THE Eleven Charters — Continued.

[January, 1905.

11 12

Place from

■

Grantee's
name.

Grantee's
Residence.

Country.

which the
grantee is
immi-
grant.

Writer.

Mahasan-

dhiyigra-

hin.

Engrayer.

Bkmabks.

Sankha-

(9r!) STiU-

04ra.

(S^rl) balla-

...

Cohio-

Yijfiani

••*

pil^i.

bhafijapati.

grama m

Madhya-

deSa.

oha^esya.

MAdhaya.

dahodadhi

Ktara^i in

. •*

Kasili in

Tathagata,

DhAradatta

• ••

...

Lava^A-

Sriyasti-

a Kayastha

(the

(vishaya).

ma^dala.

(writer) of

Rinaka).

•

the office of

the Maha-

sandhiyi-

grahin.

. • •

Kayastha

Soryaeena

(of the

office of the

Mahaean-

dhiyigra-

hin.

Singha-

datta (M.S.

of the

Kosala).

The

Vijfianl

Madha-

mathana.

I*.

Haccho,

Singo&

Kosala.

KastUi-

Mangala-

Singha-

The

•••

le rA^aka.

(grama) in

Deylbhoga

(▼ifaya).

•

bhatta-
grima in
Srayasti-
ma^fal.

datta.

Vijfiini,

Madhn-

malla.

(Bhatta.

•••

•*•

Hastipada.

Par^pa-

•••

**•

1
Written

atra) Na-

datta, son

in ayery

ijima, son

of Kinuia,

onrsive

■f Janar-

the 8^69'

hand. The

dana.

fhin of
Lenapura.

second
name,
Bhima-
ratha, of
Mahl-Bha-
yagnpta II
is not men-
tioned.-

Vol. 1, No. 2.1 Earwigs of the Indian Mtueum. 27

[N. 8.-]

2. Earwigs of the Indian Museum, toith DescripHons of NeuD
Sjpecies.—By Malcolm Burr, B.A., F.L.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S., F.E.S.
Communicated by N. Annandale.

Genus APAOHTS Serville.

Apachys feiB Borm. Sikhim. Nos. 5301-02/14, 1802/6, 2&52.
3-4-5-6-8-9/5. All nymphs. Previously recoixied from Silhet and
Burma.

Genus DIPLATYS Serville,

Diplatys ridleyi Karb. Upper Assam, No. 1332/9, 9 .
This species has been recorded from Sumatra, but the specimen in
question does not appear to be distinct.

Diplatys gladiator, n. Calcutta. 1 S , No. 7336/14, and a larva,
taken also at Calcutta, by Mr. Nelson Annandale. Owing to the
distribution of the colours, I feel certain that this larva belongs to
this . species. It has the very long segmented cerci that are
characteristic of the larvae of this genus.

Genus PYGIDICEANA Serville.

Fygidicrana eximia Dohm. No. 5310/14, i ; Berhampur
No. 5962/12, 9.

Genus ECHINOSOMA Serville.

Echinosoma sumatranum (Haan). Khasi Hills, Sibsaugor
No. 5324/14. (S. E. Peal.) One 9. Also a fragment which
1 refer with doubt to this species, labelled Calcutta, and another
fragment from Sikhim, No. 2560/5. The species is abundant in
Java, Sumatra, etc.

Genus FORCIPULA Bolivar.

Fofcipula trispinosa (Dohm). Sikhim, Nos. 8858/13, ds
5308/14 9,5315/14, cf.

Forcipula qnadrispinosa (Dohm). Sikhim, Nos. 5319-26-29/14.
All females. Both these species are previously known from India
and Burmah.

Forcipula decolyi l^rm, Sibsaugor, (S. E. Peal), Id*, No.
. 5317/14. Previously recorded from Madras.

Genus LABIDURA Leach.

I ...

Labidura bengaleimn (Dohm.) Berhampur, No. 5960-1-3-4-
5/12. 2 c^ <f , 3 9 9 . Hardware, (J Wood-Mason), 1 ^ , No.
5320/14. Calcutta, 1 <f A 1 9 , (Mus. Collr.) Also a larva, Ber-
hampur, No. 5969/12.

28 Edrmgs of the Indian Miiseum. [February, 1005

Labidura riparia (PalL) var. inermis Brunner. Berhampur,
No8. 5967-8/12. I cT , 1 9 . Calcutta, 18 c? c? , 42 9 9 , 25 larvw.

iafctcittra ripana (Pallas.) Type form. Bangalore, (Cameron).
No. 5314/14, 1 S . Berhampur, No. 5966/12, 2 9 . Seistan Bonnd-
ary Commission, 1 cf. Dehra Dun, No. 6337/8, larva.

Labidura lividiipes (Dufour.), Ranchi, No. 8426/12. Calcutta,
Nos. 6577/12, 5528/12, 2 9 9,4 8200/11, broken.

Genus LABIDTJRODES Bobmans.

Laburodes robustus Borm. Tavoy, No. 170/5. This specimen
is not mature, but it agrees well with de Borman's despription of
the type from New Guinea.

Genus ANISOLABIS Fiebeb.
Antsolabis annulipea Lucas. Calcutta, 2 (f d* .

Genus SPONGIPHORA Sebville.
8po7igiphora ftphinx Burr. Calcutta, Id*.

Genus CHELISOCHELLA Vebh(epf.

CheUsochella superba (Dohm.) Johore, (J. Wood-Mason.), No,
5305/14. Id*.

Genus OHELISOCHES Scuddeb.

Ohelisochea morio (Fabr.) ? New(P) Hebrides, No. 5306/14.
coll. Distant), 1 9 . Johore, No. 5304/14, (J. Wood-Mason.), Id".
Abundant throughout the Oriental Region.

Oheltsoches glaucopterus Bormans. Upper Assam, No. 1330/9,
1 S • Recorded from Burmah.

(P) Chelisochea melanocephalus (Dohm.) Upper Assam, No.
1334/9, l<y. Recorded*from India.

Genus ALLODAHLIA Vebh(Efp.

AUodahUa scabrtuscula (Haan.). Sikhim, Nos. 5303/14, 9015/7,
29 9 ; Sikkim, Mung Phu, No. 6225/8, Ic?. Sibsaugor, Nos.
5322/14, 5318/14, 2 d d" , ( S. E. Peal). Dunsiri Valley, No. 5321/14,"
1 d ( Godwin- Austen). Upper Assam, Nos. 1327-28-29-31/9, 2 d ^ ,
29 9 No. 5311/14. Id*.

Genus ANECHURA Suddeb.

Anechura ancylnra (Dohm.) Naga Hills, (Capt. Butcher.)
No. 5309/14. 9 ,

Vol. 1, No. 2.] Eartcigs of the Indian Museum. 29

IN. 8.]

Anechura 8^. Shillong. No. 5312/14. (Gfod win- Austen). l9.
Anechura metallica (Dohm.) Khasia Hills, (J. Wood-Mason),
No. 5316/14. d*. {[urseong (purchased), Id*.

Genus OPISTHOCOSMIA Dohbn.

Opisthocosmia oannes Burr. Khasia Hills. No. 5323/14, 1 d* •
Slightly different in colour from the type, (described from Assam ;)
the elytra and wings are bright bronzy castaneous instead of dark
red.

Opisthocosmia sp. n. Sikhim. No. 5325/14. 9 .

Opisthocosmia vivax n. Dikrang Valley, Nanangs, No. 5313/14,
( Godwin- Austen. )

Genus FORFICULA Linn.

Forficula sp. n. Bang, Sikhim. No. 5775/5. 9 .

Forficula tomis KolL Oiwake. 1886. cf. Recorded from
Siberia and Japan.

Forficula sp. n. Sikhim. No. 53235/14. 9 .

Forficula heelzehnh Buit. Dardjiling. No.5745/5. 9 . Pi*e-
viously recoi'ded fi-om Dardjiling.

Forficula sp. n. 'Gilgit Exp. No. 3824/6. 9 .

Forficula celei' n. Khasia Hills. No. 5327-8/14. d* 9 .

Forficula acer n. Sikhim, Mung Phu, No. 6724/8.

Genus APTERYGIDA Westwood.

Apterygida hipartita Kirb. Nos. 5330-5361/14, 41, cf d*, 61 9 9 ;
Bangalore (Cameron), Nos. 5364-5-6-7/14, 6d'd', 129 9. Some
very dark in colour ; also sevei-al fragments.

Descriptions of New Species.

DIPLATYS GLADIATOR sp.n.

Caput fuscum, postice pallescens, oculis atris ; occiput postice
cainnulis 4 instructum, suturis valde distinctis ; frons inter oculos in-
distincte bi-impressa : antenn© typicw, pallidaB : pronotum rotunda-
tum, aequo longnm ac latum, pallidum ; scutellum magnum, palli-
dum, triangulare : elytra brevia lata nigra ; alap i-udimentariw, hand
nrominentes ; pedes pallidi ; abdomen gi^cile, Iseve, tuberculis
lateralibus parum distinctis, testaceo-rufum ; segmentum penulti-
mum breve, propter magnitudinem segmenti ultimi ceteris valde
latins ; segmentum ultimum dorsale quadratum, postice paullo
dilatatum, mfum, laeve, prope marginem posticum medio impres-
sum, margine postico recto, pi-ope angulos postico oblique truncato :
forcipis bracchia valde depressa, basi subcontigua, margine intemo

30 Earwigs of the Indian Museum, [Febmarj, 1905.

in dentem acutnm magnum dilatata, dehinc inermia, incurya,
attenuata, aream ovalem includentia. <f.

Long.corporis 8*75 mm.

„ forcipis 1*5.

INDIA : — Calcutta.

A very distinct species, characterised by the rudimentary
wings, black elytra, which are braad but short, round pronotum,
and the form of the last abdominal segment and forceps.

There is a larva with long segmented cerci which, on account
of the distribution of colours, I attribute also to this species. It
also comes from Calcutta.

OPISTHOCOSMIA VIVAX sp. n.

Statura majore, castanea: caput magnum,' tumidum sulcis
Y-formantibus, profunde impressis: pronotum oblongum, antice
rectum, postice paulo angustius, subrotundatum ; prozona tumida,
metazona plana, rugulosa: elytra ampla, granulosa; aim promi-
nentes, Udves : presternum latum, postice angustatum, margine
antico recto, paulo reflexo : abdomen medio dflatatum, leave ; seg
mentis omnibus margine postico pilis bi*evibus spissis horizontalibus
instructis ; segmentum ultimum dorsale angustum, declive, margine
postico recto, integro ; medio impresso, utrinque subtuberculato :
pygidium prominens, validum, coins 2 acutis terminatum : forcipis
bracchia remota, gracUia, subsinuata, apicem versus incurva,
margine intemo per totam longitudinem denticulata. 9 .

Long- corporis 18 mm.

„ forcipis 9*5.

INDIA : DiKRANO Valley, Nananos. No. 5313/14. (Godwin-
Austen).

This is a very distinct species, characterised by the occipital
sutures, the foi*m of the pygidium, and the dilated abdomen.

The basal part of the abdomen is badly broken, but the speci-
men is apparently a female, though the well developed characters
would appear to be more suitable to a male. It is possibly a male.

FORFICULA ACER sp. n.

Nigra ; caput globosum, mfum, sutuins obsoletis, laave ; anten-
nae...?, (segmenta 7 restant), iiigive : pronotum prozona vix
eeevata, deplanatum, medio sutura longitudinali instructum, latum,
tfpite vix angustius, margine antico 1*6010, postico lateribusque
paullo rotundatis, lateribus ipsis paullo reflexis : elytra et al»
edvia, rufo-nigra, lata ; abdomen segmeutis 1-3 fere Isevibus, nigris

Vol. 1, No. 2.] Earwigs of the Indian Muse urn. 31

[N. 8.']

npberculis lateralibus distinctis ; segmentis ceteiis f usco-rufis,
punctulatis ; segmentum ultimam doraale ti*ansversum, margine
llostico incrassato, utrinque tuberculo magno nigix) instructum : pygi-
aium magnum longum, angustum paiTallelam, apice trancatum :
corcipis bracchia rufa valida basi subcontigua, depressa ac deplanata,
valde elongata :• pars depressa margine intei*no laminato-crenulata,
dente acuto ac forti terminata ; dehinc bracchia attenuata, depla-
nata, sensim incurva, inermia. d".

Long, corporis 8*6 mm.

., pygidi. 1.

„ fore. part. depress8B...2'5.
„ tota f orcipis ... .8*5.

INDIA : SiKHiM, Mung Phu. No. 2724/8. d".
This specimen is of the " macrolahia form " of forceps ; it is
characterised hy the long parallel pygidum.

PORFICULA CELER sp. n.

Caput laeve, globosum, rufo-nigrum : antennae ll-segmenta89,
mf8B, apice pallescentes : pronotum magnum, latum, capite vix
angustius, margine antico recto, postico rotundato, grannlosum ;
elytra ampla, lata, fulva ; alae longee, fulv8B : pedes fusco-rufi :
abdomen ^punctulatum, tuberculis lateralibus distinctis ; segmentum
ultimum dorsale d" transversum, utrinque obtuse b^tuberculatum ;
9 angustius, tuberculis obsoletis : pygidiura baud perspicuum :
forcipis bracchia d basi contigua, deplanata, margine iiiemo larai-
noto-dilatata, usque ad dimidiam partem longitudinis, dehinc
subito attenuata, sensim incurva, apice baud attingentia, 9 conti-
gua, I'ecta, inermia. 9 .

d 9

Long, corpoi'is 9 mm. 8 mm .

forcip is 4 2.25.

»»

INDIA: Khasia Hills. Nos. 5327-8/14.

[March, 1906.] Proceedings.

Order. — That the recommendation of the Committee relating
to the following mattera be accepted : —

(1) Publication of a quarto series (2) Publication of a new
series (8vo) containing the Journal and Proceedings combined.
(3) Paper and Type to be used. (4) Insertion of advertisements
relating to books and scientific instruments. (5) Appointing
Messrs. Thacker, Spink & Co. to secure advertisements. (6) Pub-
lication of such resolutions of the Council, as the Council may
determine, in the Proceedings. Circulate proposal about the ap-
pointment of a Publication Committee and their powers.

Eread the following extract from a programme from the
Royal Academy of Sciences of Turin, announcing a prize : —

The Royal Academy of Sciences of Turin announce a prize,
open to savants and inventors of all nations, to be given to that
person who during the four yeara 1903-06 shall, in the opinion of the
Academy, have made the most striking or useful discovery, or have
produced the most celebrated work in physical and experimental
science, natural history, pure and applied mathematics, chemistry,
physiology, and pathology, including geology, history, geogi'aphy
and statistics. The value of the prize is 9,600 francs.

Anyone wishing to compete may apply, but the prize will be
awaixied to the most worthy, though he may not have applied.

The following papers wei^e read : —

1. Occurrence of the genus Apus in Baluchistan, — By E.
Vredenburo, Geological Survey of India,

2. Tibet under the Tartar Emperars of China. — By Rai Saeat
Chandra Das Bahadur, CLE.

This paper has been published in Journal Part I for 1904.

3. Pavana-dutam or Air-messenger, by Dhoyika, a Court poet of
Laks7nanasena, King of Bengal, with an Appendix on the Sena
Kings.— By Monmohan Chakbavarti, M.A., M.R.A.S.

4. Eancigs of the Indian Mu^seum. — By M. Burr. Communi-
exited by the Anthropological Secretary.

This paper has been published in " Journal and Proceedings,"
N.S., Vol. I, No. 1.

5. The Hydra of the Calcutta Tanks. — By Nelson Annan-
dale, B.A.

6. The connposition of the oil from Bir Bahoti or the " Rains
Insect " (Trombidium grandissimum). — By E. G. Hill, B.A.

7. Contributions to Oriental Herpetology II. Notes on the
Lizards in the Indian Museum with descriptions of New Forms and
Lists of species recorded from British India and Ceylon and of spe^
Hmens collected in Sinkip Island {Ea^t Sumatra) by the late Pro-
fessor Wood-Mason's Collector (Part J). — By Nelson Annandale,
B.A.

8. Customs in. the Trans-border Territories of the North- West
Frontier Province. — By H. A. Rose, LC.S.

Proceedings. [March, 1905. J

9. The Agrahans of Sasaram. — By L. S. S. O'Malley, I.C.S.
Gonimumcated hy the Anthropological Secretary.

These papers have been published in Journal, Part III, for
1904.

10. OofUributions to the Kanawar folklore. — By Pandit Tika-
BAM JosHi. Communicated by Mr. H. A. Rose.

11. A review of the first volume of the Archseological Repwis
of the Government of Java. Illustrated hy a collection of photo-
graphs belonging to the reader of the paper. — By Father Dahlmakk^
S.J. Communicated by the Philological Secretary.

- /'"■^ .• V •*■

Vol. I, No. 3.]

Ihe genus Apm in Baluchistan,

3. Occurrence of the genus Apus in Baluchistan, — By E. Vreden-
BURO, (geological Stvrvey of. India,

The following
is an extiuct fi-om
my diary : *' Ko-
hian, 18th Febni-
ary, 1901.... At
Thalohk there
are some strange
phyliopods." The
above extract to-
gether with a
rough sketch of
the animal, is all
that I have
wntten in my
diaiy i-egai-ding
these creatui'es,
but I am able to
supplement this
short notice fi-ora
memory.

I was not
awai'e, till a few
days ago, that
the matter was
of any interest
whatever, and
only di^w the
sketch in order
to be able to
identify what ap-
peared to me a
very curious

crustacean, not
thinking that I
could, thereby,
add any infonna-
tion i-egarding
its distnbution.
The circumstance
did not recur to

my mind until a few days ago, when, on showing my sketch to
Major Alcock and to Mr. Annandale at the Indian Museum, they
recognised it as i^epresenting the fi^esh- water phyllopod cinistacean
Apu8^ and infoimed me that the genus has never yet been found
within the limits of the Indian Empii'e. . Although, in the absence
of an actual specimen, it is not possible to determine the exact
species, yet the occuii'ence of the genus within a I'egion where it
had not yet been known to exist appears sufficiently interesting
to be worth bringing to the notice of the Society.

Thalohk is situated in Latitude 28'' 24' N. and Longitude 64°

43' at the foot of an abmpt limestone range fonning the northern

border of the Kharan desert which constitutes a poHion of the

semi-independent State of Kharan in Western Baldchistdn. I

passed this locality while marching to Kohian, a camping place

situated about thi-ee miles further east, and did not have any

opportunity of again visiting it. Except for a few wells and

springs this region is almost waterless. On the occasion of my

visit in the winter of 1900-1901, there had been, however, quite

an unusual amount of rainfall* Heavy showers fell on all the

hill-ranges at the end of December and beginning of January.

Considerable ti*acts in the desert were flooded, and pools of water

remained in many places for weeks and perhaps months At

Thalonk I came across what appeared to me a pool of this kind,

occupying a shallow depression in the desert plain. It had

dwindled to scarcely more than a yaixl in diameter, and, to me it

seemed to be of a ti*ansitory nature. Perennial pools, fed by un-

derground springs, do occur in certain parts of the desert, and I

34 The genus Ajms in Baluchisidn, [March, 1905.

cannot say for certain that this one was not of that kind, but
ivom its appearance, this seemed nnlikely. On approaching the
pool I found it swarming with the cnistacea of which I here give
a sketch. There must have been dozens of them, all of about the
same size. I placed one of them in a bottle of water, but it prob-
ably got injured while removing it from the pool for it died al-
most immediately. I tried to preserve it in spirit, but the bottle
was accidentally bi'oken and the specimen lost, so that the only guide
remaining to identify it is the rough sketch that I di'ew the same
day that I observed these creatui'es.

The sketch is drawn approximately of natural size It is
quite diagrammatic, but sufficiently detailed to enable clear identi-
fication of the object represented. The diagram shows distinctly
the pHncipal features of Apus, the shield with the main details
of its ornamentation, the anterior pair of eyes, the anterior legs,
transformed into long antenniform filaments, the expanded branch-
ial legs pi'otruding on either side of the carapace, the greatly seg-
mented abdomen and the caudal appendages. The portion of the
body extending beyond the shield is pi-oportionatel}- longer than
in the specimens and figures that have been shown to me by
Major Alcock and Mr. Annandale. Its i-elative dimension is pos-
sibly slightly exaggerated in my sketch. Thei-e is no doubt, how-
ever, that it really was longer than in the examples that I have
since seen tigui-ed oi- preserv^ed in spirit, for I was particularly
struck, at the time, by its shape and size. My sketch shows one
pair of eyes in the anterior pai't of the shield. Thei-e exists, in *
Ap^ts^ a thiini unpaired eye placed slightly fiQ'ther back than the
line joining the paii'ed eyes, but it is vei*y small and easily escapes
detection if one does not know of its existence. The caudal
appendages ai-e much shorter in my sketch than in the figui'es and
specimens which I have seen in Calcutta. Perhaps they had got
broken in my specimen.

The presence of so large a number of Crustacea in the situa-
tion where I observed them, appears veiy puzzling. If the pool
was the remnant of a larger pond tempoi^arily filled by i-ain- water,
one can understand that they should have gi'adually become
crowded into a small space as the water receded, but their deve-
lopment must have been very rapid, for if the pool is not one of
the perennial ones alluded to, it could scarcely have existed for
more than two months previous. If the pool is perennial and
normally of the small size it possessed when I saw it, its crowded
population is still difficult to account for.^

As noticed at a previous meeting by Mr. Annandale, it is prob-
able that the reputed absence from this country of many well-
known fresh-water invertebrates is due to our scant knowledge of
its fresh- water fauna.

, ,1 1 1 _ ■ _ - ■-

^ Mr. Annandale lias drawn my attention to the account of the genus in
Bird's Natural History of the British Entomostraca, according to which
A'pus can reach a length of one inch after three weeks development from the
egg. It has also been noticed in Europe that this crustacean appears sporadi-
cally and suddenly in an unaccountable manner.

VoL I, No. 3.] A note on Haldyudha, 35

[N. 8,]

4. A note on Haldyudha, the author of Brdhmanasarhasva. — By
YooE^A Chandra S^astree.

Part I.

Bi^hmanasaibasva is a well-known book which deals with
the explanation of certain Mantras of the Yajurveda. Its author was
Halijndha — a Br&hmana of considerable merit and talent. He
was a great scholar of Vaidika and Lonkika Sanskrit. He wrote
several books in Sanskrit dealing with the different branches of
learning. There are different conjectures as to his identity besides
what is given by himself in his Brahmanasarbasva.

Pundita LIdamohana Vidyftnidhi, the author of Sambandha-
nimaya, says that Haliyudha, the Prime Minister of Lakshmana
Sena, was the Hall^yudha of the Chatta family, who was honoured by
Ball&la Sena. He also says that this Lakshmana Sena equalized
the rank among the Kulins of the B4rhi class, and was the son of
Kei^aba Sena, and hence the great-grandson of BallMa Sena J

The late Pundita Muktar&ma Vidy&bfigi^a, who edited Veni-
samh&i'a, a well-known di*ama by Bhatta N&i'&yana, at the ex})ense
of the late Babu Prosanna Kumar Tagoi^e of Calcutta, says in
its pi-eface that Hal4yudha, the Prime Minister of Lakshmana
Sena was sixteenth in descent from Bhatta N4r4yana and was
an ancestor of the Tagore family. He wrote many books on SmHtis
(Hindu Law and Usage) which are still extant. Dr. B4jeudra
Lala Miti-a and R4j4 Sourindra Mohana Tagore, the nephew of
Babu Prosanna Kum4ra Tagore, mentioned above, are of the same
mind with Vidy&bagisa, only differing from him in respect of the
degi'ee of descent.*

The late Babu S^y&m& Charana Sarak&ra, the author of Vya-
basth&dai'panam, a well-known digest of Hindu case law, writes in
its preface, most probably following MuktAi*£ima Vidy&b4gi^a, that

^ ^«<{« HmJUBtJH ^J ^^1^ Mohana Yidy&nidhi. Firsb edition, pages 162,
163, 207, 208, 209.

"v ^ > .__ r_,Mi -^L . .

S Vide Sena BijAs of Bengal, by Dr. B. L. Mittrs, and English translation
of Yeni Samb&ra by Baba Soarindra Mohana Tagore (now

36 A note on Haldyudha. [March, 1905.

'Hhis great Pundita (HalAyndha) was the spiritual guide of
Laksmana Sena, a renowned monarch, who gave his name to an
era of which upwards of seven hundred years have expired. HalA-
yudha was a decendant in the fifteenth degree of Bhatta Nftr&yana,
author of Yenisamh&ra (a celebrated drama) and one of the five
YedlLntists, who were brought from Kanouj by B4j& Adii^ura and
whose descendants are almost all the R4rhi and B&rendra Br&h-
manas of Bengal."^

Now, three questions arise here for decision : —

(1) If Hal&yudha, the author of Br&hmanasarbasva, did

really belong to the Chatta family as stated by Llkla
Mohana Yidy&nidhi, or the Bandya family as stated
by Muktiir&ma Yidy&b4gi^a and his followers.

(2) If he was the prime minister of Lakshmana Sena, the

son of Kei^aba Sena and great-grandson of Ball&la
Sena.

(3) Who was he in fact ?

At a certain date in his reign Ballila Sena, the King of
Bengal, made a gift of a golden cow. Some Brahmanas of the Il&rhi
class after causing that cow to be cut into pieces, accepted the gift
of gold. Their names are as follows : S'amkara Pitamundi, Biv&-
kara Garagari, Douka Gui^a, Dokari Pippali, Mirtanda, Anai,
Gknki, Hara and Gopee Bandya, DokaH M^shachataka, MlUlhu
Sudani R4yee, Yaba Kus&ri, Nllr&yana Hara, Ke^ava D^yaree,
Ke^ava Mahinta, Sakuni Chatta, Nayiri Tailabati, Yi^vesvara
Kunda, Bithu Bandya, Madana and Yi^vesvara Ghoshala, H^ya
Gllnguli, Goutama Putitunda, Pdrasara Simali, and S'amkara
Dingslli.

According to the injunction of the social law and ix)yal com-
mand, the above-named Brahmanas, who accepted! the forbidden
gift, the goldsmith, who cut the golden cow into pieces, and the
Yanika, who bought or sold those pieces of gold, were all
degraded.*

1 Preface of 4|^f||||^^i| by the late S'j^in&charana Sarak&ra, pnges 28, 24.

^•rifinBi irarrfiw Tr?tjit4^ ^ ^'^it i

Vol. I, No. 3,] A note en Haldyudha. 37

[N. S.]

Ball^a Sena having observed this evil practice of the E4rhi
class of Br4hmanas, selected some principal Kulins from
amongst those who abstained from accepting the gift and invited
them to his capital. When the Bi^hmanas reached his place
BaMla, after carefnl examination, declared them to be spotless
Enlins and honoured them. The names of those spotless Kulins
are as follows : Bahnmpa, S'ucha, Arabinda, Haldyudha and B4ng&la
of the Ghatta family, Gobardhan&ch^rya of the Putitunda family,
S^ira of the GhoshJda family, Bosh&kara of the Kimdalila family,
JUhana, Mahe^vara, Debala, y4mana, I^ana and Makaranda of the
Bandya family, Utsaba and Garara of the Mnkhaiti family, K&nn
and Kntuhala of the Kanjil&la family J It is probable that Ball&la
honoured the above-named Kulins of the Hirhi class about the same

time that he established the aristocracy (^fi1«<l|) among the
B&rendra Br&hmanas.

r<i<(^* ^msin^ ^ ^wf ?nr xi^s is^r: p

( ^\^ e»fwf^^*l )

^?5WWft ^m ^pf^infarf%aT i

38 A note on Hcddyudha, [March, 1905.

Some time after this Ball&la died and his sou Lakshmana Sena
became the King of Bengal. During his reign he found that those
19 Kulins, who were declared by BaUMa Sena to be spotless, were
quan'elling with one another in respect of their rank. None of
them thought himself inferior to another, but everyone considered
himself superior to another. This put a stop, as it were, to their
matrimonial connection.

Lakshmana Sena, the son of Ball&la Sena and inheintor of
his throne, having marked this disorder of the Society, which
originated from malice, equalized the rank of those 19 Kulins who
were previously honoured by BalllLla and who wei*e quarrelling
with one another for rank, i.e., he declared them to be of the same
status. In the time of this equalization Utsaba and Garura were
both left out but were replaced by their childi^en — Aita, Abhyagata,
Pundita and BMali. There wei^e in all two equalizations among
21 Kulins. In the firet, Aita, Bahurupa, S'ira, Gobordhana, S'i^a,
Makai'anda and Jalhana, these seven Kulins were counted ; and in the
second, Arabinda Haldyudha, S'ucha, BIkngala, Debala, Mahe^vara,
Isftna, Roshakara, Bidali, V&mana, Pundita, Abby&gata, Kd.nu
and Kutuhala, these 14 Kulins were reckoned.^ Ball&la did not.
make any mle in respect of secondary aristocrats (j^l^^l)*
They became apostate during the time of Lakshmana Sena, and
consequently wei'e expelled by him fix)m the Kulin class.

In the beginning of this note I have stated that HalAyudha
^vrote Brahmanasarbasva — an explanatoiy ti'eatise of certain
mantras of the Yajui-veda. In its beginning he has identified himself
in the following words : "In the lineage (ilt^) of V&tsya there was

VoL I, No. 3.] A note on Haldyudha. 39*

[N. 8.1

a pre-eminent sacrificer called Dhananjaya having a wife by
name Gochh&shandi. Hal&yndha was the son of Gochh4shandi by
Dhananjaya. In the prime of his age he (Haliyudha) was a Court
pnndita of Lakshmana Sena, in middle age he became Lord
Chancellor and in old age he was the Prime Minister of the same-
King."'

From Hali^yadha's own version we know that he never

belonged to either S'indilya or Kll^yapa lineage (4t^) as stated
by Mnkt4r&ma and Llllamohan respectively ; but he belonged to-
the lineage of Vitsya and his father's name was Dhanajaya.
Hal&yudha who was honoured by Ball&la was bom in the Chatta
family, and hence he belonged to the lineage of Kll^yapa and he was
one of the equalized Kulins ; and Haldyudha, who Avas bom in the^
family of Batta Nai4yana, the ancestor of Bandya and hence
Tagore family, belonged to the lineage of S'^ndilya. His father's
name was Rimarupa, and he cannot be found in the list of
the equalized Kulins. For these reasons, we can safely say that
Haldyudha, the author of Brahmanasarbasva, and Prime Minister
of Lakshmana Sena, son of Ball41a Sena, is a quite different pei-son
from Haliyudha, the ancestor of the Tagore family, and fi'om
Haltlyudha of the Chatta family who Avas honoui*ed by Balldila Sena.
I am unable also to admit the statement made by Vidy&-
nidhi, when he says that Lakshmana Sena or Lakshmana

••• •••••• ••• •«* •••

40 A iwte 071 Haldyudha. [March, 1905.

N&r&yana Sena, the son of Kesaba Sena, equalized the rank of the
19 Knlins honoui^ed by his gi^eat-grandfather — Ballila Sena, and
that Hall^yndha was his pi*ime minister, inasmuch as we find in Hal4-
yadha's own vei'sion that he was a Coui't pundit of Lakshmana
Sena in the very prime of his age, while he became Laksh-
mana's Lord Chancellor in his middle age and in old age, the
Prime Minister of the same King. It is stated also by Vidy^nidhi
that Halllyudha was honoured by Ball^la Sena. How then could
Hall^yudha be in the prime of his age during the time of
Lakshmana Sena, the great-grandson of BallAla ? Moreover,
it is quite impossible for the same 17 Kulins, who were
honoured by Ball&la, to live up to the time of Lakshmana, his
great-gi'andson, without a single of them being dead. It is ideally
wonderful to observe that Vidy&nidhi did not hesitate even to
make Um4patidhara a Couit punditaof Lakshmana the great-
grandson of BallMa. This Um&pati was a Coui't pundita of
Vijoy Sena, the father of Ballala Sena. He composed the verses
inscribed on a stone slab attached to the temple of Prodyumnes-
vai*a S^iva established by Vijoy Sena. Vidyllnidhi may try to
support his view regarding Um&pati by citing the instance of
JoyhaH Chandra, a gi-andson of Mah&i'ftji Knshna Chandra, who
(Joyhan) was present in his time and is still present in the time
of Mah§.raji Kshitisa Chandra, the 7th in descent fi-om Krishna
Chandi'a. But it is quite illogical to say that as Joyhari Chandra
is living, so UmUpati lived, inasmuch as Joyhari's case is merely
an excepti(mal one and cannot be made a general mle.

Under these circumstances we must hold thatHalAyudha, the
author of Brahmanasarbasva, never belonged to either K^syapa
(Chatta) or Sandilya (Bandy a) lineage; but that he was of the
lineage of Viitsya, being the Prime Minister of Lakshmana Sena,
the son and not great-gi*andson of BalUla Sena,

This Halayudha wi'ote several other books besides Brslhniana-
flarbasva, namely, Punditasai'basva, Nyltyasarbasva, S'ivasarbasva,
Mimltns&sarbasva, etc. His elder bi-other Pa^upati wi-ote a ti'eatise
on S'ritddha and other ceremonials, known as Pa^upatipaddhati.
His younger brother wix)te Anhikapaddhati, a treatise on the
daily duties of Bi'ahmanas. These books are still in existence
but not very widely known.

VoL I, No. 3.] Pavana-diitamy or Wvid-Messenger. 4i\

[N. 8.]

5. Pavana-dutaThj or Wind-Messefiger, by Dhoyika, a court-poet of
Lakfmanasena, king of Bengal, with an Appendix on the Sena^
kings. — By Monmohan Ghakbayabti, M.A., M.R.A.S.

This poem was first brought to public notice by our Philo-

mttoduotion. ^^K^^J „ Secretaij MahSmahopSdhySya

Fa^dit Haraprasad yastn in "Notices of
Sanskrit MSS.," Second Series, vol. I, part II, pp. 221-2, (No. 225).
A brief abstract of its contents was read by hun in the Proceed-
ings of this Society for July 1898, which was reproduced with*
some variations in his Preface to the above " Notices, *' pp. xxxvii-
viii. He described the MS. as " a discovery of some importance,"'
and rightly, for before this, no poem of Dhoyika was laiown, and
even up to now this MS. is the only copy known.. Its owner Pandit
Baghuram Tarkaratna of Yi^nupur, District Banku^a, has, at the
instance of its present subdi visional ofBcer Babu Atal Behari Bose,.
kindly lent me the MS., and has thus enabled me to edit the-
text.

The MS., on yellowish country paper, consists of 12 leaves^

(or rather 23 pages), 13i"x3f". It was
Tne MB. apparently part of alargeMS., fortheleave»»

ai'e numbered on the left side from 151 to 162. The text, five or
six lines to a page, is lOf x 11^" , and has besides marginal
notes. The characters are modem Bengali ; the handwriting neat
and generally legible. The colophon states that the MS. was copied
by one Ramagati in 9^ka 1752 K&rttika sita, or A.D. 1830,.
October- November, bright half (of the lunar month). Ramagati is.
father of the present owner. In the text are various omissions
and mistakes, some of which have been corrected in the margin
apparently by the copyist himself. The marginal notes are few,,
and give no help in difficult or deficient passages. I have therefore
given the text exactly as it stands in the MS., the conjectural
emendations being noted in small brackets, and the omissions in
larger brackets with asterisks. Several passages, however, still
remain doubtful.

The poem has KM stanzas, all in the metre ManddkrQntd. It
Contents ^*® composed in imitation of Kalidasa's lyric-

poem, Meghu'dutafhf cloud-messenger, (better
known in the south as Megha-sandega^), The metre is the same ;
the story is an evident adaptation from the latter ; and in several
stanzas reminiscences and even actual words of the Meghaduta
verses can be traced.

Such imitations of Kalidasa's poem are^
Imitations of not infrequent in later Sanskrit literature,.
Meghadutam. ^s the following list will show :—

1. Uddhava-dutam, (w. 141), by Madhava Kavindra-
Bhattacaiyya of Tilitanagara (Printed in J. Yidyi-
Bagara*s Kdvya'Samgraha, Calcutta).

42 Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger. [March, 1905.

2. Uddhava-dutam or U.-sandeQam, (vv. 131), by Rnpa

Grosvami, the disciple of Caitanya (printed in K.
samgraha).

3. Ktra-dutam, (w. 238 ?), by Ramagopala, the court poet

of a king of Vanga (MS. No. 67, "Notices" 2nd series,
Vol. I).

4. O&taka-sandegah, (w. 141), by a Brahmin of Kei*a]a,

(J.R.A.S., 1884, p. 451).

5. Nemi-dutarh, (vv. 126), by Vikrama, a Jaina poem

{Kavya-mQlS^ Vol. II, Bombay).

6. PadfUika-dutam, (w. 146), by Mahamahopadhyaya

Kr^na Sarvabhauma in9&'ka 1645 under the patronage
of Maharajadhiraj Ramajivana (Printed in KQvya-
samgraha) .

[Commentaries by Radhamohan and Ramahari.]

7. Pavana-dutam, the present poem.

8. Bhramara-sandegahy (vv. 192), by Vasudeva of Kei^la

(J.R.A.S., 1884, p. 452).

9. Quka-sandegah, (w. 163), by ^Lak^midasa of Kei^]a

(Printed in J.R.A.S., 1884, pp. 404-431).

10. Cuka-sandegah, by Karingampalli Nambudii (Oppei't's

ListofMSS. 2721, 6426).

[Commentary by Eralpatu, king of Calicut.]

11. Quka-sajidegah, by Rangacaryya (Rice's Mysore List

of MSS., 244).

12. Subhaga-sandegah, (vv. 130), by Narayana of Kerala

(J.R.A.S. 1884, p. 449).

13. Hanisa-detam, (vv. 40), by Kavindi'acaiyya Saras vati

(Bumell's Catalogue of Tanjore Palace Libraiy, p.
163a).

14. Hamsa-dutam, (vv. 142), by Rupa Gosvami (Printed

in Kavya-samgraha) ,

[Commentaries by Nrsiiiiha, Rama9ahkai^ and
Vi9vanatha Cakravartti.]

15. Hathsa-sandegah, (vv. 110), by Venkateca Vedantacaiyya

(J.R.A.S., 1884, p. 450).

[Commentary by Appayya Diki^ita.]

16. Ham8a-8and€gai^,(yv. 110),by an unknown poet, writing

apparently in rivalry of Venkate9a, No. 15, (J.R.
A.S. 1884, pp. 450-1).

The story of the poem is veiy simple. On the sandal-hills is
jj. a Gandharva town named Kanaka-ndgart

Btory. (v. 1), There Kuvalayavatl, a fair Gan-

dharva girl, saw King Lak^mana who had come on world-conquest.
She fell in love with him (v. 2). But unable to express to him her
feelings she passed several days in grief. Deeply disti<acted, she
at length begged the southerly breeze (v. 3) to convey to the king
of Gauda her message of love (v. 5). She then describes the
conntries- and the people, the wind would have to pass over
t(vy. 8-35), until it would come to Vijayapura the capital of the

Vol. I, No. 3.1 Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenuer. AA

IN. 8.-] -^

king. The capital and the king are then described (vv. 36-60).
Then the love message and the pangs of her sufferings the wind is
asked to communicate to the king (w. 61-100). The last four
stanzas are personal or benedictiye.

Interestiog geographical details are furnished in the descrip-
Oeographioal tion of the wind's journey (vv. 8-36). The
Details. breeze starts from the Malaya (v. 8), the

hiU-range forming the eastern boundary of Travancore. Cross-
ing the valleys at the foot of the Malaya, it will go to Paw^a-defa,

-Dx^^^^ A^^n, ^*^ ^*^ capital Uraga-pura or Bhujaqa-

Pa^^ya-deqa. ^^^ ^^ ^q^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^ Tamraparnt

(v. 8). Pdn(jla-deQa or the country of the Pan^yas is comprised
in the modem Districts of Tinnevelly and Madura with S. Tra van-
core ; Tinnevelly itself stands on the left bank of the river Tamra-
parni. The Pfindya^s are known from very early times, being men-
tioned in the rock Edicts of Asoka, the Vai^ttikas of Katyayana,
and also in Mahabharata and Bamayana. The capital Uragaptira
is mentioned in Baghuvam^a, vi. 59-60 ; while the Tamrapatmt with
the pearl fisheiy at its mouth in the Gulf of Mannar is still moi'e
famous. The Ureek and Roman name for Ceylon, Taprobane, is
believed to be derived from this river's name.

The wind will then pass by the Biidge of Rama which looks
like an arm of the earth extended to the Lanka-dvlpa (v. 10) ;
and here lies the god Bame^ara (v. 11). This refers, of course,
to the Adam's Bridge and the well-known temple of Rame^vara,
described to be one of the twelve Jyotirlingas.

The wind next proceeds to Kaiicipura, the ornament of the
p South (v. 12), the capital of the Cola ladies

uoias. ^^ j^^j K&nci or Conjeeveram is one of the

oldest cities of India, being mentioned in P&tanjali's Mahabha^ya ;
while the Colas have been named in the rock Edicts of Asoka, and
the Varttikas of Katyayana. At the time the poet wrote, the Colas
were the most powerful in the South, having been raised to that
eminence by Kulottudga Cola I (A. D. 1070-1118.)

Following (westward) the coui-se of the Kaveri (v. 115), the

wind will come to the land of the Keralas (v.
Kerajas. ^^^ rpj^^ ^^^^ Km-eri, which fertilises the

Cola country, flows past the great temple of prirangam. The
Kerala land is identifiable with the west coast from N. Travancore
to Gokarna in N. Mysore. Kerala was known to Pataiijali, and
is apparently the same as Kerala-putra of Asoka's rock Edicts. -"
Having thus gone througl^ the southern half of Deccan, the
M&lyavaa Mt, wind will next see the Mnlyavanta moun-
tain (v. 18), and PancHpsara the tank of
MOsyakarni 1^8% (v. 19). Both these .names are well known from
Ramaya^a.^ Mdlyavanta^ is apparently the central portion of the

1 Rimiyana 8. 11. 11-12; Raifhnvarii^a, 13. 38.

S For Malyavanta, see Ramiiya^a 4. 28. 1. The difCerence between
4>oetioal talent and poetical genins oan be wHl tieen by comparing the

'Hr/'^r M//. wfM^ HviMitiff Uiff )MMMw tt/ond aboot the CKoilaraTs
««»/<«* ftMKM^-f, r'" '"'''• V',*^'"' ""Pitol of Kalingat, (r. 21 ) ;

; »^/ '; ' 'r' ♦'" '<"""««'""•'''."*' >*»"• "««r the «ea bat not^cm the

i ; 1? "."''./rr'/""'''^! "'♦""."'•'•' wi«l' modem Muldu£6p^i in
;.f K n ""'i '"'"• '"•.'' ^i'*""' l»lMrl,it(}»fijim. This towiTBtends
>'U\\HiUH VMrtH,M.II.M.H. IM" .•l7'lttt.H.t.''a'long., about 22 milea
!'♦ (tH|( U„M kMllfitfH|MtHiMn. ( hp JM.H, ftt the mouth of this river,
I (Hdi Dim NI.H iMMiHl llio wIihI will blow over the Vindhya-

*""*""'" " ('"''''f <'«'«'M"«'««wl by elephanta (t. 23), to

ll»'f\.T.lwUhUHtfi\>\'««.)eopled by Saxaris

VlHHIuN Mhiiii
IhIhn.

M II . M.)I.i<iuIh( M|m,„(„,„ xvwv ,v«,ia*mi to be a part of the

\Uv \\t«y« w 0\,^w «xU< tx» «N» ^» V..,.«-;^s,>wi to seethe

\*\*\V \S*»^\A <*"^>«v^>»* ^^^^^>« vx»" KV«:.- «tHs ^r. JK). This

. , . *^'^^ ** *"** ♦^^^ >v» Kp<« M^.:-^«iL hnt it i»

V.4-V v,,s,vt.^vc ^^ ^-^v Ww Ttx^er* Any.
vv vv ., V. .. ,v-.^ . V .. ;\.vx^v\,^^v >^,.:^>^ ^:tk the

XXs.. \ \

■\

^ "* * • ^ -^ ^ ^-^-^.»C•^ ^^J.

'^^ W^^I^^AnNi

Vol. I, Ko. 8.] Pavana-dutani or Wi7id' Messenger, 45

-^- [iST. S.]

Suhma is the old name of a Division of Bengal comprising
" * Suhma northern Midnapore, District Hughly west

^ "^'*' ^ * of the Sarasvati river and the eastern part

of District Bui'dwan. TdmraltpH was its port,* and Vtjayapura its
capital. Vijayapiira is apparently to be identified with Nndiah
(!Nadia or NavadviT)), which was the capital of Lakhanija at the
time of the im*oad of Mu^ammad-i-BaUit-yar.* Is this name con-
"^ • nected in anj way with Yijajrasena, grandfather of Lak^ma^a-

i sena ?

The poet Dhoyika (or Dhoyi Kaviraja as per colophon) can
The time of the have his time ascertained only approxi-
poet. mately. Being mentioned in Oita-govinday

verse 4, he most be a contemporary of or slightly older than Jaya-
deva. But Jayadeva's time has not yet been definitely ascertained.
Dhoyika's verse is quoted in Jalhana's Suhhaftta-muktcivalt, com-
piled in the second half of the 13th centnry^ and in ^i^dharadasa's
Sadukti'karnamrta compiled in A.D. 1205-6> So he must be
earlier than 1205. He cannot be much earlier, for in the present
poem he makes Lak9mana of the Sena dynasty its hero.

The chronology of the Sena dynasty in Bengal is involved in
much confusion. It is thei^fore discussed at length in an Appen-
dix. I have therein come to the conclusion that Laksma^asena
ruled from A.D. 1170-1 to about 1200. He must have ruled
for some time, before he could be mentioned as having gone out
on world-conquest (v. 2). Consequently the composition of the
poem may be reasonably inferred to have taken place in the fourth
quarter of the 12th century.

The text with an index of 9loka-beginnings and of proper
names, chiefly geographical, is appended.

APPENDIX.

The Sena Dynasty of Bengal.

The chronology of this dynasty was, up to a recent period.

The Ban A DvnAatv ^^^^^J ^«*^ ^^ traditions given in the
The sena i^ynasty. Kula-panjikSs of ghafaks (matchmakers),

and in such works as Ksttiga-vanigQvali-carttam and Ain-i-Akbari«
Becent researches are, however, clearing the ground. As the
author of Pavana'dutam^ Dhoyika, was the court poet of Lak^ma-
^asena, it has become necessary to ascertain the approximate time
of. this king, and thus indirectly of the whole dynasty*

I Dafakumira-eariU 6th ^ceahisa " Suhmefu Ddnuilipt-ahvayasya*'
S Barerty's Iranslatioii, p. 654.

^ NoticeB of Bombay 8ui8krit Mas., 1897, p. XXVI (Ooi-dhoi Kamrdja)^
« B. L. ICittra's Notices of Sanakrit Mm , Vol. Ill, pp. IS5, 146.

46 Pavaiia-dutam or Wind- Messenger. [March, 1905.

Booaments for From the following docnments the succes-
determining their sion of the Sena kings has been well estab-
Suooession. lished :—

(a) The ValWa-caritam of Ananda Bhatta (Biblotheca In-
dica edition) p. 61 ; Adhyaya 12, 9lokas 50-3 ;

(h) The MSS. of Dana-s&gara and Adhhutorsdgara attributed
to Ballalasena (their introductory verses) ;^

L, pp. 307-8).

(d) The copperplate inscriptions.

(i) Tarpanadighi, of Lak^manasenadeva (J.A.S,B,,
XLIV, p. 11).

(ii) Bakarganj, of ViQvnrupasenadeva (J.A.S.B., VII,
p. 43).

(iii) Madanapa^a ; of Vi^varupasenadera (J. A.S.B.,
LXV, p. 9.)

These show that the dynasty was founded by Samantasena ;
_. . „ . then his son Hemantasena who married

Their SuooeBBion. Yasodevi ; then his son Vijayasena ; then

his son Valla lasena ; then his son Lak^manasena who married
^ri-tandra (?) ; and lastly his son Vi^varupasena.

The succession thus proved disposes of the assumption of
Dr. B. L. Mittra that two Lak^mai^iasenas existed in the Sena
dynasty.* It also sets* aside the traditionary list in the Ain-i-
Akbari*.

The next question is about the times of the Sena kings. The

Their Ghronoloffv determination of these times largely de-

pends upon the ascertainment of Lak^mapa-
8ena*s rule. For the beginning of Lak^ma^asena's rule various
dates have been given A.D. 1106,* 1119.20,«^ 1170,« and 11727
On account of conflicting data, the solution of the problem is
not free from doubts.

The first historical fact to be noted is an era, known as
T i» ana^ntt Vwa Lak^manscua's samvat, abbreviated to W»
liBiLsmansena jsra. ^^ This ei^ is still used in Mithila, and

I Of the Ddna'Sagara, extracts from three MSS. are available (B. L.
Mittra, Notioea of Sanskrit MSS. I, p. 161; Eg^elling, India office MSS.
Catalogne, p. 646 ; and " Notices/* 2nd Series by Hnraprasad pitri, Vol .11,
p. 170). Of the Adhhuta-sdgara extract from one MS. is k^own, Report on
Sanskrit MSS., Dr. B. 6. Bhan^&rkar, 1897, pp. 83^86.

5 J.A..S.B., XLYII, pp. 898, 408.

6 Jarrett's Transl. Yol. II, p. 146.

4 J.A..S.B. XLYII, p. 898; ValUla-carifam, Adh. 27, ^1. 4, p. Idl.

( Epig. Ind. Vol. I, p..806i J.A.S.B., LXIX, p. 62.

• J.A.S.B., LXV, p. 81.

1 Beport on Sanskrit MSS. in Bombay, 1897, p. LXXXVIJI

Vol. I, Xo. 3.] Piwana-dutam or Wtnd-Messeiiger. 47

•according to some modem calculations it began in A.D. 1106. But
-calculating from six of the eai*liest dates (five in MSS. and one in
inscription), Pi-of. Kielhom arrived at the conclusion that the
•era really began in A.D. 1119-20. According to him the La° Sa°
was an oixiinary southern (Karttikadi) year with the amanta
scheme of lunar fortnight ; and the first day of the era was
Kdrttika siidi one of the expired 9aka year 1041 = 7th October
A.D. 1119.^ I think this is a right conclusion, particularly as
it is supported hy a statement in the Akbamama* and other
^evidences.

The era is generally taken to begin from the first year of
The era taken to Lak^manasena's reign which, according to
'begi^firomhis flbrst an anecdote in the Tabakat-i-Na^iri,^ began
yoar. with his birth. But this view is open to

Objeotions, serious objections. Firstly, it involves the

■assumption of a rule of more than eighty years — a fact unprecedented
in Indian history and I suppose in the recorded history of the world
too, even if the mle began ivoia his bii'th. Moreover, in the Adhhuta-
s^gara Ballalasena is described to have raised his son to the throne
before his own death.* If so, Lak^manasena must have been of
same age at the time of accession ; and his i*eign for more than
eighty yeai-s becomes still less credible. Secondly, in the MSS.,
the Dana-sagara is said to have been composed by Vallalasena in
paka year C(^^i'fiuva-dafa (1091); while the Adhbnta-sdgara is
said to have been begun by Ballalasena in the ^aka year Kha-
nava-lch-end-vdhde (1090).^ These show that Ballalasena was
reigning in paka 1090 and 1091 (A.D. 1168-69 and 1169-70),
which is incompatible with the assumption of Lak9maQasena's
rule beginning in A.D. 1119-20. The MS. of Adhhuta-sQgara dis-
tinctly says that though begun by Ballalasena, it was completed
by his son Lak^maaasena, whom he (Ballala) raised to the throne
before his death. If this be true, Lak^manasena could not, possibly,
have been Icing before A.D. 1168-69. Thirdly, it is curious to
find that not a single date in the Laksmanasena era has yet been
found earlier than 51, i.e., earlier than A.D. 1170-1.*

The wording of xhe two known inscriptions of this era
ttons in this era. *^® peculiarly worded, and run as follows ;—
(1) Qrimal'Laksmansena^sy-dttta'rdjye sam 51 Bhddra-ditie 29.^

I Ind. Ant., XIX (1890), p. 6. ; Bp. Ind. I, p. 306, not© 6.

i " For example, in Bengal, the era dates from the beginning of the rule
of liaohman Sen, from which date till now 465 years have elapsed ;" Akbnr-
nama, Beveridge's transi , vol. II, pp- 21-2. 465 La. Sa.-1606 gaka-1641 V.
SaniTat.

8 Major Raverty's Translation, p. 665.

♦ Notices of Bombay MSS., 1897, pp. LXXXV-VI.

& Catalogue of India Office MSS., p. 545; and Bom. MSB., 1897,
p. LXXXVI.

• Jour. Bora. Br. R.A.8., XVI, p. 368.
1 Jour. Bom. Br.B.A.S., XVI, p. 858.

48 F avaiia-dutam w Wind-Messenger. [March, 1905,

(2) ^rfmal-Laksmanasena'devapadSni'afUa'^'fljye sum 74 VatgH-
hha-vadi 12 Ghirau.^

Literally, these would mean — " years 51 or 74 expired of
Laksmanasena's reign, " i.e., his regnal years. But may not the
years really refer to that of a general era which fell in that king's
reign? Several such instances are known in Indian epigra-
phy, e,g.—

(1) In the Junagafh inscription of Budradaman —

I. 4i — " E/iidradamno varshe dvt-saptatttaTne 70 2."*

(2) In the Garhva inscription of Candragupta II —

L 10 — " Qn-Oand/i^agupta-rajya samvvatsare 80 8.^"

(3) Bilsar inscription of Dhruva^arman —

I, 6 — " ^rl-Kumiaraguptasy'dhliivarddhamana-vijaya'
rajya-samvatsare shan-navatey^

(4) Grarhva inscription of Kumaragupta I —

/. 2 — " Qrt'KnTndragupta-rnjya'Samvatsare 90 8. "^

(5) Kosam inscription of Bhimavarman —

l. 1 — " MaharSjasya Cri-BMmavarmanah samvaf 100
30 9."«

(6) Halsi plates of Kakusthavannan —

/. 4—" Sva-v&ijayike aqitit^me samvatsare,'^ ^

In (1) the year is refeiTed to paka era and in (2) to (5)
the years to Gupta era ; they are not considei^ed to be i^gnal years.

More facts ai^e needed to arrive at a reliable conclusion. On
The era is f^om *^® existing data the safest theory at present
the fouader'8 first is to take the first year of the era as the
year. first year of the dynastic founder, and to

believe that on the accession of Lak^ma^asena, the era was
either formally adopted or made so widely prevalent that the era
came to be known as Lak^manasena's. This theory meets the
objections above raised on the ground of length of years or the
dates of compilation of the DSna-sogara and the Adhhuta-sdgara^
If also helps to explnin the following additional facts : —

In the Deopara inscription, v. 20, Vijayasena is described to
have assailed the lord of Gauda, to have put down the prince of
Kimarnpa and defeated the Kalinga. In the succeeding verse, 21^

I Ind. Ant. X, p. 846.

« Ep. Ind., VIII., p. 41 and note 6.

& Fleet's Guptn IiiBcnptions, p. 37.

♦ n . M M P- ^^

• i» »» »i P* 41.

* ,. ,» .. p. 267,
1 Ind. Ant. VI, p. 28.

Vol. I, No. 3. J Pavatui'dutam or Wind-Messenyer, 49

are named Nanya, Ragbava, Vardhana and Vira, as (kings) yrho
-weve kept in prison.^ Presumably tbese names include the
names of tbe defeated kings. Wbo was tbe defeated king of
Kalinga ? Is be Ragbava ? Sueb was undoubtedly tbe name of
a Kalinga king wbo ruled between A.D. 1156-1171.* Tbe early
years of Ragbava (A.D. 1156-60) would fit in witb tbe last years
of Vijayasena, if tbe above view be adopted.

According to X^'bakat-i-Na^iri,* tbe news of tbe victories of
Mu^ammad-i-Ba^t-yar and of bis conquest of Bibar reacbed tbe
eai^ of Rae Lakbrna^iab, wben be bad been on tbe tbrone for a
period of eigbty years ; and tbe following year be invaded the
Rae*s capital Xudiab and sacked it. Now, a rule of eigbty years
and more is not in itself credible, as I bave already pointed out.
But if tbe year be taken as Sam vat 80 of tbe era during tbe reign
of Lak^manasena, as Professor Kielbom pointed out,* tbe incredi-
bility disappears. Tbis would make tbe inroad and tbe sack of
Nfidlab fall in Samvat 81 or A.D. 1199-1200. Tbis date very
nearly agrees witb tbe date arrived at from Mussulman histories
by Dr. Blocbmann, as A.H. 594 or A.D. 1198.^

No doubt Major Raverty beld tbe date of inroad as A.H.
590 or A.D. 1194,* because Muhammad-i-Bakht-yar wbo died in
A.H. 602 is said to bave reigned 12 years. But tbis does not
necessarily mean 12 years after bis sacking of Nudiab ; it may
as likely refer to the time of bis first charge, when holding
the fief of Kashmandi (or Bhugwat and Bbiuli).'^ On the other
hand, Dihli was occupied in A.H. 589, and Dr. Blocbmann shewed
that after tbis occupation various events occurred witb respect to
Mubammad-i-Bakbt-yar which would bave taken several years.
" It would, indeed, be a close computation if we allowed but five
years for tbe above events, i.e., if we fixed tbe conquest of Ben-
gal as having taken place in 594 H., or A.D. 1198. "^

Lak^mana Sena's reign came to an end shortly after Mu^am-
mad-i-Bakht-yar's inroad.^ From the introduction to Sadukti-
kamamrta, it does not appear that Qridharadasa was Mahflmantfa-
Ilka under Lak^ma^asena, though he says his father had served
him.^0 Evidently therefore this king did not live at the time of
composing that work in A.D. 1205-6. 1200 A.D. might accord-
ingly be taken as the approximate termination of Lak^ma^asena's
rule.

1 Ep. Ind. I, p. 309, liDes 19-20.
> J. As. Soo. Beng., LXXII, p. 113.
8 Transl. pp 554, 655, 667.

♦ Ind. Ant., XIX, p. 7.

» J.A.8.B., XLV, p. 276.

• Tab. Na? transl., note 4 below p. 669, note 8 below p. 673.
T „ pp. 549.650.

8 J.A.8.B., XLV, p. 276.
^ Transl., p. 668.
10 B. L. Mittra, Notices of Sanskrit MSS., Ill, p. 141.

50 Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messentjer, [March, 1905,

Chronology of To summarise, the chronology of the

the Sena Kings* Sena kings would then stand as follows : —

Samantasena, founder (AD. 1119-20)

His son
Hemantaseiia ■» Tasodevi

Hi8 son.
Viiayasena, contemporary of Raghava (also of Coraganga)l

(1140— 1158-eO?)

I
His son

Ballalasena (1158-60—1170)

I
I

His son
Lak^manasena (1170-1200 Circa) ^gri-tandra (?)

Sam 51, 74, 80, 81.
Inroad of Muhammad-i-Bakht-yar (A.D.I 199 Circa)

I
His son

Vi^varupaseiia.

It is noted in the Tabakat-i-Naairl : " His [Lakhmaniah'sJ
descendants, up to this time, are rulers in the country of Bang."*
By "up to this time, " I suppose, is meant either the years in
which the author was in Bengal, A.H., 641-2 (A.D. 1244-5) or the
year in which it was finished A.H. 658 (A.D. 1260).

Some discussion took place in the time of Dr. Rajendralal
Their caste. Mittra as to the caste of the Sena kings.

In the Deopara inscription of Vijayasena,
Samantasena is described as " Brahma-Ksatriy-dnam kula-^ro'
damaJ"^ The same term Brahma- Ksatra is used m the Valldla-
caritam for these kings.*

What does Brahma-K§atra mean ? Prof. Kielhom translated
the above passage " head-garland of the clans of BrahmaDas and
K^atriyas.*^" In Quka-sandega v. 34, Kerala land is described as
" Brahma-Jcsatram jan<ipadam ; " and in note 11, the word is taken
to mean " Brahman-kinged.^ " Were the Sena kings then Brah-
manised K^attriyas ? In the inscriptions they are said to be of
lunar race.

Did the founder come from the south P In the Deopara in-

. scription it is said that in the lunar race

Their origin, arose Dak9inatya rulers, Virasena and the

rest (v. 4) ; that in that Sena family was bom Samantasena

(v. 5) who singly killed the robbers of Karnata (v. 8), and who in

his old age frequented the hermitages on the banks of the Ganges-

1 Valldla-cai-itam, Adh. 12, v. 52, p. 61.

S Transl., p. 558.

B £p. Ind., I, p. 806.

♦ Adhyoya 12, v. 54, p. 61 j cf. v. 45.

b Ep. Ind., I., p. dia.

8 J.B.A.S., 1884, p. 409; for note 11, pp. 483-4.

Vol. T, No. 3.] Pavana-dutam at' Wind-Messenger. 51

(v. 9) ; and that from him was bom Hemantasena (v. 10). With
this may be compared Dhoyika's selection of the southerly breeze^
and his high eulogy of the Co/a-land as the ornament of the south.
Is it likely that Samantasena is connected with Coraganga of
Kalioga P ^o^aganga conquered and apparently killed the Mandara
king on the bank of the Ganges (Mandara seems identifiable with
Suhma), after he had conquered Utkala^ ; nnd Utkala must have been
conquered by him several years before ^aka 1040 (A D. 1118-9),
an inscription of which year describes him as " sahal-Othala-sam-
rdjya-padavt-vtrajmanath.^'^ Is it therefore possible to infer that
Coragadga, after killing the king of Suhma, put Samantasena in
charge as feudatory ?

i J.A.S.B., 1895, p. 139, nofce 1 ; Do. 1896, p. 241 ; cf. also J.A.S.B. 1908.
p. 110.

» Ind. Ant. XVIII, p. 169.

Pavana-dutam or Wmd-Messenyer, [March, 1905.

INDEX OF PROPER NAMES.

[The numeral figures refer to the number of ver«e«.]

Uraga'purat a town, — 8, of. 10.
KanaJui'nagara, Gandharva town — 1.
Kavi-narapati, — 103 (of. colophon).
Kavi'Kimdhhrtdm Cakravartti, (title)

—101.
Kanci, town--12, 15.
Kdlinga^nagara, town— 21.
Kiveri, river — 15.

Kuvalayavatlf the heroine, — 2, 62.
Keralif nation— 16, 26.
Oanga, river— 16, 27, 32, 89, 102, of.

83.
Qoddvankay residents of river Godi-

vari — 21.
Oauda-dega^ country— 6,
Oau£Ea-ri;a«-> 06.

Oauda-Kaawfl king of Gawda — 5.
Qnud-endra king of Ganda — 101.
Candan'ddrif Malaya hill range— U
Cola^ nation — 14.

Tapana'tanaydf river Jamuna— 38.
Tdmraparmf river — 8.
Dakfindtya, tract— 17, 68.
Deva'rdjya, country — 28.
Dhoytka, poet — 101.
DhoyUKavir^ay poet (with title)—

colophon.

Pancapsara, tank — 19.
Pdr^'dega, country — 8«
Bhdgirathif river — 83.
Bhujaga^ura, town — 10.
Malaya, a hill range —
Malaya-kaiaka^^,
Malaya-Jefmddhara,'^6, cf. 1.
IfoZayaja-rajaA- 71 .
Malaya-pavana^'Sf 85.
Malaya-maruia — 9, 92.
Malaya'Opatyakd — 62, 88.
Mdsyakarifi, saint, — 19.
Mdlyavanta, hill range — 18.
Yaydti'nagari, town — 26.
fiimecvara, god and place — 11.
Bevd, river Narmmada— 25.
Lankd'dvipa, Ceylon Island — 10.
Lakfmana, the king and hero— 2.
Lopdmudrd, wife of Agastya R91
Vindhya, a range of hills — 23, 24.
Vijayapura, capital — 36.
(Javariy tribe— 25.
dri-khai^ddri, hill— 8, 62.
BenO'dnvaya, the Sena dyna8ty<*28
Suhmay country— 27.
Sva-madt, river Ganges— 80.

Vol. I, No. 3.] Pat'ana'dutafii or Wind-Meseuger. 53

[N. 8.-]

'Wif-fTTiO I

'T^ ^T iZ5 fSHci^OTl^H ^ W^^ I

* *^ ^ •

_ ^ • • •»>■

^wn^ wft ^^ »WT ^*miiWt«f^S>n^2
jfvSt f^fvr wft ft^nn tw jufi^^ i •
^?tv(wT) wit frorftwt iw^^4fl Wt-

54 Parafia-dutam or Wind-Messenyer. [March, 1905.

.Vol. I, No. 8. ] Pavatm-dutam or Wiitd' Messenger, 55r

^HfmwPi JitW^: iTTfei^Tii ^WT I

'n(iRPT(ti)fiHfffi?w 'PiJ %tnn?t cfwr: i

^6 Pavawjk-dutam or Wind-Messenger. [March, 1905.

^ft*l^i5^ ^^\^ "fw at TT«W!^ I
mi^ m% ^^^ ipr^rwii»rn^i5^T^T^ I rr i

ai^i ^T^rt ^Jrfir «rirfliTi^«rT «t ^nn^s i

VoL I, No. 3.] Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messevger. 5X

[N, 8.]

inef^(^)^ vrqfinntt^ j^(^)tCTT$'

ir^^$^i^ (Fol. 4**) f^fipRrfiCT^T«f!^T %^
n^ iHiuwwn^ ^irarer ft«nfif i i\ i
miw iwfif ^wn OTpB wwtin

a|ilinflfitilI^qei<((«fr)^ilV€l4iPii4i^l

i^t^^ns vniww: nn^HT)^ iwt i

;* 'i-ij-ifiitam or Wind-Messenger, [March, 1905.

Hf wwrwRir »wi??hn^ *<r»^««s it ^^ i
iffei: ffJ^T H^ ^«wrTc[ ftf g*ri^fift ^^ • ^8 i

- - *^ ^ _ TlL- i_*^ 1

wi«^r ^\ (Fol. 5*) iTVJnrN^fTsjTi^i^j^i ^^ I
funniiTW T7RiHi?m(^ftir)firhn|nrwwniT«

Vol. I, No. 3 ] PavanU'dutam or Wind-MessetPjer. 69

IN, 8.]

T3{ m^ (FoL 6^) ^fiRrftrffRla^T w^si^ i

iJt^J^TO^ wi^^ftwn i?i^ff??l'iTO' ^r(%*

^njn:T(irT*)^?:wTfTOT: inr^^f-fi^t i

^T^rejpff ?:^PifTO% ^ftc^TT^ny ^w i 8^ i
<SI*^i i imi<ft<i ^^ i^ q4i \ii fstf (Fol. 6') m^

Oin^w* wrf^-^f^ vitif^n^ vm i

60 Pavana-dutam (rr Wind -M ess tnjer, [March, 1905**

tiro ?hlt «R1!cl«?^: ^HTgJ^^TWr^

fHii w^if^ i^ftWt: ^wirtf fiw(FoL 70'W I

Vol. I, Ko. 3.] Pavana-dutam or Wirid' Messenger. 61

IN. 8.]

62 Pavana-dutam or Wind- Messenger. [March, 190&

^f^iTI^ ftf'rf^ ftftpn jpsrerr ^Fr«iHnf

•IWT «*Jn^VT ^cTj: HI ^ i^sfffif OT I « I (FoL &")

iftyif(^) 'fpffj ntnr cHc^ ^4^fi ^v<iif!f-

VoL I, No. 3.] Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger, 63

IN. S.]

?^> mm ^m^( «i * )Km «fK^)creTiTOirni i
^c^t^ ^^Rt vf^i ftimin ^Tfncrftj i ei^ i

64» Pavana-datafh or Wind-Messenger. [March, 1905»

HT^ ^n^ «r«r«nT^ ww?^(^) tr^jtiw
JX WW ftHcf ftr^ w?r5i»inr N'licKitfl

Vol. I, No, 3.] Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenyer. '>5

IN. SO

^nr^pi^ ^(tt)w^ (Fol. 10')^r»ftHxg*rrai(«T)^[^WFi

<^
§w cT^s ^v^ 5wr m^^'^wiira: i ^ i

4 I Wd*^4cia VfVt 5«H: TOcTf : I

mg:w!5TfftTenFnrt ^r^^fi y^m

06 Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger* [March, 190Si

cTjT^Trt f^iwfir «T^ ^jskm^ (FoL 10**) fkf^m

f^ %^V^fK *\^<^^ ^«||^d«^

flrer^

m ^s^^qfir^^nrfir (Fol. 11') f^CfsS)^^! m^

!I«I I^ITT^ SWT fnr^T fi|HJc?t ^TOqfh" I

^^^■^^^^^^■A^H^^M^H ^BM^B^^B ^^^B^H^^M^^^^^^ ^^i^V^^H^^B^^tf^BM ^^^^^^^^^^M ^^^^^^^^i^^^^k ^^^^^^^^^^^B£

Vol. I, No. 3.] Pavana-dtUam or Wind-Messenger, ^f

•s^.

«^5 wwf "n^ ftiin^^ftf ^gpn f%ft[-

lIB^i^ ^T^ H^m «f^ ift?^: I

^fnmw T'ifinpTO 'nine: *<jw^t i ^^ t
ff?y5c?ffiT2 «wr ^ wrt (Fol. 11^) ii^rft(ift)w ^rei

•^ Puvana-datam or Wind^Messenyer. [March, 1905.

(Fol. 12*)

(Pol. 12^)

ToL I, No. 3.J Pavana'dutam or Wind-Messenqer.
[N. 5.]

AN INDEX OP fLOKA—BEGINNINGS.

• • •

WTW^ier: w^U mMvi... i\ ^WT \^ ^T^ ^m^ ... ^^

• . .

• a .

• • .

• a •

d^flfti Mti4i<rtiai ••• ^^

PavatM-dutam or

... \»l,

W? if'f «tftiPr fwa" ... «^

Wind'^fe8senger, [March, 1905.

• • •

...

• • •

...

• « •

V^ ^^ ClTflf'Icf ... 8t
^^^\ MK^^M^ ... 8«

• • •

• ••

\^
«8

TO^IT^T 8mirf5f nM\ «i

Vol. I, No. 3.] Pavana-di
IN. 8.-]

itaHh 01

• Wind 'Messenger.

^W^W HiK^KHl^ ...

•Jl^<ifi^4^ft ftra^.,.

^V IXWT ^^T ft'Rn ...

fwwigfmr THJDirftifH:

^'^

^J^«ft«^ 'TTftr fiff^:

f^wugi^ft:^ f^f^afT...

^roftjip^ ^RT^T^rm . . •

^R*^ fi^T U^^ . . .

§^jj?t^i^i^w^^Ct

1«>

72 The Hydra of the Calcutta Tanks. [March, 1905.

6. T^ Hydra o/ the Calcutta Tanks — By Nelson Annandale,
B.A., Deputy Superifitendent of the Indian Museum,

Description, — Body and tentacles very elongate, the latter not
clubbed ; body cylindrical throughout ; six (sometimes five) tentacles
in well-grown, five in young, individuals ; ovaries one or two, testes
numerous. Testes and ovaries do not occur together on the same
individual. Ooloration. — Tentacles and base milky white ; distal
portion of the body either pale or dark olive-green, deep chestnut,
orange-brown, pale brown, cream-colour or dirty white ; never
bright green.

When I exhibited specimens of the Calcutta Polyp to the
Society I was inclined to regard it at most as a variety of Hydra
viridisj using the specific name in a more extended sense than
its author Linnaeus adopted, to include H. fusca. A careful
study of the descriptions of the European forms and an examina-
tion of a larger number of Indian specimens has since led me to doubt
whether I was correct ; in coming to a decision I am indebted to a
note received from my friend Dr. J. H. Ashworth, of the University
of Edinburgh, who has not, however, seen the Indian form. On the
whole this form appears to be related to Pallas' H, vulgaris ; but
the question of specific characters, in animals so simple and so
variable in appearance from moment to moment, is a veiy difficxdt
one. From typical specimens of H, vulgaris^ it differs in several
important details.

When the animal is clinging to an inclined or vertical surface
the expanded tentacles are arched, their proximal portion project-
ing in a straight line from the disk, while the distal extremity
either falls downwards or extends upwards. Every phase of
colour may be found in the same tank, but the darker speci-
men are more common over deeper water. Specimens kept in a
bright light fade so as to become of an almost pure and uniform
white, whatever their original coloration may have been.

The Polyp is usually found on the under surface of the
floating leaves of water-plants. It is by no means uncommon
but may be a little hard to find. Sexual reproduction takes
place at any rate from December to March, but probably

I I have jnsfc seen Downin{<*a recently published summary of whar. is
known regRrding the species of Hydra^ in his paper on " The Spermatogenesis of
Hydra. {Zool. Jahrh.^ Anat.f 1905 ) He recogDizes, on wiiat appear to be suffi-
cient groands, the following fonr, with one variety of the first : — (1) H. viridiSf
Linn. ;(2)H. gri8ea,hiuu. (with H. vulgaHSj Pall., as a synonym); (8) H.
fuscay Linn. ; and (4) H. dtoecia, Downing. If sexoal characters are to be
taken into account, as hns been done in constituting U. dioecia — and the only
objection is that a specimen which it is desirable to identify may not be breed-
ing — then the Indian Hydra shoald be regarded as a distinct species, thoagh
it may only be protandrous or the converse. Under the circumstances it
will be convenient to give it, at any rate provisionally, specific rank, calling it
jr. orientalis. The description above is a sufficient diagnosis. June 6th» 1905.

Vol. I, No. 3.] The Hydra of the Calcutta Ttmks. 73

[jy. sf.]

ceases at the commencement of the hot weather J Bndding oc-
curs simnltaneonslj. I have not seen more than two bnds on one
adult at the same time, and one is commoner ; nor have I seen an
attached bud budding. The food consists chiefly of small Cmstacea
and worms. Large Daphniids on coming in contact with the ne-
matocysts are temporarily paralysed but break loose through their
own weight and recover movement after a few minutes. Adult
Polyps show little inclination to leave a situation in which they
have settled, and buds rarely move far from their parents ; conse-
quently, large numbers of individuals may often be found within a
small radius in the tanks, though there may be none on the sur-
rounding plants. In an aquarium they desert the water-plants
and take up a position on the side of the glass farthest from the
light. If starved they become extremely pale and attenuated
within a day or two, their colour disappearing very much more
rapidly than it does when they are well fed but kept in a bright
light. They do not seem to be able to endure a change of tem-
perature such as that brought about by the sun shining directly
on the surface of the water in a large glass jar.

So far as I am aware, the genus Hydra has not previously
been recorded from British India, but a species (//. fv^ca ?)'^ is re-
ported from Tonkin. The late Professor J. Wood-Mason, as
Major Alcock informs me, collected many specimens in Calcutta.
I have myself seen a species (probably the same as the Calcutta one)-
in an aquarium in the Experimental Grardens at Penang.

1 Since the beginning of the hot weather my captive specimens have disap.
peared, and I have not been able to find any free in the tanks. April 1 2th
1905. This remark still holds good. Jnly 2l8t, 1905.

S Richard, Mem. 8oc. »ool. France^ vii, p. 237. What may be the same
species is recorded from Turkestan (Daday, Zool, Jahrh, Syst., 1904. p. 480).

74 Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti, [March, 1905.

7. The Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti or the " Bains
Insect,'^ (Trombidium grandissimum). — By E. G. Hill, B.A., F.O.S.

The animal known to natives as hir hahoti and which is de-
acribed as the " rains insect," the " red velvet insect," the " lady
cow," in the CyclopsBdia of India, and as Bucella camiola in
Platts' dictionary, is a red mite abont half an inch long and from
a quarter to three-eighths of an inch in its widest part. It is
covered with a scarlet, velvety down, and appears on the gix)and at
the beginning of the rainy season. It is only to be found for a few
weeks in the year, bnt it has a great reputation among Mahome-
dans as an aphix>disiac, so it is collected and kept for sale in the
bazaar. The insects fi'om which the author extracted the oil for
his experiments were purchased from a dealer in Allahabad city.
They had been kept for several months, but had not putrified at
all. On pressure they exuded a deep red oil. It is this oil which
is used medically as an external application. The Cyclopsedia
quoted above states that the oil is used as a counter-irritant, but
it appears to have no such properties, and its efficacy as a medicine
is probably purely imaginary and due to its colour.

About a pound of the insects were extracted with ether in a
Soxhlet's apparatus. The extraction was carried on till the ether
came over colourless, and the various fractions were then mixed
together and the ether evaporated. The oil was slightly wet and it
was dried over a little calcium chloride. Thus obtained it was
almost as deep in colour as bromine. It had a specific gravity
of '907 at 15°C. On being kept at that tempei'ature for a day or
two, it set to a semi-solid mass which melted at 18'*-19^. The oil
had a very peculiar odour somewhat resembling that of Malwa oil
of opium. It began to boil with decomposition at 240*^. The first
portions of the distillate were liquid, but subsequently at a higher
temperature solid products also passed over. These were all
colouiless. Acrolein was obviously one of the pix>ducts.

With strong sulphuric acid the oil gave a vivid blue colour
which turned to green. With nitric acid all colour was destroyed.
Cold potassium hydrate, chlorine water, hydrochloric acid and
ferric chloride had no action on the oil.

The oil readily dissolved in ether, but alcohol left a small por-
tion undissolved. This was of the same red colour as the original
oil : it was more soluble in hot alcohol, but was thrown out of
solution as the alcohol cooled.

With nitrous acid the oil gave a buttery elaidin in a few hours.

On distillation in steam partial hydrolysis took place, and the
distillate had a pungent odour which seemed to be that of
butyric acid. This acid was recognized by neutralizing the
distillate with potassium hydrate and evaporating to dryness on
the water bath. The salt thus obtained was treated with alcohol
And a few drops of sulphui*ic acid, and warmed, when the distinctive

Tol. I, No. 3.] Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti, 75

[N. 8.']

odour of ethyl butyrate was obtained. The distillate with steam
also contained a small quantity of a solid acid.

The following values were obtained for the oil by the usual
methods. It determining the saponification value aniline blue was
used as an indicator and gave fairly good results, the very deep
colour of the oil making very accurate observations extremely
difficult :—

Sp. Gr. at 15^

.. -906-907 "1

Acid value

.. 62-3

Saponification value

.. 194-7

^Mean of three

Ester value

.. 132-4

determinations.

Unsaponifiable

.• 37 percent.^

Keichert-Meissl value

.. 0-55

Hehner value

.. 94

Iodine value

.. 65

The unsaponifiable matter above was extracted with ethyl
ether from a solution of the soda soap. It contained a good deal
of colouring matter.

Preltmtnary examination. — Aa a preliminary examination part
of the extracted oil was saponified with potassium hydrate and
the fatty acids liberated. These were then fractionally precipitated
with an alcoholic solution of magnesium acetate. The various frac-
tions were decomposed with hydrochloric acid, and the melting
points of the free acids thus obtained were all between 48® and 66®.
The above indicated the probable presence of a mixture of the
glycerides of the more commonly occurring fatty acids, but re-
crystallization of the six fractions of the free acids obtained from
thi magnesium soap gave a comparatively large amonnt of an acid
melting at about 52^, which seemed to indicate the possibility that
there was a large amount of myristic acid in the oil.

Unsaponifiahle matter. — A quantity of the oil was carefully
saponified with alcoholic potash, and the soap dried on clean sand.
This was then extracted with ethyl ether in a Soxhlet apparatus.
The extract contained soap, so it was dried on sand and extracted
a second time. The insoluble portion was added to the soap left
from the first extraction. The ether extract seemed to contain some
unsaponified oil, so it was saponified a second time and again ex-
tracted with ether. On evaporation of the extract the solid product
was apparently free from soap or oil. This was fractionally crys-
tallized from alcohol in two fractions which had melting points of
106° and 95°. These fractions were separately acetylized by boil-
ing with acetic anhydride nnder an inverted condenser, and tie ace-
tates precipitated by pouring into boiling water. The acetaes were
carefully washed and crystallized from alcohol when their melting
pointe were 98^ and 68° respectively. The acetates were decom-
posed with potassium hydrate and the alcohols taken up in ether.
The extracts were evaporated to dryness and crystallized from
alcohol and had melting points of 110° and 104^ respectively.

Neither of the products thus obtained crystallized in the

76 Go7npositi07i of the oil from Bir Bahott. [March, 1906^

characteristic maimer of cholesterol. The crystals were thin
plates, but their shape was quite irregular. Tested for cholesterol
by the colour reactions the results were as follows : —

A solution of a very small quantity in acetic anhydride gave
an intense blue colour on the addition of strong sulphuric acid
drop by drop, and the same result was obtained by Burchard's
modification of the above test in which the cholesterol is first
dissolved in 2 c.c. of chloroform, and then treated with 20 drops
of acetic anhydride and one drop of sulphuric acid. Salkowski's
modification of Hager's reaction gave the colour which is charac-
teristic of cholesterol. A minute quantity was dissolved in 2 c.c.
of chloroform and an equal volume of concentrated sulphuric
added to it and the mixture shaken. On separating, the chloro-
formic layer was coloured red, and on standing changed to purple
on the following day when the lower layer had a decided green
fluoresence. It should be stated that the unsaponifiable matter
used in the above tests was quite free from colour.

These reactions and the melting point of the alcohols obtained
indicate the presence of cholesterol, and possibly of a fatty alcohol
of high molecular weight. The amount of unsaponifiable matter
available was too small for fui'ther investigation.

The Fatty acids. — The soap freed from unsaponifiable matter
was treated with dilute hydrochloric acid, and heated to liberate
the fatty acids. These were thoroughly washed and dried in a
steam-oven. They were still tinted red, but not enough so ta
render impossible the use of phenol-phthalein as an indicator.

For the mixed fatty acids the following values were obtained : —

Saponification value ... ... 199

(Hence mean mol. wt.
Iodine value
Melting point

282)
66-6
31^-32*'

It is stated by Lewkowitsch that when the mixed fatty acids
are triturated with alcohol specific gravity '911, the unsaturated
acids are almost completely dissolved. Accordingly the mixed
acids obtained as above were treated in that way in the cold and
filtered. The filtrate was reserved for treatment by Varrentrap's
method. The residue of saturated acids was washed with alcohol
sp. gr. '911 and fractionally crystallized from absolute alcohoL
Three fractions were thus obtained, and each of these was recrys-
tallized three times from hot alcohol. The melting points were
then 54"*, 53°, and 53"*. 6. After a fourth crystallization the melt-
ing points were 54°. 7, 53". 4 and 63°. 6, respectively. They were
thus very nearly pure, but not quite, and the presence of myristic
acid with a small quantity of palmitic or stearic acids was
indicated. The three fractions were mixed and put on one
side.

The filtrate from the alcohol sp. gr. '911 were evaporated down
to dryness and saponified with an alcoholic solution of potassitim
hydrate. The soap was exactly neutralized with acetic acid and

VoL I, No. 3.] Compmitton of the oil from Bir Bahott, 77

[N. S.']

poured in a tliiii stream into a boiling solution of lead acetate
(7 per cent.) with constant agitation. The operation was conducted
in a flask according to Tortelli and Ruggeri's modification of Var-
rentrap's method. The solution was cooled and the supernatant
liquid poured o£E and the lead salt washed with lukewarm water
and then dried with filter paper. The lead salts in the flask were
then warmed with ether on the water bath, and shaken, until they
had completelj disintegrated. The flask was kept at a tempera-
ture of lO^ for 24 hours, and then the liquid was filtered. The
filtrate was decomposed with dilute hydrochloric acid, washed, and
the ether evaporated o£E in a stream of dry carbonic acid. The
unsaturated acids obtained in this way gave an iodine value of 84.
They were almost colourless, having a faint yellow tint, and remained
liquid at the temperature of the laboratory, which was about
17° Centigrade. Compared with the acids left after trituration
with alcohol '911, the amount was not large.

The lead salts, insoluble in ether, were also decomposed with
hydrochloric acid and washed and dried. The acids were then
added to the mixed fractions from trituration with alcohol men-
tioned above. This mixture then contained all the saturated
fatty acids.

These mixed saturated acids were then treated according to a
suggestion of Partheil and Ferife. The solubilites in alcohol of the
lithium salts of oleic lauric, myristic, palmitic and stearic acids
differ sufficiently for it to be theoretically possible to separate
them. In the following, Partheil and Ferie's directions were
followed, but the alcohol used was the *' absolute alcohol " of the
laboratory and was subsequently found to have a sp.gr. of '809.

The acids (8 grams) were saponified with 120 c. c. of half
normal alcoholic potash, and the soap dissolved in 800 c.c. of 50
per cent, alcohol. A ten per cent, solution of lithium acetate in 50
per cent, alcohol was added, and the mixture warmed on the water
bath to 60^. Nearly the whole of the precipitate formed at first
passed into solution, and on cooling, a quantity of minute crystals
separated out. These were filtered off, washed with 50 per cent,
alcohol, and the filtrate which should have contained lithium oleate,
together with the lithium salts of the less saturated acids, was put
on one side.

The lithium salts precipitated on cooling the solution in 50
per cent, alcohol were dissolved in hot absolute alcohol A large
amount was required, but the whole of the precipitate was brought
into solution. The solution was then allowed to stand in the cold
for 24 hours, at the end of which time there had settled down a
precipitate which should have been the lithium salts of palmitic
and stearic acids. There was only a small quantity of this preci*
pitate, but it was filtered off, the free acid liberated in the usual
manner, well washed and crystallized from alcohol. The acid thus
obtained had a melting point of 54^^.5 to 55°, and was probably a
mixture of stearic and myristic acids in equal proportions. Accord-
ing to Keintz such a mixture melts at 54''.5, and as will be shown

78 Composttton of the ail from Bir Bahotu [March, J 905.

later there were clear indications of the presence of stearic acid in

ihe oil.

The filtrate from the solution in absolute alcohol should have
contained only lithium myristate. The alcohol was evaporated ofP
and the salt decomposed with hydrochloric acid and washed. It
melted at SS"".?, and after recrystallization at 53°.8. Myristic acid
melts at 63^.8.

Combustion of '1077 gram gave —

HgO '1162 gram, i.e., 11'98 percent, hydrogen.
CO2 '2777 gram, i.e., 70*3 per cent carbon.

Myristic acid, C14H28O2, gives 118 per cent, hydrogen and
70*5 per cent, carbon.

This acid was obviously pure myristic acid.

The filtrate from the solution in 50 per cent, alcohol was eva-
porated down and decomposed with hydrochloric acid. The free
acids thus obtained were liquid at the temperature of the labora-
tory, showing that all the liquid acids had not been removed by the
trituration with alcohol sp. gr. 911. The amount was too small for
further examination.

In the above work there is uncertainty as to the presence of
stearic acid, and owing to the method adopted for the separation
of the fatty acids it appeared desirable to make a separation
ab initio by means of the lead salts and redetermine the iodine
value for the unsaturated acids. Accordingly a fresh lot of the
Bxixed fatty acids was saponified. The soap was converted into
the lead salts and these treated according to the method of Tor-
telli and Huggeri. The solid and liquid acids were thus separated.
The liquid acids on standing for a few days at 18^ had deposited a
few small needle-like crystals which melted or dissolved in the
liquid acid on slightly warming it. These are mentioned below.

The solid fatty acids were converted into their lithium salts
as before, and the 50 per cent, alcoholic solution was heated to 60^,
cooled and filtered. The filtrate gave liquid acids on hydrolysis.
These were added to the liquid acids obtained from the lead salts,
l^he salts on the filter were digested with absolute alcohol and
filtered hot in a hot water funnel. This step was rendered neces-
sary by the fact that the dissolved myristic acid began to crystallize
out as. soon as the temperature fell more than a few degrees. The
precipitate left after filtering the hot solution gave on hydrolysis a
small quantity of acids which was dissolved in boiling alcohol.
TJie crystals were pressed in filter paper. This was repeated four
times, and after each crystaUization the melting point of the crys-
tals was taken. These were 49'.5, 51°.5, 53^5, 62^6. The re-
maining acid was fractionally crystallized in two fractions, and the
melting point of each fraction was found to be 64®.5. Since
this is. above the melting point of pure palmitic acid it may be
taken as certain that stearic acid in small quantity is present' in
the oil.

Tha filtrate from the hot aliDohol solution was cooled. There

VoL I, No. 3.] Composition of the oil froTn Bir Bahoti. 79

[N. 8.-]

was a copious deposit of lithium myristate. This was filtered off and
the freed acids were crystallized in three fractions which had melting
points of 53^*7, 53^*8 and 53^*8 respectively. The acid was thus pure
myristic acid. The filtrate from this lithium myristate was
evaporated down and the acid liberated in the usual manner. It
was myristic acid with the melting point 53'*.4, and after crystal-
lizing from alcohol, 53'''7. The unsaturated fatty acids obtained in
the second series of operations had deposited a few white crystals
after standing for two days at a temperature of 20'*. As it was
possible that they might still contain a small amount of solid acids
they were again converted into the lead salts and treated with
«ther as above described. The acid thus prepared again deposited
•crystals in two days at 18', but the iodine value was 94''.6, so it
was probable that the solid acid was an unsaturated acid.

For the investigation of this solid acid the crystals were
filtered off, and freed as far as possible from all liquid acids by
gently pressing them between filter paper. The acid was dis-
tinctly solid and was quite white. The amount was only 0*1390
gram which had the iodine value of 67. The iodine value of the
liquid filtered off was again taken to see whether it had undergone
any alteration. It was found to be 67 when taken at the same
time as that of the crystals, and when taken four days later after
exposure to air was found to be less still. Since the original value
was 95, it seems likely that the unsaturated acids consisted mainly
of oleic acid, and possibly of a lower acid of the same series. The
change in the iodine value would be due to oxidation or decompo-
sition. These changes seem similar to those experienced by Sen-
kowski (Zeit. f. Physzolog, Ghem. 1898, 434).

The acids isolated were present as glycerides as is shown by
the saponification value of the oil. Glycerol was, however, isolated
in the usual way by saponifying the oil, removing the fatty acids
and neutralizing the remaining solution. This was then evaporated
to dryness and extracted with alcohol. The extract after removal
of the alcohol was a rather dark liquid readily miscible with water.
It gave all the reactions of glycerol.

Conclusion, — The above experiments point to the conclusion that
the oil is principally composed of myristodiolein, and that there are
also present small quantities of stearin, cholesterol and colouring
matter. The butyric acid may be the result of decomposition.
There is possibly also present an alcohol of high molecular weight
belonging to the fatty series of carbon compounds.

In the above it will be seen that the author's results regarding
the separation of stearic and myristic acid do not agree with those
of Partheil and Perie. The latter state that when a mixture
of stearate, palmitate and myristate of lithium are heated with
absolute alcohol so as to dissolve the salts, only the stearate and
palmitate separate out on cooling, while the myristate remains in
solution. Lewkowitsch, indeed, suggests a method of separation
of the acids based on their work, but he qualifies his remarks by
the statement that Partheil and Feri^ worked on such small

80 Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti. [March, 1905,

quantities that their results need confirmation. What is probably
the case is that owing to the greater solubility of the lithium salt
such a separation is possible when the amount of myristic acid is
not in very large proportion to the stearic and palmitic acids, but
that when it is large the method needs modification. The author
proposes to investigate this question.

Vol. I, No. 3.] Oontributions to Oriental Herpetology, 81

[jy. flf.]

8. Contributions to Oriental Hebpetology II. — Notes on
the Oriental Lizards in the Indian Museum^ with a List of the
Species recorded from British India and Ceylon. Part I. — By Nelson
Annandale, B.A., Deputy Superintendent of the Indian Museum.
(With 2 plates.)

The collection of lizards in the Indian Mnseum is mainly Indian
find Burmese, including examples of the great majority of the in-
digenous species ; but interesting material from neighbouring coun-
tries, specially Persia, Eastern Turkestan, Yunnan, Siam and
Malaya, is also included. Of forms from more distant regions only
a comparatively small number are represented, one of the most note-
worthy being the rare and peculiar Australian Ball-tailed Gecko,
Nephrurus asper^ of which a good specimen was obtained in exchange
•with the Queensland Museum some years ago, under a wrong
identification. The Skinks and LacertidaB of Palestine, however,
are well represented by the collection of the late Dr. J. Anderson.
Regarding the majority of our Oriental specimens, an exami-
nation adds little to the systematic and geographical knowledge to
be found in Mr. Boulenger's works. Of a few, however, this is not
the case ; for there are still parts of India — the country between
northern Assam and southern Tenasserim is one of them — of which
even the systematist has not yet exhausted the vertebrate zoology,
and from which the Museum possesses specimens not examined
critically until within the last few months.

In the light chiefly of Mr. Boulenger's volume in the " Fauna
of India " and subsequent papers, it is no longer possible to main-
tain many of the older Indian naturalists* identifications, whether
published or in manuscript, and he has recently pointed out that the
names of two of the commonest of our Indian lizards cannot stand
— that Hemidactylus coctasi, D. & B., the common house-lizard of
Calcutta, must be known as Jff. flavtvirtdts, Riipp, while H,
>gleadovii, Murray (which is even more abundant in some parts
of India) is identical with H. hrookii, Gray. I must express my
personal obligations to Mr. Boulenger for examining certain
Geckos about the correct identifications of which I was doubtful,
notably the specimens on which the form Gymnoda^tylus consoh-
rinoides is founded.

GECKONID^.

Alsophtlax pipiens (Pall.)

Oymnodactylns microtis, Blanford, J.A.8.B. XLIV (2), 1875, p.

193 ; and 2nd. Yark. Miss., Bept., p. 15, pi. ii, fig. 1.
Alsophylax pipiens, Boulenger, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus, i, p. 19.

Dr. Blanford does not record this species from Ladak, though
it appears to be common in Eastern Turkestan ; but there is a

I Its locality is g^^en as Queensland.

82 Gontrihutions to Oriental Herpetology. [March, 1905.

specimen in the Musenm (from Stoliczka's Yarkand collection) i
which bears a label corresponding to the locality "Kharbu,
Ladak " in the register. By some error this individual is entered
as Gym7iodactyhi8 stoltczkse — a species so distinct from A. ptpiens
that it is hardly probable that any confusion can have been made
'between them. It is possible, however, that some accidental
exchange of labels may have taken place, and the latter species
most be recorded as belonging doubtfully to the fauna of British
India. It is desii^ble, if it does occur in Ladak, that further
specimens should be obtained. They are easily recognizable on
account of the extremely small size of the ear-opening.
Distribution. — Turkestan ; Transcaspia.

Gymnodactylus oldhami, Theob.

G. oldhami, Theobald, Cat, Bept. Brit, Ind,, p. 81. Boulenger^
Faun, Ind,j Bept,, p. 38.

The Indian Museum possesses the type and three other speci-
mens of this Gecko. Except the type, they are from Lower Burma
(" Tavoy," " Mintao," and " Tenasserim Expedition ") ; while the
type is recorded as from S. Canara. This locality is more than
doubtful. It was merely suggested to Theobald (loc. cit,) by
Beddome, who did not take the species himself in South India.

Boulenger's "keys" in the "Fauna of India" and the
"Catalogue" hold good for G. oldhami, G, fasciolatt^ and G.
variegatus, the types of all of which are in the Indian Museum
but have lately been examined by him.

Gymnodactylus marmoratus. Gray.

G. marmoratus, Boulenger, Cat. Liz. Brit, Mus. i, p, 44.

The Museum has lately received specimens of this speciefip
from the Malay Peninsula in exchange with the Selangor State
Museum. It is to be hoped that it will be sought for in Lower
Buima.

Gymnodactylus consobrinoides, nov.

The description is based on two male specimens, both probably
immatui^e, obtained in Tavoy a number of years ago by one of the
Museum collector.

Diagnosis. — ^A fonn closely allied to G, pulchellus and the
Bomean species G. cmisobrinus. There is no trace of a

prceanal gi'oove ; probably the adult male has an almost
straight series of praeanal and femoral pores, uninterrupted
in the middle line and numbering about 26 ; in the young male
these are represented by depressions in a 1*0 w of enlarged
scales. The dorsal tubercles are smaller than in G. pulchellus
and less distinctly keeled ; the ventrals are larger ; the ventral
region is not marked off by a line of enlarged tubercles; the

Vol. I, No. 3.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology, 88

plates on the ventral surface of the tail are not separated from
the scales of the sides, as they are in O, pulchellus, by heterogene-
ously shaped, slightly enlarged scales. The head is very slightly
depressed in the frontal region. In the types the colours have
faded ; the dorsal surface is dirty grey-brown, with nine darker
cross-bars, edged with dirty white, on the body, and ten or
eleven on the tail ; on the body they are considerably narrower
than the interspaces, but on the tail they become gradually
broader from before backwards ; the enlarged dorsal tubercles
are pale ; the lower surface is dirty pale brown.

Measurements (Immatui^e male).

Total length

112 m.m.

Body

36 „

Tail

62 „

Head

14 „

Breadth of head

9 „

Fore-limb ...

15 „

Hind limb ...
J 1 111

1-1

24 „

• 1 1

I have not been able to compare the specimens with examples
of G. consobrinics ; but Mr. Boulenger regards them as representing
a species intermediate in some respects between (r. pulchellus and
G. consohrinus. On the whole, the points in which they differ
from the former seem to tend rather in the direction of the latter'a
characteristic peculiarities.

GoNATODES AXDERSONii, Annand. (Plate II, fig. 3).

G. andersonii, Annandale^ J.A.S.B, (2) suppl., 1904, p. 21.

Since the description of this form was written two additional
specimens, both from Narcondam, have been presented to the
Museum by Mr. C. G. Rogers. They agree well with the types
and differ in the same respects as they do from G. kandianus and
G graxdlis. On the whole they show that the Andaman (or
Narcondam ?) form is undergoing what is probably a parallel
evolution to that which has produced G. gracilis.

Phyllodacttlus BiniMANicus, Annand. (Plate, I, fig. 1 ).

P. burmanicus, Annandale, Ann, Mag. N. H, (7) XV, 1905, p. 28,

Since I described this species another specimen, from the
same locality and collection, has been found in the Museum. It
is also a male. The proportions of the head difEer somewhat from
those of the type, so that these cannot any longer be considered as
specific characters. The number of lamellse under the fourth toe
is smaller than in P. siamenns, being 8 or 9 in the spedmena
examined (see figs, lb, 2a, PI. I).

84 Gontrihutions to Oriental Herpetology. [MarcH, 1905.

The possession by the males of this species and of P.
siamenns, Blgr., of prasanal pores marks the two forms ofE as
constituting a very distinct section of the genus PhyllodactylnSy
if not a separate genus. I take this opportunity to figure certain
structural details, as P. europaetts is the only other species of which
I have examined specimens. P. siamensis and P. burmamcus are the
only forms known from the Indian Region.

Hemidacttlus triedrus (Daud.) (Plate II, fig. 2).

H. subtnedrus, StoUczka, J.A.8.B., XLI (2), 1872, p. 93.

H. triedrus, Boulenger^ Gat. Liz, i, p. 133, and Faun. Ind.^
Eept., p. 89. Annandale, Ann. Mag. N. H. (7) XV, p. 30.

There is a fair series of this Gecko in the Indian Museum,
but unfortunately most of the specimens are without localities.
One labelled " near EUore " and named, apparently by Stoliczka,
Hemidactylus svhtriedrus^ agrees closely with Jerdon's description
of that species, which, however, is not definitive. It agrees with
Boulenger's definition of H. suhtriedrus in having ten labials, a
head more depressed than that of typical specimens of H. triedrus
and rather smaller ventral scales ; but it differs in having only seven
infradigital lameUao under the thumb, nine under the middle finger,
and nine under the middle toe. It may, therefore, be regarded as
intermediate between the two forms. The fact that it is from
the Ellore district suggests the possibility that other specimens
of an intermediate character occur and that H. suhtriedrus is not
fipecifically distinct. Possibly it is one of the two specimens
referred to by Stoliczka in the reference quoted ; but it is not the
one figured. Its donor's name was originally omitted in the
Museum register, but " Dr. Stoliczka " has been written in in pen-
cil M a later date.

Hemidactylus karenorum (Theob.)

A specimen from Cachar, Assam (^Wood-Mason), Previously
known from Pegu.

Lepidodactylus ceylonensis, Blgr.

Specimens from " Hills between Burma and Siam " and from
Tavoy (Museum collector).

List op Geckos from Sinkip Island.

The following species were taken on Sinkip Island, which lies
some little distance off the east coast of Sumati^a, by the late
Prof. J. Wood-Mason's collector : —

1. GymTwdactylus fem, Blgr. (3 specimens).

2. Hemidactylus freTuUus, Gray (numerous specimens).

3. Hemidactylus platyurus (Schneid.) (numerous specimens)*

Vol. I, No. 3.] Gontrihutions to Oriental Herpetology. 85

[N. S.]

EUBLEPHARIDJS.

EUBLEPHABIS HAKDWIGKII, Gray

I find it hard to ascertain the exact range of this somewhat
rare species. The Museum has specimens from the following
localities: — Quetta; Khorda, Orissa; Oanjam; the Sunderbans,
near Calcutta. Very few of the Indian lizards are found both in
Baluchistan and Lower Bengal,

AGAMID^.

Pyctoljemus gularis, Ptrs.

A male from Goalpara, Assam (H, L. Houghton).

The male differs from the female only in the development of
the gular pouch, which commences in a vertical line with the cen-
tre of the eye and terminates behind at the anterior border of the
shoulder girdle. It can be folded into the surface of the throat
80 as to be very inconspicuous, but is evidently capable of great
distention ; the three pairs of gular folds which characterize the
female are well marked on its sides. Its general colour is black,
but these folds and the lower border are dirty white : the speci-
men, however, is much faded.

ACANTHOSAURA LAMNIDENTATA, Blgr,

A lamnidentata, Boulenger, Faun. Ind. Bept., p. 126 ; and Ann.
Mus, Geneva (2) xiii, p. 317.

Coloration is no guide in the identification of this species.
Specimens of A. lamnidentata, A. armata and A, crucigera, may all
be coloured ^ (at any rate if faded) exactly alike, as the series in the
Museum shows. This series bears out Boulenger's contention,
that the relative length of the superciliaiy spine affords a constant
distinction between A, lamnidentata and A. crucigera, though the
two forms are otherwise practically identical. In A. armata the
spine is considerably longer than in either.

The Museum possesses characteristic specimens of A, armaia
from "Burma" {Major Berdmore) and from Mergui (Anderson).
The latter is the one recorded in the Fauna of Mergui, i, p. 343.

Japaluba andersoniana, nov. (Plate II, fig* 4)«

This species is founded on two male specimens collected
by CoL Godwin- Austen in the Duffla Hills (Assam-Bhutan
Frontier). The late Dr. J. Anderson recognised it as new, but
neither gave it a name nor described it.

Dia^fnosis. — Body rather slender, strongly compressed ; hind-
limb long, reaching to the tip of the snout or beyond. Snout

X Bat compare my note in FaseiC' Malay.^'ZooK 1, p* 154*

86 Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. [March, 1905.

slightly longer than the diameter of the orbit, obtnse; rostral
and superciliary ridge prominent, continnons; the latter suc-
ceeded behind, after an interval, by a large conical tubercle ,
round which several others of smaller size are grouped. There
are two other prominent tubercles between the top of the head
and the tympanic region on each side. A curved line of smaller
tubercles outlines the inner margin of the superciliaiy region and a
flat or slightly depressed sub-circular area is similarly marked off
on the snout. All the scales are keeled ; those on the sides are
small, with five oblique rows of larger and more prominent scales
running downwards and forwards from the base of the dorsal crest
to or beyond a longitudinal line of similar scales ; between every
two of these rows there is another, which is much shorter and
does not reach as much as half way down the body. The dorsal
surface of the limbs is covered with rather large heterogeneous
scales, the larger of which show a tendency to be arranged in
V-shaped series ; the scales on the belly and ventral surface of the
limbs are larger than those on the sides ; the tail is covered with
small, imbricate, leaf- shaped scales, which are not enlarged below.
The nuchal crest is well developed (in the male), consisting of a fold
of skin covered with three or four parallel horizontal rows of flat,
smooth scales, the uppermost of which are larger than those below
them and form a feebly serrated ridge ; the doiisal crest is much
lower, consisting of a single row of similar scales. There is no
gular pouch and no distinct gular fold.

Coloration— xDoraBl surface dirty brown, rather dark, brighter
on the head, feebly marbled on the sides, pale on the ventral
surface ; pale, dark-edged lines radiating from the eyes.

Measurements ^.

Total length (tip of tail injured) ... 119 mm.

Head ... ... ... 20

Width of head ... ... 11

Body ... ... ... 33

Fore-limb ... ... ... 29

Hind limb ... ... ... 52

This species can be distinguished easily from J. planidorsata
ty its compressed body and long hind limbs.

Salea poRSFiELDii, Gray

Specimens from Moulmein (Stoliczka) and from "HiUs near
Harmatti, Duflla Expedition" {Oodunii- Austen).

Oalotes microlepis, Blgr,

Of this species, previously known from the hills of northern;
Tenasseinm, the Museum possesses a specimen from Manipnr
(B.D'.Olflham.) .

Vol. I, No, 3.1 CoJitnbutions to Oriental Herpetology, 87

[N. 8.-]

Calotes versicolor (Daud).

0. gigas, Bh/th, J.A.S.B. XII, 1853, p. 648.

C. gigas (under C, mystaceus), Baulenger, Faun. Lid.y Bept,
p. 138. C. versicolor id,, op. cit., p. 135.

I have examined several liundi*ed specimens of this common
lizard. They came from nearly all parts of India and Ceylon,
from Malaya and Pitsanuloke in Siam. With these I have
compared Blyth's types of 0. gig as (which are in the Indian
Museum), with the result that I find the two forms to belong
clearly to the same species. There is no oblique fold in front of
the shoulder in Blyth's specimens, and therefore they cannot be
associated with 0. mystaceus, as Boulenger, who had had no oppor-
tunity of examining them, thought probable.

The types of 0. gigas, which are adult males, differ from
the majority of specimens only in having the secondary sexual
characters more fully developed ; the scales (especially those on the
throat) are heavily keeled and inclined to be lanceolate in outline,
the crest is very high, the cheeks are greatly swollen, the siza
above the average. The large series examined shows that in
Lower Bengal (and probably in Assam, Burma and Malaya), the
males of G. versicolor rarely if ever reach an extreme degree of
development in these respects ; but no exact line can be drawn.
We have specimens from Sind, from South and North- West India
and from Ceylon which agree almost exactly with Blyth's, while
a much larger number are intermediate in character. Dr. Blanf ord's
examples from Baluchistan (Eastern Persia ii, p. 313) belong
to this intermediate phase ; but specimens from Calcutta have
the male characters even less marked. The extreme phase
(gtgas^ probably bears much the same relation to versicolor a^
Oonyocephalits humii (Blyth) does to O. suhcristatus (Stol).

Calotes yunnanensis. nov.

C. maria {pai-t.), Anderson, Anat, Zool, Res, Yunnan Ex,, p 806.
Among the lizards collected by Dr. Anderson in Yunnan I find a
Calotes which does not agree with any published description. It is
registered in the Museum books as 0. maria and is the only speci-
men from Yunnan now in the collection which at all resembles this
species. It differs, however, in certain respects from the des-
criptions and from specimens from Assam, and I think that (in the
present state of systematic nomenclature) it is worthy of a specific
name. Anderson states that the specimens of C. maria which he took
in Yunnan were compared with the types of the species ; but what
has become of the i^est of them I have been unable to discover. As
regards several impoi'tant points the new form is intermediate
between 0. maria and G. jerdonii ; but it has a distinct though rather
short and shallow oblique fold in fix)nt of the shoulder covered with
granular scales. Were it not that the presence or absence of such
a fold is a very constant character in other members of the genus,

88 Oontrihuttons to Oriental Herpetology. [March, 1906.

the specimen would practically break down the distinction between
the two species, or would have to be regarded as an aberrant
example of 0, marta.

Diagnosis, — Upper head scales moderate, smooth, imbricate,
slightly enlarged on the superciliary area; two parallel rows of
enlarged, erect scales on the temple, the posterior few of each
series ending in short spines ; the lower series is separated from
the tympanum (in the type) by .three rows of small scales. Tym-
panum nearly half the diameter of the orbit. Gular pouch not
developed ; gular scales strongly keeled, larger than ventrals,
equalling dorsals. A rather short and shallow oblique fold in
front of shoulder; dorso-nuchal crest well developed anteriorly,
the longest spines (just behind the head) measuring between half and
two-thirds the diameter of the orbit. Fifty-six scales round the
centre of the body ; dorsal and lateral scales feebly keeled, directed
upwards and backwards ; ventrals much smaller than dorsals,
strongly keeled. The adpressed hind limb reaches the anterior
border of the orbit ; third and fourth fingers nearly equal. Tail
round, slender, very long. Colour green (faded in the type), with
pale (red ?) markings on the sides and on the knees and elbows.

Measurements

(J.

Total Length

•••

405 Mm

Head

* • *

34 „

Width of head

. • .

17 „

Body

• . *

65 „

Tail

...

305 „

Fore-limb . . .

. ■ *

53 „

Hind limb ...

• • •

68 „

Calotes rouxii, D <fe B.

C. rouxii, Boulenger, Faun, Ind., Rept,, p. 142.
Several specimens from Travancore (Beddome),

Agama meoalontx (Gthr.)

A. megalonyx, Boulenger^ Cat, Liz, ; i. p. 347.
Two specimens from the Pei^so-Baluch frontier (Dr. Turnbull
and Col, Wahah).

AoAMA LiUATA (Blanf.)

A. lirata, Boulenger, Faun, Ind,, Rept,, p. 150.

Four specimens from Sind {Murray ?) agree very closely
with the type, which is in the Indian Museum. Pi'obably this
species does not reach the full dimensions of A, melanura ; its tail is
more slender and proportionately longer.

Vol. I, No. 3.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. 89

Aqama. sp.

There are two specimens of a large Agama in tlie collection
whicli represent a species allied in some respects to A, ntipta,
De Fil. As their origin is uncertain I prefer to leave them
unnamed. The numbers on their museum labels have been ori-
miallj entered in the register without particulars, but "Dr. W. T.
Blanford« Persian collection ?" has been written in at a later date
in pencil and the collector's labels attached to them resemble those
of the Persian Collection.

They differ from specimens of A, nupta (of which I have
examined a large series) chiefly in the character of their dorsal
lepidosis. There is along the vertebral line a narrow band of enlarged
scales which widens sliirhtly from before backwards. These scales
are not homogeneous or at^nged in any order, but differ largely
inter se both in size and in development ; they are strongly mucro-
nate and their bases do not overlap ; some of them have almost
the character of retroverted spines. Similar scales are scattered on
the sides of the posterior part of the body, and there are others,
which have a rather larger base, on the postero-lateral surface of the
thighs. The majority of the dorso-lateral scales are extremely
minute, but the antero-lateral scales of the thighs are large, imbri-
cating, leaf-shaped, homogeneous and strongly keeled. The other
characters are those of A, nupta,

Agama nupta, De Fil.

A. nupta, Boulenger^ Faun, Ind. Bept.y p. 151, Alcodk and
Finn, J.A,S.B. Ixv (2), 1896, p. 555.

The verticillation of the tail, at any rate in old specimens, may
be practically absent. The coloration is frequently an almost
uniform brownish-black. The Museum processes a characteristic
but imperfect specimen from Chitral (Dr. G, M, Giles)

LiOLBPis BELLii (Gray)

L. bellii, Boulenger, Fascic. Malay. Zool. 1, p. 155. An-
nandale and Eohinson, ibid, (note). Annandale, P, Z. 8., 1900, p.
857, and Ann : Mag. N. H. (7) XV, 1905, p. 32.

We have several immature specimens from Burma which
exhibit the characteristic "juvenile livery" so well marked, in
examples from the Malay Peninsula.

List of Aoamidj: taken on Sinkip Island by Wood-Mason's

Collector.

1. Draco quinqu£fasciatus (Gray) (numerous specimens),

2. Aphaniotis fusca (Ptrs.) (one specimen).

3. Oalotes jubatus (D. & B.) (one specimen).

90 Contributions to Oriental Herpetology, [Marcli, 1905.

Al^GTJIDM.

Ophisaurus apus (Pall.)

The known range of this species is from Dalmatia to Afghanis-
tan, from near the Indian border of which we have a specimen ;
but it probably occurs also in adjacent parts of India. There
are several specimens in the Indian Museum which have come
from the Alipore Zoological Ga.rdens, unfortunately without any
definite history ; but the probability is that they are from North-
western India.

.Ophisaurus gbactlis (Gray)

Of 0. gracilis the Museum possesses a large series, which exhi-
bits great variation as regards colour. Judging from a collection
recently made by Major Alcock, this species is common near
Darjeeling. Major Alcock tells me that it is extremely sluggish
and generally " shams dead " when handled.

VARANID^.

Varanus dumerilii (Miill.)

The only specimen we possess is immature, being the type of
Blanford's Varanus macrolepis. It is very desirable that fui'ther
•examples should be obtained, as the other Indian species of the family
Are represented by large series.

LIZARDS OF INDIA, BURMA AND CBYLON.i

GECKONID^.

1. Teratoacincus soincas* (Schleg.) ... (Alcock and Finn, J.A flf.B., 1896.)

Balnchistan.

2. OeramodactyluB affinis, Murray* ... (iid, ibid.) Baluchistan.
:8. StenodactyluB orientalis, § Blanf. ... Sind.

4. 8tenodactylu8 lumsdenii, Blgr Balnchistan.

6. Alsophylaxpipiens • (Pall.)? ... h%dak? (Antea.)

6. M tnbercalatus, § (Blanf.) Sind, Baluchistan.

7. Gymnodactylns fedtsohenkoi, Panjab Salt Uange.

Strauch.

8. Gymnodactylns scaber (Bapp). ... Sind.

9. 11 brevipes, § Blanf. ... Baluchistan.

10. ,1 kachensis, § Stol. ... Katch; Baluchistan; Sind.

ll» n stoliczksB, Steind. .. Upper Indus Valley.

12. „ lawderaiiu8.§ Stol. ... Almorah and Kumaun.

13* f» nebulosus, Bedd. ... S. India and Ceylon.

14. Oymnodactylus jeyporensis, Bedd ... Jeypore.

16. „ deccanensis, Gthr. ... Bombay Presidency.

1 A • denotes an addition to the Indian fauna since 1890 ; a § that a type
ox co-type is in the Indian Museum. The namea of species not represented
in this collection are printed in italies. * - *

YoL I, No. 3.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology.
IN. S.]

16. Qymnodtictylus albofasciatus, B\gr. ...
17« Gyniiiodactjlas oldhami, § Theob. ...

18. ,f triedms, Gthr. - ...

19. ,1 ' frenatns, Gthr. ...

20. „ • khasiexiBis. § Jerd. ...

21. „ rubidos, § (Bljth.)...
22* Oymnadactylus pegtiensis,* Blgr.

23. Gjmnodaotjlns pnlcbellas (Gray). ..

24. y, con8obrinoideB,*§

Annand. ..,

26. „ variegatas § (Bljth).

26. „ feaB, • Blgr.

27. tt fa8ciolatii8§ (Blyth.)

28. Agamura oruraliB, § Blanf.

29. „ persioa * (A. Dam.)

••*

30. Prifltaras rapestris. § Blanf.

31. Gonatodes indioas(Gray)

32. „ wjnadensis (Bedd.)
38. Oonatodes sisparenais (Theob.)
34. Gonatodes omatos (Bedd.)

marmoratus (Bedd.)
mysoriensis (Jerd.)
kandiaQUB (Kelaart.)
andersonit, * § Annand.

graciliB (Bedd.)
jerdonii (Theob.)
littoralJB (Jerd.)

42. PhyllodactyliLB barmanica8,*§

Annand.

43. CallodactylnB anrens, Bedd.

44. PtyodactyluB homoIepiB, § Blanf.

45. HemidactyluB reticulatua, Bedd.
46.
47.
48.

35.

36.

37.

»i

38.

>»

39.

40.

41.

f»

It
If

grncilis, § Blanf.
frenatns, D. & B.
brookii, Gray.

49.
^.
^1.
52.

f}
f*

tarcicns (Linn.)

persicns, § Anders. ....

macalatus, D. & B. ...

triedms (Daud.)
£3. Hemidactylu8 auhstriedrus, Jerd. ;..
54. Hemidaotylus 8abtriedroide8,^§ ...
Annand.

depressuB, Gray.

lejchenanltii, D. & B....

flaviviridis, Rupp.

gtgantens. § Stol.

bo wringii ( G ray)

karenoram (Theob.) ...

gamotii, D. & B.

platyuras (Sohneid.) •••

63. TeratolepiB fasciata,! Blyth.

64. Gehyra mntilata (Wiegm.) m.

65. Lepidodactylns oeylonensis, Blgr. ...

66. „ aurantiacns (Bedd.)

67. „ -lagnbria (D. & B.) ...

55.
56.
57.
5iB.
59.
60.
61.
62.

If
ft
>f
tf
ft
ft
ff
If

S. Canara.
Lower Borma.
Ceylon.

i>
Assam; Upper Barma.
Andamans.
(Bouleng^r, Ann. Mus. Oenova (2)

xiii.) Pegu.
Bengal {?); and Lower Burma.

Tavoy. (Antea.)

Lower Burma.

(Bonlenger, op. cit.), "Pegu,

Western Himalayas.

Balachistan.

(Aloock and Finn, op. cit.)

Balachistan.
Bind ; Central India (?)
Nilgiris, 8. India.
Wynaad „ „
Nilgiris „ „
Malabar.

Malabar District.
Mysore.

Ceylon ; S. India, and Preparis I.
(Annandale, J.A.8.B., (2) sappl.

1904) Andamans.
Ceylon and S. India.

Malabar District.

(Annandale, Ann. Mag. N.H,, 1905),

Tavoy.
"S. Aroot.

Sind and Balachistan.
8. India.

Central Provinces.
S. and E. India; Burma; Ceylon.
( B H. gleadoWi, Murray.) All

India and Ceylon.
Sind.

Deccan and S. India.
Central and S. India ; Ceylon. ,
8. India.
( Annandale, op. cit). Upper Barma,

Ceylon.

All India, Burma (?) and t^eylon.
( « H. coctffiif D. & B.), All Indi%
Malabar district.
E. India and Burma.
Pegu } Cachar.

Sikhim and Burma. . ]'

E. India ; Burma and Ceylon.
Deccan and Sind;
iSiT.E. India; Burma and Ceylon.
Burma and Ceyl<>n. . . . ; ^. .
8. India.

Burma and 'Ceylc^; Andaman^
and Nidbbairs.

Ccmtrtbutions to Oriental Herpetology, [March, 1905»

68. Hoplodactylus duvauoelii (D. & B.) ...

69. Hoplodaotylus anamnllensis (Gthr.)

70. Gecko yerticillatns, Laur.

71. „ stentor (Cant.) ...

72.

xnonarcliaB (D. & B.)

73. Ptjohozoon homalocephalum fCrev.)

74. Phelsama andamanense § (Blyth.) .

Bengal (?)

AnamallajB, S. India.

N.E. India; Bnrma.

Chittagong, Burma; Andamans

and Nioobars.
Ceylon.

Lower Burma; Andamans (?) and
Nicobara.
Andamans.

EUBLEPHABID^.

76« Eublepharis hardwiokii, (Gray.)
76* I, macular ins, § Blyth*

Peninsular India ; Baluchistan.
Punjab and Sind ; Ghitral.

AGAMIDi!^.

77.
78.
79.

80.
81.
82.

83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
[G.

92.

98.

94.

96.

97.

98.

99.
100.
101.
102.
108.
104.

105.
106.
107.
108.
109.

110.
111.
112.

Draoo maculatas (Gray.)
blanfordii, Blgr.
norviUii, *§ Alo. ..

n
If

dussumieri, D. & B.
,1 t89niopteru8» Gthr.
Sitana pontioeriana, Cu7.

Assam and Burma.

Tenasserim.

(Aloock, (2) J.A.8.B. LXIV.)

Upper Assam.
Malabar Coast.
Tenasserim.
India and Ceylon (not in Hima*

layas).
Ceylon.
S. India.
Assam.
Ceylon.

Ceylon (mountains only.)
Ceylon.
Ceylon.

Kandy district, Ceylon.
Andamans and Nicobars.

Otooryptis bivittata, Wieg^.
Otocryptia heddomiif Blgr.
Ptjctolesmus gularis, Ptrs.
Cophotis ceylanica, Ptrs. ..

Ceratophoras stoddartii, Gray. ..
I, tennentii, Gthr.

I, aspera, Gthr.

Lyriocephalus scutatus (Linn.)
Gonyocephalus subcristatus (Blyth.)
humii (Stol.)«G. bubcriBtatus(agedindividuhl8), Annandale,/.il.S.B. (2)^

_ 1904, Buppl.]
Oonyocephalus hellii {D. & B.)

„ grandia (Gray.)

Aoanthosaura armta (Gray)

,, orucigera, Blgr.

„ lamnidentata, Blgr.

Acanthoaaura minor (Gray.)

Aoanthosaura major ( Jerd.)

„ tricarinDta§ (Blyth.)

Japalura andersoniana, *§ Annand.
„ variegata, Gray

Bengal.
Pegu.
Burma.
Tenasserim.
Lower Burma.
Sikhim and Assam.
kakhienaia (Anders.)... (^Calotes fees, Blgpr.) Burma.

W. Himalayas.
Bikhim.

„ planidorsata, Jerd.
Salea horsfieldii, Gray

...

„ anamallayana (Bedd.)
Calotes microlepis, Blgr.

oristatelluB (Kuhl.)
jubatas (D. ^B.)
versicolor (Daad.)

[0. gigas, Blyth « 0. versicolor (Daud.)]
Calotes maria, Gray ... ,.. Assam,

jerdonii, Gthr. ... ... „

emma, Gray ... ... Burma and Assam.

>i
•I
»

{Antea), N.E. Assam.

Sikhim, Assam and Bengal.

Assam; Sikhim.

S. India ; Ceylon (?) ; Burma ; K. E.

Assam.
Animalay and Patni Hills, S. India
Lower Burma ; Manipur.
Tenasserim.
Nicobars.
All India, Burma and Ceylon.

If
fi

VoL I, No. 3.] . ContributCotu to Oriental Hervetology.
[N. 8.-\

lis. Oalotea myataoeas, D. & B. ...

9»

114. Oalotes grandisquamiaf Gthr.
116. Calotes nemoricola^ Jerd.

116. Calotes ceylonenais (F. Mailer)

117. Calotes liolepis, Blgr.

118. Oalotes andamanensiSf^ Blgr.

119. Calotes ophiomachas (Merr.)

120. f, nig^labis, Ptrs.

121. Calotes liocephaluSf Gthr*

122. Calotes ronzii, D. & B. ..•
128. .. elliotii, Gthr. ...

8. India, Ceylon, Andamans and

Nicobars.
Malabar.

Nilgiris; Malabar.
Cejlon.

(Bonlenger, Awn. Mag. NM,, 1801)

Andamans.
Ceylon ; S. India ; Nicobars.
Ceylon.

Bombay Fresidenoy ; Travanoore.
8. India.

[Calotes fesB, Blgr. « Acanthosaora kakhiensis (Anders.)]

124. Charasia dorsalis (Gray)

125. „ blanfordiana, Stol.

126. „ omata (Blyth)

127. Agama isolepis, Blgr.

128.
129.
130.
181.
132.
188.
134.
135.
136.
187.

it
11
If
I)

>}
If
I)
if
>•

rnbrigularis § (Blanf.)
megalonyz* (Gthr.)
tubercolata, Gray
dayana (Stol.) ...
himalayatia (Steind.)
agroren8i8§ (8tol.)
melanura (Blyth)
lirata§ (Blanf.) ...
nupta, De Fil. ...
cauoasica (£ichw.)

188. Phrynooephalus olivierii., D. & B.

139.
140.
141.
142.
143.

theobaldi, Blyth
oandivolTnlns (Pall.j
omatns, Blgr.
macnlatnsy Anders,
enptilopos, *§ Alo. A
Finn

144. „ Inteoguttatos, Blgr.

145. Liolepis bellii (Gray) ...

146. Uromastiz hardwickii, Gray

147. „ asmnssii* (Straaoh)

n
11
>»
}>

S. India (hills).

Central India.

Central and North-Eastem India.

N.W. India.

Bind.

Baluchistan {Antea),

Kashmir and W. Himalayas.

Foot of W. Himalayas.

Upper Indns Yalley.

N. W. India (high altitudes).

Bind ; Panjab ; W. Himalayas.

Bind ; Baluchistan.

f, 11 s Ohitral.

Baluchistan.
Baluchistan.
Upper Indus Valley.
Ladak.
K. Baluchistan*

[Alcook and Finn,
op. ct*.]

8. India; Burma.
N. W. India.

Baluchistan [Aloock and Finn,
op. ctt.].

ANGUIDiE.

148. Ophisaurus gracilis (Gray)

149. „ apus*(Pall.)?

N.E. India; Sikhim ; Assam

Upper Burma.
N.W. India ? (Antea.)

YASJLSM.

160. YaranuB griseus (Baud.)

161.
162.

158.

154.
166.

a
II
11

flavesoens (Gray)
bengalensis (Daud.)

nebnlosus (Gray)

dumerilii (Mull.)
salvator (Laur.)

N.W. India (deserts).

N. India ; Burma.

Peninsular India and Ceylon;

Burma?
Central Provinces (?) ; Bengal;

Burma.
Tenasserim.
N. £. India; Ceylon; Burma

Andamans and Nicobars.

{To he continued.)

94 ArchsBologtsch Chiderzoek op Java en Madura, [March, 1905.

9. ArchsBologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura, I Beschrijving
van de mine hij de Tesa Toempang, genaumd Tjandd Djago.
Batavia, 1904, — By Father Dahlmann, S.J. OommuniaUed by
the Philological Secretary.

A magnificent volume of Archsdological research has lately
been presented to the Asiatic Society by the Batavian Society of
Letters and Arts. It is the first outcome of the researches con-
ducted by the newly established arohsBological survey in the
Dutch East Indies, and it treats of one of those highly interesting
relics of true Indian Art, so profusely scattered over the whole
ground of Middle and Eastern Java. Although I cannot claim any
title to introduce to you this admirable work — ^yet the favourable
opportunity I enjoyed of visiting Java on my way back iroia
China and of personally examining some of its most distinguished
monuments, may perhaps excuse my saying a few words about the
results embodied in this volume. I am all the more anxious to
do this for the Asiatic Society in that it was a distinguished
English statesman and administrator in the Far East, who gave
us the first accurate and scientific knowledge of the monumental
antiquities of Hindoo civilization in Java. I refer to Sir Thomas
Stamford Raffles, Governor General of Java and its dependencies.
This distinguished member of the Asiatic Society, inspired by that
high enthusiam for Indian research which led to so many dis-
coveries, revealed to us for the first time a new world of Indian
art in his masterly History of Java. I say " masterly : " for when
we remember that until his time nothing had been done to clear
the way for the study of the relics of Hindoo Religion and Art
once predominant in Java, everyone must be surprised at the
vast and minute learning with which Raffles introduced into the
descriptive and figurative details of research. His History of
Java gave the first impulse to closer investigation of the grand
monuments. But although since his time some remarkable works
have been published by distinguished members of the Batavian
Society, it was long before a methodical inquiry, covering the
whole ground of ancient Hindoo relics, could be inaugurated —
perhaps according to a German proverb, " Gut Ding hat Weile,''
*' a good thing needs time." And indeed it is a good thing, in fact
an excellent thing, which finally has been brought forth by the
Archeeological Survey of the Dutch East Indies under the leader-
ship of its talented Director General, Dr. Brandes.

The volume presents to us a complete archadological picture
of a Buddhist Sanctuary in Eastern Java, now-a-days called Tjandi
Toempong. The monument described is neither one of the earliest
nor one of the finest works produced by the Hindoo artists in Java.
For the monuments erected in the Eastern Kingdoms of Hindoo
Princes show, in style and workmanship, a remarkable decline
from what we admire in the artistic beauty developed at a much
earlier period in Central Java. If we look for the monuments
of the classical period, we must turn our eyes to Boro-Bodur and

VoL I, No. 3.] Archaedogisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura, 95

[N. 8.']

to Prambanam. We miglit haye perhaps expected that the system-
atic research now inaugurated would begin with those master-
pieces of art. The survey has taken a contrary course, beginning
with Eastern Java, where art was in its decline and leading in-
vestigation from the latest relics of true Indian art to the earliest
and at the same time the most glorious representatives of Indian
workmanship.

I say " true Indian art." For when you go through the
splendid photo-series illustrating this volume, you will immedi-
ately be impressed by the truly Indian character of the ornament.
This is not only the case with the decorative ornament in general.
The true Indian character shines forth above all in the sculpture
cycles decorating the terraces of the monument. It was one of the
characteristic features of the Hindoo artists in Java, that they
decorated the walls not only with detached sculptures and statues,
but with a continuous line of scenes representing- a whole cycle of
legends. They reached their highest perfection in the sculpture
cycles of central Java. At the Brahmanical sanctuary of Pram-
banam^vthe legend of the Bamiyana is worked out in a splendid
set of reliefs. But in the Buddhist sanctuary of Boro Bodur we
have the whole legend of the life of Buddha as told in the
Lalitavistara, put before our eyes within the frame of more than
Bizty reliefs. Another series of sculptures represents in continu-
ous line more than thirty Jatakas, that is to say, more than all the
Buddhist monuments of India proper and of Afghanistan toge-
ther contain. Besides there is another sculpture cycle of more
than sixty highly-refined reliefs, of which the meaning has not yet
been discovered. We meet with the same characteristic feature
in the monument described in the present volume.

The Sanctuary is mounted on a threefold terrace, one terrace
rising above the other. The walls of every terrace have their
peculiar cycle of legends. In the first terrace we meet with a set
of legends evidently taken from the fables of the Pancatantra ; the
reliefs of the second terrace represent scenes of the Eama legend ;
those of the third terrace give the Arjunavivaha and especially
Arjuna's fight with f iva ; finally the walls of the Sanctuary itself
are decorated with scenes of the Krishna legend. So we see
here united within the architectural limits of a small sanctuary
a good number of favourite topics of Hindoo epic poetry.

Now as regards artistic workmanship the sculpture-cycles of
Tjandi Toempang are, as I have already pointed out, far inferior
to those found in Central Java. For comparison's sake I have laid
before you a few of my own photos, representing scenes of the
sculpture cycles either of Boro-Bodur or of Prambanam. Nay,
the artistic value of our Tjandi must be held even much inferior
to the reliefs of Panataran, lying in the same region of Eastern
Java.

But it is not the artistic value, which gives to the sculpture-
cycles here represented their importance. This is fco be sought
for in quite another line of comparison.

96 Archseologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura,] [Marcli 1905.

The artists of the classical period of Hindoo art in Java
closely followed the original Sanscrit texts when representing their
legendary objects. The legends, as told either in the original
Bamayana and Mahabharata or in the original Lalitavistara,
were the models put before the eyes of the workmen of Central Java,
In Eastern Java, on the contrary, it is no longer Hindoo epic poetry
as contained in the original epic, bnt Hindoo poetry remodelled in
the old Javanese Kavi translation. The scenes of the first terrace,
although closely resembling some legends of the Pancatantra, follow
the old Javanese Tantra, which itself is based on the original Pan-
catantra or on the Hitopade^a. The cycle of the second terrace
follows the Rama legend as told in the old Javanese Bamayana.
And so with the legend of Arjuna in the third terrace and with the
Krishna legend on the walls of the Sanctuary. It is therefore as a
Javanese reflex of Hindoo poetry, that is to say, as a typical old
Javanese development of Hindoo thought and Hindoo life, — an
outcome of that continuous Hindoo indluence, spread over the
country for so many centuries — ^that the monument before us
should be viewed and a place assigned to it in the history of Jndian
art in Java. In these sculptures we must look therefore for the
true representative of all those literary and artistic characteristics
which Hindoo civilisation finally developed on Javanese ground
and which, combined together, make out the proper and original
type of old Javanese civilisation.

But there is yet another remarkable point to be noted in our
monument ; a point which is of considerable importance with
regard to the religious and artistic development of Hindoo belief
not only in Java but over the whole sphere of India.

Look at the decorative element of our sanctuary. You will
find nothing in it indicative of a work of Buddhist devotion.
The sculpture-cycles, in which f iva plays such a remarkable part,
might lead you to say that Tjandi Toempang is a monument of
^iva worship.

But this is not the case. Although the ornament is all
Brahmanical and as regards the sculpture cycles rather pivaite,
the monument itself was consecrated to the worship of the five
Dhyani-Buddhas and of three Taras or mystic powers. This
becomes evidently manifest in the splendid statues representing
separately the Dhyani-Buddhas and their Taras. And if there
could be a doubt about the character of these statues, the old
Nagarl inscriptions, giving to every statue its proper signification
would dispel it.

How is this fact, that is to say the close connexion of pivaite
art and Buddhistic worship, to be explained.

The foundation of the Sanctuary, according to an inscription
found at Tjandi Toempong is to be assigned to the first half of the
thirteenth century. Hindoo society in Eastern Java was at thai
time absolutely pivaite ; it had been 9^vaite ever since the
seventh and eight century and remained pivaite in spite of the
Buddhistic influence spreading over the country. Buddhism

Vol. I, No. 3.] Archaeologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura. 97

[jr. a.]

became in the ninth centiuy bo strong that it conld give rise to
monuments of such splendour as we see in Boro-Bodur and in its
neigbourhood. It is as if a mighty wave of Buddhist influence
had suddenly come oyer Hindoo civilisation, established in Java
on a thoroughly Brahmanical ground, either pivaite or Yishnuite.
Later on this Buddhist wave lost its strength amidst Qivaite and
Vishnuite worship, rooted deeper and spreading farther its branches
amongst the Hindooised population.

But in the beginning of the thirteenth century a second wave
of Buddhist influence reached Java on its eastern shore. This
second wave came evidently from the south of India and gained
some temporary ascendancy in the mighty kingdom of Madja-
pahit. That there must have been such an influence coming from
the south, long ago, was pointed out by Bumell in his South-Indian
Inscriptions. He found evidence of it in the close resemblance of
the Nag&ri type of inscriptions we find in connexion with the
statues to the Nagari type of South India. He was only wrong
about the epoch, saying that according to the resemblance of types
this influence must have been exerted in the eleventh century. The
writing of the inscriptions closely resembles the Nagari character
of the first half of the thirteenth century, which is quite in ac-
cordance with the age of the monument, as attested by the inscrip-
tion of King Yishuuvardhana. The monument described is there-
fore a new proof of the fact that Buddhism was yet existing
in the south of India at the beginning of the thirteenth century,
as in fact it existed in the north of India. But at the same time it
is evident that Buddhism as developed in the Mahayana, had
entered into a close religious and ai*tistic alliance with piva worship.
With regard to this the Sanscrit inscription found in Kasia in the
North- Western Provinces and recently interpreted by Prof.
Kielhom of GGttingen gives a striking parallel.

The inscription in the two first lines celebrates fiva ; in the
third line Tara, the Buddha^akti is mentioned disertis verbis.
In the fourth and fifth line Buddha is celebrated as Tathagata and
Munindra. So we find in the north of India the same connexion of
yiva on the one side, of Buddha and its (^ahti on the other side
that we meet with in the eastern part of Java.

The few words I desired to say have become many. But
they are, I hope, not quite out of place, since they tried to
show how much light the religious and artistic development of
Hindooism in Java may yet throw on the whole history of Indian
religion and art. Further research may perhaps lead to the dis-
covery of a page of the history of Indian art, lost in India proper
and preserved in the Hindooised island far away.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Anuruddha Thera, 99

IN. 8.-]

10. Anuruddha Thera — a learned Pdli author of Southern India
in the ISth Century A.D. — By Prof. Satis Chandra YiOTlBHe^A^A,

With the rifie of Buddhism the Pali langaage rose to pro-
minence in the 6th Centary B.C. From that time to the close of
the Ist Gentnry B.C., that is, for nearly five hundred years, the
Buddhist books including the well known Tripifakas, which were
rehearsed in the three famous Buddhist councils, were used to be
written principally in the Pali language. But since the rise of
the Mahayana school of Buddhism under the auspices of the
fourth Buddhist Council that was held in Ka^mira about the
beginning of the Christian era, Sanskrit has been chosen as the
principal medium of Buddhistic communications and the Bud-
dhistic books have generally been written in the Sanskrit
language.

Thousands of Indian books written in the Sanskrit language
have recently been recovered from or traced in Nepal, Tibet,
China, Japan, etc. But very few Indian books written in the Pali
language haye been obtained from those places. Are we then to
suppose that with the rise of the Mahayana school about the 1st
Century A.D., the use of the Pali language in the sacred scrip-
tures was altogether stopped in India P I daresay the answer is
no, for, even in the 5th Century A.D., when the Mahay&na school
attained its highest development, India produced several eminent
Pali writers of whom Buddhagho^a^ stands as the foremost. In
the Ceylonese records' we find indications that even up to the year
1462 A.D. Ceylon used to derive some of its Pali literature from
India and Buddhist monks were in large numbers sent to Ceylon
by the Southern Indian kings of the Cho}a and other dynasties.
It is not within the scope of this paper to enumerate all the Pali
writers that flourished in India between the 1st Century A.D.
and 15th Century A.D. In the present paper I shall give a brief
account of only one of the many Pali writers that adorned India
during that long period. The name of this writer was Anurud-
dha Thera.

Anuruddha was the author of three works in the Pali lan-
guage, viz., Abhidhammatthasamgaha, Paramatthavinicchaya and
rTama-rupa-pariccheda. Besides, he was the author of a did-
actic Buddhistic poem in classical Sanskrit which is generally
known under the name of Anuruddha-iataka.^

I Vide Mahavaihsa, chapter XXXVII.

* MahivamM, Bajavnii, Rajaratnakari, Saddharmilai^kftra, commentary
on the Vigaddhimagga, etc.

ft In the Saddbammasfimgahn, chap. IX, verses 14, 15, London Pali Text
Society's edition (Ftde J.P.T.S., 1890), two Pali works of Annmddha have

100 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

In the Saddhammasaingaha and Paramatthaviniocbaja it is
stated that Annmddha was bom in Kancipora on the KSveri
where he spent the early part of his life as a Bnddhist priest. He
gradoallj rose to the position of Sanghanayaka or High-priest.
Subsequently he went to Tinnevelly and Tanjore and resided there
for some time for the propagation of Bnddbism. Afterwards he
went over to Ceylon and was admitted into the priesthood of the
Uttaramula monastery. He is mentioned in the ffataka as an
upasthavira, but in the Saddhammasamgaha and other books he is
described as a thera.

The Uttaramula or Uttarola monastery* originated in Ceylon
at the latter half of the 11th Century A.D. Anuruddha who
belonged to that monastery* must therefore have lived after the
11th Century A.D.

In the Mahavamsa^ it is stated that Yijayababu I, who was
King of Ceylon from 1065 A.D. — 1120 A.D., sent messengers
with gifts to the Ramanna country unto his friend the King of

been mentioned, viz,, Abhidhammatthasaihgaha and Paramatthayinioohaya i
Thus we read there: —

Elsewhere we find the mention of two other works of Annraddha,
viz.f Nftmarupaparicoheda and S^ataka. The Abhidhammatthaaaxiigaha has
been published by the Pili Text Sooiety of London, and the 9ataka by the
Buddhist Text Society of Oalcatta.

1 Mahivamsai ohap. LVII, verse 20.

_. » ^

S Maharaifasa, chap. LX, verse 6.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Anuruddha Thera. 101

[N. 8.-]

Anuraddha to bring from there some learned Bnddhist monks and
elders of the church. I have reasons to believe that the Bamanna^
country was identical with the kingdom of the Pallavas that lay in
the Ooi-omandel coast, and " the King of Anuruddha " was the
PallaraKing in whose territory Anuruddha was bom and from whose
territory learned monks including Anuruddha himself were taken
over to Oeylon. Anuruddha must on this supposition have gone
to Ceylon early in the 12th Century A.D. when Vijayab§hu I was
King of the island.

Kancipura in whjch Anuruddha was born is identified with
modern Conjeeveram, 43 miles south-west of Madras. It was the
capital of the ancient kingdom of Dravi^a and was the residence
of the kings of the Pallava dynasty till that dynasty was over-
thrown by the Cholas at the close of the 11th Centurv A D.
Bajarajendra Kulottudga Chola I, who reigned from 1064 — 1113
A.D., is said to have completely crushed the power of the Pallava
kings and to have destroyed the city of Kanci. He, however, sub-
sequently rebuilt and greatly improved that city but selected
Tanjore as the permanent place of residence of the Chola kings.
Anuruddha, we have seen, lived both in Kanci and Tanjore.

It may be noted here that the Pallava Kines who reigned in
Kanci were staunch Buddhists and belonged to the Sthavira school.
It has already been stated that they were overthrown by the
Cholas in the 1 1th Centnry A.D. From that time downwards they
remained as vassals under the Chola kings. The last mention of
the Pallavas as a dynasty occurs, as far as it is known at present,
about the year 1223 A.D. In 1310 A.D. the Cholas being con-
quered by the Mahomedans Kanci passed into the hands of the
conquerors. Early in the 12th century A.D. Bamanuja, the cele-
brated Yai^^ava preacher, flourished in oriperumatur, 18 miles east-
north-east of Kancipura, and converted the kinsps of the Chalukya,
Chola and other dynasties into his religion. The Buddhists were
henceforth persecuted by the Yai99ava8 of the Bamanuja school
as well as by the Mahomedan conquerors. Still Buddhism
lingered for some time in Kancipura or Conjeeveram and finally
disappeared from it at the close of the 15th Century A.D. Anurud-
dha Thera, who flourished in Kancipura early in the 12th Century
A.D., was by no means the last Buddhist Pali scholar of that city.

1 In Burmese books we find, however, that Ananrata or Anuraddha waa
the 42nd (or 44th) King of Pagan and Bimafifia or Bamagniais the country
round Thaton. Vids Bigandet's Legend of Gaudama, Vol. II, pp. 146-146
(3rd edition). Bev. T. Foulkes obaerves : — " Sir Emerson Tennent guesses
that this Kingdom of Aramana [Bamafifia] may be a part of the Indo-Chinese
Peninsnla probably between Arracan and Siam ; and Tumonr had ahready,
without giving any authority, fixed it in Arracan ; but the passages in the
Bdjaratnikari, the Bdjivali and the Jfah^vamM, in which it is mentioned,
clearly locate it on the Goromandel coast; and, as it is not Pftndya nor Chola,
the only part of that coast which remains is that which lies between Chola
and Kalinga, namely, the old dominions of the Pallayas." The Indian Anti'
9iMiry, Vol. XVII (1888), page 126.

).02 Journal of the AsicUtc Society of BengaU [April, 1905.

11. The Oolowring Principle of fhe flowers ofNycianthes Arhor^
tristis.'—By B. G. Hill, B.A.

The Nyctanthes Arhor-tristis^ known in Urdu as " Harsinghar, "
is a large shrab of the order Oleaceao. The flowers are sessile in
bracteate fascicles, they are pednnculate and are arranged in short
terminal trichotomous cymes ; the corolla tube is orange, and the
limb white. The flowers open at night and fall to the ground the
following day. They are then collected for ase in dyeing. The
plant grows most abundantly in the sub- Himalayan districts.

For use in dyeing, the flowers are steeped or boiled in water
and the solution strained ofE. It is a beautiful rich golden-j-ellow,
and dyes cotton fabrics without a mordant. The efEect is tran-
sitory, the colour fading slowly. When used with alum or lime-
juice the colour is brighter and less transitory, but the chief use
of the dye is in combination with turmeric and safflower. It is
iseldom used with iadigo. It is sometimes employed for colouring
fancy leather- work. With safflower, turmeric, red ochre, myroba-
lans and sulphate of iron it gives a fast maroon-brown, and with
Butea frondosa and indigo and acidulated water, a fast grape
green.

No reference has been found to this flower in the chemical
literature at my disposal, but in 1902, A. P. Sirkar made in my
laboratory, a preliminary investigation into the colouring principle,
which he considered existed in the flowers as a glucoside. He was
unable to obtain this in a pure state, owing to its sparing
solubility in most solvents, but he suggested CigHgiO^ for
the colouring matter, although on boiling this with dilute hydro-
chloric acid, he obtained a substance with a brighter colour and a
higher percentage of carbon. He also considered that there were
two methoxy groups present in the compound and at least one
carbonyl group.

The most noticeable feature of the coluaring matter was the
high percentage of hydrogen which was invariably obtained on
combustion.

The method of work was as follows : —

Aqueotis extract. — The flowers were extracted in cold water
and the extract carefully filtered. The infusion was light -yellow
in dilute, and dark -brown in concentrated solutions. It had a great
attraction for flies. The infusion gave an acid reaction wit];L litmus,
and a yellow precipitate with basic lead acetate which became yellow
on addition of ammonia. With copper sulphate it gave a pale-yellow
precipitate, which became green with ammonia. Stannous chloride
gave a turbidity which disappeared on adding acetic acid. Ferric
chloride gave a greenish-black colour which darkened on adding
ammonia. Fehling's solution was reduced, as were also gold chloride
and ammoniacal silver nitrate. It gave no reaction with gelatin.
When a few drops of the infusion were carefully added to a few
cubic centimetres of concentrated sulphuric acid, an intense blue

Vol. I, No. 4,] Colouring Principle of Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis. 103

[N. flf,]

colour was produced at the jnnction of the two liquids. This soon
darkened and disappeared.

When the infusion was allowed to stand for a few days alone,
a reddish-brown deposit settled. If a little hydrochloric acid was
added to the infusion, a reddish flocculent precipitate settled after
about twelve hours. A similar precipitate was obtained by
heating the infusion with basic lead acetate, decomposing the
washed yellow precipitate with sulphuretted hydrogen, and warm-
ing the yellow solution obtained on filtering. The amount ob-
tained was always very small, but attempts to get more from the
solution by heating on the water- bath with dilute hydrochloric acid
resulted in the deposition of a black amoi'phous substance. When
dried, it was very light and friable, and varied in colour from a
very dark-brown to a jet black. On evaporating the solution after
removal of this black substance, it was found to contain a sweet
substance, which reduced Fehling's solution on boiling.

About two grains of the red colouring matter were collected,
and washed with water. On boiling with alcohol a large quantity
dissolved, and the residue appeared to consist of mineral matter.
The alcoholic solution on evaporation gave a dark-red lustrous
deposit. This was entirely soluble in alcohol. Thus obtained, the
substance melted between 250° and 260°, dissolved in alcohol, ethyl
acetate, and ether, but it could be made to crystallize from none
of these. It also dissolved readily in alkalis and alkaline carbon-
ates, and in a solution of borax. It was sparingly soluble in
chloroform and carbon bisulphide, insoluble iu benzene and cold
water, very slightly soluble in hot water, and soluble in acetic
acid.

Alcoholic extract, — Owing to the apparent high solubility of the
colouring matter in alcohol, some of the flowers were extracted in a
Soxhlet apparatus with alcohol (sp. gr. '810) till they were colour-
less, and the hot alcohol was then allowed to cool. On cooling,
bunches of needle-like crystals had settled all over the flask.
These were pale-yellow, but after several recrystallizations became
white. They had a sweet taste, reduced a solution of ammonia-
cal silver nitrate, but did not rotate polarized light.

Analysis gave : —

Carbon =39-62
Hydrogen. = 7 96

MannitoH f = 39-57

C,H,AJ'''^''''''IH= 7 7

The crystals melted at 166^ ;
Mannitol melts at* 168°.

When the filtrate from the mannitol was slightly evaporated
apd cooled, no further precipitation occurred, but a small quantity
of wax separated. The residue contained crude colouring matter
with some resinous products. To obtain the colouring principle,

104 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

the alcoholic solution was heated with dilute hydrochloric add^
when a bright scarlet product was obtained. This was filtered
off and washed with alcohol.

The yield was very small, but thus prepared, the colouring
principle was only very slightly soluble in all solvents. If dissolved
in large excess of alcohol and allowed to evnporate the colouring
principle deposited a microscopic powder which seemed to be
crystalline when viewed under an oil immersion (iV)*

Preparaiion of the colouring principle. — Since the above method
was obvioDsly not adapted to the preparation on a large scale, the
colouring matter obtained by hydrolysis of the aqueous extract was
dissolved as far as possible in alcohol and the solution heated with
hydrochloric acid, when, as a rule, the bright red colouring principle
was deposited. It was only possible to work with small quantities at
a time, and in some cases black tarry products resulted at once with
no red deposit at all. Moreover in some cases it appeai^ed that
the hydrolysis of the aqueous solution resulted at once in pracipi-
tation of most of the colouring principle, in wliich case the
precipitate from the acidified water solution would not dissolve to any
extent in alcohol, and the colouring principle could not be extracted
by this method. The extraction was thus attended with great
difficulty, and it was found that the best method was to keep
solutions dilute, not to add too much acid, and not to boil The
ilocculent precipitate from the aqueous extract was then moderatelv
soluble in alcohol, and on warming the alcoholic solution with
h} drochloric acid a i*ed precipitate settled down which could be
easily filtered off. This red precipitate was washed with alcohol
and water, and the purified product collected.

For a long time this could not be obtained pure, but it was
eventually found to crystallize from pyridine and toluene. In the
former of these it was very soluble, in the latter moderately so.

The crystals were apparently of two kinds — one yeUow and
one red, but on gently warming the yellow crystals they became
red.

The melting point of the crystals was 225® — 230°. They were
tested for methoxy groups by ZieseFs method ; none were present.

Two combustions of an incompletely purified sample (it
yielded a trace of ash on combustion) g^ve : —

C = 69-10 , = 68-91

H= 7-53 *^^ H= 7-34

X (C4H5O) requires | jj~ .^.g

p TT n rC=68-4

v>igrL26^B i» 1 H= 7*5

Several other combustions of other samples had been made
in the course of the work. Results varied from 6860 to
70-36 for carbon, and 7-34 to 8*3 for hydrogen. The author thus

Vol. I, No. 4.] Colouring Principle of Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis. 105
IN. 8.-]

does not attach importance to the formulas mentiolied above.
It is certain, however, that Sirkar's results are useless.

Fn
practi

alcohol, ligroin, moderately soluble in toluene, and readilj
pyridine. With strong sulphuric acid they g^ve an intense blue
compound which rapidly became yellow through apparent
absorption of atmospheric moisture.

The author hopes to complete the investigation on some
future occasion.

106 Journal of the Astatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

12« The Monasteries of Tibet* — By Bai Sabat Chandra Das
Bahadur, CLE.

Introduction.

Tibet is the land of monasteries. Her history chiefly compri-
ses records of the establishment cf monasteries and temples and
their endowments by the State, chiefs and nobles of the conntry,
commencing from the middle of the 7th Centnry A.D., to the
18th Centnry.

There are eighteen different Buddhist sects, oat of which four
are widely distributed all over higher Asia including Tibet, Mongo-
lia and Western China. Of these four sects three, viz., Sakya,
Duk-pa and fl^ing-ma have the red-cap, which they use during
religious services only, to distinguish them from the remaining
15 sects. The fourth which is the reformed sect and therefore the
purest of all, has become dominant since the middle of the 17th
Century. Its monks use the yellow-cap. The Dalai Lama is the
head of this Church.

In the official register at Lhasa, in 1882, the total number of
monasteries belonging to the Yellow-cap Church was 1026 with
491,242 monks. Out of this number, 281 monasteries belonged to
the provinces of tJ and Tsang which constitute Tibet proper, 150 to
the provinces of Nyang, Lhol^rag and Kong-po; 27 to Upper
Kham; 154 to Lower Kham and 414 to Ulterior Tibet which is
called Poi-Ghen or greater Tibet. In this list village-monasteries
and Mani'lhakhang (prayer- wheel temples) have not been entered.

The number of monasteries belonging to the three red-cap
sects, is a little more than the total of the Yellow-cap Church insti-
tutions. This would bring the total of the monasteries of all the
18 sects to over 2,500 and that of the monks to about 760,000.

In Tibet every third boy in a family, as a rule, is sent to the
monastery, in consequence of which the male population of the coun-
try may be roughly estimated at 2^ to 3 millions.

The Yellow-cap Church Lamas take the vow of celebacy, which
circumstances precludes them from keeping female company. But
many among them while residing abroad seldom conform them-
selves to monastic discipline.

The miserable pittance which the monks of even the State-
supported monasteries get for their subsistence, hardly exceeds
three Tanka, i.e., 1^ Re. a month. Owing to this, about one-fifth
of the monks in a monastery generally turn into traders. Many
among them become mendicant priests and roam over the country in
quest of the necessaries of life. These are called TdpH or monas-
tery-boys. The agricultural population often regard them with
dread for their irregular habits of life and clamouring for alms.

There are few convents in Tibet and the number of nuns
(Tsunmo) in them is very small. While the largest monastery
contains 10,000 monks, the largest convent can hardly count 100

* Compiled from Pagsam Jon tan and other Tibetan historical works.

Vol. I, No. 4.] The Monasteries of Tibet. 107

[N. flf.]

nuns for its inmates. The nnns of Tibet have the reputation of
heinfi pure as onlj the most religiously disposed among the fair
sex betake themselves to monastic life. The red-cap Lamas gener-
ally keep concubines called Ani who often dress as nuns.

Marriage being the exclusive privilege of the eldest brother in
a landholder's family, the younger brothers seldom care to share
the bed of the house- wife with him which the custom of the coun-
try allows. They generally keep concubines. It is true that
there is marriage among the rich cultivators and herdsmen, but the
majority of the common people make familv in wedlock either
singly or jointly. Thus, side by side with polyandry, concubinage
has become a popular institution in Tibet. Out of 100, 99 people
keep concubines. This explains the question as to what becomes of
the majority of the female population who remain unmarried. The
Tibetan male is generally less jealous than the Tibetan female
which circumstance has given rise to the formation of that much
despised relationship called Nyamdo-pdn, i.e., brotherhood in wedf
lock versus brotherhood in matrimony which is polyandry pure and
simple.

Ra-deno.

^it-i

The monastery of Badeng was founded by Dom-ton-pa ' in the
year 1056 A.D. Many predictions were on record in some of the
sacred books such as Manju9r! Mula Tantra,' Phalpo-clte, Do niA-
je Padma Karpo,* etc , as to the rise and progress of a great school
and monastery in the centre of Tibet. Conformably to them,
Dom-ton-pa founded Ra-deng in one of the finest spots of C,* rich
in various kinds of alpine vegetation. The valley of Ra-deng is clad
in thick forests of firs, cedars, cypresses, and junipers. It abounds
in numerous brooks and fountains, which yield very good water.
Nine mountains, the culminating cliffs of which have various
slopes, fQrm the back-ground of this famed old monastery. Many
kinds of medicinal plants grow on these hills.

At this charming place which was possessed of many auspi-
cious signs essential to the site of a sacred Buddhist institution,
Dom-ton-pa built the monastery of Khyungo-chan, or ^^Eagle'&
head," in the vicinity of the hill of Senge-tag ^ (lion's rock). The
valleys which open to the east and west of Ra-deng have spacious
plateaus rich with verdure. On account of the tall and horn-
like shape of the trees growing in this place, the mpnastery of

108 Journal of the Astatic Society of Bengal, [April, 1905.

Khynngo-chan ^ was called Ra-deng from (rwa, 'a hoiii,' and sgreng,
' standing erect.' ) The large silver tomb wbioh contains Ati^a^s *
remains is the most remarkable of all the sacred objects of Ra-deng.
The central chapel of the monastery contains a complete set of the
images of the Tantnk pantheon, in which Buddha is observing the
triple vows, Maitreja watching the course of the world, and the
four gods of medicine (Manlha) ^ looking to the four quarters as in
life. Outside the cupola of the great Ghorten was constructed the
mansion of the chief Tantrik deity of Ouhya 8a/mSja (the mystic
commune) with a number of mystical goan, all in relief. When
the erection of the monastery with the images was completed,
Dom- ton-pa is said to have propitiated the god of the Tnshita
heaven to enable him to have his monasteiy consecrated by his
spiritual father. Accordingly, Ati^a, who was then seated on the
right of Maitreya, the coming Buddha, showered flowers toward
Ra-deng from Ttuhita. Dom-ton-pa presided over the monastery
for eight years.

At Ba-deng there is a golden image of Milarag-pa, the famous
Buddhist saint. It is said that the Jungar Mongolian Chief, who
persecuted the 9in-ma^ Buddhists in 1716, on his way to Lhasa
visited Ra-deng, and was much astonished when he was told that
the hair on the head of the saints' image was not artificial. In
the library of Ra-deng there were many rare ancient Sanskrit
works kept sealed by the Government of Lhasa. Ra-deng was
the chief seat of the first and the earliest Buddhist hierarchy of
Tibet and belonged to the Kahdam-pa School.

The Monastery of Gah-dan.

Tsong-khapa the great Buddhist reformer of Tibet, in fulfilment
of a certain prophecy of Buddha, in the year 1408 A.D., established
the grand annual prayer confin^gation of Lhasa, called the Mon-lam^
chen-po. After making ofEerings to the gods he prayed for the
welfare of all living beings. In the autumn of the same year he
examined the auspicious signs regarding the suitability of a plot

The name by which Dipaqikara ^r\]&kn9k the high-

priest of Vikrama QHaFthJra of Ma^^ha is known all over Tibet. He was
Don-ton-pa's spiritial teaohar and died at Ne-thang near Lhasa only three
years before the foundation of the monastery.

S^l *P^'^] Vg^^^Ti

Vol. I. No. 4.] The Monasteries of Tibet. 109

of land situated on the bill of Dok-poiri ^ with a view to erect on it a
great monastery. In the rocks of that hill he observed many religi-
ons symbols such as the sacred mystic syllables "Omma^-padme
hiim, om vajra patii hum," etc., and seeing that there was some scar-
city of water, he touched with his hand the water of a little foun-
tain that trickled down. On further examination the fountain
proved to be the source of a streamlet. In the midst of the rocks
of Dok-poiri he found several fossil conch-shells one of which
having its whorls from right * to left was believed to have been
used by the Buddha himself. From a rock-cavern in the neigh-
bourhood he unearthed a mask believed to have been used by the
Lamas daring King Thisiong-deu tsan's ^ time. It had the miracu-
lous power of dispelling all the evil spirits of the place. On this
auspicious place Tsong-khapa laid the foundation of the world-re-
nowned monastery of Gahdan. Within the remaining months of
the year the Dukhang-Uma ^ (central congregational hall), seven
cells for the residence of monks, and a biiildLng for the high-priest's
residence, were finished. As soon as the monastery approached com-
pletion, presents of gold, silver, precious stones, and other articles
from the pious flowed to it from different quarters. The number of
monks increased every year. Tsong-khapa furnished the monastery
with numerous religious books, objects and symbols. In the 64th year
of his age he erected the Tsang^khang ^ the principal chapel in the
monastery. This was followed by the Oon-khang^^ the chapel of
the hideous looking gods of mysticism. Then were constructed the
Khyamra or courtyard, and overhanging it all round, porticos
resting on 70 pillars. The Tsang-khang or chapel of worship was
provided with a large image of the Buddha, three superb mansions
of the gods of the Tushita heaven made of precious stones, with
Bhairava, Manju pri, the deities presiding over the destinies of all
living beings of the world and with the huge images of the four
Lokap&la. He also enriched the library with many rare books of
Buddhism. At Ghlidan there are now only two colleges for reli-
gions instruction to 3,300 monks, viz: —

(J) ^etJC'ise Tva-tshang,7 where metaphysics are taught.
(2) Ghyang-tse,^ where esoteric Buddhism and mysticism
are taught.

110 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [Aprils 1905.

Later on, during the ministry of Tsong-kliapa's illustrioas 8iio«
Qessors, the monastery became converted into a grand university
both for secular and religious education.

In the temples erected by OyaUtshab ^ Darma Binohen and
Dul-dsin the most remarkable object is the Nam-gyal ' Ohorten^^
^hich contains the remains and personal properties of the great
reformer. A satin tent hangs over the altar containing the urn.
During the ministry of Gedun Phun-tshog Lozang Tanzing,* Tashi
Badur the great Ehan of Kokonar covered the silver tomb of
Tsong-khapa with thin plates of gold. TThe gold used there is
said to have been one yearns revenue derived from Kham). On
the right and left of this central tomb-c^or^en there are the tombs
of the disciples and the illustrious successors of the founder. In
some of them are placed their respective statues.

In the chapel, called Serdan-Tsangkhang ^ (golden pure hall)
at the centre of the great temple called Yang-pachan, there are the
images of Buddha, Maitreya, and Amitabha. In the Qonhhang
the life size statues of Kushi Khan ^ and his generals are placed in
martial attitude. Besides these, stand several mythological war-
riors all in divers frightful attitudes. In the chapel called Dub-
choi ^ Tsaug-khang the remarkable thing is the image of ^amvara
the chief of the Tantrik deities, with the Sakti (female energy) in
his clasp.

In the Lama-khang a statue of Tsong-khapa, his works in
original, painted tapestries, a set of Kahgyur scriptures written in
gold, etc., are among the remarkable articles. This was Tsong-
khapa*s study in his old age. There are also several Ohortens and an
image of Yajra Bhairava, the fearful defender of Buddhism. In
the Sarma-khang, erected by Lodoi Choikyong, ^ there are the
images of the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas made of gold, sandal-wood,
medicinal minerals besides numerous chortens, tapestries, pictures,
etc. In the De ^eg ^ Lhakhang, i.e., the temple of the Tathagata
there are eight silver chortens consecrated to the eight Buddhas.
The most prominent of the images of the temple called Ghyam-
khang is that of Maitreya, the future Buddha, which is said to
have come flying from Magadha. Beside it, stand in row the im-
ages of several Bodhisattvas. In the Zim-khang^^ the private

Vol I, No. 4.] The Manaateries of 3Ibe^. Ill

[N. 8.-]

reBidenoe of Tsong-khapa, which contaiiui the chair of the great re-
fonner, is to be seen the curious image of the hero E^handa Kapala
with a halo of variegated colours round his head. In the ascetical
cell called ffoi^salphng' (the cavern of light)where Tsong-khapaused
to perform ascetical meditation the images of the terrific Yajrapa^i
and his retinae attract the attention of the pilgrims. In the interior of
the hall of priestlj assemUj called Dnkhaug-Earpo, ' the Serthi *
(the golden chair, t.6., the hierarchical throne) and the statne of
Tsong-khapa impress the faithful pilgrim with awe and reverence.
Phola Jiing Wang provided this temple with a gilt dome built after
the Chinese style and deposited in it a set of 108 volumes of the
Kahgyur scriptures written in gold. In the Nai-choikhang ^ a
tooth of the saintly reformer, called Tsem-Hodzer-ma ^ (the lustrous
tooth) and the image of the thousand armed Avalokite9vara whose
eleven heads look with eyes of mercy on all living beings of the
world, are remarkable.

In the college of Chyang-tse, there is an elephant illustrative
ofone of Buddha's former births with a number of devout followers,
all made of horn. There are also some representations of sainted
fairies called Khandoma,^ and a set of Tantrik bone ornaments
including strings of beads, earrings, chains, amulets, etc., all made
of human bones. All these are said to have once been used Iby the
Indian saint Naropa. Naropa's mitre- shaped crown and his Tshe-
biim (pot of longevity) containing consecrated water which never
dries, are looked upon by devout pilgrims as wonderful objects of
veneration. In the Oonkhang of this college there are terrific
representations of the Lord of Death and his frightful companions,
messengers, and guards. In the Parkhang (printing house) are to be
seen Tsong-khapa^s voluminous works — flJl engraved on wooden
blocks which are piled up in different rooms from which impres-
sions can be had on daphne paper, at any time, at a small cost. In
the temple of Yangpa-chan^ there are the scenes of Buddha's triumph
over Mara (the evil one) and his legions. In the outer passage of cir-
eumambulation called Chyi-kor ^pUgrims are shewn many self -exis-
tent (i?an7-/i»n^)^ sacred letters, figures, and fountain heads, finger-
marks and footprints on rocks, and outside of this passage there
is a lofty seat consecrated to the mountain god of Ma-chen
Pomra, who is said to have patronised Tsong-khapa in his arduous
works. The saccessors of Tsong-khapa, who are appointed by

112 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [April,. 1905,

election from among the most learned and pions Lamas of ordinary
birth, oconpy the hierarchical throne called Serthi. They are, there-
fore, called GhJidan Thi-pa,^ i.e,, President or Chairman of Ghihdan.
Men of learning generally resort to Oahdan. Its monks, for the
excellent education they get in the university, always rise to dis-
tinction in the public service both secular and religious. All
sections and classes of men are represented at Oahdan.

The monastery of Sangkhar which contains 200 monks at
Dachan,* north of Lhasa, was founded by Tsong-khapa under the
auspices of a rich noble named Rinchen Shun-pa of Tag-kar. It
is under the supervision of the Gahdan Thi-pa,

The Monastery of Sera.

The monastery of Sera (literally, wild rose) was founded by
Oham-chen-choije yakya Ye9eg* in 1418, the year of Tsong-khapa's
death.

The Governor Nehu-pa who patronised Tsong-khapa and his
disciples, frequently used to invite them to Sera-tse,^ a retired
hermitage on the top of the hill overhanging Sera. On these occa-
sions Ohoije devotedly served the reformer, in consequence of which
Tsong-khapa predicted a great futnre for a monastery which
Ohoije would found in that neighbourhood. A saintly Lama while
sitting in meditation, cast his eyes on a spot lower down the
hermitage which was filled with wild rose plants in blossom.
He predicted that some day there would be a monastery there.
Emperor Ydnglo of the Taming dynasty, had sent an invitation to
Tsong-khapa to visit Peking ; but the great reformer, finding Ohoije' a
time fully occupied with the more important work of religious
reformation, sent Qakya Ye9e« as his representative. Ydnglo did
honour to the Yellow-cap Church by showing every consideration to
this disciple of the reformer on his arrival at Peking where Ohoije' s
first act was to bring about the recovery of the Emperor from a seri-
ous illness by the efficacy of his religious services. The temple
of Maitreya, then recentlj built by the Emperor, was placed in his
charge and he was given the name of Chyam-chen Ghoije, Un-
der the Imperial auspices Ohoije founded the monastery of
Hwang-sze (Yellow-temple) in one of the imperial gardens of
Peking situated a few miles to its north. For diffusing the reform-
ed creed of Tsong-khapa in China he had taken with him several
of T6ong-khapa*s works and a set of block-print Kahgynr

.Vol. I, No. 4.] The Monasteries of Tibet. 113

scriptures. After converting the Lamas of Peking to the reformed
Yellow-cap Church he returned to Tibet. On the way he paid his
reverence to Tsong-khapa making rich presents to him. Subse-
quently, he founded the monastery of Sera Theg-chen-ling, which
now contains 5,500 monks and exercises much influence in the
secular and religious administration of the country.

He established a university in it with four Tva-tshang or col-
leges. Of these Gjek'Tva-tshang belonged to the upper division
of Sera and the remaining three, i.e., Thoisam, Norpuiling, Chyipa
Khaman<^ Tva-tshang^ andfi'aig-pa Tfia-tshang belonged to Sera Msh,
(«ma/i) i.e., lower division of Sera. In the middle of the eighteenth
Century two of the colleges were established. It still continaes to
be a favourite resort of learned men of Tibet and Mongolia. The
monks of Sera belong to respectable families of Tibet proper,
Amdo, Kham, S'yagrong, Mongolia and Western China.

There are in the Dukhang (grand hall of congregation) the
images of —

1. Buddha vanquishing Mara the evil one and a host of

demons.

2. The sixteen Sthavira (Neh-tan Chu-rug ') brought from

China.

3. Several life-like images constructed by the famous artist

Nehu Chang-wa.

In the Gonkhang (the temple assigned to the Tantrik deities
there are —

1. The image of the six-armed Bhairava, constructed by Leg-

gyau of Shwau.

2. Gon-po Clioij^yal with four arms.

3. The goddess Paldam Lhama (Kali) on horseback, her legs

being tied by a chain, probably as a punishment for
her wicked conduct.

In the front wall there are painted representations of the in-
vasion of tl by the Tsang army and their defeat by the Tartars
in 1643, the scenes of war, and the images of fearful spirits, such
as Gon-po De-mar, the genius (Chyarog-dong-chan, he with a raven's
head), etc. On the western wall are painted the likenesses of the
successive high priests of Sera, etc.

In the western comer of the upper congregation hall ( Duk-
hang Gong-ma), are the images of Amitabha Buddha, the eleven-
headed Avalokite9vara and the four-armed Gt>n-po, Maitreya made
of silver, the Bodhisattva (Qakya) as a citizen, and the eight
spiritual sons of Buddha and also the Kah-gyur and Tangyur
collections, all written in gold and silver.

In the temple of Chyam-chen Shal-reh Lhakhang, tho image
of Atifa with a Ghintamani wishing-gem in his hand is conspicuous.

'W^'5^^«'5"1 1

114 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905,

In the Go-chje-khang there are the images of Buddha and a
silver Oharten. In the further nich6 of the Dukhang there is a
golden image of the coming Buddha, In the front hall of the
Dukhang there are the Dharma Pala. The most remarkable
object in the passage of circumambulation round the monastery is
a small OJiaitya (said to be one of the 84,000 chaitya constructed
by Emperor A9okjet ) which was brought £ix)m Magadha. There is
also a Tantrik image of Hayagriba with the goddess Vajra Varahi
in his clasp.

The Monastery of Dapuno.

Dapiing the great monastery of lower 0, now the premier
monastery of Tibet, was founded by Jam-y«ng Choije ^ in the year
Fire-monkey, i.e. 1415 A.D. with 5,000 monks. His father Qtth-wa
Nor-shon, on account of his wealth, was believed to have been an
incarnation of Vai9ravana the god of riches. Jam-yang was
born at Sam-ye, and admitted into the sacred order at Tse-
thang (Chethang). He received his first lessons in sacred litera-
ture from the abbots of Sangphu. At Qahdan, Tsongkhapa Hnd
his principal disciples ordained him with the final vows of the
order of Bhiksn. At Tashi Dokha, Tsong-khapa advised Jnm-yang
and his friend Namkha Zangpo, the Governor of Nehu-Dsong, to
found a monastery after the model of the ancient monastery of
^ri-dhanya Kataka of Southern India. One night, while Jam-yang
was asleep in the fort of Nehu-Dsong he saw in a dream the god
Nam- A a Karpo telling him that if he founded a monastery at Dar*
bag thang, sitaated in front of the hill called Gephel Kivo-che, he
could get 5,000 monks to reside and study in it. Accordingly, he
visited Dar-bag and Rivo-che. There he saw several fountains and
small lakes called '' the lakes of fortune. " On another occasion,
while seated on the margin of a lake situated on the top of Lang-
chen ri, Tsong-khapa mentioned to him that that was " the lake of
learning. " Another night he dreamt that several men were
assembled on a river's edge in order to cross it. Jam-yang at
once swam to the opposite bank and threw a bridge across to
enable others to follow him. After several such curious dreams
he determined to found the monastery of Dapiing. Tsong-khapa
supplied him with the necessary plan after the model of Qri-
dhanya Kataka, and his friend the Governor of Ne^u Dsong, fur-
nished him with funds ; and through the joint exertions of Jam-
yang and his patron, Dapiling was founded. On account of the
Governor's help the rich nobles of Tibet gave endowments of
lands to it and sent their boys for religious education there.

Vol. I, No. 4.] . The Monasteries of Tibet. 116

[N. fif.]

Their example was followed by the merchants and other land-
holders, in consequenoe of whioh it soon became a favonrite insti-
tution of the aristocracy of Tibet. Jam-jaug establislied eight col-
leges for teaching the different branches of sacred and secular learn-
ing. In course of time the monastery became the principal seat
of learning, and learned and wise men flocked to it from the different
parts of the country. In discipline, moral culture and purity of
life, the monks of Dapiing excelled the monks of all other sin[iilar
institutions in Tibet. It soon claimed a university with seven
colleges for the study of the different branches of sacred litera-
ture including metaphysics, logic, medicine, and one for that of
profane literature for the benefit of the lay people. After Tsong-
shapa's death, Jam-yang presided over the Monlam-chenpo of Lhasa
and raised it to prominence. From this circumstance the power of
Dapiing over the Monlam-chenpo became paramount and con-
tinues so to this day. The president of the Monlam-chenpo
called the Dap^ng Sha^-ngo, exercises supreme authority in the
spiritual affairs of the country during the months of January and
February, when the Talai Lama himself submits to the resolutions
passed by the congregated clergy on the occasion. The chair of
Dapung was filled by many able and distingcished sages, among
whom Pa)dan-senge, one of the disciples of Tsong-khapa, Jam-
yang Gahlo, and Yontan Gyatsho of Tsang-thon, were the most
learned. On the rise of Dapiing with its great university the
glory of Gahdan was overshadowed. The fame of the Gahdan
Thipa as the profoundest scholar of the Yellow-cap Church was
surpassed by that of the high priest of Dapiing. Under the presi-
dency of Gedun-Gyatsho who was called Dap&g Tiilpaiku (incar-
nate Lama of Dapiing), the monastery with its university claimed
precedence even over Gahdan. Gedun-Gyatsho in whom the spirit of
GedAn-diib had appeared was called Gyal-wa ni-pa (2nd Gyalwa).
He was, therefore, the first incarnate hierarch of the Yellowcap
Church, from whose time the monastery enjoyed the proud name
of Chyog nampar Gyal-wa — victorious in all the quarters, which
expression is preserved to this day in the silver currency of Tibet.
DapOng contained the following Tva-tshany or colleges : —

1 . Tashi-gomang. 4. ififag-pa Namgyal-ling.

2. Lozang-ling. 5. Ku chyog-ling.

3. Thoisam-ling. 6. Choikhor-ling.

7. De-yan.

Of these only four are now in existence. Thoisam-ling, Ku-
chyog-ling andCnoikhor-ling were abolished during the presidencies
of Sonam Gya-tsho and Lozang Gyatsho. There are at present
7,700 monks in the monastery, most of whom are recruited from
noble families in Kham, Mongolia, Gyarong, ^ag-rong, Amdo, tJ
and Tsang. In the Zimkhang, Jam-yang Ghoije's residence, situ-
ated behind the grand cloister, is the image of Jam-yang Sung-chon
(speaking Munju pri). In the central Tsang-lchang (chapel) are
the golden images of the Buddhas of the past, present and future

116 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [April, 1905.

in sitting posture and sorronnded by their respective eight disci-
ples. In the temple of Na-chu-tug Lhakhang there are the sixteen
sthavira (sages) brought from China hj the illustrious Phag-pa
during the reign of t he Emperor Khublai Khan. In the new chapel
conseci^ted to Champa there are — the huge image of the corning
Buddha, representing him as a youth of twelve, and a silver trident
used by Jam-yang himself. In the Kalzang Lhakhang there are one
thousand Buddhas, all made of copper gilt with gold. In the
Kahgyur Lhakhang, i.e., the library of sacred books, there are
Kahgyur collections all written in gold. In the cloister of the
^ag-pa Tva-tshang (I'antrik College), there are many articles very
sacred to the Buddhists. On the right of the image of Vajra
Bhairava is the statue of Tsong-khapa and on its left is the image
of the Lord of Death with his horrid train. The principal temple
is three- storeyed- The principal hall of congregation called the
Dukhang Chenpo on the ground floor contains 2W wooden pillars,
distributed over an area of 34,560 sq. ft. to accommodate 7,700
monks when they assemble to perform religious service.

The third hierarch was Pai^-chen Sonam Tag-pa ; the 4th,
Sonam Gyatsho, the Dalai Lama ; 5th, Yontan Gyatsho, Dalai
Lama ; 6th, Panchen Lozang Choigyan of Tashilhunpo ; 7th,
]Aag-wang Lozang Gyatsho, the 5th Dalai Lama ; 8th, l^ag-
wang Ye9e Gyatsho (rakardsin-pa) ; 9th, Kalyang Gyatsho (7th
Dalai Lama) in the year 1726.

The Monastery of Meru was one of the four sanctuaries
founded at the four cardinal points of Lhasa by King Ralpachan
in the 9th Century A.D. It was abolished by King Langdarma,
but was afterwards restored to its former condition and formed
the metropolitan monastery.

Chaopoiri is a monastic institution with classes for the study
of medicine. It is called the Man-pa Tva-tshang or the Medical
College. It does not contain more than one hundred pupils.

PhaboDg-kha was anciently KingSrong-tsan Gampo*s favourite
resort, where he used to propitiate his tutelary deities. The seven
early monk-scholars called Sedmi-midiin also had their residence
there. During the persecution of Buddhism by King Langdnrma
there existed no monastic establishment at Phabongkha. Gei^s
Tag-kar-pa revived the institution. During the hierarchy of
Sakya, Dogon Phagpa repaired the monastery and g^ve rich
endowments for its maintenance, but during the dispute between
Sakya and Phagmodd it again dwindled into insignificance till
it was repaired by Thegchan Choigyal and revived by Je-Deleg-
f^ima. But again, when internal discords convulsed Tibet, it
declined and remained in a neglected condition till the year Earth-
sheep of the tenth cycle when Minister Paljor Lhundub of the
family of Khon rescued it from ruin. Since then it has been
flourishing.

Sangphu Nehu thang, situated on a hill beyond Kethang, was
founded by Dog Leg-^e in the same year when Sakya was
established.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Notes on an Indian Worm. 117

13. Notes on an Indian Worm of the Oenus Cheetogaster — By
Nelson Annandalb, B.A., D.Sc, Deputy Superintendent of the Indian
Museum, (With one plate. )

The fresh- water worms of the gehns Ghsstogaster are held by
some authorities to constitute a separate family; bat Beddard,^ whom
1 have followed in drawing np my account of ()h. henqalensis, regards
them as belonging to the Naidomorpha, a rather obscure group of
OligochsBtes which appears to be well represented in the Calcutta
tanks. Hitherto the genus, well known in Europe and record-
ed from America, does not appear to have been reported from
within the limits of Asia. The Calcutta species is not un-
common and I liave taken specimens of what may be a second in
the Botanical Gardens at Sibpur. This merely proves, as I have
already pointed oat to the Society, that a vast field lies open to any
naturalist who would devote himself to the study of Indian pond
life. I am much indebted to my friends Mr. F. F. Laidlaw, of
Owen's College, Manchester, and Dr. J. H. Ashworth, of the
University of Edinburgh, both for the generic identification of
the worm in the first instance and for references to literature later.
My thanks are also due to Major A. Alcock for his unfailing
sympathy and assistance in the work undertaken.

Description of Ohsetogaster hengalensis, sp. no v.

Prostomium forming a large, sub-circular sucker : another
smaller sucker at the posterior extremity of the body. CEsophagus
longer than pharynx, with two well-marked dilatations, the poste-
rior of which shows indications of a second constriction in its
posterior third when empty. The anterior dilatation is covered
with large, flat, polygonal cells of a faint yellowish colour.
There is a sense-organ (otocystp) in the brain: the remainder
of the nervous system normal for the genus, the somewhat
discrete nature of the ventral ganglia, their number in the first
few segments and the separation of the two ventral nerve
chords in the same region being characteristic. The first pair
of nephridia is larger than the others posterior to it. Setee
arranged on each side of the ventral surface in bundles of from
15 to 17. Body colourless and almost transparent. Length vary-
ing greatly with state of contraction, at least 10 mm. when the
body is fully expanded. There is a very distinct flattened area on
the ventral surface between the two bundles of setaa. Outward
appearance somewhat resembling that of an JEohsoma.

Possibly this worm should be regarded as the type of a new
genus; but it seems more convenient to regard it for the present
as a OhsBtogaster,

i A Monograph of the Order Oligochatat p. 304. Oxford, 1895.

118 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

Bionomics of OhsBtogaster hengalensis.

The Ohsstogaster of the Calcutta tanks is usually found clinging
by means of a posterior sucker to the external surface of the body
or the edge of the shell of a water-snail. When disturbed it with-
draws itself entirely within the latter. It does not confine itself
to any one species of snail, but generally chooses a LimnsBus,
Linmophysa or some similar species, apparently because these
genera are common in its habitat, do not possess an operculum
and have a wide aperture to their shells. In one instance I saw,
in an aquarium in which snails were somewhat scanty, a solitary
worm attempting to establish itself on a Planorhis; but the connec-
tion was only temporary, not lasting for more than a few minutes.
The mouth of the shell in this genus, though there is no oper-
culum, is evidently too constricted to be suitable for the worm,
which is generally gregarious. Ab shown by the figure (plate III,
fig. 1), a considerable number of individuids may establish them-
selves on a single snail. Occasionally Oh. bengalensis quits its
host altogether and either wanders away in search of another or
drops to the bottom. This happens whenever the water becomes
foul or reaches too high a temperature (in an aquarium when the
sun, falling directly on the surface, heats the water), or when too
many individuals are settled on a single host after rapid asexual
multiplication. Before fixing themselves on a fresh snail they
frequently crawl over the external surface of the shell.

Progression is mainly effected by a series of contractions and
elongations of the body, aided by the two suckers. The posterior
of these having been fixed to any surface, the body is stretched
forward to its greatest extent. The anterior sucker is then applied,
the posterior one set free, and the body contracted. As a rule, the
ventral surface is not lifted, but something analogous to the '* loop-
ing '' of a leech or a Gl-eometrid caterpillar, but not so marked, takes
place very occasionally. When sinking through the water, as it
does when its hold is released, the worm can change its direction
slightly by moving the posterior part of the body from side to side ;
it cannot swim or raise itself upwards without snpport. The setee
appear to play a very small part in ordinary progression, except
as aids in adhesion. Each bundle is capable of an independent
rotatory motion somewhat resembling a rapid turn of the wrist.
This movement is very useful when the worm is insinuating itself
into a crevice, as it thrusts the body forward rapidly. All the setes
are frequently moved at once, although each bundle can be turned
separately. The anterior bundles have a different function, as we
shall see.

Although this species' lives in close connection with water-
snails, it is not, strictly speaking, parasitic upon them ; for it captures

I The European speoies also live on water-snails, bnt some of them nt any
rate are said to be internal parasites. Dr. J. H. Ashworth has sent me a
specimen of an English speoies in which the food probably consists of
diatoms and the like.

Vol. I, No. 4.1, Note* on an Indian Worm. 119

[N. 8.-]

living prey and only useB its host, so to speak, as a beast of burden
and a stallkin^ horse. Carried along clinging to it by the posterior
sucker, the body is extended outwards as far as possible and
waived rapidly in all directions, the " head " being invariably free
of the snail's shell. As soon as it comes in contact with the body
of a small crustacean, the anterior sucker takes a firm hold. Its
ventral surface is covered with small prominences, which are
not grandular but mere projections of the epidermis. These
probably give an additional grip, the limbs of the struggling prey
becoming entangled amongst them. The anterior setae do not
project free from the ventral surface as in the posterior bundles,
but are contained in a pocket or introvert in such a way that
thej lie below the mouth inside a lower lip or lobe which forms
the wall of the posterior part of the prostomial sucker. As long
as the body is elongated they are placed almost parallel to one
another in a vertical line, leaving the aperture free; but as soon as
the body is contracted, a rapid twist of their bases takes place and
they spread out in a fan-like formation, so that the tips of the
inner setae of each bundle are practically in contact with those of
the other side. (There is no difference in stracture or arrangement
between these setae and those posterior to them, but the latter are
considerably shorter) . By the movement described the prey is seized
by the setae and conveyed into the mouth, which opens directly into
a large pharynx with greatly thickened walls, a small lumen, and
numerous muscle-bands radiating from it to the body-wall. A
function of this organ seems to be to crush the prey to death ;
but a similar pharynx is found in species in whicli the food
probably does not need cruRhing. A narrow slightly coiled
passage leads into the first dilatation of the oesophagus. The
cells on the surface of the latter probably have some
digestive f auction (" liver cells " ) and the interior of the Crusta-
cea swallowed become disintegrated very largely in this chamber.
Even at the moment of the passage of food into the second dila-
tation, the constriction between the two remains distinct. The
feeble constriction in the posterior dilatation is a mere fold of the
walls of the structure, allowing a certain enlargement to take place.
The intestine which leads from the oesophagus to the anus is rather
broad: this is rendered necessary by the bulky nature of the
indigestible parts of the food, for the shells of small Gopepods and
Ostracods pass through the body of the worm practicaUy unaltered,
even the appendages remaining attached to the trunk in many cases.
Regarding sexual reproduction I have pmctically no infor-
mation. During the period between December and April, through-
out which I have had living specimens under observation, it does
not take place and the sexual organs are imperfectly developed.
Reprodnction by fission is, however, active at this season. I find it
a little difficult to say what is the normal number of segments pre-
sent in the species, but it appears to be twenty or twenty -one.
More than this number are, however, produced by budding from
the penultimate segment, and at first it is impossiole to distinguish

1*20 Journal of the Aaiatto Society of BengaU [April, 1905.

between them and the original ones. When several hare been
prodnoed, the moat anterior can be distinguished from the others
hj a dilatation of the alimentary canal which nltimat«Iy becomes
the phaiynx of a new individnal. The prostomium never takes
its place as a regnlar segment in the series, but grows ont as a
lobe on the dorsal snrface. The month of the young worm is in

continuity with what will be the new anus of the pareat and the
shells of the food pass to the exterior of the old anns, at the extrem-
ity of the yonng individual, until the separation has been com-
pletely affected. This does not occnr until at least 16 new seg-
ments (in addition to the old extremity) have been formed. The
clitellam (10th and 11th segments) is already conspicnoos, being
devoid of setee. In adult individuals, however, the glandular struc-
ture of its integument extends partially over another segment
on either side.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 111.
Fig, 1. Ohsetogcuter bengalensig on a Water-Snail, X 2.
„ 2. Anterior extremity of an adult individual from below,
showing nerve cords, etc. (Muck enlarged).
p. — prostomium, I. — lower lip, 8, — anterior set*, n. —
nerve chords, g. — ganglia.
„ 3. Diagram showing arrangement ol' the setts in a similar
bundle from the right aide. Each dot represents a seta
in cross-section.
„ 4. A bundle of setts from the left side of one of the poaterior
a^ments, seen from behind. {Much enlarged).

{Text figure.)
Fig. 1. Young Oh^toga:Ster bengaleTtni just separated by fission
from its parent. {Somewhat diagraiMnatic at reyarda
the nephndia),
p. — prostomium, ph. — pharynx, l.ph. — lumen of pha-
lynx, oe. — cesophagns, c. — ditellnm, n, — nephndia,
p.g. — posterior sucker.

Vol. 1, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 121

[N. fif.]

14. NUMISMATIC SUPPLEMENT V.

(With Plates IV & V.)

Note. — The numeration of these articles is continued jrompm 116 of
the Journal for 1904. (Extra number.)

III.

Sultans of Dehli.

31. Mu^am/mad bin Tughlaq^ PL IV. 1.

A new variety of Muhammad bin Tnghlaq^s lighter gold
coins has recently been obtained at Agra by Mr. G. Bleazby who
has sent it to me for publication. An almost similar coin of the
same mint was described by me in the Journal of the Rojal Asiatic
Society J 900, p. 776. The date of the present coin, however, is dif-
ferent, and Daulatabad is given the title of S;'^^ instead of v^Uljtd.
The coin is in very fine condition. In my paper above mentioned
I suggested that the words in front of the mint name were
fj^\ i^l ^ap and not ^^1 (^^i) ^ as read by Mr. Thomas or
f^ Vt ^ as preferred by Mr. Gibbs. I have, nowever, since had
reason to modify this opinion, as I find that on the gold coins
of Firoz Shah l^afar and Fate^ !Khan the form of the two first
letters of the words f^^Vt is identical with that of the same letters
in ^^ Vt on the margin of this coin. I have therefore adopted
Mr. Gibb's reading.

Weight, 143 grains.

Size, -7.

Mint, Hazrat Daulatabad.

Bate, 730 A.H.

Obverse. Reverse.

Kalima in circle. j v:r*3 i/* *?i->**

Margin. i^^j ^\J\ «ujJf

H. N. Wright.

IV.

Mughal Emperors.

32. JalaUud-din Ahbar,

(i) Metal, Gold. PL IV. 2.
Weight, 168 grains.
Mint, Hajipnr.
Bate, 983 A.H.

122 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1906.

This nniqae mohiir was aicqtured from a Hindu priest
shortly after the last Magh Mela at Allahabad, to which it is said
to have been brought by a pilgrim from Bengal. No coins from
the Hajipur Mint were previously known. The place is situated
in the Muza&rpur District, Bengal, and lies on the east bank of
the Little Ghindak, a short distance above its confluence with the
Ganges opposite Patna. Hajipur figures conspicuously in the
history of the struggles between Akbar and his rebellious Afgb&n
governors of Bengal, having been twice besieged and captured by
the Imperial troops. in 1572 and again in 1574 A. D. This mohur
was struck in 1575, when apparently order was again restored. It
is in fine condition and of the type of the mohur illustrated as
Figure 65, Plate III. of the British Museum catalogue of Coins of
the Mughal Emperors.

(ii) Metal, Gold. PI. IV. 3.
Weight, 167 grains.
Mtnty tlaunpur.
Date, 988 A.H.

This is, I believe, the only square mohur of Akbar known
from the Jaunpur Mint. His square rupees from the same mint
are extremely rare. The date on this mohur appears in the right-
hand lower comer of the obverse — a comparatively rare occurrence.

(iii) Me^a^, Silver. PI. IV. 4.
Weight, (looped.)
Mi7it, Jaunpur- Chaitaur.
Date, 976 A.H

This strange combination of names has long been a puzzle to
me, which I have not yet succeeded in solving. There seems no
doubt about the reading, and the coin is certainly genuine. It is of
the usual type of Akbar's broad rupees from the Jaunpur Mint
(No. 96, Plate IV of the B.M. Catalogue), but with this difference
that, while the name Jaunpur appears in the usual place in the
lower margin of the reverse, the word Chaitaur occurs in the upper
margin on the same side of the coin. Hitherto only copper coins
of Akbar were known from the Chaitaur Mint and none with two
mint names Silver coins of Sher Shah are known from the
Jahanpanah-Ujjain Mint. This coin was acquired in Lahore
some years ago.

(iv) Metal, Silver. PI. IV. 5.
Weight, 44 grains.
Mint, Lahore.
Date, 987 A.H.

The inscription on one side of this coin reads A^f Ai/| ** Akbar
is God '* and not the usual Al^t ^^1 " God is great." A four-anna
piece with a similar legend was published by Dr. L. White King
and Captain Vest in 1896 in the paper abeady referred to, but
although it bore the same year, it was from the Ahmadabad Mint.

Vol. I, No. 4.1 Numismaitc Supplement, 123

It has been stated hy some writers, among them the late Mr. G. J.
Bodgers, that in the thirtieth year of his reign, when Akbar found-
ed a new religion, he changed the legends on his coins, his object appa-
rently being that he should be looked upon and worshipped as God ;
and coins of the kind described.above have been quoted as strength-
ening the assertion regarding the object he had in view. But, so far
at least as these pieces are concerned, is it not more reasonable to
suppose that the transposition of the words was due to a mistake
in the dies which was almost immediately rectified, for if Akbar
really intended to assume divine honours and to proclaim himself as
God, surely these coins instead of being of the greatest degree of
rarity, would be abundant even now, and the inscription would also
have been found on coins of the higher denominations instead of
being confined to four-anua bits ?

(v) Metal, Silver. PL IV. 6.
Weight, 177 grains.
Mint, Lahore.
Date, 997 A.H.

The rupee is apparently unique, or at any rate extremely rare,
by reason of the mint name appearing in the upper margin of the
reverse. On tliis side, the name and titles of the king are given in
a square with loops at the four scomers. The Kalima, with the
usual accompaniment, appears on the obverse in a quadrilateral
area with three curves in each side.

(vi) Metal, Silver.

Weight, J 76 grains.
Mint, Urdu Zafar Qnrin.
Date, Alif = 1000 A.H.

This rupee, which is precisely similar to the mohur portrayed
as Figure 79, Plate III, of the B.M. Catalogue, is probably unique.
It is the only round rupee of Akbar discovered so far from the camp
mint and of the year (1000) alif. It was acquired in Amritsar som&
years ago.

(vii) Metal, Silver.

Weight, J 75 grains.
Mint, Ahmadnagar.
Date, 4- Hah!.

This rare coin is of rude fabric, and, in this respect, much re-
sembles the rupees of Akbar from the Bairat Mint. The legend on
the reverse is —

The obverse has the inscription usual on Ilahi rupees.

Geo. B. Bleazbt.

124. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal [April, 1905.

33. A Zodiacal Half-rupee. PI. V. 1.

A few days ago I came across in the Al^madabad bazar a
zodiacal Leo half -rupee [Legend, normal : Date, Hijri year wanting,
regnal year 13 ; Mint, A^madabad]. If this be, as it seems to me
to be, a genuine specimen, it furnishes evidence, hitherto wanting, of
the existence of zodiacal coins of that denomination. Imitation half*
rupees, indeed, bearing representations of the signs of the Zodiac,
are well known (See Br. Mus. Gatal. Nos. 386-401), and these them-
selves, qud imitations, may fairly be taken as proof more or less
substantial of the currency of the original coins they counterfeit.
Had there been no genuine half -rupees, it is hard to see why the so-
called ** imitations should ever have been fabricated.

Beside the recently-discovered half -rupee, three full rupees of

Leo type lie before me on the table at which I am now writing.

Two of the three were evidently struck from one and the same die,

but the third not less evidently from a die slightly different. On

the two, for instance, the word j^jJ ^^ written as )jJi) with no

superscribed dot over the " ze ** (PI. Y. 2), but on the third as

^>>3 "^^^ ^^ subscribed dots under the " ye" (PL V. 3). Also on

the duplicates after the word %^ of Jahangir Shah comes a small

curved flourish distinctly to the left of the " ha " ; but on the third

we have a longer sprawl, not to the left at all, but directly above

the "ha." The two are evidently indentical with the coin

No. 385 figured on Plate XI of the Br. Mus. Catal., and there styled

an *' imitation rupee.'' If these be imitations, then the third (of the

jyj type) is certainly genuine, and it is with this third specimen

that the half -rupee agrees in every particular.

But, indeed, on what ground the Br. Mus. rupee No. 885 is
adjudged to be an imitation I fail to apprehend. A complete state-
ment of the differentiaB that serve to discriminate between a genuine
Zodiacal muhr or rupee and the beautifully-executed " imitations,"
a statement more detailed, and thus more practically helpful, than
the paragraph on pp. LXXXIH, f. of the Br. Mus. Catal., would,
I feel sure, be very acceptable to the collectors of the coins of
this fascinating series.

Geo. P. Taylor.

AhmadSfbQd,

Note. — 1 take the opportunity to figure yet a third variety in
which the word j^ is written without anv dots (PL V. 4.) All
three types appear to be equally genuine. 1 note also that on the
two specimens of the " Cancer " rupee in my cabinet, the reverse
legend of which is similar to that on the " Leo " rupee above
mentioned, the word^J also appears without dots.

H. N. Wright.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 126

[N, iS.]

34. Som^ rare Mugkol Coins.

In the hope that the following coinB from my collection may
be of some interest to numismatists, I beg to offer some short de-
scriptive remarks regarding them : —

(i) AkbAr. PI. V. 5.
Weight, 306 graias.

Size, -ss/;

Mint, Sironj.
Obverse, In double circle with dots between.

€'^

Reverse. ^^ ITA

Date, Ilahi 38.

Month, Mihr (7th Persian month).

This is a new Mu|j^al Mint. The coin was obtained in Bom-
bay two years ago.

(ii) JahOngir and NUr Jahan. PL V. 6.

Weight, 176 grains.
Size, -85."
Date, 1036-21
Mint, Lahore

Obverse,

"Reverse, •^Jj*

(^ — — ^

The legends on both obyerse, and reverse of this rupee read
downwards — omitting the regnal year 21 and Hijri year (10)36,
— icftm the following couplet : —

Zi N&m-i-Shah Jahftngir tibuwad sikka-i-bar nnr.
Fazudah Nur Jahan Begum ru*i-LUior.

126 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [April, 1905.

(May the coin by the name of King Jah&ngir, remain with light ;
And may the face of Lahore be made by Ntlr Jahan Begam

bright).
I.e., may this coin which is struck at Lahore remain for ever

shining with lustre, both from King Jahangir, and his

(Queen Consort) Begam Nnr Jahan.

This rare rupee was obtained by me at Al^madabad on my
short visit to that city on 29th of January last. Rupees of
Jahangir and Nftr Jahan from the Lahore mint with legends form-
ing a couplet are known. This is a new couplet altogether* : —

(iii) Awrangzeh. PI. V. 7.
^.

Weight, 103 grains.
iSftW, -7"
Mint Burhanpur.

Obverse. Vi)

[ ^^ ] ^^ »

Reverse. )ji^^^

A new mint of of Aurangzeb in copper, I got it at'' Burhan-
pur some two years ago.

(iv) A'lamgir II. PI. V. 8.
^.

Weight, 105 grains.
Size, -66."
Date, 1171— 4 P
Mint, Machhlipatan.

Obverse. «-0^^

Itvt
Reverse, »»

This is a new mint of JL'lamgir II. in copper. The name of the
Emperor is not engraved on the coin, but the year helps us in
assigning it to him.

Framji J. Thanawala.

'-'-'' Bombay, .,

^Note,T-The reading of the interesting coin of Jahangir
suggested by Mr. Thfai^wilft, appears capable of improvement.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic SupplemoU. 127

[N. 5.]

Owing to the coin being somewhat worn, it is diffiotdt to say with
certainty what the couplet is. The following is given as an
alternative suggestion.

Ohvene. J>^ ji ^^ ^ ^^ »^ f^ }

Reverse. )j^^ *^ *-j{> ^sl^A• jj^ *«>j J*

The words on the reverse read bj Mr. Thanawalaas f^ and

i>3 are, I think, unmistakeably A^ and j). Similarly, I do not think
that the penultimate line of the obverse can be read as .^ 4^. The
second letter is much more like a d than a ^^ and it is followed by
what is clearly a S. The rhythm of Mr. Thanawal&*s couplet
also appears to be defective. Dr. Taylor of Ahmadabad, who has
also seen the coin, has suggested that the last three words on the
obverse read jt^ j^ t^t. He would make the S at the end of the

Penultimate line the last letter of the word St& in the second line,
t is true the S of st^ is not visible elsewhere on the coin but
the coin is very much worn to the left of tft where one would expect
to find the letter B. Also there is no " alif " on the coin, and as
far as I c&n see no room for any.

H. N. Wright.

35. Dawar Baihsh. PI. IV. 7.

The coins of this grandson of Jahangir who occupied the
thix)ne of Dehli for three months as a stop-gap for S^fthjahan are
so scarce that it is worth while chronicling any finds. A rupee
of Lfthore mintage has been described and figured in the Cata-
logue of the British Museum (Moghul Emperors, No. 527). A
second was contained in the collection of the late Pandit Batan
Narain of Delhi, and the coin described below, which was obtained
by me at Meerut in March last, is, I believe, the onlv other known.
All three are identical in legend. No gold coins of Dawar Bakb^
have apparently come to light yet, bat doubtless some were struck .

Weight 172 grains.

Size, -85.

Mint, Lahore.

Bate, 1037 A.H. Ahd.

Obverse, Reverse,

iiJ\ lUftU

A ♦«*>« {•rv )j\^

JJ^^

128 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

The coin, bnt for three shroff marks on one side and fonr on
the other, is in very good condition.

H. N. Wright.

36. Two rare coins of ShdhjakSn and Aurangzeh,

Among 246 silver coins recentlv acquired as treasnre-trove in
the district of Bhandara C.P., and sent to me for examination,
two are of sufficient rarity to warrant special notice. One is a
coin of Shahjaban of Katak mint bnt of a new tjrpe ; the second
of Aurangzeb, strack at the Town of Allahabfid. This latter is, I
believe, one of two known, the other having been presented to me
some years ago by my friend Dr. G, P. Taylor of Ahmadabad. It
has not, however, been previously described.

(i) akayahSn. PI. IV. 8.

Weight, 173 grains.

Size, -9.

Mint, Katak (Cuttack).

Date, 3rd regnal year. Month AbSn.

Obverse. Reverse.

tumt All ji . yi

AUt J^j *—

^1 BUS bl ^ bell>^UA»»u>

(ii) Aurangzeh. PI. IV. 9.

Weight, 174 grains.

Size, -9.

Mint, Town of Allahabad.

Date, 1072. A.H. 4th regnal year.

Obverse. Reverse.

Usual couplet but «btf JJ| 8«xb

jf^ vice ji^ s^j^

date to left of ^jA^ qUji^d Klty^
lower line. t^ £u»

H, N. Wbight.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 129

IN. 8.}

37. Note an KSm Bakhfih and Bahadwr Sl^ah.

I notioe on p. 241 of the Jonmal, Vol. LXXII, Part I, for 1904,
a statement by Mr. H. N. Wright that " Kam Bakl^sh was made
Governor of the ^ubahs of Bijapur and Haidarabad hy his
brother, Shah 'Alam Bahadur'' [should be S.^'A., Bahadur S/iah].
I do not think that such an error, ^ coming from a leading numis-
matist, should be allowed to pass without a protest. The mere
fact that Kam Bakbsh issued coin in his own name suffices to
show that he claimed sovereignty.

Elam Bak^sh never held his authority from Bahadur S^ah ; he
was either an independent sovereign, as his father intended, or a
rival who had usurped part of Bahadur Shah's kingdom. By his
alleged will 'Alamgir attempted to make a partition of the
country between his three surviving sons ; and it was in pursuance
of this design, no doubt, that on the 14th Zu,l Qa^dah 1118 H.
(17th Febmazy, 1707 N.S.), he dominated Kam Bakbsh to be
Governor of Bijapur and Haidarabad. Kam Bakl^sh started from
the court at A^piadnagar at once to take up his appointment.
'Alamgir died on the 2nd March, 1707 (N.S.)

The exact words used in the will, as translated by James Frazer
"Nadir Sl}ah,'* p. 36, are: "Whoever of my fortunate children
"shall chance to rule the empire, let him not molest Mahommed
"Kam Bakbsh, should he rest content with the Two New ^ubahs."
The text from which James Frazer translated was, apparently,
that now in the Bodleian Library, see Sachau and Ethe's " Cata«
logue of Persian MSS." No. 1923 (Frazer MSS. No. 118) fol. 13a.

After doubting for a long time, 1 have at last come to look on
this will as authentic. S^afi Khan^ II, 549, says it was made
over to Qamid-ud-din IQ^an, a confidential servant in the Emperor's
entourage; K&mwar !Q^n states that ^Alamgir kept it, after
signature, under his pillow. Immediately after *Alamgir^s
death, its provisions were appealed to by Bahadur g^ah when
writing early in June, 1707 to his brother A'zam SJ^ah, then
advancing on Agrah to contest the succession ; and a copy had
reached Surat as early as the 18th October, 1707, as may be seen
foom F. Valentyn, Oude en Nieun ost Indie," IV, 274. The pro-
babilities are in &vour of the document having been executed ;

^ The statement quoted abore was based oa the following extract from
the MwhtajAahu-l'lubSb (Text Vol. II. p. 605) as translated by Professor
Dowson (Elliot's History of India, Vol. VII , p. 405).

** A kind and admonitory letter was addressed by the fimperor (Sb<^h
'A'lam I) to his brother Prinoe Mn^mmad Earn Bal^s^ to the following
effeot : ' Our father entrasted yon with the government of the l^ba of
Bijipiir) we now relinquish to you the government of the two filbas of
Bijapur and Qaidaribad, with all their subjects and belongings, upon the
condition, according to the old rule of the Dakhin, that the coins shall be
struck and the ^uiba, read in our name. The tribute which has hitherto
been paid by the Governors of these two provinces we remit.*

H. N. Wbight.

130 Journal of the Astatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

and in anj case, the dates show that Kam Bakbsh was appointed
to, and started to take possession of, Bijapnr before his father's
death.

William Irvine,

38. A^mad SRflfe Bahadur. A new Mughal mint, MujdhidOhSd,

This coin was obtained by me in Cawnpore two years ago. I
have been nnable to identify the locality of Mujaludabad. A^mad
Sh&h at his accession took the title of Mujahid-nd-dln (Elliot,
VIII., p. 112.).

The mint is entered in Mr. Barn's list of Mughal Mints
( J.A.S.B., Pt. I., No. 2, of 1904) bat the coin has been nowhere
described.

M. PI. IV. 10.

Weight, 165 grains.

Size, -86.

Mint, Majahidabftd.

Date, 1163, A.H. 3rd regnal year.

Obverse.

Reverse,

Within dotted circle.

^^j|L& j^l

^yU

jU|UAb<^

>.*C

vr^

cfjfAiki^uo

H. N. Wright

39. A Jirid of coins at ManhhUm.

A large and interesting find, containing 540 coins, from Shah-

Shan I to Shah Alam II was recently made at Ghorati in the
anbhtlm district. The find was especiaUy rich in the Bengal and
Benares mintages of the later Moij^als, Ma^ammad Shah, A^mad
gfaah, *Alamgir II and ghah 'Alam II as the following figures
will shew : —

Ma^^ammad gbih A)^mad Shah 'AlamgTr S^lh 'Alam II.

Azimabad ... 39 10 31 5ts 85

Jahangimagar 1 ... 7 5s 13

Katak ... 1 ... ... ss 1

^SSf*^^ }26 33 123 31 « 213

Murshidftbad 17 20 31 1<= 69

Mtlnglr .•• ... ... 2s 2

383

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 131

[N, S.]

Of the Mn^ammadabad Benares Mint there were coins of the
16th regnal year, and of each regnal year from the 18th to the 30th
of Mn^ammad Shah, a complete series of the coins of Al^mad
S^ah and 'Alamgir II, and coins of the first five years of Shah
'Alam II. The latter coins and those of 'Alamgir II shew a
great variety of types and mint marks. The find also contained a
complete series of the mpees of Azamabad for the reigns of
Al^mad Shah and 'Alamgir II, except in respect of the 4th year
of the former sovereign ; and it appears from them that the mint-
mark identified with the A^imabad Mint in later times was first
placed on the coins in 1163 A.H. — ^the 3rd year of Abimad Shah.
Kupees of Katak of Muhammad Shah, of Jahangimagar of
Muhammad Shah, and 'Alamgir II, and of Mungir of Shah 'Alam
U have not, as far as I know, been previously found.

The find further contained a rupee of 'Alamgir II of Calcutta
mintage, a rupee of Shah Alam II of Allahabad, with a date which, it
seems to me, must be read as 1172 A.H., t.€., two years before he
ascended the throne of Dehli ; and a rupee of Sh§h Jahan III of
A^imabad, dated 1174 A.H.

The Mungir rupee of Shah 'Alam II calls for special notice. In
Dr. White King and Captain Yost's paper " Some Novelties in
Moghul Coins," published in the Numismatic Chronicle, Vol. XVI,
a dam of Akbar was described and figured, on which the mint

name Manghir ^t^^ was read, though no ' ye ' is visible in the

illustration of the coin. This place was identified with Monghyr
in Bengal. The latter, however, is always in Persian characters

spelt j^y^j and this is the spelling found on the coin of Shah

'Alam II in the Manbhum find. It seems certain, therefore, that
the mint town of the copper coin of Akbar above mentioned cannot
have been Monghyr in Bengal. It is more probable that it was
" Manghar," a fort built by Islam Shah Suri, 76 miles north of
Amritsar (see Thomas's Chronicles, page 414). This would ac-
count for the S&ri type of the reverse.

The Allahabad rupee of Shah 'Alam II, dated 1172 A.H., is
puzzling. It is, I understand, not the first found, but I have myself
seen no other. In Elliot and Dawson's History of India, Vol«
VIII, page 172, it is stated that in the 5th year of 'Alamgir's
reign, which would correspond to 1172-73 A.H., Shah 'Alam left
Dehli after fighting a battle with Ghazi-ud-din Khan and proceed-
ed eastward. He was joined by the Governor of Allahabad, and
proceeded to invade Bengal, with a view to " establishing his
claim to the viceroyalty of the eastern StLbahs " (Br. Mus. Cat.,
page 12). After his defeat at Buxar and the signing of the
Treaty of Allahabad in 1765 A.D. (1178-79 A.H.) the latter
place became the headquarters of Shah 'Alam for some years.

(i) Muhammad ^h. PI. IV. 11.
JR.
Weight, 179 grains.

132 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1906.

Size, -9.

Mint, Katak.

Date, 1154— 24th regnal year.

Obverse. cf)U* i^ ^^ »UdU »U d^*t* f | d|«

Reverse. *-tf^ ^j^ (j»y^ *aa>^ ^jh^V rp «*-•

(ii) 'Alamgir fiftflA II. PI. IV. 12.

I7e*^^, 179 grains.
Size 9

Mint, Jabangimagar.
Date 117 — 6fch regnal year.

Obverse. *Jjk^ *C«. ^s}^i »Uj»li^,fctiJb 1 1 v

Beverse. jLj^fii^^ s^j^ jj-^U i&i*t^ ^j^j^ 1

(iii) ' Jiam^V flfeSA II. PL IV. 13.

Weight, 179 grains.

Sue, 1".

Mint, Calcutta.

Date, 1172— 5tli regnal year.

Obverse. 1 1 vr *J^ «C- ^^jU «Uj>b^ j^U

Bet?er«0. *Sfl^ y/* a?r*^ o>4J^ (j»>1^ • *i*>

Jfui^ mark:

On obverse — "Sun,"

On reverse — " Cinquefoil '* (traces of).

(iv) ^ahjahan III PL IV. 14.

JR.

Weight, 179 grains.

Size, -9.

Minti Aximabad.

Date, 1174— Alid.

Obverse. 1 1 vi» dfiU* ^C* ^sJ^ »^4 c^ »^
Awrse. v/^^ •a*i*fe* <j^ a^I «i*» ^Wt^»*A# 4^

(v) aia^'iZamll. PL IV. 16.

Weight, 180 grains.

Size, -95.

iftn^, Mttngir (Mongliyr).

DaU, 1176 — 1th regnal year.

Vol I, No. 4] NumismaJtic Supplement. 188

[N. S.]

Ohv.

UV1

^:.

(vi) ffier^ 'i/am II. PL IV. 16.

Weight, 179 grams.
Size, -9.

Jftn^, Allahftbfid.
Date, 1172 (P)— Ahd.

Bet?we. ^^^Jl w^ c^U %fiJ^ <.^|ji^ •>ft^l *i-i

H. N. Wright.

40. luDO double rupees of Surat Mint,

Mr. B. F. Malabarw&la, of Bombay, has sent me for publication
a double rupee of the Sfirat Mint struck in the name of Alam-
gir IL The Hijra date is unfortunately wanting, but the
regnal year on the reverse fixes it as 1176 or 1177. Below is a
description of the coin. As far as I know, the only other double
mpee Imown is the one in the cabinet of Dr. O. P. Taylor of
AJI^madabad, which he has kindly permitted me to describe in this
note.

Bupees of the type of the Silrat rupee of the Moghul Emperors
were comed by the Bombay Mint. Mr. Thurston in his History
of the East India Company's Coinage says (page 43): "The
Naw&b*s rupees, however, were soon found to contain 10, 12 or
even 15 per cent, of alloy, in consequence of which the Bombay
rupees were melted down and recoined at Surat. The coinage
of silver in the Bombay Mint was suspended for twenty years, and
the Suratis alone were seen in circulation. At length in 1800
(1214 A.H.) the Company ordered the then SHrat rupee to be
struck at Bombay." Ajs both the present mpees were issued before
1780 A.D. (1194 A.H.) it cannot be definitely stated whether they
were struck by the Mug]^ Emperors whose names they bear or
issued from the Bombay Mint.

(i) (G. P. T.) PI. V. 9.
M.

Weight, 349 grains.
Site, 1-0.
Mint, Surat.

134

Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

Da;te, [1172] 5tli regnalyear.
MM,, • in the tj» of u^j^

Ohv. ^ J^ i^^ _ •®^*

cry^

Sir*

(ii) (R. F. M.) PI. IV. 10.

Weight, 350 grains.

St^e 1-0.

Mi'nf, Snrat.

Date, [1176] 4th regnal year.

M.M,, seven petalled flower in the (j» of {j»j^

Obv. ^ ^U» U

Eev.

H. N. Wright.

41. " Munibai-SUrat " ( s;t»;>^ ^^ ) or ** jHf a^t^tir ( jy» j^j^ )

which ?

Grave doabt should, it seems to me, be entertained re-
garding the existence of the so-called " Mumbai-Surat " Mint,
And for the following five reasons : —

1. The only coin attributed to this mint is the guar ^er- rupee
registered as No. 80 on page 280 of the British Museum '^ Cata-
logue of Indian Coins, Moghul Emperors. "

2. Neither element of this compound-name, " Mumbai-S&rat, "
can be regarded as an adjectival epithet subordinate to the other
element. We have here co- ordination pure and simple, produced
by the mere juxtaposition of the names of two distinct mint
towns. In the long list of the Mughal Mints in India I can recall
no other instance of a name built up in this agglutinative fashion.

3. If the legend given in the British Museum Catalogue is
true to the original, then amongst contemporary coins this quarter-
rupee is exceptional in recoiaing the name of its mint aimpliciter,

without the prefixed term " darb, "«-^

4. The crescent symbol here present, when foujad on other
coins of this period, is held to be a mint-mark distinctive of the

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 135

[N. 8,]

French Compagnie des Indes. Now, in the 45th regnal year of

ghah * Alam II xiTTsosT' *^® ^^^ ^^ *^® ^®®^® ®^ *^^^ quarter
rupee, France was still a belligerent power, harbouring hostile de-
signs against British India. It is thus well-nigh incredible that
any coin struck in that year by the English at either Bombay
on Surat, cities remote from the sphere of French influence, should
bear this acknowledged symbol of French ascendency.

5. An autotype representation of the quarter-rupee is included
in Plate XXXI of the British Museum Catalogue ; but the mint-
name as there shown — at least in my copy — does not admit of
decipherment as Mumbai-Surat.

Rejecting for the above reasons the British Museum version,
I venture to submit the following as the true rendering of the
legend that is contained, so far as the plan admits, on the reverse
of this coin : —

If this reading be correct, the quarter-rupee was struck at the
Mahisnr (Mysore) Mint. At Mysore the French held a dominant
position till the fall of Seringapatam in 1799, and doubtless the
crescent on this coin of 1803-4 stands as a survival from that
earlier period of power.

A comparison of this quarter-rupee (No. 80) with the Pondi-
cherry and MaoJ^hlipatan rupees (Nos. 128 and 143) reveals the
fact that all three are of the same (French) type, bearing not only
the crescent symbol, but an identical obverse impression. In all
the arrangement of the words of the legend is precisely the same,
and the row of diamond-shaped clusters, each of four dots, is a dis-
tinctive feature of the field.

The Labor Museum Catalogue registers a full rupee of Mahisur,
dated the 47th year of ghah *Alam II, but unfortnnately the
description nven of this rupee is imperfect. It would be interest-
ing to examine the coin anew, and see whether in type and make
it is allied to the ** Mnmbai-Surat " quarter-rupee.

Query : — ^In the L. M. CataL Bodgers's brief note reads : —

" Year vp (for Pv) and mint jj>-» ^^ ." May this vp

(psrpv. . . •) stand for the regnal year " 4«" prece-
ded by a rudely formed or misshapen crescent P*

Geo. p. Tayloe,

Ahmaddbdd.

^ I have ascertained from Labor that the reForse of this coin bears the
orescent symbol to the left of vi^.— H. N. W .

Vol. I, No. 5.] The Emperor Bahar. 137

{N. 5f.]

16. The Emper(yr BSthar — By H. Beveridgb, I.C.S. (retired.)

As everything relating to Babar is interesting, I shall here
set down a few things about him which are not mentioned in
Erskine and Abul Fazl. The most important is a tradition which
is still current in Babar's native country of Farghana, and which is
recorded in the " History of the Khanate of Khokand (i.e.,
Farghana) by Vladimir Petrovitch Nalivkine, a translation of
which by Aug. Dozon was published at Paris in 1889. The author,
after stating in his preface that the Memoirs of Babar are nearly
unknown in Farghana or by the Sarts, and that Babar himself has
a bad reputation in that country, says, at p. 63, that when
Babar hurriedly evacuated Samarkand in 918 A.H. (1512 A. D.),
after his defeat by the Uzbegs, Saizida AfSq, one of his wives, who
was accompanying him in his flight, was seized by the pangs of
child-birth in the desert which extends from Khojand to Kand-
badam (east of Khojand and north of Isfava) and gave birth to a
son. Babar dared not tarry, and so the infant was wrapped up
and left under some bashes. As a token of whose child he was,
and as a reward to the finder, Babar fastened round the babe his
girdle which contained things of price. The child was found by
natives of the country, and in allusion to the valuables which
were beside him they gave him the name of Altyn Bishik
or, "The golden cradle." Afterwards he received three other
names viz., Qultuq (the armpit?), Kban Tangriyar (the
friend of God), and Khudajan Sultan. It was by the last of
these names that he was generally known in after life. Altyn
Bishik grew up and spent most of his life at Akshi, one of the
capitals of Farghana. He was a disciple of the famous saint
Makhdum A'azam who was a native of Kasan, and whose real name
was Aljimad Khwajagi Kasani. Several saints of the name of
* Makhdum A'azam are mentioned in Shaw's history of the Khojas,
A.S.B.J. Supp. for 1897, but the one referred to in the tradition
before us is the Ma^dum A'azam who was a friend of Babar and
^ho died in 949 A.H. (1542 A.D. He lived chiefly at Samarkand,
and is buried near there, at Dakhbid. Shortly before his death
he came to Akhsi and saw his disciple Altyn Bishik and his son who
also had the name of Tangriyar and was then 5 or 6 years old. Altyn
Bisliik died in 952 A.H. (1545 A.D.), and his grandson Yar Muham*
mad went off to India, to his relations, the descendants of Babar.

The same tradition is told, with some differences, by Niyaz
Muhammad Khokandi in his Persian work the Tdriih-i'Shahrukhh
Pantnsov, Kazan, 1885. With regard to the above tradition, which
is probably genuine, it may be noted that an Afaq Begam, a
grand-daughter of Sultan Aba Sa'ld and consequently a cousin
•of Babar, is mentioned in Gulbadan Begam's Memoirs, transla-
tion, p. 204. It is doubtful, however, if she can be the same as
Saizida Afaq. In a Persian MSS. in the Shaw Collection in the
Indian Institute, Oxford, there is a reference to Babar's friend-
ship with Makhdum A'azam, for it is stated there that Babar,

138 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal [May, 1905,

after his victory over Rana Saoga, sent Darvesh Muhammad
Sarban to the saint with presents, and a quatrain expressive
of his respect for dervishes. Perhaps it was on this occasion
that Babai sent to Transoxiana the long religious poem called
the Mubayyan, one-half of which has been published by Berezine
at Kazan, and of which Sprenger saw a copy at Lucknow. Babar
wrote it in A.H. 928 (A.D. 1521), for the instruction of Humayun.
At Bampur in R-ohilkand there is in the Nawab's Library a small
book of Turki verses which, according to a note by Shah Jahan^
are in Babar 's handymting. It seems desirable that they should
be edited and published. It is probably the Turki -divan men-
tioned by Haidar Mirza and Abul Fazl.

Some MSS. of the BlBARNiMA.

There is a good manuscript of *Abdu-r-ral?im's translation of
the Memoirs in the Pott collection in the Eton College Library. It
is No. 175, p. 22, of Professor Margoliouth's Catalogue of the
Pott MSS., but is wrongly entered there as a History of Fer-
ghana. The MS. was written in Agra and bears the date of 7
Jamada-al-awwal, 1051, (4th August, 1641 ). The MS. formerly
belonged to Mr. Richard Johnson, and was bought in Lucknow for
ten rupees. In the Bibliotheca Lindesiana, now in the John
Rylands* Library, Deansgate, Manchester, there is a thick octavo
volume containing *Abdu-r-ral?im's translation of the Memoirs.
It is a well- written copy (Nast*aliq), but has neither date nor
colophon. Probably it belongs to the 17th century. At the end
of the account of the translations of the year 908 there is a curious
deviation from other manuscripts. Instead of ending abruptly, as
in the Shirazi Bombay Lithographs, p. 75, or in Erskine, p. 122,
with the words ** Should a man live a hundred, nay, a thousand
years, yet at last he must die," it goes on to say that Babar's friends
came up and arranged that he should leave the place, and that his
ladies (Kbotttnau't-i^arani) should be taken care of. It looks as if
Babar or some copyist had attempted to round oft the description.
As is well known, some of the Turk! copies have a much longer
narrative in this place. The Bibliotheca Lindesiana also possesses
a small fragment of the Turki Memoirs. There is no date or
colophon, but the MS. looks older than 1780, the date assigned
by Mr. Kearney, and it has at the end the words dastihat Nur
Muhammad aitlah (P ignorant P) wa Abul Fazl. Possibly this
means that the MS. was written or signed by the Nur Muljiam-
mad who was Abul Fazl's sister's son. There are also one or two
other words which I could not read, but which perhaps give a.
regnal year.

It is much to be wished that the history of Babar by Zain*
lQ)awafy entered in Sprenger*s Catalogue of the Elliot MSS.
J.A.S.B., Vol. XXIII, p. 241, referred to in a note at p. 123 of the
Asiatic Quarterly Bsview for July 1900, could be found. It was
described as a very old copy and as the property of a Mend of
Sayyad Jan of Gawnpore. Perhaps it still exists at Cawnpore^

Vol. I, No. 5.1 Oontributiom to Oriental Herpetoloqy III, 139

[N. S.-]

16. Contributions TO Oriental Herpetoloqy III. — Notes on the Ori-
ental Lizards in the Indian Museum, with a List of the Species
recorded from British India and Ceylon. Part 2. — By Nelson
Annandale, B.A. {Oxon,), D.Sc. {Edin,), Deputy Superinten-
dent of the Indian Museum.

The present is a continuation of my former paper with the
same title, and deals with the remaining families of Oriental
Lizards, viz., the Lacertidas, Scincidas and DibamidsB. As before,
I append a revised list of the species in the families dealt with
which have been, or are here, recorded from British India and
Ceylon, with their distribution within these limits. To the epithet
* Oriental ' I have given a liberal interpretation, including under
the category of Oriental Lizards all those forms which occur on
the mainland of Asia or in the western section of the Malay
Archipelago, but excluding those only known from New Guinea or
Australia.

Bibamus is represented by two specimens, a male and a female,
from the Nicobars. They do not call for any comment. As re-
gards the Lacertidsa and Scincidaa, however, the series is a fine
one, naturally richest in Indian and Burmese forms — we are
rather poor in examples from Ceylon — but including a very consi-
derable number of specimens from Palestine (collected and pre-
sented by the late Dr. J, Anderson, F.R.S.), from Persia ^ (mostly
obtained by Dr. W. T. Blanford, F.R.S.) and from Eastern Turk-
estan * (with a few exceptions, from the late Dr. F. Stoliczka).
There are a few specimens also from Malaya, one or two from
Singkip Island off Sumatra and several from Borneo ; the last
obtained from the Sarawak Museum, while those from Malaya
and Singkip were either collected by one of the Museum collectors
under the auspices of the late Professor J. Wood-Mason or were
donated by the late Dr. Stoliczka. Othei'wise the exotic {i.e.,
extra-Indian) part of the collection is of little importance ; it
consists of a considerable number of miscellaneous specimens from
Australia and the two Americas and a few from Europe and
Africa.

LACERTID^.

Tachtdromus septentrional is, Gthr.

T. haughtonianus, Jei'd., P.A.8.B., 1870, p. 72; Stol,
J,J.8.B., (2), 1872, p. 88.

T. tachydromoides (part.), Blgr., Gat, Liz. iii., p. 5, and Faun.
Ind,, Bept., p. 169.

T. septentrionalis, id., P.Z.8. 1899, p. 161.

^ See Blanford, Eastern Persia, Vol. ii., Keptiles.

t Id., Scientifie Results of 'the Seeond Tarkand Mission, Reptiles*

140 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [May, 1906»

The synonomy of the Indian species of Tachydromus, like that
of many other genera, has been rendered obscnre by imperfect
descriptions. At least three closely related forms must be recog-
nized as occurring within or near the borders of British India.
They are (1) T. sexlineatus, Gray, recorded from Assam, Burma,
Siam, the Western Himalayas, the Siamese Malay States, S.
China, Sumatra, Java, Borneo, etc. ; (2) T. septentrionalis, Gthr.,
known from S.-W. China and here recorded from Assam, and (3)
T, tachydromoides (Schleg.), formerly believed to occur in Assam
but probably confined, so far as our knowledge goes, to China,
Korea and Japan. A very distinct species, T. smaragdinus, Blgr.,
from the Loo Choo Islands is represented in the Maseum by a
specimen given by the late Dr. J. Anderson.

T. tachydromoides was apparently included in the Indian
fauna by Boulenger because he regarded it as synonymous with
T. haughtoniantiSy which was described later. He also regarded
T. septentrionalisj Gthr., at the time when he wrote his volume in
the " Fauna," as identical with Schlegers species ; but more
recently he has pointed out that Giinther's species is really distinct,
though very closely allied to the other. An examination of Jer-
don^s type in the Indian Museum shows that it is merely a speci-
men of T, septentrioiialis, and, therefore, as Boulenger's more
recent views seem to be correct, the name T, tachydromoides must
be crossed out from the list of the Indian Lizards and T. septen^
trionalis inserted in its place.

Apparently the only specimen of T, haughtonianus recorded
was the type, which I have examined. It is distinguished from;
specimens of T, tachydromoides by the absence of granules-
between the supraoculars and superciliaries and of a shield
between the supraocular and the loreal. From 1\ texLineatus
it differs in having five rows of dorsal scales and a distinctly
more elongated head. There is only one femoral pore on each
side, but no small scales separate the outer rows of lateral plates.
The specimen has four pairs of chin shields developed quite
symmetrically — a condition I find also in two young specimens of
T. sezlineatus, out of twenty-seven, young and adults, of this
species examined. The coloration and proportions (except as
regards the head) are practically identical with those of
T. sexlineatus,

Lacebta vibidis (Laur.)

L. viridis var. major, Blgr,, Oat. Liz., iii, p. 17.

The Museum possesses three specimens from Mount Hermon
(/. Anderson) of Boulenger's variety major. As there is in the
British Museum a specimen of the variety (Gray's species)
stngata from the same locality and collection, the two varieties
must occur together. The only specimens of strigata in the
Indian Museum come from Persia (17. T. Blavford) and are
immature.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Oontributions to Oriental Herpetology IIL 141

Ophiops schleuteri, Boett.
0. schleuteri, Blgr., Gat, Liz., iii, p. 77,
O. elegans (jpart)y Werner, Zool. Jahrbr. Syst. xix, 1904, p. 334.

Among a large namber of specimens of Ophiops elegans from
Palestine and Asia Minor ( J. Anderson ) six individuals from
Mount Hermon have the more numerous body scales and other
peculiarities of 0. schleuteri, Boett., answering very closely to the
descriptions of this form, which was at one time believed to be
peculiar to Cyprus. The differences between 0. elegans and
0. schleuteri are very small but seem to be constant; they can
generally be perceived, by mere inspection, without actually
counting the scales. Boulenger suggests that Boettiger's
species may be only a variety, but it seems best to consider it for
the present as a distinct species occurring side by Fide with
0. elegans, which, however, has a very much wider range, extend-
ing from Turkey to North-West India.

The remaining Lacertids in the collection call for no special
mention. Only two species, Scapteira scripta, Strauch, (of which
we have two Indian examples) and 8. aporosceles,^ Ale. Sd Finn.,
both from Baluchistan, have been added to the Indian fauna since
1890.

SCINCID^.

Mabuia rugifera (StoL)

M. rugifera, Blgr., Faun. Ind., Rept. p. 190.

A specimen from Perak (Iftw. colltr,) has seven longitudinal
whitish bands on the dorsal and lateral surfaces. The three
innermost commence immediately behind the head, the next two on
either side at the posterior margin of the orbit. At the posterior
extremity of the body they become indistinct, disappearing on the
tail. We have also a specimen, in which the colour has faded^
from the Nicobars (Stoliczka),

Mabuia multifasoiata, (Kuhl)

M. multifasoiata, Blgr,, Faun, Ind., Bept,y p. 191 ; flf. Flower^
P. Z. 8, 1899, p. 646.

The Museujn possessess a large series of this common Indo-
Malayan skink. The following table shows the number of
specimens with tri- and quinquecarinate dorsal scales respeotiFdiy

I Aloook and Finn, J.A,a.B., 1896 (2), p. 659.

142

Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [May, 1906.

from different localities Six specimens from Penang and two
from Upper Bnrma have tricarinate dorsal scales : —

Total No.

With 8 Keels.

With 5 Keels.

Percentage
with 3 Keels.

Assftin ••■

92 3

Lower Barma

02 3

Andamans

21-4

Nioobars

100

Borneo

100

These figures show clearly, though the number of specimens
ex amined is not very great, that while Assamese, Burmese and
Bomean specimens agree with those from Malaya {fide S, Flower)
in being mostly provided with tricarinate dorsal scales, there is a
greater tendency among Andaman specimens for these scales to
be quinquecarinate, as I have already suggested. ^

Mabuia tttleri, Blgr.
M. tytleri, Blgr., Faun, Ind.j Bept.j p. 191.

Of this Andaman Skink the Museum possesses seven adults
and a young one. One of the adults was obtained in the
Botanical Gardens near Calcutta by the late Dr. Anderson ; but
probably it had been introduced with specimens of living plants.
As Bordenger had only Theobald's and Stoliczka's imperfect
descriptions to go upon, it may be well to give a new diagnosis of
the species, which is very distinct from any other.

Lower eyelid scaly : a postnasal. Body stout, head large,
triangular ; snout moderate, obtusely pointed ; cheeks swollen in
the adult ; tail long and slender, more than twice the length of
head and body when perfect. Nostril behind suture between rostral
and first labial ; supranasals generally in contaot behind rostral ;
anterior loreal not, or but slightly, deeper than posterior, in
contact with second, sometimes also with first, labial ; frontsnasal
slightly broader than long ; prsBfrontals in contact mesially ; frontal
generally as long as frontsparietals and interparietal together, in
contact with second supraocular ; four supraoculars, second largest ;
Buperciliaris inclined to break up irregularly. Ear-opening cres-
centic, vertical, smaller than a lateral scale, without, or with
small and indistinct, anterior lobules. Dorsal scales tricarinate,
nuchals and laterals feebly keeled ; 24 to 26 scales round centre of
body, subequal. The hind limb reaches the axilla. Subdigital
lamellfie smooth. Coloration i dorsal surface uniform greyish
brown, spotted on both limbs with dark- brown and white ; ventral
Burfaca dirty- white or greenish, tail dull-green or dull yellow.

I J,A.8.B, (2), 1904, Snppl., p. 19.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III, 143

In the youDg there is a dark lateral stripe which gives the
Lizard much the appearance of Lygosoma maculatum, with which,
judging from specimens in the Indian Museum, it has sometimes
been confused. Even a very superficial examination is of course
sufficient to distinguish between the two forms. The dimension, at
any rate in respect to length, appear to exceed those of M. muU
tifasciata ; but the tail is very brittle and none of our specimens
seem to be quite perfect as regards this organ. The shape of its
head is very different from that of this species.

M. tytleri appears to be much scarcer than M, multifasciata in
the Andamans.

Mabuia monticola, (Theob.)

Euprepes monticola, Gthr., apud Theobald (nee. Oiinther)
Rept, Brit. Ind,, p. 52.

The specimens described as Euprejes monticola, Gthr., by
Theobald in his Reptiles of British India are quite distinct
from that form, wldch is ( as Boulenger states) a synonym of
Mabuia dissimilis (Hallow). The following description is based
upon Theobald's examples, three in number, and a young specimen
from Arakan (Mus, colltr.).

Lower eyelid scaly : a postnasal. Habit slender ; head very
small ; snout short, obtusely pointed ; tail slender, about 1|^ times
the length of head and body. Hind limb reaches the elbow
of adpressed fore-limb. Supranasals meet behind rostral, fronto-
nasal broader than long ; praefrontals in contact behind fronto-
nasal ; four large supraoculars followed by one small one, second
largest, in contact with frontal; parietals entirely separated
by interparietals, with straight posterior termination ; one pair
of nuchals. Ear- opening subcircular, smaller than a lateral
scale, with several feeble anterior lobules. Dorsal scales bi-,
tri- or quinquecarinate, generally with only two keels distinct
34 to 36 scales round centre of body. The colour has completely
faded in the specimens.

Theobald's specimens have no history ; possibly they come
from the Eastern Himalayas or the hills of Assam.

Mabuia axakulab, nom. nov.

Euprepes longicaudatus, Anderson (nee Halloto), J.A.8.B, (2)
XL, 1871, p. 13.

The specimen described by Anderson as Euprepes longicaudatus
represents a very peculiar form, resembling in its elongated and
cylindrical shape some members of the genus Lygosoma but techni-
cally belonging to the genus Mabuia. As Anderson's name was
preoccapied by Hollow, I have rechristened the species. The
following description is based upon Anderson's specimen: —

Habit snake-like; limbs well developed, pentadactyle, hind
limb reaching elbow of adpressed fore-limb ; distance between
tip of snout and fore-limb contained 1^ times in distance between

144 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1906.

axilla and groin. Head very small ; snout short, obtusely pointed,
convex above. Lower eyelid scaly ; a postnasal. Supranasals
separated by frontonasal. Praefrontals form a median suture;
frontal shorter than frontoparietals and interparietal together ;
parietals meet behind interparietal, one pair of enlarged nachals.
Bar-opening a little smaller than eye-opening, longitudinal,
without lobules. Thirty scales round centre of body ; dorsals,
laterals and nuchals with 4 to 6 keels, only two of which are at all
strongly marked. Length from snout to vent 35 mm. ; tail (now
much broken) at least three times as long as, stout in comparison
with, body.

One specimen from Cachar {Mus. colltr,).

Anderson was right in regarding this species as allied to
Theobald's Euprepes monticola, from which, however, it is quite
distinct.

Lygosoma maculatum, (Blyth)

L. maculatum, Blgi-., Faun. Ind.^ Bept., p. 196.

Comparison with other specimens (of which we have a veiy
large series), shows that those from Narcondam (see Annandale,
J.-4./S.B., (2) 1904, 8uppl., p. 13) belong to this species. Boulenger
says {loc. cit. and similarly in the Oatalogue of Lizards iii, p. 242),
" distance between end of snout and fore-limb equals l-J to 1^ times
distance between axilla and groin." This is obviously a lapsus
calami, for the latter distance is the greater.

Lygosoma mitanense, sp. nov.

Diagnosis —

Allied to Lygosoma indicum, with which it agrees in lepidosis,
except that it has 42 smooth scales round the centre of the body,
the dorsals being considerably larger than the laterals or the
ventrals. The hind limb reaches a point midway between the
shoulder and the ear. Length from tip of snout to fore-limb is
contained about 1^ times between axilla and groin. The tail,
which is laterally compressed, is more than twice the length of the
head and body. The type is much discoloured but appears to
have been marked in much the same way as L. maculatum.

Dimensions of type —

Total Length
Head

130

Body
Tail

34
91

Fore-limb ...

Hind Limb

Breadth of Head

6-5

mm.

»»

A single specimen from Meetan, Lower Burma (^Tenasserim
Expt.).

Vol. I, No. 5.] Oontrzhutions to Oriental Herpetology HI. 145

[N. 8.-]

Lygosoma DUSSUMiERii var. COKCOLOR, var. nov.

We have a specimen from Canara {Gol. Beddome) which
perhaps differs snfficientl j irom others to be given a varietal name,
though the differences may be due to age. The rostral is convex ;
the dorsal and lateral surfaces are of an almost uniform pale bronze
marbled on the sides of the neck with white, a colour which
appears in the same manner on the labials and the sides of the
tail ; the size is greater than that of any other specimen I have
seen (snout to vent 57 mm ; tail 105 mm.).

Lygosoma oltvaceum var. griseom, (Gray).

The only specimen of this variety in the Museum is one from
Sinkip Island (/. Wood-Mason). Mr. Boalenger has kindly ex-
amined it. Specimens from the Andamans and Nicobars belong to
the typical variety.

Ltgosoma caghabense, sp. nov.
Diagnosis.

Subgenus Keneuxin^ Gray.

Habit lacertiform ; limbs well developed, pentadactyle ; hind
limb reaches wrist of adpressed fore-limb. Distance between
tip of snout and fore-limb contained 1| times in distance from
axilla to groin. Snout short, obtuse, convex above ; lower eyelid
scaly ; no supra- or postnasals. Prseafrontals meet behind rostral;
frontal as long as frontoparietals and interparietal together ; fronto-
parietals meet behind parietal ; so enlarged nuchals. Fifth and
sixth upper labials beneath eye, enlarged. Ear-opening almost as
large as eye-opening, oval, vertical. Twenty-four smooth, sub-
equal scales round centre of body, nonimbricate laterally ; prcBanals
slightly enlarged. Tail less than twice the length of head and
body. Coloration — dark-brown above, with darker lateral line ;
paler below : —

Total Length ... ... 118 mm.

Head

Body

Taa

Fore-limb

Hind Limb

Breadth of Head

10
35
73
12
23
7

>»

»i

))

>»

One specimen from Nemotha, Cachar (/. Wood-Mason).

Ltgosoma pulohellom (Gray)

L. pulchellum, Blgr., Cat. Liz. iii., p. 254, pi. xvii, fig. 1.

I have been somewhat surprised to find an example from
Tavoy {Mus. colltr.) of this extremely beautiful and distinct little
Skink, which was described from the Philippines. It agrees

146 Journal of tJie Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

closely both as regards lepidosis and proportions (actual and
relative) and as regards coloration with Boulenger's description
and figures. Major Alcock has kindly examined some of its
most characteristic features with me.

Lygosoma sikkimense (Blyth)

There is a specimen from Simla in the Indian Museum,
wrongly identified as L. dorise. I am not aware that the species
has been recorded hitherto from the Western Himalayas.

Ltqosoma tbaqbulense, Ale

L. himalayanum var, tragbulense, Alcock, Report N. H,
Pamir Bound. Gomm., p. 36, pi. II, figs. 1, la.

Out of eleven specimens of Lygosoma collected on the Tmg-
bal pass by Dr. G. M. Giles four belong to Alcock's variety trag^
hulensey while the remainder represent the typical L. himalayanum.
Some of the latter are very much smaller than those of tragbulense^
which, as well as the types, are fairly well grown. The coloration,
therefore, cannot be due to youth ; and though variety in colora-
tion in itself is not a safe specific difference in the S kinks, it may
be taken, when it is very distinctive, as an additional reason for
separation if combined with differences in scaling. The greater
number of subdigital lamelisB on the fourth toe which Alcock
noted in his specimens, is constant, as are also the cliaracteristio
dorsal and lateral stripes, while the ventral scales have not the
obscure dark edging common in L. himalayanum but are of
an opaque white. There may be two scales under the eye ; but
this character is not constant.

Lygosoma beddomii, Blgr.

The only specimen in our collection which can be assigned
to this species differs from the descriptions in that the limbs do
not meet when adpressed. Otherwise it conforms to Boulenger's
•diagnosis.

Lygosoma pormosum (Blyth)

Mocoa formosa, Blyth, J.A,S.B., (2) xxii, p. 651 ; Blgr,,
Faun. Ind., Bept., p. 205.

The following description is based on the three types of
Blyth's imperfectly described species ; —
Subgenus Em^a, Gray.

Habit stout; head moderate ; snout obtusely pointed ; limbs
well developed, overlap slightly ; head and body about -J length of
tail. Lower eyelid with an undivided transparent disk, no
supra or postnasals. Nostril behind suture between rostral and
first labial; rostral forms a straight or nearly straight sulture
with frontonasal ; prtefrontals in contact ; frontal in contact wiih

Vol. I, !N"o. 5.] Oontrihutions to Oriental Herpetology III. 147

[N. 8,]

Ist and 2nci supraculars ; 4 snpraocalars, 2nd longest ; 6 to 8
snperciliaries, subequal ; frontsparietals distinct ; no enlarged
nnchals. Dorsal scales smooth, larger than ventrals or laterals ;
30 to 34 scales round centre of body. Coloration — Dorsal surface
olive-green or pale- brown, spotted with dark-brown and white ; a
dark lateral band, also spotted with white ; ventral surface and
tail pale-brown or olive-green.

From Mirzapore (North-West Provinces) and Wazirabad^
Punjab.

Lygosoma atrocostatum (Gray)

L. atrocostatum, Blgr., Cat, Liz. iii., p. 295 ; S. Flower,
P.Z.8. 1899, p. 649.
L. jerdonianum, Blgr, t. c, p. 300.
L. singaporense, id., t.c, p. 297.

In addition to Stoliczka's type of Mabouya jerdoniana from
Pulau Tikus (Rat Island) off Penang, we have a specimen from
Sinkip Island {J. Wood-Mason) which resembles it closely on the
whole but has only 34 scales round the centre of the body, and six
specimens from Borneo ( Sarawak Mus. ) . These Bomean and Sinkip
specimens have a single frontoparietal, while this scale is only
partially divided in Stoliczka's. One of the Bomean specimens
has supraoculars. I agree with Flower in regarding L, jerdonia-
num as a synonym of L, atrocostatum, to the synonomy of which
I would also add L. singaporense, though I have not seen a speci-
men of the last.

L, atrocostatum does not appear to have been recorded from
Sumatra, where it probably occurs, being found on Sinkip.

Lygosoma chinensb (Gray)

L. chinense, Blgr., Cat, Liz, III, p. 318.

A specimen from Hong Kong (/. Wood-Mason) must, I think,
be referred to this species. It has 4 supraoculars, and the
coloration is as follows : — dorsal surface pale brown ; lateral surfaces
and tail mottled with dark brown and white ; a dark lateral line
starting from below the eye and becoming indistinct behind the
{ore-limb : ventral surface yellowish.

LtGOSOHA LINEOLATUH (Stol.)

A specimen from Martaban is probably one of the types, but
is entered in the Museum register simply as purchased, which is
the case with other types of Stoliczka*s.

Lygosoma comottii, Blgr.

. A specimen from Tavoy {Mus, colltr.) agrees with Boulenger's
description except that the fifth, not the sixth, upper labial is
under the centre of the eye. The species does not appear to have-
been recorded from Lower Burma.

148 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

Ltgosoma anguinum (Theob.)

In addition to the types we have another specimen from Pegu
and one from Amherst in Noj*them Tenasserim.

Edmeces scutatus (Theob.)

B. tseniolatus, Blanf Res , 2nd Yark, Miss. Rept. p. 19.
E. scutatus, Blgr, Faun. Ind. Bejpt., p. 218.

The Museum has specimens from Sind (Karachi Mus.) ;
Rajputana {N, Bellety) ; N. Kashmir {2nd. Yarkand Miss.);
€hitral {F. J. Daly), and Afghanistan (Dr. B, M. Green), The
species has frequently been confused with F, tasniolatus,

EUMECES T-fflNIOLATUS (Blyth)

E. teeniolatus, Blgr, Faun, Ind., Rept., p. 219.

Of this species we have only two true specimens, both from
the Punjab Salt Range (Theobald). One has two, the other only
one postmen tal ; otherwise they agree closely, difEering consider-
ably from the preceding form.

SciNCUS MiTRANUS, Anders.

S. mitranus, Blgr., Cat, Liz. iii,p. 393.

S. arenarius, id,, t.c p. 392 ; & Faun, Ind., Bept,, p. 221.

In his description of 8. mitranus Anderson states that it has
five supraoculars. The type, however, (the locality of which is
doubtful) has six on one side of the head ; while on the other
traumatic injuries to the skin forbid an opinion. Specimens of
Murray's S. arenarius from Sind agree in every other respect with
this individual, which is, on the whole, well preserved.

Ghalcides ocellatus (Forsk.)

There are a number of specimens (purchased) in the Museum
said to come from Haldibari (Kooch-Behar) : their true pro-
venance is doubtful but probably Indian. They belong to var.
A of Boulenger's Catalogue (iii, p. 401), as also do Persian ex-
amples {Blanf ord), but are rather darker than examples from
Palestine and Egypt.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Gontributions to Oriental Herpetology III, 149

[N. 8.']

LIZARDS OF INDIA, BURMA AND CEYLON (II).

LACBBTID^.

156. Tachydromns aexlineatus, Dand. ... E. Himalayas; Assam; Barma.
167* It septentrionalis,* Gthr. Assam («■ T. taehydromoidea Schleg.

{partim) in Blgr., Faun. Ind.^ Kept,, p. 169).

158. Aoanthodactylas cantoris, Gthr.

159. „ micropholis,! Blanf.

160. Cabrita leschenanltii ( M..Edw.)

161. „ jerdoiiii, Bedd. ...

162. Ophiops jerdonii, Blyth.

163. „ beddomi (Jerd.)

164. „ elegans, Mtfn^tr.

165. „ micTolepis,§ Blanf.

166. Eremins gnttnlata (Licht )
1C7. I, breviroatrisl (Blanf.)

168. „ velox (Pall.)

169. „ fa8ciata,§ Blanf.

170. Soapteira scripta,* Straaoh

171 . Seapteira acutirostriSy Blgr.

172. Scapteira apoxoBceles,*§ Alo.

d(Finn

N.-W. India.

Balachistan ; Bind. [Berar.

S. India as far north as 8. E.
Godavari Yalley ; Ellore.
Central and N.-W. India.
S. India; Bombay Presidency.
Punjab.

N. India from Eatoh to W. BengaL
Bind; Baluchistan.
Punjab.
Baluchistan.
Baluchistan.
N. Baluchistan { Anted),
N. Baluchistan.

N. Baluchistan (Aloock & Finn,
J.A.a.B. (2) 1896).

SOINOID^.

176.

177.

178.

179.

180.

181.

182.

173. Mabuia bibronii (Gray.)

174. Mahuia doriae, Blgr....

175. Mabuia dissimilis (Hallow)
septemtsBniata (Benss)
noTemcarinata§ (Anders.)
beddomii (Jerd.)
rertebralis, Blgr.
rugifera§ (Stol.)
multifasciata (Kuhl)
tytleri, Blgr.

183. Mahuia qu^driearinata^ Blgr.

184. Mabuia monticola *§ (Theob.)

185. n anakular,*§ Annand.

186. LygoBoma indionm (Gray)

mitanense,*! Annand.
maoulatum (Blyth.)

dussumieri, D. & B.
olivaceum (Gray)
cacharense,*§ Annand.
192. LygoBoma suhcoei^leum^ Blgr.

XOf .

188.

189.

190.

»i

191.

193. „ pulohellum •(Gray)

194. LygoMoma kakhienense, Blgr.

195. Lygosoma melanostiotum, Blgr.

196. „ sikkimense (Blyth)

197. H himalayannm (Gthr.)

198. „ trngbniense,*} Alo,

199. Lygosoma ctorte, Blgr. •••

fl«t

■••

S. India; Ceylon.

Upper Burma.

N. India from Sind to Bengal.

Bind.

Mandalay.

S. India, north to S.-E. Berar.

Central India.

Nicobars. [Nicobars.

Assam ; Burma ; Andamans and

Andamans; Calcutta (introduced ?).

Kakhyen Hills, Upper Burma-

Arakan ; ? E. Himalayas (Antea).

Cachar ( « Euprepea longicaudatus

Anders. Antea).
E. Himalayas ; Hills of Assam and

Burma.
Lower Burma, (Antea),
N. Bengal ; E. Himalayas ; Assam

Burma.
Malabar province.
Tenasserim ; Andamans ; Nicobars.
Cachar (Antea).
Travancore (Blgr ; Ann. Mag, N, H.

1891, p. 289).
Taroy (Antea).

Kakhyen Hills, Upper Burma.
Tenasserim ; Tavoy,
W. Bengal (Pareshnata Hills); E.

Himalayas; Simla.
W. Himalayas ; Kashmir ; Oentral

Provinces.
Tragbal Pass, Kashmir (Ale, Pamir

Bound. Oomm, N. H., p. 86).
Upper Burma.

150 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [May, 1905.

200. LjgOBoma ludaceDse (Gtbr.) ... Ladak.

201. LygoBoma laterimaeulatum, Bigr. ... S. India.

202. Ljgosoma bilineatamM^'ftjO — «*

203. Lygosoma beddomii, Blgr. ... 8. India.

204. „ macrotympaiium § (Stol.) 8. Andamans.

205. Lygosoma macrotia {Qteiud.) ... Nioobars.

206. Lygosoma forrnoBQm*§ (Blyth) ... N.-W. Provinces; Panjab (4nfeo.>

207. „ taprobanense, (Kel.) ... Ceylon.

208. „ fallax, Ptrs. •.. ... „

209. „ lineolatam § (Stol.) ... Martaban, Lower Burma.

210. „ comotti, Blgr. ... Upper Burma; Tayoy.

211. „ albopnnctatum (Gray) ... 8. & E. India; Assam ; Burma*

212. „ puncbatnm (Linn ) ... Peninsular India; Ceylon.

213. „ gaentheri (Ptrs.) ... S. India; C. India ; Bombay.

214. „ oyanellum 8§ (Stol.) ^... Burma.

215. „ agninnm § (Theob ) ... Pegu ; K. Tenasserim.

216. Lygosoma calamus, Blgr. ... Upper Burma.

217. Lygosoma lineatum (Gray) ... Central Provinces.

2iS. Lygosoma punctatolineatum * B\gr. ,,, Bia-po, Burma {Blgr. ^ Ann, Mus^

Genova, 1893, p. 321.)

219. Ablepharus brandtii, Strauoh ... Punjab; Sind ; Baluchistan.

220. „ grayanus,§ (Stol.) ... Katch and Sind.

221. Ristella rurkii, Gray. ... Anamalay Hills, S. India.
2i2. „ travancorica, Bedd. ... Travancore (hills).

223* Ristella giientherif Blgr. ... Madura (hills).

224. Ristella bedomii, Blgr. .. ... S.-W. India (hills).

225. Tropidophorus berdmorii, (Blyth) ... Lower Burma.

226. Tropidophorus yunnanensiSf Blgr. ... Kakhyen hills, Upper Burma.

227. Eumeces scutatus (Theob.) ... Sind; Katch; Punjab; Kashmir;

Chitral.

228. „ t8Bniolatns§ (Blyth) ... Punjab Salt Bange.

229. „ schneideri (Daud) ... Baluchistan.

230. „ blythianu8§ (Anders.)... P Punjab ; Afridi District.

231. Scincus mitranus,*§ Anders. ... Sind (-3. arenartua, Murray, .^ntea.)

232. OphiomoruB tridactylus (Blyth) ... Punjab ; Sind ; Baluchistan.

233. Ophiomorus hlandfordii^ Blgr. ,.. Baluchistan.

234. Chaloides ocellatus (Forsk) ... Sind.

235. Chalcides pentadactylus (Bedd) » ... Bey pore, Malabar.

236. Sepophis punctatust Bedd. . . . Qolgonda and Gk>dayari Hills*

237. Chalcideseps thioaitesii (Gthr.) ... Ceylon.

238. Acontias burtonii (Gray) ...

239. „ monodactylns (Gray)

240. „ layardii, Kelaart

241. Acontias sarasinorumf F. Muller ...

II
If
11
11

DIBAMIDM,

242. Dibamos no789-guine89, D. & B. ... Nioobars.

In the above list, as in that of the preceding families, a * op>
posite a name indicates that the species is new to the Indian fauna
since 1890 ; a § that the Indian Museum possesses a type or c j-
type. Names in italics are those of species not represented in the
collection.

1 Y. Bama Ohandran, M.A., student, Madras, has lately sent me u
specimen of L, bilineatum which has, as he points out, 26 scales round the body.
June 22nd, 1906.

> Including L.fBm, See Boulenger, Ann, Mu§. Qen* (ii) ziii, p. 820«

VoL I, No. 6.] OontrihtUtons to Oriental Herpetology HI, 151

iN. 8.']

In Boulenger's volume in the " Fauna of India " (1890), 221
species of Lizards are described ; at present 242 appear to occur
within the Indian Empire and Ceylon, but the grounds on which
three of these are included are a little insecure. The majority
of the species added have been new to science, but a few previous-
ly known from other parts of Asia have been recorded from Balu-
chistan. Several new forms have been described from the same
neighbourhood several from Burma (chiefly from Lower Burma),
one from S. India, two from the Andamans and one from Cachar.
Undoubtedly novelties stiU remain to be discovered, especially in
the extreme east of the Empire ; and probably certain forms now
regarded as solely Malayan will be found also in Tenasserim.
Several forms, e.g. Lygosoma zehratum and L. f$se have been shown
to be at most varieties of previously descidbea species.

Mr, Grrey Pilgrim, of the Geological Survey of India, has
lately collected in Eastern Arabia and presented to the Museum
the following specimens :

Uromastix miorolepisy (Blanf.) .., One specimen.
Varanua griseua (Daudl) .•• „

Eremias hrevirostris (Blanf.) ... Two specimens.

I neglected to mention in the former part of this paper, that
Qymnodactylus hhanensU has lately been recorded from Upper
Burma by Boulenger, Joum. Bombay N.H, 8oc., xiii, p. 553.

July 26th, 1905.

jrote.—Through the kindness of Dr. A. Willey, F.B.8., Director of th©
Oolombo Museum, I have lately had an opportnnity of examining the types
of NeviU's JSuprepea haUanua, a Gejlonese Skink regarding the systematio
position of which Bonlenger expresses a donbt. As they possess retractile
claws, while otherwise agreeing with Lygoaoma, I propose to place them in a
new genns Theeonyw^ which will be fnlly described later in Bpolia Zeylanica,
the organ of the Oolombo Museum. August 28rd, 1905.

152 Jovmal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

"'. 17. Tihet,a dependency of M(mgolxa:'-'(164S— 1716 A.I>,).-- By
Bai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, CLE.

The six Khanates of Mongolia had, for a long time, remained
under a solemn compact which kept them in peace. At last, the
Khan of Chakar, named Legdan, who had grown ambitious, made
a bi each into it, in consequence of which internal dissensions broke
out among them. Friendly advisors and intermediators came
from the neighbouring States to bring upon reconciliation among
the contending parties in Khalkha, the country of the Kulmuc
Mongols. One of the claimants to inheritance in that Khanate
being driven out of the country, came with his hordes to the bank
of Lake T'hig-p6g Gyalmo and took possession of the province of
Ho^o-tshe of Thumed-Mongolia. His depcendant who had set-
tled there was attached to the shwamar or Ked-cap School of Tibet.
About this time the two rival sects of Quddhism, namely, the Bed-
cap and the. Yellow-cap Lamas, were fighting with each other in
Tibet. Rab-chyampa,. a representative of the Bed-cap sect pro-
ceeded to Mongolia and appealed for help to the Khan of
&090-tshe. in the year Tree-hog the Khan sent his son Arsaling
(Abaling) at the head of 10,000 Tartars to Tibet to extirpate
the Yellow-cap Church. The prince being humane and pious
refrained from doing injury to the Yellow-cap Lamas, so the
Bed- cap Lamas, out of spite, sent misrepresentations against him
to his father, accusing him of partiality to their enemies. The
Khan, who was at that time engaged in war in the Kokoncr
country, became furious at his son s conduct and wrote to the
'Bab-chyampa to take the prince's life. On Arsaling's death, which
was probably caused either by poison or assasination, the Tartar
troops were thrown into disorder. For the want of a leader they
dispersed like a cloud and returned to their country. About thia
time the Khan of Duthukthu, a descendant of Jenghis Khan,
who had also espoused the cause of the Bed-cap Lamas, started
from Chakar with a large army to help them in their struggle
with the Yellow-Church. But on his arrival at Kokonor he acci-
dentally died. A great enemy of Buddhism now arose in Kham,
who followed the Bon religion. This was the King of Beri, named
Don-yo dorje. He, like King Langdarma, had destroyed all the
Buddhist Institutions of Kham belonging to the Bed- cap and the
Yellow-cap sects. He was about to start with a large ai my for
conqnering Tibet proper when the Khan of CBleuth Mongols
entered Kham with his Tartar hordes. This was Gushi Khan the
third of the five sons of the Khan of Ho^od, one of the four divi-
sions of Orad Mongolia. Like Jenghis Khan, he too was believed
to have been an incarnation of the Lord of Death. His native
name was Toral Be$u, but he is better known by the names Gushi
Khan or Gegan Khnn. Owing to his devotion to the cause of the

Vol. I, No. 5.] Tibet, a dependency of Mongolia. 163

Yellow-cap Church he is known in Tibet by the Tibetan name
of Tenzing Ghoigyal, the upholder of religion or Dharma Raja.
While only thirteen years of age he was entrusted by his
father with the leadership of the Tartar hordes. He defeated
the Gokar^ Tartars and brought them under subjection in 1593.
At the age of 25 he was successful in reconciling the Kulmucs
of Khalkha with the CBleuth Mongols who were quarrelling
on account of a question of precedence between the hierarch of
Gahdan and Ston gkor Sabg-drung named Jetsundampa, and
thereby averted a fierce and bloody war in the heart of Mongo-
lia. For this service, he was decorated with the holy order of
Ta Kansri by the Emperor of China in 1605, from which cir«
cumstance his name Kushri or Oushi Khan had originated.
At the age of 35, at the earnest entreaties of Desrid Sonam
Choiphel, Pa;)ichen Rinpocbe of Tashilhampo and other repre-
sentatives of the Yellow -Church, he agreed to march into Tibet
to punish their enemies. In the year Fire-ox in the first
month, i.e., February, he entered Kokonor with a large army.
He despatched about 10,000 troops to phog-thu in Khalkha to
suppress a rebellion there. His hordes routed 40,000 Tartars in
a single battle fought at Utan H090 in one day, and killed the
Khan. From Kokonor, Gushri Khan moved towards Tibet. He
reached the great monastery of Gahdan in the auspicious evening
of the 27th day of the month, when he saw a halo of light
brightening the horizon at dusk.

During the winter of that year he again yisited Kokonor, and
from there proceeding to Kham, on the 25th of the llth month,
he annexed the whole of King Beri's dominions to his kingdom.
Seeing that Beri would be dangerous to both the Church and the
State he put him to death and released the Lamas of the several
Buddhist sects who had been thrown into prison by that apostate
king of Kham. Gushri then brought under his control all the
territories bordering on Jangsathul — the dominions of the king
of Jangsa. Then entering Tibet proper with his invincible hordes,
he made presents to the great monasteries of the Yellow-Church
and proclaimed his authority over the whole countnr. From
Lhasa he marched to Tsang with the major portion of his army.
In the year called water-horse, on the 8th of the first month, he
captured thirteen large jongs (forts), including that of Samdub-tse
at Shigatse, and overthrew the power of the king of Tsang. On
the 25th of the llth month he threw him into prison. At first, out
of respect for the valour of the fallen monarcn, he did not order
him to be beheaded, but at the representation of the leaders of the
Yellow-Church he was found guilty of the highest crime, having had
established arival monastery of the Bed-cap Church,called Tashizil,
in the immediate vicinity of Tashilhunpo, with the object of mining

I The Westera Mongolians who had become Mahomedans were called
Gokar on aocoant of their nsing the white Pagri, from go head and kar
white.

154 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [May, 1905.

the latter. Onshri Khan caused him to be packed in a hide ^ and
then threw him into the river. He then comm enced the pious work of
establishing a University with thirteen colleges, which were called
Ling or divisions, at Lhasa, for the education of both the laity and
the clergy. Of these thirteen Lings only four have survived , namely,
Tan-gyeling, Tshe-chog-Ling, Kundii-Ling and Tshemo-Ling. He
brought all the great Cholha or Provinces of Tibet under his
power. Hearing that the Lamas of Kongpo, were greatly
attached to the Eed-cap Karmapa Sect, he sent a division of his
army there and annexed the eastern provinces to his dominions.
He now declared himself the supreme ruler of all Tibet and
Mongolia, and sat on the Lion- throne of Potala at Lhasa. On this
auspicious occasion he received presents from the border states of
India, such as — Bushing (probably Bushahir), Yambu (Nepal),
Ngah-ri (Ladak), etc. The Tibetans of the older sects began to
regard him as an incarnation of their saint Padma Sambhava.
After making the Yellow-Church dominant all over Tibet and
Mongolia he shewed tolerance to the followers of the rival sects
and patronized learning. Thus Mongolia and Tibet being brought
together under the sovereignity of one B/oyal Umbrella, the religion
of Buddha, as reformed by Tsongkhapa, flourished and shone with
gretkter lustre than it had done even during the reformer*s time.
Under the benign rule of this devout king all classes of people
enjoyed peace and prosperity, as if they were living in the ideal
age of perfection.

After Gushri Khan's death his son Dayan Khan reigned for
fourteen years over Tibet. On his death his son Talai Khan, also
called Eatna Gyalpo, succeeded to the throne. Batna's eldest son
named Tanzin Wangyal succeeded him, but he did not reign long,
being mysteriously poisoned. During the reigDs of these kings
the office of the Desrid was successively filled by Pon Sonam
Ghoiphel for seventeen years, from the year Iron-serpent ; by T'hin
las Gyatsho for ten years; by Lozang thutob for six years ; and by-
Lozani^ Jinpa for three years. Then it passed to the layman
Sangye Gyatsho who held it for nearly twenty-five years from the
year Earth-sheep, during which time he completed the building
of the nine-storeyed palace on Potala called the Phodang Marpo.
In the year Fire-tiger there was war between the Khalkha and the
(Eleuth Mongols. The hierarch of Gahdan, named T'hi-Lodoi
Gyatsho, reconciled the belligerents to each other and induced them
to make a treaty of peace. On the death of Tanzing Wangyal,
Lhabzang, the younger son of Batna who was exiled, succeeded to
the throne. His first act was to wreak vengeance • on the Besridy
Sangye Gyatsho, who had been instrumental in bringing about his

^ This punishment is called Ko-thilLmgyah-pa, i.e., packing the criiiiinnl
in hide or skin and then throwing him in the deep water of a river. This
is the capital pnnishment that is inflicted on the higher class of criminals in
Tibet.

S At this period it wns suspected that the Lama anthorities of the Yel-
low-cap Church were intrigpaing to kill the king (Lhabzang) by exorcism.

Vol. I, No. 6.] TS)et, a dependency of Mongolia. 155

IN. 8.-]

banisliinent. During bis exile Lhabzang had collected about 500
Tartar troops. Entering Tibet with them be collected a large
army from the 13 Ththor of Tibet, besides Kongpo and other pro-
yinces and took possession of the throne. In the year Tree-bird he
killed Desrid Sangye (Jjatsho. He reigned for nearly thirteen
years.

Hearing the news of Desrid* s violent death, the Khan of
Chungar (Zungaria), the left branch of the CBleuth Mongols
named H&ng Thaij6, who was devoted to the Yellow-cap Church,
sent presents to the Dalai Lama, and with a view to restore peace
and prosperity in the troubled land of the Lamas, sent his generals
to invade Tibet with a large army. In the year Fire-hird they
captured Lhasa, defeating Lhabzang in a battle in which he feU.
Thus in 1716 ended the short-lived kingdom founded bv Oashri
Khan in Tibet. In the year 1717 the Chungar army, after sack-
ing the S'ingma monasteries of Namgyaling, Dorje Tag, Mindol-
ling, etc., and making the Yellow-cap Church still more pre-
dominant all over Tibet, returned to Mongolia.

»-• « « < «

156 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905^

18. Sarvajna-mitra — a Tantrika Buddhist author of Kaimtra in
the 8th century A,D, — By Prof. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, M.A.

Among the manu scripts presented to the Asiatio Society of
Bengal by Mr. Hodgson, there is a Buddhist Sanskrit "work
named Sragdhara-stotra by Sarvajna-mitra. The work derives it»
name from that of the metre, v?;?., Sragdhara} in yvhich it is written.
It is a hymn consisting of 37 stanzas in praise of the Tantrika
goddess Tara who is called in Tibetan Sgrol-ma. There is a Sans-
krit commentary on the work, called Sragdhara stotra-tika, by Jina-
rak^ita who was a monk of the great monastery of Yikrama^ila
and a spiritual guide of a king of the time.

The commentator states that Sarvajna-mitra, the author of
Sragdhara-stotra, was a devout monk of Ka^mira and was re-
nowned for bis unbounded charity. Having given away everything
he possessed, he left the country and wandered abroad as a men-
dicant. Once while he was proceeding to the kingdom of Vajra-
mukuta, he met on the way a poor old Brahmana who was in a
very pressing need of money for the marriage of his daughter.
The Brahmana, who was going to the place of Sarvajna-mitra
himself for help, having learnt that the latter had nothing left
except the beggar's bowl and robe, fell into great despair and shed
tears. Sarvajna-mitra, however, consoled him saying : " Be not
sad, I shall give you what you ask for." At that time King Vdjra-
mukuta was told by a certain person that all his desires would b&
fulfilled if he could wash himself sitting on 100 skulls
freshly severed from the trunks. The king who had already
secured 99 persons completed the number 100 by purchasing
Sarvajna-mitra, who sold his person for its weight in gold which
was given to the poor Brahmana. The 100 victims were in a
morning led into the Executioner's Tank by officers of the king.
Sarvajna-mitra finding no means of escape composed and chanted
37 stanzas in praise of Arya Tara, whereupon all the victims-
were miraculously saved and taken to their respective homes.
Heaps of gold equal to the weight of the victims remained depo-
sited on the edge of the tank. The king, surprised at the nuracu-
louB power of the monk, became a disciple of his.

The story of Sarvajna-mitra and a literal Tibetan translation
of the Sragdhara-stotra are to be found in the Tangyur, section
Sgyud, vol. L.

A similar story about Sarvajna-mitra is narrated in the Tibetan
work called Pagsam-jon-zang edited by Eai Sarat Chandra Da&

^ The Sragdhari metre contains twenty-one syllables in each foot broken
into three eqaal parts. In the Ghandomanjari, the Sragdhara verse ia
thus scanned : —

Yol. I, No. 5.] Sarvajna-mitra, 157

IN. 6f.]

Bahadur, CLE. According to this work Sarvajna-mitra, though
bom in Kasmlra, was a student of the monastery at Nalanda in
Magadha where he became a great master of sciences. The kii\g
to whom he sold his person is called Vajra-rauku^a in the Sanskrit
Sragdharastotra^ika, while he is called Sarana in the Tibetan,
Pagsam-jon-zang. The story contained in the Pagsam-jon-zang
(p. 102) runs thus : —

" A little bastard child of the King of Kasmira was carried away
by a vulture from the roof of the palace and dropped on the top
of the Gandhola (the great central temple) of Nalanda in Maga-
dba. The Pandits of the Vihara, taking mercy on it, nu];*sed it.
As he grew up the child acquired great knowledge and became
3, scholar. He propitiated the goddess Arya Tara and thereby
acquired great wealth. He gave away all his riches in charity, and
when there was nothing left he started on a journey to Southern
India. Meeting on the way an old blind Brahmana who was
being led by his son, he inquired where he was going. Being
told that the blind Brahmana who was very poor had started on
his distant journey te beg help from Sarvajna-mitra of
Nalanda, he was overpowered with pity and determined to sell his
own body to give gold to the helpless beggar. At this time he
learnt that King Sarana, who at the advice of his wicked spiritual
guide had undertaken the performance of a YaJHa in which 108
human sacrifices were necessary, was in search of one more victim
which was wanting to complete the full number. The king was
convinced that if he successfully performed the Yajna he would
attain the longevity equal to the sum of the longevity of 108 souls
that would be sacrificed in it. Sarvajna-mitra sold himself to the
king and paid the gold that he had obtained therefrom to the blind
Brahmana. While waiting one night for death in a dark dungeon
he invoked the goddess Tara with the utmost concentration of his
mind. When fire blazed up from the piled firewood and all the
108 men were led in chains to the pyre, a heavy shower of rain fell
which extinguished the fire withiu a short time and converted the
whole plain where the sacrifice was being performed into a large
sheet of water resembling a lake. The king and his ministers
hearing that this was due to the mercy of the goddess Tata who
was invoked by the victim who had sold himself to save others,
now acquired faith in the religion of Buddha and having released all
the 108 victims of the unholy sacrifice sent them to their respec-
tive homes loaded fchem with presents. Sarvajna-mitra before
whom the goddess had miraculously appeared, held fast a comer
of her celestial robe and was carried to the land of his birth."

The same story is related in Lama Taranatha's history of
Buddhism (vide A. Schiefner, p. 168 fF. ).

Neither in the Sragdhara-stotra nor in its commentary is there
any mention of the date of either of the two works. Dr. Bajendra
Lala Mitra who notices the two works in his Buddhist Literature of
Nepal, p. 228, says nothing about their dates. The Rajatarangini, the
weU-known chronicle of Kaimira, supplies us, however, with some

158 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May 1905.

data to determine the age of Sarvajna-mitra the author of Srag-
dhara-Btotra. In Book lY, verse 210 of the Eajatarapgi^i, we find
that Bhikfu Sarvajna-mitra, who appeared as another tfina, resided
in Kajyavihara, which had been built by King Kayya. This
Kayya is stated to have been a king of Lata or Central and
Southern Quzerat, and was subordinate to King Muktapi^a-
Lalitaditya of Kaimira. As Lalitaditya is generally held to have
lived early in the 8th Century A.D., Sarvajna-mitra who resided in
Kayyavihira could not have flourished before that time. As tha
monastery of Nalanda was destroyed in the 9th century A.D.^
Sarvajna-mitra, who was educated there, could not have lived after
that time. This leads me to suppose that Sarvajna-mitra lived in
the middle of the 8th century A.D.

Eline Yajramukufa or Sara^ has not yet been identified.
Vajramt3cu^ is perhaps identical with Yajraoitya, son of Lali-
taditya, King of Ka^mira in the 8th Century A.D.

VoL I, No. 6.] An Analysis of the La^kHvitdra Sutra, 159

\.N. 8.-]

19, An Analysis of the Lahkdvatara Sutra. — By Prof, Satis
Chandra YidyabhG^a^a, M.A.

The Lankavatara Stltra is an ancient Bnddhist Sanskrit work,
a manuscript of which was brought from Nepal by Mr. Hodgson
nearly eighty years ago. It gives an account of a miraculous
visit whicn Buddha paid to Eava^a, the King of Lanka. Though
the visit was altogether an imaginary one, the book is very valu-
able as it gives a copious explanation of the Buddhistic meta-
physical doctrines as well as an account of several non-Buddhistic
sects such as the Lokayata, Sankhya, Yai^ika, Pa^upata, and
others. It is one of the nine most sacred books of the Nepalese
Buddhists called their Nava-dhamma.^

A Tibetan version of the Lankavatara S&tra is found in the
Kangyur, Sect. Mdo, Volume V. In Tibetan it is called Hphagg-
pa-lan-kar-g^egs-pa-theg-pa-chen-pohi-noido, in which it is stated
that the- Sutra was translated into Tibetan by order of the Tibetan
King Bal- pa-can in the 9th Century A.D. Lo-tsa-wa G^-long
(Hgog-chog-grub), who translated the Sutra in Tibetan, also added
to the translation a commentary of a Chinese professor named
Wen-hi.«

There are extant three Chinese translations* of the Lankava-
tara Sutra. The first translation, which is incomplete, was made
by Gui^tabhadra, 443 A.D., the second by Bodhiruci A.D. 513, and
the third by S'ik^ananda A.D. 700-704.

Hwen-thsang, who travelled in Ceylon early in the 7th
Century A.D., points out the Malaya mountain as the place where-
in Buddha, in olden days, sat to deliver the LaAkavatara Sutra>

The Sutra was merely known by name to the Pandits of our
country from a reference to it -in the Sarvadarsanasangraha^ of
Madhavacaryya in the 14th Century A.D.

^ The nine most aaored books of the Nepalese Buddhists are : —

1. AftaBahasrika Prajniparamita ; 2. Ga^^avyuha; 3. Da^bbumiivara ;

4. Samidhiriija Sutra; 5. Lankivatara Sutra; 6. Saddharmapn^^Arika ;

7. Tathagatagnhyaka ; 8. Lalitavistara and 9. Sarar^aprabhisa Sutra.

Divine worship is offered to these nine works by the Buddhists of Nepal.

Cf. Hodgson's lUastrations of the Literature and Religion of the Buddhists,

p. 19.

* Vid9 Osoma do Eoro8*8 Analysis of the Kangyur, p. 432 (Asiatic Resear-
ches, Yolnme XX).

S Vide Bunyiu Naniio's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripi^aka, Nos. 175,
176, 177.

The first Chinese translation consisting of 4 fasciculi, 1 chapter, bears
two prefaces by Tsiang O'-ohi and Su-shi, of the later Sun dynasty, A.D.
960-1127. The date of the latter preface corresponds to A.D. 1086. The
second Chinese translation consists of 10 faaciouli, 18 chapters. The third
Chinese translation consisting of 7 fasciculi* 10 chapters, bears a preface by
the Empress Wu-tsO-thien, A.D. 684-705, of the Than dynasty.

« Vide Si-yu-ki, Book XI ; Beal's Buddhistic Records of the Western
World, p. 251.

* Midhaviiciryya quotes a passage from the La&kivatara Siitra saying :-*

160 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [June, '1905.

The work consists of ten Parivarta or chapters named re-
spectirely as, (1) Bavanadhye^apa, (2) Sarvadharmasamaccaya,
(3) Anityata, (4) Abhisamaya, (5) Tathagatanityanityatra, (6)
K^anika, (7) Nairma];^ika, (8) Maipsabhak^aaa, (9) Dharani, and
( 10) the tenth chapter which bears no special nRme.

Throughout the Laiikavatara Sutra the speaker is Buddha
himself. The first chapter is addressed to Bavana while the
person spoken to in the remaining nine chapters is Mahamati.
Rava^a, King of Lanka, prayed to Buddha for the solution of two
questions, viz., (1) what is the distinction between dharma and
adharma ; and (2) how could one pass beyond both dharma and
adharma, Buddha's answers to these questions form the subject-

(^4<Ji4W^, chapter on whl^vvr) I

The passage referred to here occars with a little variation twice in the
Lankavatara Sutra (in Chapter II. p. 50, and Chapter X. p. 115 respectively
of the Bengal Asiatic Society's manascript) :—

The Tibetan versions of the passages ran respectively as follows : —
(Eangyor, Ifdc, Vol. Y. Leaf 150, A.S. MSS.)

en C\

(Kangynr, Ifdo, VoL Y. Leaf. 268^ A.S. MSS.)

" Of things that are disoemed by intelleot no self-ezistence can be
ascertained ; therefore they are shown to be inexplicable and essenceless."

Vol. I, No. 6,] An Analysis of the LaiihUvatSra Sutra, 161

[N. S.]

matter of the first chapter. Thereafter one hundred and eight
* questions were raised by Mahamati ; Buddha^s answers to these are
treated in the remaining nine chapters.

Some information about the author of the LaAkavatara Sutra
may be gathered from the following verses occurring in the lOtk
Chapter of the work : —

(A.S. MSS. p. 143).
The Tibetan version of the above runs thus : —

( Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V., Leaf 292-293, A.S. MSS.)

The above passages may be translated thus : —

'* My mother is Vasumati, my father the Brahman named
Prajapati ; I belong to the same clan as Katyayana ; my name is
Jina, the passionless one, I was bom at Gampa. Somagupta sprang
from the Lunar race is (in fact) my father and he my grandfather
too."

1 The orig. is ft fa uft which should be flft^^
valent is ^qj ij;^ |

> The meaning of this line is not dear*

162 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Betigal, [June, 1905.

In the tenth chapter Buddha in a prophetic style predicts
eertaiu future events which help us in determining the approxi-
mate date of the work. Thus he says : —

Hfir fTO% ^^w( ^imt t HT^ereitiT i
A^ 'T^w jpxm ^ ^Mp ^mwn: i

#^T^ HW^NW: www tl m^rhl' II

(A.S. MSS., Leaf 142.)

The Tibetan version runs thus : —

.(Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V., Leaf 292, A.S. MSS.)

The passage may be translated thus : —

" One hundred years after my Nirvana, Vyasa, the author of
the Mahabharata, will flourish. Then the Pandavas, Kauravas,
Nandas and Mauryyas will arise. The Nandas, Mauryyas, Guptas
and the Mlecchas, the vilest of kings, will flourish m succession.
The Mleocha rule will be followed by tumult of arms and the
tumult will be followed by Kali-yuga. "

Several non-Buddhistic sects are mentioned thus : —

(A.S. MSS., Leaf 136.)

I The Sanskrit manuscript reads f imi ^ |B ^^ which is OTidently
irrong. The correct reading has been restored from Tibetan.

YoL I, No. 6.] An Analysis of the LaiMcdvatHra Sutra, 163

IN. S.}

'* The Siqikhyas, Vai^ikas, Nagaas, Vipras and Pai^upatas
have taken the extreme views of permanence and non-permanence
and are destitate of the diBcriminated truth. *'

The views of Kapila and Kai^ftda are specially discussed on
leaf 132.

Not merely in the 10th but in some of the previous chapters
too the Naiyayikas and Tarkikas are specially referred to. Thus
in Chapter II we read : —

(A.S. MSS., Leaf 11.)
The Tibetan version runs thus :—

" Tell me how in future times the Naiyavikas will flourish/*
The very first question asked by Mahamati in Chapter II
is: —

inf fr v^ ^' ^^ T'i* w^ I

(A.S. MSS. Leaf 11.)
The Tibetan version runs thus :—

(Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V*, Leaf 93, A.S. MSS.)

^' How is ratiocination correcfced and how does it proceed P ''
The following doctrine of the Tarkikas is specially mentioned :—

(A.S. MSS., Chap. X., Leaf 143.)
The Tibetan version runs thus : —

164 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1905.

'^ Whatever is Krtaka (produced) is destructible, this is the
view of the Tarkikas."

According to the peculiar calculation of the Nepalese Bud-
dhists, the Lankavtara consists of 3,000 verses. So it is stated : —

fs[fH' wf^i ^?mBi f^^\Jsf^f^ %w^ ii

(A.S.MSS. Leaf 141.)

'* I belong to the clan of Katyayana, I am come from the ?ud*
dhavfisa heaven ; I teach men religion leading to the City of Nir«
vapa. This religion is an old one. I and other Tathagatas teach
this i*eligion by means of 3,000 Sutras (verses).*'

K&tyayana to whose clan the author of the LaAkavatara be-
longed, seems to have been the same person who composed the
Hindu socio-religious institute called Katyayana Dharma Sutra,
for Katyayana is mentioned along with Yajnavalkya thus : —

^j^w: ^^ir^ ^m^^TW ^ ^^^ tr i

(A,8. MSS., Chap. X,, Leaf 143.)
The Tibetan version runs thuB : —

(A.S. MSS., Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V., Leaf 293.)
^' KAtyayana is an author of Sutra, so also is Yajnavalkya/'

1 The Sanskrit maxmsoript reads ^mw^| The reading ^HfWltf ii
restored from Tibetan.

Vol. I, No. 6.] Tibet under her Last Kings, 165

[N. S.'\

20. Tibet under her Last Kings (1434—1642 A.D.)— By
Eai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur^ CLE.

About eighty years after Ta^i Situ Ghyaii Chub Gyal-tshan*s
annexation of Tsang to the Goverment of Central Tibet, one of the
Governors under the Phagmodu Rulers named Binpung-Norzang, a
native of Tsang, caused a rising of the people against the Phag-
mo-du authorities, and from the year tree-hare of the 7th Cycle,
the Shikha (towns) of Binpungand oamdub-tse (modem Shiga- tse)
passed under the authority of Kun-zang Uon-dub-dorje, the two
sons of Binpung Norzang. They established their power
over the whole of Tsang in the year 1434, but nominally acknow-
ledged the supremacy of the Phagmodu Chief. From the year
Earth-tiger of the 8th Cycle, the Government of Central Tibet
had to contend with internal dissensions both in the north and

south of U for which Mi-wang Ne?iu-dong-pa, the Buler of
Phagmodu, removed his residence to Dansa-thil, the seat of the
Phagdu hierarchy. In the year Iron-ox, the son of Kunzang
named Don-yo-dorje, who was also called Binpiing Deba Gar-wa,
inviting the Karma heirarch Choi-tog Gya-tsho of the Shica-mar

(Bed-Cap sect) invaded u with ten thousand troops. He drove
away Miwang Ne/iu-d6ng-pa from his capital, and took possession
of it. In this connexion, it is stated, that though the hierarch
of Gahdan had twice tried to turn the tide of victory towards the
Buler of Ne^u-dong-tse by propitiating some spirits yet the Karma-
pa hierarch, his adversary, by superior exorcism made Binpung. pa
victorious at the end. This heralded the triumph of the Shwa-mar
( Bed-Cap Church) over the Yellow-Church. Thereafter, for sup-
pressing the growing power of Sera and Dapung monasteries, two
monasteries of the Bed and Black Cap sects of the Karma-pa school
were erected under Binpiing-pa's auspices. This was done with a
view to make Sera and Dapung, the two great Yellow-Church
monasteries, to die a natural death for want of support either from
the State or from the pious. The Karma-pa and Dug-pa sects sent
troops to overpower some of the smaller Yellow-Church in-
stitutions which, thereby, became converted to the Bed-Cap Church.
Some of the land endowments of Sera and Dapung were taken
away from them, for which reason the breach between the rival
schools became wide. From the year Earth-ox to that of Earth-
tiger in the 9th Cycle, the Lamas of Sera and Dapftng were pre-
vented from taking part in the Monlam Chenpo of Lhasa. But
since the year Fire-dog, Miwang Ne^u-dong-pa, the Chief of Nefeu-
dong-tse recovered his authority to some extent over the province

of U. Again in the year Fire-bird (about 1508) during Qedun
Gyatsho's residence at Methog Thang of Gyal, the Digong-pa
Lamas brought troops from Kong-po for crushing down the
power of the Yellow Church. When they were about to demolish
the outer Dsong (fort) of Holkha, the Chief Nangso*Don*yod of
Dohdah came with his troops for rescuing it. The Digong-pa

166 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [June, 1905.

Lamas failing to destroy the Dsong, diverted their attention to-
wards Liing Shoi, J7od-na, and other places where they succeeded
in converting eighteen Oelug-pa (Yellow- Church) institutions into
Bed-Gap school. In the year Water-ox the Yellow-Cap Lamas also
sent troops to Kyor-Mng and other places under the Kahgyud'pa
authorities. In this manner the Lamas of the difEerent sects
and schools became involved in civil dissensions. Daring this
period the state of affairs in Tibet resembled the dark days which
had followed the successsion of the apostate Langdarma to the
throne of Tibet.

The Chiefs of Tsang, who held office under the Phagmodu

Rulers of Central Tibet, frequently led their troops to U to harass
the people. They sometimes retired to their own strongholds after
defeat, but often quietly annexed parts of their masters territories
to their possessions. The Lamas of the Yellow Church struggled
for power and to establish their supremacy over Tibet, in which
act they met with reverses on account of the powerful help which
the Chief of Tsang had given to the Lamas of Shwa-mar sects.

In the year 1564, Tshe-wang Dorje, the chief representative
of the house of Binpung,^ with his son Padma-Karpo held the fort
of Samdub-tse, and having brought the whole of Upper Tsang under
his power, declared himself Tsang-toi Gyalpo, the King of Upper
Tsang. In the year 1569 {Iron-horse of the lOth Cycle) the autho-
rities of Digong fought with those of the monastery of Tag-lung.
In the year Water-serpent, there was a rebellion at Ky id- Shoi against
the Phagmodu authorities. The Dalai Lama, Gedun Gyatsho, inter-
ceding in the affairs brought upon an agreement between the raler
and the ruled. Again afterwards, in the year Tree-hog ( 1 574) Bin-
pung-pa brought his troops to Kyid-Shoi for creating disturbances,
but they were compelled to withdraw from there after they had
caused some injury to the people. In the year Iron-serpent (1580)
internal dissensions again raged in Digong. On Dalai Yontan
Gyatsho's return from Mongolia, the Shwa-mar hierarch, ^ag-wang
Choitag, complimented him with a letter written in verse ; but some
misapprehension having arisen as to its concealed meaning, Bab
Byampa Geleg Lhiindub and others sent a discourteous reply to it
couched in terms which were interpreted as conveying insult to the
hierarch. This incident, unfortunately, raked up greater bitterness
in the strained relations between the two rival Buddhist Churches
of Tibet.

The King of Upper Tsang, with the help of a few petty
chiefs of the south and north, incited the ^a-wa Bong people to
rebellion, in quelling which, the resources of the Government of
Central Tibet were greatly exhausted. Taking advantage of this
disturbance he asserted his independence.

In the year Tree-serpent heading the troops of the Bed and
Black-cap Lamas of the Karma-pa School, he attacked the military

1 Binpiing or Sinohenpnft^, a small town in the Tsang Rong district.
It contained' a huge image of Maitreya famous ander the name of Bm^i*
Cham*Ohen.

Vol. I, No. 6.] Tib«t U7ider her Last Kings. 167

IN. S.]

encampment of Deba Kjid-Shoi and killed a large number of
Dungkhors (civil officers) of the Government. On this occasion the
Karma-pa Lamas became exnltant and made a metrical rejoinder to
the Dalai Lama's replj by placing their letter before the
image of Buddha in the Cathedral of Lhasa. This step, which was
meant to be an appeal to show that the Shwa-mar hierarch's wel-
come to the Dalai Lama was sincere, produced disastrous effects.
It induced the Yellow-Cap Lamas to invite the help of the Mong-
olian hordes. About the time that Sonam Namgyal was Deba
of Kyi-Shoi, several thousands of Tartar horsemen had already
come to Tibet and encamped in the neighbourhood of Lhasa. In
the year Iron-dragon (1609) the Karma hierarch named Phun-
tshog Namgyal, with his son Karma Tan Kyong Wang-po, led the

Tsang army to U, but finding tliat the Mongol horsemen, that had
come to protect the Yellow Church, were waiting for an action,
out of fear they quietly withdrew. In the year Water-mouss
(1611) he brought the whole of Tsang including Gyal-Khar-tse
(modem Gyang-tse) and Byang (northernmost province of Tsang)
under his power, and became known as Tsang Gyal, i.e., King of
Tsang. This was the first instance in which a Karma hierarch
had marched at the head of a victorious army, having betaken
himself to worldly life, and become lord temporal and spiritual.

Later on, again invading U with the Tsang army, he took
possession of NeAu Dong and all the lands, and some of the smaller

monasteries of U. In the seventh month of the year Earth-hare
(1617), resolving to entirely demolish the Yellow-Cap Church he
beseiged Sera and Dapftng and killed many thousand monks.
He expelled the Yellow-Cap Lamas from Lhasa. In their dis-
comfiture the Lamas took shelter at Tag-lung. In the year 1619,
that is, shortly after the humiliation of the Yellow-Cap Church
and its patron Miwang NeAu Dong-pa, the Mongolian army
arrived and met the Tsang army first at Kyang-t hang-gang near
Lhasa, and ultimately at Tsang- Gj ad thang-gang and completely
routed them. In the seige of Lhasa, which followed this success of
the friends of the Yellow-Church, about 100,000 Tsang men were
captured. They all would have been killed bad not the Panchen
Rinpoche (Tashi Lama of Tsang) timely interceded and procured
their release. The monasteries of Sang-ftag Khar and others,
besides many Lamas of the Yellow Church that had been taken
over to the Bed-Cap Church, were restored in 1620 to the Yellow-
Church, which got back its lost territorial endowments as well. The
king of Tsang and his friend the valiant Karma hieraix;h failing in
their military etiterprize in Tibet, sought for help from the Mongo*
lian Chiefs who were devoted to the Red-Cap Church. It took
them nearly twenty years to consolidate their power in Tibet after
the retirement of the Mongolian hordes from Tibet. When thej
had again grown powerful they began persecuting the Yellow-
Church with greater animosity than before.

168 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1905.

21. Note on a Decomposition Product of a Peculiar Variety of
Bundelkhand Gneiss, — By C. A. Silbbrrad, B.A., B.Sc, LC.S.

During the construction of the Ken Canal, my attention was
called by the Executive Engineer in charge of the work, to a
peculiar soft, white, clayey material found in the low hill on and
around which the village of Deora-Bhapatpur in the Ajaigarh
State is built. The hill is one of the low gneissic hills charac-
teristic of this part of Bundelkhand (vide Medlicott and Bland-
ford's * Geology of India,' Volume I, page 11, et, seq,), but
appears to be of a somewhat unusual variety of gneiss and one
more than usually liable to decomposition. At several places on
the sides of this hill, all about half-way up, small pits have been
dug into it, and a white clayey material found, which is locally
used as " white wash." The same material has been found about
1^ miles south of this in the course of excavating a deep cutting
(up to 50 feet deep) for the canal. Both positions are within three
or four miles of the head works of the canal, and some ten miles
west by south of Ajaigarh town ; they are about eight miles north-
west from the Vindhyan scarp.

I accordingly obtained some samples and sent them to my
brother, Dr. O. J. Silberrad, Ph.D., Research Chemist to the War
Office Explosives Committee, who examined them, and through the
kindness of a friend had them tested at a pottery as regards the
suitability of the clay for the manufacture of earthenware or
other pottery. To them I am indebted for all the following in-
formation : —

The report is subjoined. Beside the figures showing the re-
sults of the chemical analysis, I have added those of Finite as
given in Dana's Mineralogy, which appears to be a somewhat
similar material. The occurrence of Titanic Acid in the clay is,
however, of interest.

" Report on Olay from Beora-BhdipHtpur.

Analysis of clay is as follows : —

Clay from
Deora-Bhapatpur. Finite.

Silica ... SiOji AA'^U 4911

Alumina ... AlgOg 3047 29-00.

Lime ... CaO '61 51

Magnesia ... MgO 289 107

Ferric Oxide ... Fe.Og 6-17 913

Fotwih ... K.fi 805 6 84

Soda ... NaOg ... '42

Titanic Acid ... TiOg 054

Combined water and

organic matter ... 6* 14

Moisture ... I'lO

Fhosphoric Acid ... FgOs '091

}

401

100-461 10009

Vol. I, No. 6.] Note on Bmidelkhand Oneiss, 169

IN. S.]

The clay was tested for its capacity of fornuDg a china or
earthenware in the following manner : —

1. About 20 grams of the dry clay was mixed with sufficient
water to give a plastic clay, which was moulded into the form of a
triangular pyramid. This was dried at 100°, then baked for S^
hours in a gas muffle, at a temperature of 890°. The resulting
mass was pink in colour, easily broken, possessed little cohesion,
was soft and friable.

2. Another portion of the clay was mixed with calcium car-
bonate, in proportion to give a mixture containing 2°/^ added cal-
cium cnrbonate (196 gi*ams clay, "4 grams CaCOg). This was
moistened, kneaded, and the resulting plastic clay formed into a
pyramid as before. This was dried at 100°, and heated in a blast
muffle, together with the pyiamid used in the first experiment
(made from clay alone). Pyramids charged into cold muffle and
muffle lit at 9-10 a.m., on 8th November, 1904.

Temperature at 11-10 a.m.

• I •

1155°

„ „ 12 noon

• . •

940°

„ „ 12-30 P.M.

* • •

1150°

,, ,, 1 P.M.

• 1 1

1300°

Heating was then discontinued as one of the pyramids was
seen to be sinking, the result of incipient fusion. The muffle was
turned out at 1 p.m. Pyramids drawn at 2-15 p.m., and broken.

Clay alone. — Pyramid had sunk considerably. Was smooth,
glazed, dirty brown on the outside. The fracture was highly
porous and cindery. Heated to a temperature as hi^h as this
(1300°), the clay would not be of any use as earthenware.

Clay + 2q/° CaCOg. — The surface of the pyramid was
smoother and more highly glazed than that of pyramid just
described, and the mass had sunk more, indicating that the clay
mixed with 2^/° CaCOj is more fusible than the clay alone. The
colour of the exterior was dark brown. A fracture showed a
porous, spongy layer under the surface, then a more compact, blue-
black central mass. Useless as earthenware.

3. The earth was made into a plastic clay as before, without
any admixture (except water) and formed into a pyramid, and a
small dish. These were dried at 100°, charged into cold muffle,,
and muffle lit at 9-15 a.m., on 9th November, 1904.

1030°

930°

1050°

1060°

1090°

1130°

980°

960°

1130°

1070*^

Temperature at

11 A.M.

11-30 „

11-60 „

12-25 p.m.

I ,9

1-30 „

2.15 „

3 „

3-30 „

4-15 „

170

Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [June, 1905.

Temperature at 5 a.m.

5-25 „

• ••

1090°
1050°

Muffle turned out at 5-30 p.m. Pieces drawn at 9 a.m. on lOth
November, 1904. They had not altered in shape, and showed
no signs of fusion. They were glazed on the surface, dark brown
in colour. Were dense and hard, giving a metallic ring when
struck. The fractare showed tlie pieces to be solid, not porous
at all, and was somewhat glassy. The pieces were strong and
required a sharp blow to break them.

4. Pyramids were made in the manner previously described,
containing respectively 5°/^ CaCOg and 10% CaCOg (19 grams
clay + 1 gram CaCOg, and 18 grams clay + grams CaCOg). They
were dried at 100°, charged into cold muffle, and mufRe lit at
9-20 A.M., 9th November, 1904.

Temperature at 11

11-30
11-50
12-25
1

1-30
2-15
3

3-30
4-15
5
5-25

»>

»»

»>

»»

»j

j»

A.M.

P.M.

»>
»»
j»
jj
»»

• ••

• • •

• ••

930°
890°
910°
920'
930°
930°
940°
930°
930°
900°
870°
860''

Muffle turned out at 5-30 p.m. Pieces drawn at 9 A.3!.,
10th November, 1904.

Identical results were given by both pyramids. They were
pink, not glazed, of only moderate hardness, easily broken, giving
a dull fracture. Apparently not strongly enough heated to give
a satisfactory eart'henware.

The two pyramids were recharged into cold muffle, and
muffle lit, at 9- 10 a.m., 10th November, 1904. The temperatures
were taken with a thermo-couple (all the pi'evious temperatures
having been taken in this way) and also with the Wanner Optical
pyix)meter. The corresponding readings are given below.

Thermo-oonple.

Wanner-Pyrometer.

Temperature at 11 a.m.
„ 11.30 a.m.
„ 12 noon

... 1040°
... 970°
... 1090°.1100°

...
1087°

Thenno-oouple.

Wanner-Pyrometer

Temperatui^ at 12-30 p.m.

„ 1 P.M.

„ 2*16 P.M.

... 1110«-1130°
... 1090°-1100°
... 1040°.1050°

1132°
1108°
1052°

Vol. I, No. 6.] Note on Bundelkhand Qtieiss, 171

[N. 8.]

When two thermo-couple tempeiutures are given for the same
time, they reFer to different points in the muffle.

Muffle turned out at 2-20 p.m. Pieces drawn at 3 p.m.

Pyramid with 5% CaCOg. — This was a dark, coloured, hard,
dense mass, glazed on the surface though not so much as the
pyramid made from the clay alone, and somewhat lighter in
colour. No change of shape could be detected, and there were no
signs of fusion. The fracture was glassy in parts, the rest being
dull and stony, and was blue to bix>wnish-black.

Pyramid with lO^© CaCOs- — This was much lighter in colour
than the two previous pieces, was light brown, dull, not glazed.
Was not so hairl or dense as the Pyramid with 6% CaCOo. The
piece was easily broken, giving a dull, sandy fracture, and show-
ing the interior to be fairly compact. The colour of the fracture
was a brownish pink. The pyramid had not sunk at all, and
showed no signs of fusion.

The best results as regards the making of earthenware ap-
pear to be given by employing the clay alone, without any ad-
mixture of lime. The addition of lime in small proportions re-
duces the melting point. The hai*dness and density of the ware
depend on the temperature to which it has been heated. If that
temperature has been too high, the upper parts of the pieces are
porous and cindery, this probably being due to the liquation of a
fusible silicate. The colour of the ware is necessarily dark,
owing to the high percentage of oxide of iron in the clay.

It does not appear to be possible to obtain good earthenware
from the clay. Experiment III gave the best pieces.

The clay is evidently not Fuller's earth.

When mixed with water, with, or without additional lime, a
highly plastic clay is obtained."

In addition to the experiments recorded in the above repoi*t,
the clay was fired in an ordinary earthenware kiln, but it refused
to bind and simply dned to a porous friable mass differing very
little from the product obtained by merely moistening it and let-
ting it dry at an ordinary temperature. Heated in an electric
furnace to a temperature of about 2900^0 the clay melted to fluid
which could be easily poured or cast.

From the foregoing it will be seen that the clay is little like-
ly to be of any use except that to which the villagers have put it
from time immemorial, i.e,, for whitewashing their houses.

Vol. I, No. 7.] Oriental Snakes in the Indian Museum. 173

22. Additicnis to the GoUection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum. — Part 2. — Specimens from the A7idama7ts and Nico-
bars. — By Nelson Annandale, B.A., D.Sc, Deputy Superin-
tendent of the Indian Museutn.

All the snakes recorded or described in this communication are
from the Andamans or the Nicobars. With one exception, they have
been collected and presented to the Mnsenm either by Major A, R.
Anderson, I.M.S., or by Mr. C. G. Rogers. The one exception is
the type of a new Sea- Snake, which was taken by the Indian
Marine Survey. Mr. G. A. Boulenger has kindly examined several
of the other specimens. I am much indebted to Major Anderson
for several letters on the snakes of the islands. I have added a
revised list of the species known to occur in the two archipelagoes
or represented from them in the Indian Museum, having re-examined
the specimens recorded by Mr. W. L. Sclater in all cases in which
there was any doubt.

TYPHLOPID^.

Typhlops braminus (Daud.)

This is evidently the common species in the Andamans, or at
any rate in the neighbourhood of Port Blair. Major Anderson has
lately sent us twenty-four very dark specimens from that station.

The type of T. andamauensis still remains unique, if it is in
existence. I have not been able to trace its history. The Museum
does not possess examples of T. oatesti, described from the Gocos
group.

COLUBRID-^.

Lycodon aulicus (Linn.)

We have lately received several specimens of this common
Indian species both from the Andamans and the Nicobars. One
from the Nicobara belongs to var. E of Boulenger's " Gatalogue ; "
those from the Andamans to var. C, a common form in Ceylon.

Oligodon woodmasoni (Scl.)

Simotes woodmasoni, Sclater, J,A.8*B., (2) LX, p. 235 ; List,
Snakes, p. 24.

A young specimen, lately received from Major Anderson, has
been submitted to Mr. Boulenger, who regards it as belonging to
the genus Oligodon. I have compared it with Mr. Sclater's types,
with which it is identical. Mr. Boulenger notes that it is nearly
related to 0. trilineatus, a Malayan species.

Coluber melanurus, Schleg.

A specimen from the Andamans has the entire dorsal surface
of the head and body of an almost uniform dark plumbaceous

174 Journal of the Asiatic Hocivty of Beuyal. [July, 1905.

grey. The markings on the side of the head and on the neck are,
however, quite distinct, and the individual is otherwise normal.
We have in the Museum a similar specimen from Borneo.

Dendrophis pictus (Gmel.)

A specimen has been sent by Mr. Rogers from Henry Law-
rence Island, Andamans. The species appears to be common all
over the Andamans and Nicobars. Some of the Andaman speci-
mens, are very dark in colour, but this character does not seem
to be constant.

Tropidonotus piscator (Schneid.)

We have lately received a specimen from the South Anda-
mans, while we had already a number from several localities in the
archipelago. I have not been able to find any record of the
occurrence of this common Indian species in the Nicobars.

Tropidonotus nicobarensis, Scl.

T. nicobaricus Sclater, J.A.S.B,, LX (2), 1891, pp. 231, 250.

T. nicobarensis, id., thid, p. 241.

T. nicobariensis, Boulenyery Gat. Suah^s; p. 192.

The type of this species still remains unique. I have examin-
ed it very carefully, dissecting out the maxillary on one side, and
have no doubt that Mr, Sclater was right as to its genenc identifica-
tion. The maxillary teeth, 24 in number, increase slightly from
before backwards, and show no signs of being stunted posteriorly ;
but the division of the anal plate appears to me to have been trau-
matic. If the species is identical with Cope's Prymnomiodon, the
latter must have been founded on an individual injured or abnormal
as to its dentition. This seems possible, as the type was otherwise
deficient.

'DiPSADOMORPHUS CEYLONENSrS, Gthr.

Mr. Rogers has presented two specimens from the South
Andamans. The snakes from Assam and the Andamans identi-
fied by Mr. Sclator as Dipsas fusca, are young individuals of this
species.

DlSTlRA ANDAMANICA, sp. UOV.

Head moderate, hardly separated from the nec^jfAikfB gruuLliisr
depth of the latter half that of the body j-btJcTy deep, strongly
compressed ; tail short. Rostral much broader than deep ; nasals
shorter than frontal, three times as long as the suture between the
preefrontals ; frontal not much longer than broad, shorter than dis-
tance from rostral, much shorter than parietals ; one praeocular,
very large ; 3 postoculars ; no loreal ; 2 large, superimposed
anterior temperals ; 7 upper labials, 3rd and 4th entering eye j
two pairs of sub-equal chin shields, the posterior pair separated

Vol. I, No. 7.] Ori^nfffl Snakpn in fhc Indian Museum. 175

[iV. 8.']

from one another by two rows of scales. Head scales smooth for
the most part, but with a few minute, in'egularly placed pits. Eyes
large and pixjminent. Body scales imbricate, but feebly so or not at
all posteriorly, with a very short keel or a tubercle ; 31 scales round
neck, 39 round body ; vciitrals distinct, bituberculate, with a cen-
tral longitudinal groove, occasi<mally divided, 238 (in the type) in
number. Oo/o/^r— pale-yellow (m sides and belly, with about 40
large, black rhomboidal marks on the dorsal surface. These are not
in contact either above or below, reaching about half way down the
body on the neck and tail and almost to the ventral margin of the
tail. Throat and chin darker yellow, the former feebly irrorated
with black. Dorsal surface of the head pale-green as far backwards
as the posterior border of the piwfrontals and of the 2nd supraocu-
lar, black posteriorly

Measurements of type —

Total length
Length of tail

30 inches.
2f

>»

A single female from the Andamans. Judging from its bold
coloration, this specimen is immature. In many respects the spe-
cies resembles Enh{/>his rurfus^ from vhich it may be distinguished
superficially by the possession of unbroken parietals and distinct
chin shields. It has six grooved teeth posterior to the laige poison
fangs in each maxilla. Its nearest ally is D. lapimidoides.

Snakes ok the Andaman's and Nicobars.

Namk of SnAkk.

Andamanfl,

Nicobara.

Typhlops braminu8§ , iDand.

Typhlops oatesii,* Blgr.

„ andamanensitt* Stol.

Python roticulatus,§ | Schneid.

Lycodon aulicufl§;l (Linn.) ..

Polydontophis sa<?ittarius§ (Cant.j
„ bi8tri<^atu8 I (GthrJ

Ablabes nicobaronHifl.* Stol.

Oligodon sublincatus. D. &, B.
„ woodmarioni* (Scl,)

Zamenis macosuB§i| (Linn.)

Colaber porphyraceua, §ii Cant.
„ inelanuruH§,| f8chle<^.j
„ oxycephaliiH,§ Boio ...

Dendropbis pictufl§ (Gmel.)

Tropidonotus 8tolatiifl§,i (Linn.)
„ piscator§ I (Schneid.)

,, nicobaroni«is,* Scl.

Chrysydrus granulatus §!| (Schneid).

DipsadomorphuB hexagonatua (Blyth)

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

176

Journal of the Asiatic Society o/ Bengal. [July, 1905.

Name of Snake.

Andamans.

Nicobars.

Dip8adomorphu8cey1onensis,!|l Gthr. ...

Chrysopelea omata^ ^(ghaw)

(Narcondam)

Cerbems rhynohopB§ (Schneid.)

Fordonia leucobalia ^ (Schleg.)

—

Bit/ngaru8 easruleus ^ (Schneid.)

—

Naia tripndians, § | Merr.

„ bnngaruSr§| Scbleg.

PlataruB oolubrinus§ t (Schneid.)

Distira andamanica,* Ann and.

■ «

Hydms platurn8§| (Linn.) ...

—

Amblyoephalns monticola | (Cant.)

—

Laohesis cantoris* (Bljth)...

,, gp:aminenB§ | (Shaw)

,, parpiireomaculatn8§ (Gray)

In the above list, the names of those snakes which are not
represented in the Indian Museum by specimens either from the
Andamans or from the Nicobars are printed in italics. In the
first column a * indicates that a species is peculiar to the Andamans,
the Nicobars or both archipelagoes ; a § that it has been recorded
from the Malay Peninsula south of the Isthmus of Kra ; a || that
it is known from Assam or Burma. In the other columns, a x
shows that a species is known to oocur, a — that specimens have
not been taken.

It will be seen from this list that the Ophidian fauna of the
islands has close affinities with that of Burma and Malaya, while
there is possibly a less obvious connection with Ceylon. So far
as we know, three species are peculiar to the Andamans. two to
the Nicobars, and two to the Andamans and Nicobars together ; but
our knowledge is still extremely limited, especially as regards the
smaller snakes of the Nicobars.

I Dipsas fusea (Gray) apud Sclater, List SnakeSy p. 47.

^ Major Anderson has taken a specimen (Tar. A) on Narcondam.

— <■ *^ -»>./'"

Vol. I, No. 8.] History of NydyaSastra. 177

IN. S.]

23. History of NydyaSQstra from Japanese Sources^ — By

MABiMAHOPlDHTlTA HjlBAPBABId ShASTBL

The bibliography of NyiyaBafltra of the Orthodox Hindus is a
yery short one. It cousists of :^

(1) The Stltras attributed to Gautama or Ak^apada.

(2) Bhfifya attributed to Vatsyayana.

(3) Yartika by Uddyotakara.

(4) Tatparyatikft by Y&caspati.

(5) Pan^uddhi by Udayana.

But the bibliography of the Buddhist NyayaBastra, as known
in China and Japan, is a long list. It attributes the first inception
of the Nyayaflastra to Shok-mok or Mok-shok which, transliterat-
. ed into banskrit would be Ak^apada.

The second author who treated of Nyaya is said to be Buddha
himself. The third is Byuju, who is saia to have preached the
Mah&yana doctrines of Buddhism with great success. His Hoh-
ben-shin-ron is one of the polemical works against heretics. It con-
tains one volume on logic. The fourth is Mirok (Maitreya).
The fifth Muchak (Asanga), Mirok's disciple. Muchak's younger
brother Seish (VasubancUiu) wrote three books on Logic — Bonki,
Bon-shi-ki, and Bon-shin. After Yasubandhu, came Maha Din-
naga and his disciple Sankarasvanu, whose works were translated
into Chinese, by the great Hienth Sang. Hienth San^ had two-
^eat disciples— Kwei-ke in China, and Doh-8oh in Japan.
Kwei-ke's " Ghreat commentary " is the standard work on Nyiya in
China and Doh-Soh is the first promulgator of Buddhist dodannes
and Nyaya SSstra in Japan. Smce then there had been many dis-
tinguished teachers of Nyftya both in China and in Japan, and up
to the present day Dia-uaga has a firm hold on the learned peopb
both in China and Japan. The European system of logic is
a Tery recent introduction in Japan, where DiA-n&ga is still
studied.

In the two paragraphs given above, I have tried to give the
bibliography of Brahmanic and Buddhistic logic of ancient India.
Both attribute the invention of the science to one person, namely^
Ak^apada. The only clue given about this personage's chronology
is that it was before Buddha. But no clue of his time can be
found in Brahminical works. Mr. Justice Parffiter tells me that
there is no such person as Ak^pftda mentioned in the Mahabha*
rata, which was m a nascent condition about the time of Buddha's
birth. The Chinese attribute to him two things, namely, " Nine
Seasons" and '* Fourteen Fallacies," while the Hindus attribute to
him the entire body of Sfttras divided into five Adhyayas, ten
lectures, eighty-four topics, five hundred and twentv-eight stltras,
seventeen hundred and oinety-siz words, eight thousand three
hundred and eighty-five letters. It may be said, in passing, that
the Chinese people are doubtful about the ^' Nine-Beasons '* being
attributed to Ak^apada. It may also be remarked that in the

178 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [August, 1905*

whole body of Sutras, there is nothing which corresponds to the
*^ Nine Reasons " and '^ Fourteen Fallacies," which, we know
from Chinese sources, and which even Di^-naga is said to have
attributed to Soc-mock. An examination of the *^ Nine Reasons "
reveals the fact, that it is historically prior to the invention of
syllogism. It means an effort of the human mind to exhaust
all possible forms of the relation between, what is now called the
Major Term and the Middle Term of a syllogism. And such
an examination must precede the formulation of sylloopLsm. In
what light the later writers have seen this examination, and
what conclusions may be drawn from it, need not trouble ua
here. Suffice it for a historical student to know, that this early
effort is attributed to Soc-mock, universally known as the first
writer on Nyaya. The theory of "Fourteen Fallacies" too, in
their crude and undeveloped shape, shows signs of greater
■antiquity than the Nyaya Sutras.

These two theories of Ak^apada seem to have been the com-
mon property of Indian pandits before Buddha's time, as Buddha
did not scruple to take advantage of these.

The " Nyaya S&tras," as we have them, seems to be a much
later production. Haribhadra, a Jain scholar of the 6th Century
A.D., says that it is a sectarian work ; that the sect, which eitlier
composed it or adhered to it, was a Saiva sect. Now a Saiva or
Mahesvar sect existed long before Buddha. Soc-mock and thd
eighteen gurus of the sect, Nakulisha and others, might have be^
longed to this sect. That the Sutras were not composed by
Ak^apada appears to be almost certain. But it bears his name,
How to explain this fact ? The only explanation is that it belonged
to that sect, of which he was thought to be one of the earliest
representatives. I am not sure if the work '^ Nyayasutra " had
not gone through several redactions before it assumed its present
shape. But it is pretty sure that from the time of Soc-mock to the
period when the Ny&yasutras were reduced to their present form,
India was full of polemical writings, much of which has perished.

Though we know nothing from Brahmanical sources of the
process of the development of Nyaya, we know some stages of this
development from the Buddhists. Nagarjuna and Maitreya wrote
o^i Nyaya. In fact one of the volumes, I believe, the fifteenth of the
great polemical work by Nagarjuna on UpayakauSalya is devoted
to the exposition of Nyaya. Maitreya, Asanga and Yasubandhu
'— all wrote on Nyaya. Then came the great Diii-naga, the dis-
ciple of Asanga, whom the Japanese place between 400 to 500 A.D.,
and Kern between 520 and 600.

But in the meanwhile on the Brahminical side the Sutra has
been reduced to its present shape and a Bhasya has been composed
when, nobody can say. If am permitted to hazard a conjecture,
both the Sutra and Bhashya came after the development of the
Mahay ana School, i.e., both came after Nagarjuna and Aryadeva,
say in the 2nd Century A.D. The Bha^yakara, Yatsyayana,
though he does not even mention the Buddhists or even any Bud-
dhist writers, pointedly refutes all the Mahayanists doctrines of

Vol. I, No. 8.] Histoiy of NynyaUaira. 179

Transitoriness, of Void, of Individuality, and so on. Savara, the
BhA^vakara of Mimansa, was liberal enough to speak of refuting
the Mahayanic theory that the whole is merely a collection of
parts and not in any way different from them. But Vatsayana is
not so liberal. He would not name the Buddhists. There is
another Vatsyayana, however, who flourished about this time. He
may be identical with or a relation of, or at least, have be-
longed to the same gotra with the Nyaya Bha^yakara," on the
supposition that families and clans rise into importance under one
political circumstance and then disappear from history, both Vat-
s&yanas may be said to have belonged to the same epoch. That
Vatsyayana is the celebrated writer on Eratics. He mentions some
scanaals about the Satavahanas who flourished by the middle of
the 2nd Century A.D. And the geographical information gleaned
irora his book cannot refer to a period later than the rise of the
Oupta family.

We glean one historical information from the Brahmanical
sources, namely, that Din-naga severely criticised the Bha9yakara
Vatsyftyana, and that the Vartikakara, who comments upon the
Bh&9ya, defends V&tsySyana's work against Din-nSga.

The modem Hindu idea is that the Buddhists believed in two
of the pramanas* only, namely, Pratyakfa and anUmana^ i.e., per-
oeptluu and luforenco. But this is not a fact, so far as early
Baddhism and even early Mahayanism are concerned. For we know
distinctly from Chinese and «rapane8e sources that Analogy and
Authority were great polemical instruments in the hands of the
early Buddhists, i.e., that all early Buddhists from Buddha to
Vasubandhu were indebted to Al^p&da for their pramapas or
polemical instruments of right knowledge. Maitreya discarded
Analogy, and Dip-naga discarded Authority, and made Nyaya pure
logic, in the English sense of the term.

The followers of Akfapada are sometimes called Yogins, and
Yaugas, and the Buddhist tnidition is that Mirock (Maitreya) in-
troduced Yoga in the system of discriminating true knowledge
from false (i.e., the system of Ak^apada), some form of Yoga.
And we find that at the second lecture, fourth chapter, of the Nyaya
Sutras, there is a long section devoted to Yoga, and that Yoga is of
a peculiar character. How the section on Yoga was adopted into
the Nyayasastra, it is is difficult to say, because Yog^ does not be-
long to the sixteen topics which Akfapada, in the first sutra, pro-
mises to expatiate upon. Whether properly or improperly intro-
duced, it forms a part of Hindu Nyayasastra and also of Buddhist
Ny&yaBastra. The Buddhists say that Mirok introduced it, but
the Hindus cannot say who introduced it.

I reserve the result of my examination of the Nyayasfitras
for the second instalment of this paper; and I conclude this in-
stalment with the remark that though Din-naga and the Buddhist
aystem of Nyayasastra is almost completely lost in India, so
much so, that the discovery of a Tibetan translation of one of Din-
naga's works, was regarded by scholars as a matter of congratula-
tion, it is still studied and commented upon in China, Japan, Corea,

180 Journal of the Ariatio Society of Bengal. [August, 190S.

ancl Mongolia. In Japan only, it has a riyal in the European
syetem. Bnt I hare been assured that the rivalry has only
strengthened the position of the Hindu system. While the oollegea
study the European system, the monasteries study the ancient
system with great zeal.

^^■m^^^^^ ^^m^'^^m^'

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli TahaU. 181

[N. 8.]

24. Notes concerning the People of Mungeli Tahsil, Bilaapore District.
— By Rev. E. M. Gordon {continued from the Journal of the
Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol LXXIII. Part 5, No. 1, 1904).
[With one plate.] Oommunicated by the Anthropological
Secretary,

B. 38. The Measuring of Grain, — It is a never-f ailing practice
when a man stops measuring for him to throw a handful of grain
back into the measure. On innumerable occasions, for many
years, I have seen grain being measured and not once has this act
been omitted or forgotten. It is considered lucky for the measure
to be never empty. Much the same idea probably underlies the
practice of never sweeping out the granary. This would be consi-
dered tantamount to sweeping out prosperity,

39. Sowing Mango Seeds, — There is a prejudice against the
sowing of seeds from mangoes which have been eaten. The
fruit of trees grown from such seeds would be considered impure.
They would be called j huff ft, i,e, false or impure. This is an ad-
jective applied to food left over on one's plate after eating.

40. Bespect paid to Cattle which have dted.—l once noticed a
few clods of earth placed on the carcass of a cow which was lying
on the outskirts of the village. On inquiring as to why those
clods were placed there, I was told that the owner of ^' a beast of
burden " or other domesticated animal that ha-s died will with
due respect place a few of clods of earth on the carcass and consider
that this act has taken the place of a formal burial. The car-
cass is then taken by the leather workers, who remove the hide,
or it is thrown away at a distance to be devoured by vultures.

41. Chranaries causing Dumbness. — I was once questioning a
father regarding his child and remarked that it was late in speak-
ing. His reply was that the child had been placed on a granary,
and this was assigned as the reason for the delay in its acquiring
the power of speech.

42. The Cause of prolonged Pregnancy. — A woman came to the
Mission Hospital in Mungeli, and stated that for eleven months
she had been pregnant and yet there were no signs of the ap-
proach of the expected event. In conversation the doctor learnt
that there is a belief amongst the women that if one who is preg-
nant should step across a string by which a horse is tied, her
term of pregnancy will be prolonged and she will take the term
required by a mare before delivery. In order to remove the evil
consequences of having crossed the rope of a horse, the woman in
question must take a quantity of grain in her sari and present
the grain to the horse which has affected her. The horse having
eaten of the grain she will be relieved of the malign influence.

43. Wedding the Fields. — There is a practice in connection
with the sowing of fields, which I mention because of the desire of
folklorists to have on record every insignificant item which is
apparently of no consequence to the layman and yet may be
fraught with much meaning to the specialist. After sowing the
cold- weather crops, such as wheat, gram, etc., it is customary to

182 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [Anguat, 1905,

take the plongh around the field and sow in a circular form in
fieveral rows. This may be for the purpose of covering the ground
which had not been sown ; but it is interesting to note that the
farmers call this final sowing bihanO, to wed or many. Going
art) and the field in a circle may be associated with the circumven-
tion of the marriage pole.

44. The Milk Woman on the Plough. — In sowing the cold-
weather cropH, the plough invariably has a mass of damp earth
placed on it at the point where the handle of the plough meets the
tongue. This is said to assist the plough to go deep down into
the soil. But why should it be called the " milk woman " — the
Bantain ? The farmers are always greatly amused when I ask
them why they call the lump of earth the Rautain ; the term is so
familiar to them that they have never asked themselves the ques-
tion as to where the connection comes in with the " milk woman."

45. A Possible Explanation of the Preceding, — Since writing
the two preceding notes I have been reading Hiawatha. In the
section entitled ^^ Blessing the Conifields/' I find the following
lines. These lines are given without note or comment and the
reader must judge for himself as to whether there is any connection^
between the practice they refer to and the practices described in
notes 43 and 44.

*^ Once when all the maize was planted,

" Hiawatha wise and thoughtful,

" Spake and said to Minnehaha,

** To his wife the Laughing Water.

** You shall bless to-night the cornfields,

" Draw a magic circle round them.

" To protect them from destruction

" Blast of mildew, blight of insect.

** In the night when all is silence,

'* In the night, when all is darkness,

" Rise up from your bed in silence

" Lay aside your garments wholly

" Walk around the fields you planted

*^ Round the borders of the cornfields

" Covered by your tresses only.

** Robed with darkness as a garment

" From her bed rose Laughing Water.

*' Laid aside her garments wholly,

" And with darkness clothed and guarde

'* Unashamed and unafErighted,

•'Drew the sacred magic circle,

" Of her footprints round the cornfields."

In these lines, then, we find definite reference to a nude
woman going around the borders of the cornfields for the purpose
of protecting them from injury. In my notes Nos. 43 and 44, it
is stated that a plough with a lump of earth called " the milk
woman ** is taken around tlie fields several times after they are

1 [See Frazer, The Oolden Bough, 2nd ed., rol. U, chap. III.— EdJ

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mutigelt Tahsil. 183

sown, and this making of a circle aroand the field is called
"wedding the fields" Is there a connection in these two prac-
tices ?

46. Bindhig the Bain, — Mr. CrooVe, in his Folklore of North-
ern India, tells of various devices for binding the rainfall. In
this district there is the belief that certain persons have the
power to cause the rain to cease. It is said that the merchant
when he has stored away large quantities of grain to be sold at a
profit, will gather some rain from the eaves of the house in am
earthen vessel, and this vessel filled with rain-water he will bury
under the grinding mill. The consequence is that from that time
forward the thunder will be heard rumbling in the distance like
the grinding of a flour-mill, but there will be no more rain. I
think it is said that the rain must be gathered from the eaves
of a house at the Pora Festival.

47. Oounting and keeping Records, — The method of enu-
meration followed by the most ignorant people of the district is
that of counting by fives. For instance, if a man is counting
fruit, he lays aside five which make one ganda. Four groups
of five make one kori, and five groups of kories make one hun-
dred. According to Bates' Hindi Dictionary, a ganda means four,
in this district, however, it invariably means five. The great maj-
ority of the people in the district cannot count further than ten.
The usual 'way to state high numbers is in koris or twenties —
] 60 rupees is eight kories, and so on. Intermediate numbers are
expressed as follows: 46 = six over two tone*; 115 = five less six
kories, and so on. The grain measures most in use are also on
the same principle. Twenty kStSs make one khandi, and twenty
khandies make one gara. When grain is being measured at the
threshing floor, the record is kept by making one small pile of
grain (a handful in quantity) for every khandi. When grain
is given out to the labourers from the granary, the record is
made on the earthen wall of the granary in cow-dung, — one stroke
of the finger dipped in cow-dung means one katd, when twenty
strokes have been made they are crossed out and a cipher takes
their place and the perpendicular strokes start again from one to
twenty.

48. Some Agricultural Practices — (1) With regard to the
sowing of linseed, there is a belief that if the seed is sown from a
woollen blanket and cattle graze in a field grown from seed thus
sown, the cattle will surely die. I questioned a farmer in the
Damoh District on this point and found that the same belief
prevails there also. (2) It is also said that if iron in any shape
should come in contact with peas when they are being sown,
the seeds will not germinate. An iron or metallic spoon is
never used to stir the peas when they are being boiled as dall, for
the metal will cause the dall to be tough and indigestible. (3)
When the rice or kodo harvest is about to be completed and the
reaper comes to cut the last sheaf, he will throw it up into the air
and use some of the obscene phrases which are used in the Holi
Festival. (4) When the grain has been threshed in the threshing

184 Jownud of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [Angast, 1906,

floor and the first load of threshed grain is being carried to the
house to be stored, the housewife will come out to meet the labourer
who is carrying the load. She has in her hand a lota of water, and
with this she walks around the man carrying the grain and does
obeisance to the grain. This respect is paid to the first load of
grain only.

49. Oause and Oure of Styes. — There is a wide-spread belief
that styes are caused by seeing a dog in the act of defoecating.
And there are several remedies employed to remove a stye. One
of the most common remedies is connected with the Balkan Pahar^
the hill which occupies such a prominent position as a geographi-
cal feature of the district. This hill may be seen nt a distance
of fifty or eighty miles. The peak of the hill seen at a distance
just appearing above the horizon has some resemblance to a stye.
The belief is that if a person suffering from a stye should face this
mountain and say, " Balkan Pahar chqtH mor suite hard, " (the
Dalhan Hill is small, my stye is big) the hill will be annoyed, the
stye will be pleased, and as a result the stye will disppear. Some
say that while saying these words, the afflicted person should rub
the third finger of the right hand in the palm of the left hand and
apply the finger to the stye. It is also customary to take a grain
of the wild rice, apply it to the stye, and then throw it away. As
the grain decays the stye will disappear.

50. Saluting at Lamp-Ugkt, — It is customary amongst the
Satnamies for the menials and subordinates to salute a superior
when the lamp is first lighted at dusk. I was once seated outside
a tent with a number of villagers around me, when the servant
lighted the lamp and placed it on the table inside the tent.
Immediately all the villagers arose and said " Satnam " to me and
then resumed their seats. Being a stranger to the people at that
time, I was completely taken aback ; but on inquiry I learned that
this is a common practice. Now I have come to look for the saluta-
tion under similar circumstances. The entry of the lamp is
considered the ushering in of a new period of time, and hence the
people " wish you the time."

51. Ooncertitng Mecti7ig and Entertaining » — It is an invanable
pi'actice when relatives come together who have not met for a long,
while, for the womenfolk to weep nnd wail loudly. A son has
been away for months and returns to his parents' house. He will
first go and touch the feet of his father and mothei\ When ho has
been seated, the mother and sisters come to him and each in turn,
placing both hands on his shoulders, weeps loudly and in a
wailing tone narrates anything special that has taken place in his
absence.

To a stranger it would seem that a great loss has befallen
them. A daughter would be welcomed in the same way. Fre-
quently I have mistaken the weeping of meeting for that of
mourning. Experience, however, has taught me to distinguish the
two kinds of wailing. When anyone goes as a guest to a friend's
house, he partakes of the usual food prepared by the family. When
the people who are entertaining prepare some specially good food,.

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil, 185

[N. S.]

he takes it as a sign that his entertainment has now come to an end,
and the next day he takes his departure.

52. The Spindle and the Panchayat. — When ApanchSyat or
meeting of the leading men in a village is in progress, it is consi-
dered nnwise to have anyone present who is twirling a spindle.
It is said that as the spindle keeps revolving, so will the discussion
move in a circle and fail to come to a decided issue.

53. Vermin from the Clouds, — There is a very prevalent belief
that worms, frogs and snakes drop from the clouds. After cloudy
weather, when insects appear on certain vegetables, it is said that
they have dropped from the clouds. Strange as this idea may
seem to us, we nave a phrase which is even still more strange, for
we sometimes say, ** It is raining cats and dogs."

54. Tattooing. — This is done by the Oond women who usually
travel thix)ugh the district during the harvest time. The tattooing
is not as elaboi*ate as is seen in other parts of India. In fact, it
appears to me to be strikingly meagre. The most common figures
are those of two deer facing each other, and also the figure of a
chain or part of a chain. It is said that if a woman is not tattooe.d
in this world, she will be marked with a SabQr or crow-bar by the
gods in the next world. A woman will on no account allow her
husband to pay for any tattooing she may have done, lest he should
say to her when displeased, " I have not only paid for vou at our
marriage, but I have paid for your tattoo marks as well. Bather
than give occasion for this taunt, she will beg of a friend to pay
for the tattooting she may have done after leaving her parents'
home.

55. Some Matrimonial Beliefs and Practices, — ( 1 ) In the event
of a bachelor marrying a widow, he alone goes through the
marnage ceremony, for a woman never goes through the marriage
ceremony more than onco. The bachelor in this case would be
wedded to a dagger, and the dagger will take the place of the bride
throughout the ceremony. (2) If a couple should have twenty-one
children, it is said that they would go through the marriage cere-
mony together a second time. Or if a couple should live to see a
grandchild's grandchild, they will do the same. I was told
that a couple in a certain viUage lived to see their grandchild's
grandchild ; and my informant claimed to have been present at tlie
marriage ceremony which was performed. I will not vouch for
the truthfulness of my informant.

56. Lippoing, — When a house is lippoed, i.e., the floor
plastered with cowdung, it is customary to begin at the doorway
and do the plastering inwards. Never is the house lippoed out-
wards except after a death.

57. Effects of an Eclipse, — An eclipse, it is said, has a detri-
mental effect on granaries and on animal life not yet born. In
order to avoid the grain in the granary losing its germinating
power, a mark is made on the side of the granary with cow-dung.
The same means is employed to remove the evil influence from
pregnant animals. A mare would have a mark made on the side
with gobur (cow-dung) and a pregnant woman has a mark made

186 Journal of .the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [Augast, 1905»

on ber left side. I think it is a circnlar mork that is tnade. If
tliis precaution nvas not taken, the offspring would be deformed.
I once met a lad on the roadside with a deformed leg. I after-
wards questioned the man who accompanied me as to the probable
catLcre of the deformity. The reply was " Grahan khich Hya " — The
eclipse has drawn it up. His meaning was that shortly before
the lad was bom, thei'e had been an eclipse, which caused the
deformity.

68. Cause of another deformity. — There is a firm belief that
if one should hare a sixth finger, it was caused by his having
stolen garlic or huldi (turmeric > in the previous incarnation.
So firm is this belief that gardeners have no fenr of losing these
vegetables from their gardens by theft. One who steals would
appear in the next world with the mark of theft on his hand.

69. Toothache, Cause and Cure. — An insect is said to be
boring in the tooth and causes the pain. In order to remove the
insect, the patient is given a piece of hollow bamboo and he sits
over a slow fire in which some particular leaf is burning. One
end of the hollow bamboo is over the smoke rising from the
fire, the other end is placed in the mouth as near as possible to
the decayed tooth. It is said that the insect comes out of the
tooth, falls through the hollow bamboo into the fire, and the
toothache ceases. The gum of some of the Indian figs is also
used to close the hollow of a decayed tooth.

60. Anent the Bolt Festival. — Crooke in liis Folklore of Upper
India gives many interesting particulars regrading the Hoh\
I will mention only a few details observed in this locality. A
heap of thorns, etc., are stacked about the first of the lunar
month of Phognn, This stack is mnde just outside the village on
some open space. As the dajs go by and the Holi festival draws
near, the stack of thorns and dried branches increnses continually,
for the boys keep adding to the heap of fuel day by day. In the
centre of the stack of thorns is a high bamboo pole, to which is
tied a branch of the castor plant {Tticinns communis.) Under
the pole which stands in the centre of the Holi stack are some
kotcries or pice, and some turmeric. To the top of the pole is tied
a sheaf of dried grass or straw. On questioning a gardener as to
when he would sow a certain vegetable, he replied he would do so
when the Holi pole {dang) falls. His meaning was when the Holi
is burnt. I find this is a common idiom — " When the Holi pole
falls." The stack is set on fire by the village priest, who presents
horn, at the village shrine, and he is often a Qond or a HaigH or
one of the " aboriginal tribes." The fire with which the Holi is
lighted must be obtained from the rhak mak or fiint and steel.
No other fire will suffice. Some of the ashes of the Holi are kept
and supposed to have power in removing evil influences of spirits.

61. I'he Btirial of Qosais. — On hearing of the burial of a
prominent Gosai, I gathered the following information from some
aisinterested persons of other castes, who were present at the
burial and witnessed the whole ceremony. (1) Immediately after-
death tlie body was washed and covered with moist ashes. (2) A

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 187

deep whole was dag on the bank of the tank and the body was
placed in this hole in a sitting posture with legs crossed as
represented in the figures of Bnddha. (8) The face was toward
the north. (4) The body had a lanyoti^ a meagre loin cloth.
(5) Another piece of cloth was cut open in the centre and the
head was put through this opening in the cloth, so that the cloth
i*e8ted on the shoulders. It was coloured with a red earthen
dye {gem). See Exod. xxviii. 31,32, R. Version. " Thou shalt
make the robe of the ephod all of blue. And it shall have a hole
for the head in the midst thereof." (6) Under the shoulder was
placed Ajholi or bag of cloth, the string of which went around the
shoulder. (7) The right hand was placed to the mouth and in the
hand was a ehipp^tie (loaf of unleavened broad) touching the
lips. (8) Inside the mouth was an udrnj (the sacred bead which
mendicants or those of the priestly castes wear around the neck.
In the mouth was also a leaf of the Bael tree (JEgle mar-
melos). (9) By the side of the body was placed a stick such as
mendicants carry and also a kamajidal or water- vessel made from
a gourd. (10) There were placed by (he body a pair of wooden
sandles. (11) A piece of cloth was tied carelessly around the
head, and over this was placed an earthen plate turned upside
down. (12) The body was then surrounded with fifteen kata.t of
salt (something over a maund.) (13) When the earth had been
filled in there was a Siv (stone image of of the Linga) placed over
the grave, and the fellow-caste-men went around the grave seven
times and sprinkled rice on the Stv. (14) Every night a lamp is
lighted at the grave for one year and a lota of water and some
rice is sprinkled over the Siv daily. In connection witli this burial
I should mention that a short distance (five miles) from the village
(Heraspore) in which this burial took place, ifi another village
(Dharampui*a) which for many decades past has been the residence
of Gosais. On the banks of the tank of this village are five different
temples. I was told that each of the temples is built over the
grave of a man buried as described above. My informant was
able to give me the names of four of the Gosais buried there, but
he said the name of the man buried under the fifth temple
(certainly the oldest and now in a delapi dated condition) was un-
known to the village people. They had forgotten the name.

62. Birth Practices. — Immediately on the delivery of a child
the mother has cotton stuffed into her ears. This is said to " keep
out the wind." This is also done when one is expiring. There
is a belief that a male child comes into the world the face upwards,
and the female with the face downwards. It is said that if a male
is bom face downwards, he will be effeminate, and vtce-versa. The
hair is never allowed to remain knotted during delivery, and if
delivery is prolonged and painful, the woman is taken into another
house as it is believed the house has something to do with the delay
in the child being bom.

63. Sworn Friendships. — These are known by various names,
which are usually connected with the object employed in sealillg
the friendship. One of the most common names is Mah^prSsOd^

188 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [August, 1905.

(the great feast or food ). It is supposed to be formed hj the
couvenauting parties partaking together of some of the food cooked
and sold at Jugganath, and brought home by returning pilgrims.
As a matter of fact MUhUprSsdd now means anyone who has sworn
to be a life-long friend. These friendships are also formed with the
use of Ganges water brought home by pilgrims. In this case the
friendship is known as Oangajal,

Then, again, any flower may be employed, and the friendship
would be termed merely phul (flower). This is usually the
case amongst women. Each party places a flower in the ear
of the other and the friendship is formed. If some particular
flower is used that flower gives the name to the friendship. In
all these bonds of friendship, it is incumbent on the promising
parties to refrain from taking the name of his friend, and they
call each other MdhdprasSd, Oangajal^ Dmina (Artemisia vxiU
yaris or Indian wormwood) or merely Phid. It is astonishing
how very binding these friendships are considered. After an
acquaintance with the people of 14 years I can recall only one
instance in which such a friendship was broken. Like David
and Jonathan, the parties stand by each other, they are bound
together for better or for worse, etc., etc. In has been hinted to
me tiiat these friendships sometimes result in a community of
possessions extending even to a community of wives. In this
connection it is interesting to note what is done when one of the
friends happens by forgetfulness or necessity to take the friend's
name. He will go to his friend and say, *^'' Tor douki mor douki^
gendfi gajld phuV^ These words may have two meanings and
have been interpreted both ways to me. They may mean, " Your
wife and my wife are a garland of marigold flowers ; '* or they
may mean, " Your wife is my wife, a garland of marigold flowers.
By repeating this couplet to his friend it is supposed the ofEending
one makes propitiation for his offence.

64. Concerning Witches^ Fairies ^ etc. — (1) There is a belief
that witches sometimes have an insatiable desire for human
blood, and they can suck blood from the navel of a child with-
out anyone knowing it. As a result the child becomes ema-
ciated and dies. There was once a Telin witch who was possessed
by this desire for blood, and not being able to suck the blood
from the navel of any other child she was compelled to draw
blood from her own infant. If an adult also should suddenly
become emaciated and loose flesh, it is said that a witch has sent
down a long tongue or tube from the roof of his house when he
was asleep and has drawn blood from his navel. In order to regain
strength it is necessary to eat a small kind of fish found in
the rivers. Also to eat a kind of rice. (2) If a child is
believed to be possessed by a witch or an elf, it is customary
for the parants to take a bangle and a tassel worn at the end of
a plait of hair by women and to tie these articles to a twig of
the Baer tree {Jnjuha vulyaris). The Baer tree is supposed to
be the special residence of witches, or elfs or other invisible
beings. (3) According to Bates* Hindi Dictionary^ the word Pret

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeh TahsiL 189

has seyeral meanings, *' a spirit of the dead, a goblin spirit, evil
sprite, fiend, etc." Here I find it is commonly used to mean an
«!£ or fairy, not necessarily a being with evil infinences. Pretins
are said to assume the form of women and frequent the bazars*
By their superhuman powers they can take away articles from
the stalls of tradesmen without being detected. A woman with
a crooked nose is suspected of being a Pretin, The story is told
of a Eaut (milk-man) who was returning from a bazar when he
saw a Pretin, most beautiful to look upon, fomenting her child
under a Bckt tree. He persuaded her to go to his house, but he
hid her sSiri in a hollow bamboo. The Pretin lived happily with
the Raut and they had three sons. At the marriage of the eldest
son the neighbours asked the mother to dance and amuse them.
•She refused to do this unless she was given her own sSri, which
the Raut had hidden. Persuaded by his guests the man at last
produced the hidden «5ri from the hollow bamboo. Scarcely
had the woman put it on when she became invisible and dis-
appeared, never to return. It is said that the descendants of the
three sons of this Pretin are still in this district, but no one has
ventured to inform me just where they may be found. Students
of folklore will recognize in this story the widespread belief that
the influence of fairies, giants, etc., lies in some special object,
e,g., Samson's strength being in his hair. (4) It is believed that
some have the power of placing a Pretin in a flute or fiddle, and
in this case the instrument will make music of its own accord
without any human assistance.

65. Deserting Hotues. — I have been told that amongst the
jungle people of this district if a death should take place, the
entire settlement, never very large, moves away to another site,
doubtless because of the belief that the deceased will frequent his
former abode. Amongst the people of this Tehsil, who live in
larger and more settled villages and hamlets, there is an inclina-
tion to desert the house in which a death lias occurred, and
to build another house on another site. Higher up in the grades
of civilzation we find a desire to withdraw from the room in
which one has died, if not from the belief that it is haunted,
then on account of the unpleasant associations. Amongst the
people of whom I write, if a house is to be deserted it will be
leepoedj n Inmp lighted, and the residents will withdraw.

66. Punishment of Witches. — If I was to tell of all the witch
stories which are told amongst the people, these notes would have
to swell out to undue proportions. Pei^haps I should mention that
Ohhattisgarh has long had a reputation for witchcraft and similar
cults. Sleeman, writing as far back as 1835 in his Rambles and
Recollections, mentions these parts as having an unfavourable
reputation. It is currently reported that in the old days when
a witch was found she would be tied to the horns or the legs of
a buffalo, and the buffalo was then infuriated till the victim
was killed.

67. A Case of " Possession.^* — It was on the night of the 9th of
August, 1901, that I had the following experience with a man said

190 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 190^»

to be possessed by the Devil. At eleven o'clock I was called to-
the Leper Asylum, of which I am Superintendant, to see a leper-
named Yisahu, who was laid hold of by Shaitan. It was a
dark, drizzling night and I went to the Asylum lantern in hand.
Approaching the gate of the Asylum I heard many loud voices
for the lepers were greatly excited, and I could also hear the
grinding of teeth from the unfortunate man. This was heard
at a distance of fully one hundred yards. On approaching the
crowd I found the leper Visahu, a man of medium physique,
lying on the ground on his chest struggling violently, while^
two men were seated on him trying to keep him down. They
told me he was making efforts to run away from them, and as
the river was not far off they feared he would drown himself. I
immediately ordered the men to loosen their hold of him, and
1 talked with him calmly and firmly and tried to pacify him.
Meanwhile I noted the wild meaningless look in his eyes, as
though he was terribly frightened. He was trembling, shaking
from head to foot, his teeth were grinding, and I was convinced it
was not a case of shamming. I concluded he was in a fit of
some kind. Ordering the ammonia bottle from the hospital, I
led Visahn to his own room, and had his bed put in readiness. As
we wore about to enter his room, the man broke away from me
and rushing througli the lepers who had gathered around, he
went straight for the gate. I went after him as fast as possible,
and the crowd followed me. Visahu ran straight into the grveyard,
close by ; seeing this the crowd hung back and only two atten-
dants followed me as I ran after the man over the Ghamar
graves. With shod feet and with a lantern we had difliculty in
following the man because of the cactus tiiorns and the ditches full
of water. He, however, did not seem to heed these, and ran along
bare-footed over tlie graves and the thorns to the other end of the
graveyard wh ere he plunged into a ditch full of water. When
we overtook him, he sat quaking and grinding his teeth staring
around wildly. I again laid hold of his arm and led him back
to the Asylum and seated him in the Chapel. Here I kept him
under my gaze, talked with him and poured water between his
set teeth. Foi* sometime he gazed at me stolidly, with a vacant
look a nd without blinking; there was no intelligence in his face.
In the meantime the ammonia was brought from the hospital.
He did not seem affected by it. After about ten minutes in tlie
Chapel, his face changed, he looked around to the others and
said, ** Why have you brought me here ? " He seemed like one
waking from sleep. He felt the mud and water on his body
and asked why we had thrown water on him. I asked him
where he had been ; he said, "Nowhere ! " He had no recollection
of having acted strangely. He then became conscious of the
bruise on his knee and the thorns which had become imbedded
in his feet. On questioning him I learned that he had been
on leave from the Asylum and had returned that morning walking
some eight miles. After a night meal, he sat in the comer of
his room playing on a long bamboo flute which has a deep

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungelx Tahsil 191

roonotonoQs tone. He wife was also in the room. After playing
for some time he arose and went to the door to go out. Outside
the door he said he saw a figure and exclaimed, " What is this P "
Immediately he fell forward, and that is all he could remember.
I am positive that this was not a case of shamming. I am alsa
positive that lie did not recall what took place, that he had na
recollection of what took place from the time I saw him on the
ground to the time he '* came to himself " in the Chapel I am
also certain that he was not under the influence of an intoxicant.
This case puzzled me for a long while. I could not bring myself
to believe it was a case of demon possession, though everything
seemed to support that theory. Since this experience, I have
looked iuto the subject of hypnotism, and I am now of opinion that
this so-called '^case of possesion" was actually a case of auto-
hypnotism. The man playing his flute in a monotonous tone
for a long time (probably gazing at the light) brought himself
into the hypnotic state when he was susceptible to any outside
suggestion. Seeing a shadow, may he not have taken this to be
a spirit about to possess him ? Then the cries of his neighbours
" Shaifan laga hai " would still further deepen the impression, or,
technically, the " suggestion," until he actually became to himself
a man possessed. I have seen persons coming out of the hypnotic
state, and the way in which consciousness returned to them re-
minded me of the way in which the leper came to himself and was
first conscious of his bruises. I mention this case with the only ex-
planation which suggests itself to me. Perhaps I should say
again that there was no history of the use of intoxicnnts, and the
man who is still in the Asylum (May, 1905) is not addicted to the
use of intoxicants. Need I add that all the lepers and all the
neighbours were fully convinced that it was Shaifnn who possessed
the man, and the Shaitan was supposed to be the spirit of a leper
who had died fifteen days before and was buried in the grave-
yard into wliich Visahu took us on that memorable night in
August.

68. Facifying the God, — I once saw a man leading a black
goat. On questioning him I was told that he had a buffalo worth
forty rupees which was ill. He was taking the goat to tie near
the buffalo. He would feed the goat in the name of the deo
which possessed the buffalo, and when the buffalo recovered, at the
next principal festival, the goat would be slaughtered in the name
of the god. Some days later I heard that the buffalo had died,
and the man was wish ing to sell the goat. Another sacrific, however,
proved moi^e fortunate. I had a syce, a Ghassia by caste, who had
an only son, who was drowned in the river. As the syce and his
wife were getting on in years, they wished to have another son.
I recall the time when my syce asked leave that he might sacrifice
a pig at some shrine in order to have a son. A year or eighteen
months later I was told that Raru, the syce, had a son. This boy
is now living, is about ten years of age, and comes to me every
Christmas for Baksheesh, His father is too old for service.
Nothing could convince the father that the son was not given in

192 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

answer to his sacrifice. To his parents he is in very truth a Samuel
— " asked of God."

69. Terrors of the Night, — In common with all primitive
peoples, the villagers of this Tehsil are greatly scared by the dark
night. It is not the dread which civilized persons have of stepping
on a snake or a scorpion, but the darkness to them is frequented by
evil spirit and malign influences. Specially after someone has died
is this fear apparent. It is completely removed during the moon-
light nights and most apparent during the dark wet nights in the
rains. On a dark night it is considered unwise to name a person
recently deceased ; a snake also should not be mentioned. By
naming the snake or the deceased they will come near. " Speak
of an angel/* as the saying goes.

70. Settling Quarrels. — The Rants or herdsmen have a festival
in September or October, which I am sure will repay investigation
by an expert. I wish to mention one item in this connection. For
about a month the Bauts go around dressed up with strings of
shells ijcoiories) with leather or metallic shields and lathies or
wooden swords in the hand. At this time they have what is
called matar jdgnH. Jdgnd means to awake, but what Matar
means I cannot say. The Bauts get together on the site where they
usually tie the cattle during the heat of the day, and at this place
they have a great feast and a merry time. They are all dressed
up as described above, and I am told they eat with their shoes on
and their lathies in their hands. After this feast they go forth to
settle any quarrel which may have arisen with neighbouring
Bauts during the past year. The quarrel is settled by the use of
lathies and not by words, one party throws out the challenge by
shouting out words of abuse, the others reply and they engage in
a hand-to-hand fight till the people in one party are defeated and
take to their heels. The people tell me that these fights still take
place, but I have had no positive evidence of this being the case.

71. Scorpion 8 tings y Immunity from, — I know for a fact that
there are persons on the Tahsil, who are immune to the sting of
the scorpion. A man of my acquaintance will deliberately take
up a scorpion holding it by the tail. This is not merely done by
courage due to dexterity, for I once saw the scorpion strike him and
the only discomfort he experienced was a pain as though the part
had been burnt or rubbed with chillies. There is a belief that dark
skinned persons are more susceptible to the poison, for they suffer
more intensely. It has also been stated that if a woman is stung
by a scorpion during pregnancy, her offspring will be immune to
the scorpion poison. There are certain persons who have a re-
putation for removing the pain consequent on the sting of a scor-
pion, and they go through various mesmeric passes over the part
stung ; and if the distressed portion be the arm, they profess to
gradually bring down the pain to the fingers from which extremity
the pain is eliminated.

72. Concerning a Mushroom, — There is a dark-coloured
rather high-growing mushroom found in the open fields, which is
known as Suri gae ki dhettiy i.e., the teats of the Suri (wild) cow.

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 193

[N. 5.]

I am told that this mushroom grows over the spot where a cow ha&
given birth to its young. It is an invariable practice for the herds-
men or the ploughmen when they find this mushroom to stick it
in the cord round the waist or to put it behind the ear. It seems-
to serve no practical purpose, and yet people carry it around like a
charm. This mushroom is tough and leathery and appears to be
quite durable.

73. The Festival of Stilts,— During the latter half of the Hindu
month of Sravan is held, what I have termed, the festival of stilts
because of the practice amongst the boys and sometimes the young
men of making stilts and playing with them for 15 days. Just as
soon as the light half of Sravan comes around, these stilts will be
seen. The stilts are made by tieing small pieces of bamboo about
a foot in length to a long bamboo six feet long, and the foot is placed
not across the step of the stilt, as is usually done by English school-
boys, but the foot is placed lengthways on the step of the stilt, so
that the long bamboo is held by the toes of the foot. The stilts are
not nailed in any part but are tied with twine ; and when the twine
is wet it makes a creaking noise rubbing against the bamboo, and
this noise made at eveiy step of course adds immensely to the enjoy-
ment of the youngstei'S. When the fifteen days are over, at the PorS,
festival, the children make some specially dainty cakes, and taking
their stilts they all go down in a body to the river or tank. Here the
stilts are all stacked together like rifles in a guard-room. Before
this stack of stilts the childi'en offer horn (incense), sometimeb-
merely burning dried cow-dung Then they untie the foot-pieces
from the stilts, and one foot-piece is thrown into the river and the
other is either buried in the sand by striking it upright or it la
carried to the home and struck in the ground in front of the door-
way.

The long pieces of bamboo are also taken home and put in the
roof to be kept till the next season. After this festival of stilts, the
Kumhdrs make earthen bullocks, paint them in gay colours and
take them round for sale. They also make earthen grinding mills
and small vessels to amuse the girls. This time of the year
appears to be specially the time of amusement for the little ones.

74. The Fisherman's ^^f.— During the Dasherah festival a
fisherman goes around with his net and he tlu-ows this on to the
child of any prominent person. This appears to be a sign of
good- luck or prosperity, for the parents of the child reward
the fisherman with grain or money. A fisherman once tried to
throw his net on my little girl ; she was greatly alarmed and
would not allow it to be done. The man thought it would be
unfortunate to be thus hindered ; so he placed his net over mo.
It is a question whether he was more concerned for his own
interests or mine.

75. Snake-Lore and Snake-Gharmers, — The snake-charmers of
the district are called QouriyHs. They appear to be few in number
and I do not find them named in the Census Report. They reside
in a few villages of this Tahsil, engage in agriculture during the
rains, and in the dry months they wander away to great distances

194 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [August, 1905.

with their carious pets, which they exhibit and thus make a
precarious living. I Lave culled them snake-charmers, but they
do not charm with music. I have yet to see the Qouriya who uses
the gourd fluto so often seen in other parts of India. They
wear the peculiarly twisted narrow turban which is characteristic of
the Indian snake-charmer. They have attached to their turbans a
few claws of bears or tigers and the talons of hawks or large birds
of some kind. The snakes usually carried around are the Python
molurus and two varieties of the cobra ; one with the spectacles and
the other without them. The cobra with the mark on the head is
called the Domi ; without this mark it is called the Oouhd, they
are believed to be quite distinct snakes. I learned, in conversation
with the men, that they make an agreement with the snake when it
is first captured as to how long it will be kept in captivity. Some
vow to keep it for six months, others for a year-and-a-half . When
the time is up, the snake is given its freedom and another is cap-
tured. It would be considered a very great misfortune if a snake
should die in captivity. On questioning a man as to how the
cobra came to have the mark on its head, I was told that when
Bhagwan, the deity, went into Fatal, (the nether region) he placed
his foot on the N^g, and it is the footprint of Bhagwdn that is
seen on the snake to-day. ** It shall bruise thy head, etc." Gen,
iii, 15. The Python molurus is considered the most dharmi
(righteous) of all snakes. The reason is that it will never go out
of its way to seek for its prey ; it lies quietly till the victim hap-
pens to come into its immediate vicinity, and then it will lay hold of
it. The Ptyas mucosus is locally known as the AahaHySi^ from the
month Ashar, corresponding with June-July. It is so called from
the popular belief that it is poisonous only in Ashar. The follow-
ing interesting story is told concerning this snake. I have heard
this tale with many variations and it appears to be widely known :
At one time the Ashariya was the only poisonous snake^ in existence.
It found a raut (a herdsman) lying on the side of a field where
he had fallen asleep while tending his cattle. Near the head of
the herdsman lay his bamboo flute, which he often played to while
away the time while watching his cattle. Now the AshariyS
had oft^n heard the sound of the flute, and was annoyed at
hearing the music. Finding the raut asleep, he determined to
silence him forever. He approached the head of the sleeping man
and struck him in the forehead saying, " Now you are silenced, and
I will never again be troubled with your music." When the
AshariyH had gone away, to his ^reat astonishment he again
heard the sound of the herdsman's flute just as before. The flute
lay at the head of the dead body in such a position that the wind
blowing through it caused it to make music just as when played
on by tlie owner. The AshariyH was much enrafs^ed at the thought
of his poison not having silenced the rdut. He determined to
distribute his poison to others, and to incresse the possibility of
the man being killed by his poison. He therefore gave an invita-
tion to all manner of reptiles to come to a feast which he had
prepared. All the reptiles came in great numbers to this feast.

i [C/. tlie Earin and Patani Malay stories of the pjthoa (Mason's Burma
and Anuandale, Faacic. Malay Anthrop, I). — Ed.]

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungdi TahsiL 195

IN. iSf.]

While distributing food to the guests the Xshariyll mixed with the
food a good portion of his own deadly poison, which up to that time
he alone had possessed. The cobr& and the scorpions and all
other stinging insects received as much poison as was contained
in the food of which they partook. Hence the various degrees in
the poison of snakes. The Xshariyd in consequence had only a
little poison left, and so it is poisonous only in the month
of Zshar, It is said that traders in cattle and those who
have to do_with the breaking in of cattle keep a piece of the
tail of the AshartyS by them. If the tail of this snake is pushed
up the nostril of a refiactory animal (a bullock or a buffalo) the
a.nimal will immediately become manageable and submissive.
There is still another snake which holds an important place in tlie
folklore of the district. This is locally known ns the " Murari
«5p." I cannot supply the scientific name, but it belongs to the
fHmily of earth-snakes, which burrow underground and come to the
surface only occasionally. It is not much more than eight inches
in length, thick and of much the same dimension from end to end.
On account of the similar appearance of head and tail, it is some-
times said to iiave two heads. For six months it goes one way,
and for six months the other. On being touched this snake
has a way of curling around in a circular from. This may account
for the nam<j (murna means to twist), and it certainly accounts for
the popular belief that it is tiie greatest enemy of the larger
snakes, for it will twist itself around them till they are strangled.
Jlut the most common belief with regard to the Murari is that it
will attach itself to a woman's breast and draw away her milk
while she sleeps. The snake, it is said, will place its tail in the
child's mouth and thus soothe the child while drawing away the
milk for its own nourishment. Women hold this snake in special
abhorrence.

While speaking with a man concerning the Murari, he told me
that only recently he had killed this snake in the house of a
neighbour, and he had found a quantity of milk in its maw. On my
expressing my doubt he went on to explain that his neighbour's wife
had a child which had lost flesh for some time past. The reason
given was that the snake was taking the woman's milk while the
child was starving. Now that the snake had been destroyed, the
child was gaining flesh and improving in health. If a Murari is
found in the fields, it is taken up on a stick and thrown towards
the sun. This is called suraj dekhana (shown the sun). It is
thrown high up in the air and is killed as a lesult of the fall. The
snake charmers also informed me that at the Hariy&li festival, it is
their practice to go out in the fields and burn horn (sacrifice) at the
roots of the trees or herbs which are employed as antidotes to snake
poison. It is at this festival also that they lay in a stock of anti-
dotal herbs for use during the coming year.

76.-4 Love Portion called Hatha jori, — The Gond women who
f;o around the Tehsil in the winter months tattooing and selling
herbs and roots with medicinal properties, also have with them a
herb known as hathdjori, which may be roughly translated hands

196 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aagast, 1905.

joined. I have seen tliis herb or root, and it certainly resembles two
hands clasped together. This is said to be a mohini and is
given by a suitor to a woman whose affections he may wish to win.
Dr, Watt's in his Economic Products of India mentions a vege-
table growth of this name and he calls it '^ Eagle's claw." (See his
Dictionary M. 208.) He makes no reference to its being a love-
portion, and may be he describes an entirely different herb to that
which is sold by the Gond women. I have mentioned tlie hathUjori
here because of its connection with the following passage in The
Sacred Tree (a work by Mrs. J. H. Philpot), page 106. ** In the
valley of Lanzo in Piedmont, lovers in doubt whether to marry
.consult the oracle in the form of a herb called concordia, the root
of which is shaped like two hands ea<5h with its five fingers."
Jewellers sometimes advertize in their catalogues ladies' brooches,
which represent two hands clasped together. Is this merely a
convenient emblem of friendship, or is it a survival from herbs
which looked like clasped hands which were used as love-
portions ? Since scarf pins with the horse shoe are a survival of
the primitive belief that iron wards off evil spirits, why may not
this clasped-hand brooch also claim as ancient an ancestry ?

77. A Marriage Practice. — Goin^ through a village, I noticed
a strange figure made of straw attached to a long bamboo hanging
over a house. On inquiring I was told that a marriage had re-
cently taken place in the house, and the figure which drew my
attention was that of a deer. I then learned that it is customary after
a marriage for the bride and bridegroom and friends to resort to the
river or tank and wash off the htUdi with which the persons of the
bride and bridegroom have been covered ; and while this is being
done there is much fun and joking and teasing. One of the plays at
this time is to make a deer of straw and place a bow and arrow
made of bamboo in the hands of the bridegroom and not let him
go from the river till he has taken good aim and pierced the deer
with his arrow. After striking the deer he gives chase to the
bride who with her friends runs away to the house, and is there
overtaken by the bridegroom and his friends. The deer is hoisted
on a high bamboo and hangs over the house for some time.

78. A Priviitive f&i'm of Lamp Light. — The C rot on tiglium is
most commonly found throughout 'this Tehsil. It is used as a
border plant for gardens and groves. The seeds of this slirub form
a drastic purgative, and are used for this purpose by the people.
But there is still another use made of the seeds. They are strung
together by children in long rows, and the lowest seed is set on fire
and the seeds bum in succession one after the other very slowly, at
the same time giving out quite a deal of light. This play amongst
the children may possibly be the remains of a general practice of
lighting the houses with the seeds of the croton strung together.

79. Massage and Branding of Infants, — It is considered a neces-
sity for the mother to massage her infant daily. The mother sits
on the floor with her two legs stretched out together straight in
front. The child is placed on its back in her lap, the head resting
between the knees and the feet towards the mother. By the side

Vol. I, No. 8.1 The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 197

• IN. /Sf.]

of the mother is the Oorei or roughly-made earthen pot in which
are kept the slowly-burning cowdung cakes. The infant's abdomen
is first oiled and then the mother places one hand over the fire and
the other over the child's stomach, and thus with rapid movements
of the hands massages the child with each hand alternately.
Meantime she is singing some soothing lullaby. This fomentation is
intended to remove fiatulence. But sometimes a much severer
process is adopted. The child is said to be attacked with a
complaint which is called DhUbhU. I am unable to say whether this
is merely a severe attack of flatulence or constipation or a specific
disease. The stomach of the infant, it is said, becomes swollen and
hard. If it be a mild attack of DhUhh&j the abdomen is branded
with the point of an iron sickle.. The sickle is placed in the fire till
it is red hot and the point is then applied to the stomach in eight
or ten different places. Once when passing through a village at
night I heard excrutiating cries from a child ; on inquiry I was
casually informed that a child was suffering from Dhdhhd and
the parents were having it branded. If the disease assumes a
severe form, what is called big Dhdhha, then several double-pice are
placed in the fire, they are then taken up with pinchers and applied
to the surface of the abdomen leaving a burn the size of the face of a
pice. I believe fully 99 per cent, of the natives of this Tehsil carry
on their person the marks of this infantile branding. Some of them
carry the marks for forty and fifty years. May we not ask if this
practice of branding infants has not some connection with the
widespread belief that changlings and witches are afraid of fire
and also of iron. This belief may have originated the practice,
which has continued because of the beneficial results due to counter
irritation. Adults are also branded on the arms and legs in severe
cases of rheumatism or in cases of sprains.

80. Stone Heaps. — In certain parts of the Tehsil will be found
a great pile of stones. A single heap of stones is called a Kurihd,
from Kurhond to heap. The people can tell nothing as to the origin
of the practice, but they say it is considered fortunate to throw a
stone on to the heap in passing and thus add to the accumulation of
stones. In 2 <Sfam. xviii 17, with regard to the burial of Absolam,
we read that he was thrown into a pit and they " raised over him a
very great heap of stones " (Revised Version). In Adam Clark's
commentary on the above passage I find the following remarks :

"This was the method of burying heroes and even traitors The

ancient cairns or heaps of stones in different parts of the world are
of this kind." In Col. Meadows Taylor's novel Tara, a Maharatta
Tale, I find the following passage descriptive of the country near
Bijapore. " The heap of stones had been formed gradually by
travellers who, coming from all sides, took up one from the path,
and threw it with a prayer to the local divinity upon the pile.
This had been done no doubt for centuries."

81, Ideas regarding Transmigration^ — Some years ago I was
quite intimate with a SatmUni OhamSr, He was fully eighty years
of age. This man had many stran ge ideas, which, unfortunately,
at that time I did not appreciate. W ith my present acquaintance

198 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [Angnst, 1905.

with . folklore, I would have regarded him a valuable " find."
For many years now at the BivaU festival, a lamp has been burnt
at his grave for three nights in suocession. This old man claimed
to be able to tell just what form any man or animal has assumed
in the last life, or incarnation. He said that he had some cattle,
who were persons who had died owing him money ; and they had
returned in this form to pay their debts. He himself claimed to
have been a Bajput in the last life, and for some offence he was
born a Ghamar. He expected on his return to the earth to be bom
a Brahman. I once took him to see my horse which was tied in the
stable. On our entering the stable the horse started. I said to
Goburdhan, " Now, can you tell me what this horse was in the last
life." He was equal to the occasion, for he replied immediately,
** He was a deer and was shot." '^ How do you know P" I asked.
*' Did you not notice how he started when we entered," he replied,
^^he is timid like a deer, and look at this," pointing to a birth-mark
on the side of the animal, " this is where a bullet has entered*
He was a deer and was shot." It is a common idea amongst the
people of this district that marks on the body are transmitted.
If a c£ild should be bom and should die almost immediately,
the expression used is " hahurgaya^ ** It has returned." The idea
is that the life came into this world and went back from whence
it came.

82. Observation during a Small-pox Epidemic. — Early in 1904
there was a small-pox epidemic in the town of Mungeli ; and I had
ample opportunity of making many interesting observations. The
conclusion I came to was, that during the epidemic the people feel
that there is some strong personality in their midst, and all their
efEorts are with the purpose of pleasing this great power or in-
fluence or person. As is usually the case, they believe what
would please themselves will please this great being or power.
The mat a or devi is supposed to be visiting the family in which there
is a case of small-pox. It is not considered a misfortune but rather
an honour. The yard of the house in which the patient lies is
surrounded by a hedge oi thorns or dried twigs. The pur-
pose is to keep away persons whose presence will annoy the
goddess and to hinder persons with shod feet approaching the house.
Someone is always in attendance on the patient. Every word he
may utter is considered the word of the goddess. If the patient
requests water, the attendants will say, " The goddess is thirsty,"
and will bring the coldest, purest water obtainable. In the delirium
all the wild sayings of the patient are considered the utterances of
the great person in their midst. The behests of this person must
be complied with, however difficult and repulsive. If the patient
says he wants food from the house of a scavenger, it must be done
rather thnn incur the wrath of the goddess. Once a man walked
eight miles to ask for food from my table. The reason was that
his daughter had small-pox, and when asked what she wanted, she
was understood to say she wanted food from the sahib's house, and
the father begged me to give him some. On several occasions the
people have come asking for the fruit of the papiyH from my

Vol, I, No. 8.1 Tke People of Mungeli Tahsil. 199

IN.S.-]

garden, as the mdtA had asked for this fruit. If the goddess should
demand a hen, the hen will be purchased and tied near the bed of the
patient. It is said that a hen with reversed feathers is the one
most appreciated. During a smaU-pox epidemic I have knove^
poultry with reversed feathers to sell at an exorbitant price. Some-
times a goat is tied in the house of the patient and daintily fed in
the name of the go.ddess, with a promise that it will be slauehtered
in the event of the patient's recovery. Every evening in eaok
house in which there is a small-pox patient, music is heard and
songs are sung in praise of the goddess. Musical instruments are
-also employed, more especially the drum. The f liends of the patient
will sit up all night. If the patient is in distress, nothing is
•done to alleviate the sufEering ; but the friends perplex themsdves
in trying to find out what they have done to annoy the goddess or
what they have omitted to do which will please her. One evening
I questioned a young man passing my gate as to where he was
goinff. He replied he was going to join his friends who were to
watch by the house of a oasto-f ellow who had small-pox. On in-
•quiring why he was going to watoh, he replied, ** In case a dog or
a cat should come near the house at night and annoy the goddess.'*
I asked how long the friend had had the sickness. Me replied, ** Six
j^ears." On seeing my perplexity he explained that they say
year for day in speaking of this illness. I then asked how much
longer he expected the friend would be siok. He replied, ** Eight
or ton years. When the epidemic was abating in the town of
Mungeli, the following story was told around and about the town
and was believed to be true by all who heard and all who told it. A
•certain Bania, whose name was given, went from Mungeli to the
neighbouring town of Nawagarh ; on his return aftor dark he came
upon seven women seatod by fires on the roadside. He addressed
■them as " friends " and asked them for fire to light his hirhi (pipe).
Thev paid no attention to him, and he noticed their fires had no
smoke and that they burned stoadily. He then went his way on
horseback. His syce or groom came behind him and met these
same women. They said to the syce, ** Your master addressed us as
friends and we have destroyed two of his children. Tell him we
iiave done our work in Mungeli and are now Koing to Nawagai'h.**
This story was believed to account for the sudden cessation of the
disease in Mungeli and its sudden appearance in Nawagarh just at
that time. I have been told that when the disease first appears on
a person, he is seatod on a bed and his feet are bathed with
great ceremony. The water in which his feet are washed must be
.taken from a running stream ; and the wator must be taken up in a
Tessel drawn against the current and not in the direction in which
the water is flowing. When the sickness has left the patient his en-
tire body is bathed with great ceremony either on a Monday or a
Thursday. Several months after the patient has recovered, tlie
people have the ceremony of ** Vidd karoy** that is, '* sending away "
the ^ddess, as sonie visitor, is sent off, with ceremony. Special
food is prepared, and the family party all wear new clothes, and
with music and procession they all proceed to the river, where

200 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [August, 1906^

food and small articles are thrown into the stream. Those who
Yowed the gift of hens or goats, go to the temple or shrine of the
goddess, and there they will either set free those creatures or will
slaughter them and leave the remains to be removed by the
sweepers or other low-caste people. It so happened that the holt
festival came on when the epidemic was in full force. I had ex-
pected this festival to be observed with much, zest as the harvest
had been plentiful. In such years all festivals are observed with
much ado. To my surprise the holi festival that year received but
little attention, and singing and obscene language were guardedly
employed. The reason, I learned, was the presence of the mStd in
their midst. It was considered offensive to the goddess to sing
the holi songs. Special songs are sung at night to please the god-
dess, and it will be interesting some time to have these songs re-
corded and translated and published in this Journal.

8t3. Concerning Stone Inplements,^ — While conducting a class of
young men, I happened to have on my table a copy of the Journal
of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. I showed the class illustrations
of the stone implements in the Journal. One of the men remarked,
" When I was a boy my father had a stone like that one," pointing
out one in the illustrations. The youngman said his father called
it a " sarag jpaiar " — heaven or sky stone. I immediately saw the
importance of this name and was positive the young man referred to
a stone implement. In widely separated countries the belief prevails
that the stone implements are thunderbolts, and here was the name
" heaven stone *' used by the people in Mungeb'. Next morning
I made further inquiries, and my syce offered to get me a " sarag
patar " which was owned by one of his uncles. The uncle turned
up in due time bringing with him a bored stone, and I saw
immediately that it was undoubtedly a stone implement of former
days. The only use for which this stone was now employed was
as a remedy for galwa, swollen glands, round the neck. The
man who owned the stone, said it had come down from father to-
to son in his family, for generations. Together with this
stone the man brought me a piece of stag's horn, which he said
had always been with the stone. I now very much regret that I
took no interest in the stag's ])orn and purchased only the bored
stone. It did not occur to me that there was any possible con-
nection between the stone and the stag's horn. Some months later
I was reading Sir Daniel Wilson's book on Left-handedness.
On page 49, he shows that in all probability the makers of flint
arrows, etc., employed bones or boms, for these were the only imple-
plements at their service. The fact that a stone and a stag's horn
were handed down for generations together would indicate some close^
connection between the two ; and it seems probable that the stag's
horn was the implement with which the stone was the bored. After
two years of search I have succeeded in getting together only a
dozen stones. Some of these have been badly rubbed when they
were used medicinally. But we are able to judge of their original
shape and form. One or two of the stones are beautifully smooth
inside where bored, '^ as smooth as glass," as a friend remarked.

1 See Plate TV

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 201

[xV. 5.]

One stone has nndonbtedly been arrested in the process of manu-
f aotnre. The outward form is complete and it has not been mbbed
in any way for medicinal purposes. The hole in the centre, how-
ever, is only half bored. This hole was evidently made by strik-
ing in some sharp-pointed implement. It certainly does not show
signs of the rotatory action of a horn or bone implement. One or
two of the stones in my collection were said to have been found
in fields near the site of an old village. Others have been heirlooms
in families for many generations. One man told me he owned a
'* heaven stone,'' but his house was washed away in a flood and the
stone disappeared. The people are very reluctant to make known
the fact that they own the stones ; [ana they seem very reluctant
ip part with them.

2iiZ Journal of the Atiatic Society of Bengal [August, 1905^

25. A short history of the House of Phagdu, which ruled over- Tibet
on the decline of Sakya till 1432 A.D. — By Bai Sarat Chandba
Das, Bahadur, CLE.

When in former times the Sakya hierarchs enjoyed the prouid
privilege of being the spiritual instructors of the Tartar Emperors
of China, the envoy Situ Akyid took a census of the households
of the agricultural Tibetans and also of the Hor l^ibetans (so
called from their leading a nomadic life like the Mongols). With-
in the Thikor or governorship of Phagpnodu in Central Tibet,
there were included two thousand four hundred and thirty^
eight families, out of which six hundred belonged to Lhasa Ci^,
and five hundred to Tagliing. When Hor Jam, one of the
Tartar Commissioners of China, visited the Chyangkha (the
northern province, including Nom-tsho or lake Tengri Nor), he
included the numerous tribes of herdsmen that dwelt there in
the political pi'ovince of Phagmodu. The Emperor of China,
in consultation with the spiritual authorities of Sakya, placed
this large division under an able T'hipon or provincial governor.
Formerly, when both Dikh&ng Di-gii£ and Dansa-thil hierarch
amalgamated their temporal and monastic possessions, G-ompa
Bhagrin, the abbot of Dikhiing, with the general consent of the
clergy and laity of Tibet got one of his relations, named Gom-
tson, appointed as T'hipon who, under the patronage of the Chiefs
of Kang-yeng and lower Mongolia built the government house
(T^hikhang) of Tshong-du-tagkhar. Thereafter, Khanpo Ringyal,
the Tolpon of the famous hierarch Chyan-na Kinpoche, became the
chief of Lhobrag Shong-de. About this time a native of Kham^
named Doi^jepal, by his ability, energy and accomplishments,
attracted the notice of Chyan-Ai-Binpoche. This young man,
introducing himself to that Grand Lama as one sprung hx)m. the
noble family of Dag Lab-zig, and as very anxious to be his dis-
ciple, BO insinuated himself into his confidence, that the Grand
LamA, struck with his general efficiency in all matters of impor-
tance, sent him to China to represent the interests of his grand
hierarchy. There he took the opportunity of securing for himself
and his heirs the governorship of Central Tibet, together with a
state seal and decorations. Returning to Tibet in the year Tree-
tiger (1192 A.D.), he built the Thihhang (government houses) of
Taring, called Namgyal-ling and ]^edong-tse. During his rule,
which extended over thirteen years, he enjoyed the goodwill both
of those who were above and under him. He was renowned for
his liberality. His governorship extended over twelve important
places, besides ]^edong-tse, which was the chief seat of his
government. These were Halayang, Namo, Chag-tse-tugu,
Thangpo-chin-ling-me, Choi Slukha, Monkhar, Tashi-dong, Gya-
thang, Tshong-dui-tag-kha, Zangi*i-Phodang-gang, Khortog-cha,
and Kardo. After his death, his younger brother named Shon-nu
Gyal-tshan, discharged the duties of T^htpon for three or four
years. He was succeeded by one of his relations, named Chyang-

Vol. 1, No. 8.] Histojy of the House of Phagdu. 20^

[JV. 8.-]

shon (bom of the family of Kya-ya-dag-cbu), during whose
administration the Sakja and Dikhung hierarchioB fought with*
each other. Chjang-shon had the good wishes of the Sakyapa
authorities, but owing to some cause having incurred the dis-
pleasure of Ponchen (chief Oovemor) Anglen of Sakya, he waff
ordered to be burnt alive, but on explaining matters he was
exonerated and his life spared. After his death the grand-
son of Shon-nu Gyal-tshan, named Shon-nu Yontan, became.
Thtpon.

At this time Thumer Bukhoi, a Mongol prince of the Im-
perial family, with his wife, came on a pilgrimage to Tibet. The
T^hipon having failed to show his efficiency in military as well as
in civil matters, and being reported to have oppressed his subjects,
the younger brother of Chyan-Aa Kin-pochhe, nicknamed Gyavo,
or the bearded, recommended his dismissal to the Mongol chief.
During this time the State afEairs of T^hikhor were conducted by a
counou formed of the following : The governor of Sakya Mon-
astery, named Rin-chen Tashi, Tson-dui Pal, a relation of Chyan-
Aa- Rin-poche, the second cousin of Shon-nu Yontan, Tagpa-P^-
zer, the son of Oogochu, named Dorje of Yarlung, Joro Tagpa
Rin, and others. In the meantime, with the sanction of the
Emperor of China, Taisri Tagpa-^(2pa became governor. By
bringing Gyaro, the brother of Chyan-Aa-Rin-poche, over to his
side, he also assumed the spiritual power. He gave the ex-
governor, Shon-nu Yontan, the villages of Tenpora and Chomon- •
khar for his personal maintenance. On the death of Gyavo, the
elder brother of Chyan-na-Rin-pochhe, named Gyal Shonpal, pro* .
ceeded to Peking, and with the sanction of Lhaje Phagmodu,
(Phag-du heirarch) assumed the office of fhipon. Shortly after, •
he was deposed by the Sakyapa authorities, who placed his
younger brother in charge of the government. From him the office
descended to Gyal-tshan Kyab, the son of Shon-nu Gyaltshan.

When Disri Kuntob-pa proceeded to China, Gyal-tshan
Kyab was discharged from the governorship. Ritsi Wang Gyalpo
then became t^hipon, and received the title of Tai Situ. He was
succeeded by Sonam Gyal-tshan, the grandson of Gyal-tshan Kyab,
who performed the duties of T'hipan. He was very popular with
his subjects. He was so very resolute that no one could oppose
his views or outdo him in anything. He brought all Tibet under
his sway. Situ Chyan-tshan, from his early age, became skilful
in war, literature, and religion. At the age of fifty-five in the
year Water-monkey^ in the 15th of the second month, ne undertook
the task of rescuing the Sakya regent, Ponchen Gyal-tshang, who
had been kept in durance by the abbot Lhakhong Labrangpa of
the great temple of Sakya ; and for this purpose he placed himself
at the head of the troops of O and Tsang and waged war with
Sakya. On the 5th of the fifth month of the same year, with'
the assistance of the minor chiefs, he besieged Sakya ana delivered',
the chief from the hands of his enemies. Before dispersing his ^
army he eompelled the heirarch to appoint him as chief fmpon^
of Tibet, and was supported by his nephew, Situ Lodoi Gyal^tsan,)

204 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

in bis works. He was presented with a hexagonal seal, and the
people of Tsang distinguished him by raising white silken banners
in his honour. He encouraged both literature and religion.

Chyan-ehub Gyal-tshan (the younger brother of Binchen
Tagyal) was bom in the year Tree-tiger 1302, A.D. In the four-
teenth year for his age {Hare-year) he took his admission into the
monastery of Sakya, where he stayed with the heirarch Dag-nid-
chenpo. He was entrusted with the office of keeping the Govern-
ment seal. Once the Grand Lama asked if he (ChyaS-chub) would
go up for the church, so as to be called a Rinpoche, or for the State
to be called fhipon or governor. On his wishing to be a Rinpoche,
the Grand Lama said, " No, you are destined for the State. In
order to qualify yourself for a governorship you should study the
work called *Tul-Jyal' and some works on political ethics."
Thereafter, taking leave of the Grand Lama, he became a pupil of
Lama Nam-m^-chenpo and learnt the two parts |'of logic. In
the autumn of Tiger-year Chyaii-Chub and his elder brother
Lopon Tagzang were respectively invested with the temporal and
spiritual offices. At the investiture, people were entertamed with
tea boiled in the same cauldron. Lopon Tagzang expounded the
sacred laws and delivered sermons, while Chya^-Chub assumed
the dignity of Thipon or governor.

When Chyafi-Chub became known all over the country, with
the help of all other minor T'hipon, he besieged Sakya. He occu-
pied Chya-zang-gang, which was then called Cha-zang-kang, and
irom some good action done in it, it became known by the name
of Chyazang Jong (or the pla^e of good action). During his reign
the house of Lha-zig became very powerful. Having achieved
many exploits in temporal matters, he (Chyan Chhub) resolved
upon doing pious actions. He built tlie monastery of Tse-thang
(Chethang) and established a college there. He made Nedong-
tse the chief seat of government. Inviting the Grand Lama
Sonam Gyal-tshan, he consecrated the religious establishment
founded by him and appointed his cousin, Shakya Gyal-tshan, as
the head of the church and president of the ceremonies to re-
gulate the order of precedence. Thus the government of Phag-
modu, for its efficiency both in temporal and spiritual matter,
became very famous, and excelled those preceding it. At the
age of 63, in the year Fire-dragon, he retired from this existence at
the palace of Nedong (Gahdan-tse). His cousin, Cakya Gyal-
tshan, succeeded him in the throne of Nedong-tse, and assumed both
the spiritual and temporal affairs of the State. By his able adminis-
tration of the church and the secular laws, he increased the pros*
perity and peace of XJ and Tsang. On account of his being ever
thoughtful for the happiness of, his subjects, he was praised by all
men and called Jan Yang pakya. The Tartar Emperor, Thugan
Themur, conferred on him the title of Changa-kiiug. After his
death, his younger brother Shakya Rinchen, became chief the
fhipofi and filled the throne of Nedong-tse. He was very fond
of inspecting the works of local officers and inquiring after the
condition of his subjects. Once while on tonr in tT and Tsang, he

Vol. I, No. 8.] History of the House of Phagdu. 205

IN. B.}

stopped at the village of Gya-mo-Shong. Here the houBe that he
ana his party occupied, accidently caught fire, which quickly
spreading so surrounded him that he and his servants very
narrowly escaped from being burnt. On his return he founded the
monastery of Khartag Oonsar, and stayed there to avert the
calamities that, according to his fortune-tellers, hung oyer him.
He always roved from one place to another. Chyang-tag Chyan
presided at the head of the State Ghurch for B,iew years.

After pakya Hinchen's death his younger brother, Tagrin,
filled the throne of Nedong-tse. For some time the state affairs
were in the hands of Oyal-tshan-Zang and his cousin. The con-
trol of the government remained with Ghyan-fia till Gyal-tshan
Zang, also called Tagrin, came in a state hide-boat from
Gongkar to relieve him of the charge. He was succeeded by
Tagpa Gyal-tshan, a boy of eleven, the son of ^aikjB, Rinchen, in
the year Tree-bird.

From his boyhood Tagpa Gyal-tshen took to athletic and
intellectual exercises. When he advanced in age he began to
show his ability and fortitude. Within a few years of his attain-
ment of youth, he established his authority over all the governors
-of "0^ and Tpang. The Emperor Ta-Ming bestowed on him the
decorations of Konting Oushri and Tshan-Tia Wang, and presented
him with a gold seal. He also from time to time received other
titles of honour, besides kind instructions from the Emperor him*
self. Power, fortune, and wisdom were ever attached to him.
His reign extended from the 11th to the 59th year of his age.
The State under his rule progressed very much in wealth and
prosperity. Of all the rulers of the Phagdu dynasty, his reign
was the longest. He died at Nedong-tse in the 59th year of his
age in the year Water-mouse,

From the foundation of Nedong-tse and Namgyal Jong of
Yarlung by T^hipoti Dorjepal in the year Tree-tiger to the present
year Tree-tiger (1432 A.D.) 240 years have elapsed. Nedong-tee
was therefore founded in the year 1192 A.D.

Another account of ChyaH-Chuh Gyal-tsan and his successors.

In the year 1302 A.D. Ghyaft-Ghiib Gyal-tshan, of the well
known family of Lhazig, was bom in the town of Phag-du in
Gentral Tibet. After subjugating all the thirteen ( Thikor) provinces
•of Tibet proper and also Kham, he had established his sway over
Tibet. At the age of eighteen he was appointed to the com mand
of 10,000 soldiers under orders from the Emperor of China. This
sudden elevation excited the jealousy and enmity of the chiefs of
Di-guA, Tshal, Ya^za^ and Sakya authorities, who spared no pains
in devising means to ruin him. At last, they drove him to war.
In the first battle he met with some reverses, but was victorious in
the second. The war lasted for many years, when ultimately
victory attended the arms of the chief of Phagdu, who captured
almost all the hostile chiefs and threw them into prison. After

206 Journal of the Ariatio Society of Bengal, [ Angnst, 1905.>

this discomfiture, the chiefs, nobles and Lamas of XJ and Tsong-
jointly petitioned the Emperor to degrade the upstart. But the
irrepressible Chief proceeded to Peking ; there, presenting the skin
of a; white lioui besides other rich and rare presents to Emperor
Thugwan Thumer, he represented the circumstances connected
with the case. Pleased with his sincere statements, the Emperor
decided in his favour and appointed him hereditary noble of Tibet,
assigning the whole of "0^ to him with the exception of the province
of Tsang which continued to remain under the heirarchy of Sakya»

After his return to Tibet from. Peking, Chyaft-Chub organized
a regular form of government for Central Tibet. He reformed
legislation, and revised the ancient laws and regulations. He
built the castle of Nedong-tse and a large fortress with three gates
to the ramparts. Inside it he founded a monastery. He endea*
voured to observe the Dasa Qila (ten moral virtues). By his-
exemplary morals and pity, and above all by his beneficial rule,
he won the sincere esteem of his subjects. He founded the town
of Tse-thang with a monastery in it. He built thirteen forts
such as Gongkar, Tagkar, &c. Later on, he induced the Tartar
Emperor to confer on him the high distinction of Tai-Situ together
with authority over the whole of Tibet. By his able rule he
increased the happiness and prosperity of his people.

The fourth in succession from him was Sakya Binchen,^ who
became a favourite of the Emperor, by whom he was entrusted
with the collection of revenue from one of the great provinces
of China, and also with the charge of guarding the Imperial
palace. Sakya Rinchen, intead of showing his gratefulness, took
part in a conspiracy matured by tbe Chinese prime Minister
named Kyen-Hi!^n, to usurp the throne. He sent many wagons,
loaded with armed soldiers, concealed under heaps of silk clothes
under cover of darkness inside the imperial city. The Emperor,
fortunately, having got scent of the matter secretly fled towardf^
Mongolia. Sakya Rinchen proclaimed the minister's son, Li-Wang»
as Emperor of China. Thus through the help of a Tibetan chief
the Ta-Ming dynasty was established. Ydng Ming presented
Tag-pa Oyal-tshan, son of Sakya Rinchen, with a gold seal and
the additional possession of ulterior Tibet. He was made the
undisputed sovereign of all Tibet, which extended from Xagah-
rikor-sum to Sze-chuan. Tag-pa Oyal-tshan was succeeded by
his son Wang-Jdng-n^, whose appointment was confirmed by the*
Emperor Kyen Tai Li- Wang. He built the fortresses of Hug-
Yilg«ling and Karjong. His grandson, Rin Dorje, obtained the
title of Wang ( king) from China, ififag Wang Tashi was a very
impartial and just ruler. He shewed great veneration for the Dalai
Lama So-nam Gyatsho, whom he greatly patronized. The cele-
brated Dharma Raja named Padma Karpo of Bhutan was also a
friend of his. He several times fought with his rebel minister'
RinchenpMpa and was every time successful. He was decorated
with the title of Kwa-Hn Kau Sri by the Emperor.

■ — ■»

* Son of Rinchen Kvab,

Vol. I, No. 8.] History of the Home of Phagdu. 207

[N. S.]

During the reign of tlie Phagdu dyiiasi^ all Tibet enjoyed
peace and prosperity. People becieime rich in money and cattle.
The country enjoyed immunity from famine and murrain, and wa»
not harassed by foreign inyasion. Although, some petty fights-
and quarrels with some of the disaffected and rapacious ininistera
now and then disturbed the peace of the country, yet on th»
whole, the dynasty was beneficial to Tibet.

208 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aagasfc, 1905.

26. Additions to the Collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum, Part 3. (With 3 figures). — By N. Annandalb, B.A.,
D,8o,yDeputy Superintendent of the Indian Museum,

The present commimication deals with a miscellaneous assem->
blage of specimens, and completes for the present my notes on recent
additions to the collection, all the Oriental species having now being
worked out and arranged^ Four new species and a new genus are
described below, two of the former coming from the Malay Archi-
pelago, one from N. E. India, and one from Gfilgit. Considering
the number of individoals examined, this does not represent a
large percentage of novelties ; and although new forms will certainly
continue to be discovered from time to time in the remoter dis-
tricts of the Indian Empire, it is clear that we now have a good
feneral knowledge of the systematic ophiology of the country,
'he addition of a second species of Helicops to the fauna of Asia
IB interesting, while one of the new Malaysian forms is a good
example of superficial resemblance, if not of '* Mimicry.*' A new
Typhlops and a new Ahlabea have no particular importance, but
must be recorded in order to complete the list.

In regard to doubtful specimens, I have made it a practice to
dissect out the jaws on one side. This seems to me to be the only
way in which it is possible to ensure a satisfactory view of the
dentition. The operation can be performed without materially
damaging the specimen externally, and if the bones are preserved
in a small tube stoppered with cotton wool in the bottle in which
the specimen is kept, they are available for future study.

TYPHLOPID^.

Typhlops mulleri.*

A specimen from the Malay Archipelago is mottled on the
dorsal surface of the posterior part of* the body with dull yellow,
the remainder of the back and sides being brown instead of black ;
but the latter peculiarity may be due to imperfect preservation.

Typhlops kapaladua,* sp. nov.

Diagnosis. — Habit stout ; length about 27 times diameter of
body ; tail much broader than long, ending in a spine ; snout obtuse,
the sides rounded, moderately projecting. Rostral between ^ and \
as broad as head, reaching the level of the eyes behind, separating
the nasals completely. iTostril lateral, almost visible from above,
with a single large subcircular pit embracing the nasal cleft
beneath it ; nasal completely divided, the cleft starting from the

1 Binoe this sentenoe was written I have obtained some farther addi*
tions to the collection in the desert tract of S.B. India. They will be de«
«oribed in a later oommnnioation to the Society. September 16, 1906.

.Vol, 1, No. 8.] Oriental Snakes in the ImUan Museum, 209

IN. S.]

second labial, not reaching the upper surface of the head. Supra-
oculars large, frontal and parietal feebly developed. Aprssocular;
no subocular ; the former larger than the ocular, in contact with the
second and third labials ; eye barely distinguishable. Twenty-six
scales round body. Ooiora^MW— upper surface olive-brown, each
scale paler at the edge ; upper head scales broadly edged with
yellow, a yellow f] on the snout and a wedge-shaped mark of the
same colour behind each eye; lower half of the rostral and labials
and the whole of the lower surface, yellow.

Total Length. — 280 mm.

A single specimen from the Malay Archipelago, probably
from Java.

Ttphlops acctus.

This species appears to be commoner than any other in Cal-
cutta. It IS sometimes found in native houses. I have lately had
an opportunity of observing living specimens. When placed in a
vessel with earth at the bottom they burrowed very rapidly, pro-
vided that the earth was not too hard, forcing their way down by
muscular action of the anterior part of the body and making a
passage no broader than their own diameter. I failed to see them
feed, but have reason to think that they eat the earthworms with
which they were supplied, at night. When taken in the hand they
coiled round one of the fingers and pressed the tip or side of their
hooked and pointed snout against the skin. They could do no in-
jury in this way to the human skin, but seemed rather to be at-
tempting to get a grip. Probably this peculiar modification may
be useful in restraining captured worms and it is worthy of note
that the caudal spine present in a larger number of the Typhlopidao
is absent both in this form and in several exotic species in which a
beak is developed.

GLAUCONIID^.

Glauconia blanfordii.

G, blanfordii, Alcock and Finn, J.A.8,B., 1896, (2), p. 561.

In addition to the specimens recorded by Messrs. Alcock and
Finn, we have received during the last few years others from
Quetta {Majvr 0. 0. Nurse) ; Khotri, Sind (Bombay Nat. Hist.
iS'oc.), and Bushire, Persia {Karachi Mus.). The relative diameter
of the body varies considerably, but the number of the scales round
it appears to be constant. Well preserved specimens have the
upper scales feebly edged with pale-brown.

COLUBRID^.

Calauaria leucocephala.*
Two specimens from the Malay Archipelago, one from Java.

1210 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1909.

Dbyocalamus tristbioatus.*
A small specimen of this rare snake from the Malay Arcliipelago.

Tbopidonotus khasibnsis.*

A specimen, probably from Burma, obtained by one of tbe Museum
collectors.

Macbopisthodon himalatanus.

Tropidonotus himalayanus, Boulenger^ Faun, Ind., Bept,, p* 347.

Dissection of the jaws of a specimen lately received from. Sureil,
Darjeeling, {Major A. Alcock) shows that this species belongs to the
genus Macropisthodon. Fourteen small teeth are followed in the
maxillary, after an interspace, by two large, backward-directed
fangs. In T. suhminiatusy the condition is somewhat similar, but
the interspace is not so clearly marked. Evidently the separation
between the two genera is not a natural one, but the great number of
forms included in Tropidonotus, in which I would propose to leave
suhminiatus, makes it convenient.

COLUBBB BADIATUS.

A specimen from Cuttack, Orissa, {B. T. Orighton). I am
not aware that the species has hitherto been recorded from this
part of India. The late Prof. J. Wood-Mason corresponded with
the donor about the specimen, which has been in tbe Museum for
man y y ears ; but it appears to have been mislaid at the time when
Mr. W . L. Sclater was compiling his List of Snakes,

AbLABES BALIODIBUS.*

Specimens from Java and the Malay Archipelago.

Ablabes GiLGiTicus,* sp. nov#

Diagnosis.— H&hit slender; head small; tail sbort, ending in a
well developed spine. ^ Rostral deeper than broad, visible from
above ; nasal divided ; eye half as long as snout ; preefrontal un-
divided, its length much greater than that of the sutures between
the iiiternasals ; frontal as long as its distance from thie snout,
much shorter than the parietids ; one prso-and one postocular ;
loreal large, much longer than deep ; temporals 1 + 2 ; 7 upper
labials, third and fourth entering eye ; 4t lower labials in contact
with the anterior chin shield, which is larger than the posterior.
Scales smooth, in 15 rows ; ventrals 158 ; anal entire ; caudals 34.
Ooloration — Back and sides dark brown, each scale edged, spotted

^ A similar spine oocars ia other members of the genas, notably A . rappii
bat ifl not so large in any Indian form as in the new species.

Vol. If No. 8.1 Oriental Snakes in the Indian MtMetim^ 211

[N. a.]

or blotclied with pale yellow ; ventral surface paler brown ; a broad
jellow collar ; nape, labials, chin and throat, yellow.

Dimensions —

Total Length ... ... 125 mnu

Length of Tail ... ... 18 „

A single specimen ^m Gilgit, collected and presented by
Oapt. McMahon.

This species may be distinguished from any other Indian
Ahlahes by its extremely short tail. It has much the facies of a
*Calamaria,

Hblicops iNDicus,* sp. nov.

Head flat, rscther viperine ; snout obtuse ; canthus rostralis well
marked. Eye not more than half the length of the frontal ; pupil
very small. Rostral much broader than deep, well visible from

Fig. 1.
Helicops indicus,

above, separated from the internasal, which is undivided ; frontal
more than twice as long as broad, obtusely truncated in front,
sharply pointed behind, slightly longer than its distance from
snout and than the parietals ; loreal deeper than long ; one
prsdocular, two postoculars ; temporals 1 4 2 ; 7 upper labials, the
fourth entering eye ; three lower labials in contact with the anter-
ior chin shield, which is shorter than the posterior. Scales
smooth, in 21 rows ; ventrals 161 ; anal entire ; sub-caudals 72.
Ooloration — dark brown above ; on each side of the dorsal surface
a pale line originates at the posterior border of the parietal and
runs along the body and tail. Yenbral surface dull yellow reticu-
lated more or less distinctly with dark brown ; a dark spot in the
centre of each veutral shield. Labials dull yeUow marbled with
dark brown.

Dimensions—

Total Length ... ... 200 mm.

Length of Tail ... ... 40 „

212 , Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, August^ 1905

Localities —

Mongh jr, Bengal, and Rampore Tea Estate, N. Gachar. Two
specimens, both purchased.

H, indicus may be distingaished from H. schistosus, the only
other Asiatif) species, by its viper-like head, small eye and smooth
scales. As possibly the type specimens are immature, the colo-
ration may be more uniform in the adult than that described.
,^ I, The following is a " Key " for the two Indian species : —

1. Diameter of the eye more than half the length of the frontal.

Scales keeled, in 19 rows ... ... schistosus.

2. 1 Diameter of the eye not more than half the length of the-

frontal.

Scales smooth, in 21 rows ; nasals in contact behind the-
rostral ... ••• ••• ••• indicus.

The distribution of the genus Helicops is very interesting
Species occur in Tropical Africa ; in S. and E. India, Burma,
Ceylon, Malaya and Yunnan ; in Florida, Central America, the
West Indies, and S. America east of the Andes. The similai-ity
between this distribution and that of the Cascilian genus Herpele,^
which has recently been elucidated by Alcock, is striking. I may
point out that one of the types of Helicops indicus is from the same
locality and collection as that in which the type of Herpele fulleri
was found. This fact, seemingly trivial in itself, illustrates the
improbability of convergence or parallel development being the
explanation of all such difficulties in the study of the distribution

1% 2.

Helicops indicus.

of animals ; for both Helicops and Herpele are well defined and ap-
parently natural genera, having no peculiarity in common with
one another superficially or anatomically*

DiPSADOiDES, gen. nov.

Farn/Uy GolnbridiB ; svh^f amity Dipsadomorphined.

Head distinct from body ; eye large, with circular pupil j body

i Ann. Mag. N. H. (xix), 1904, p. 267.

Vol. I, No. 8.] Oriental Snakes in the Indian Museum. 213:

IN, 8.]

strongly compressed, with dorsal row of scales enlarged through-
out, scales in rows of uneven numbers (19 in type), with apical
pits ; caudals divided. Palate toothed ; solid maxillary teeth few
(6 in type), subequal, followed, after a short interspace, by a pair
of moderately sized, almost vertical grooved fangs; mandibular
teeth subequal.

Fig. 3.
Right maxillary of Dipsadoides decipiens,

DiPSADOIDES DECIPIENS,* Sp. UOV.

Head small, flattened, very distinct from neck ; snout short,
obtusely rounded ; eye prominent, nearly as long as snout ; nostril
large, directed backwards, in undivided nostril. Tail slender,
tapering. Rostral broader than deep, just visible from above. In-
temasals larger than praefrontals ; frontal longer than broad, as
long as its distance from snout, slightly shorter than parietals ; a
large prsdocular and a small postocular ; supraocular very large ;
loreal deeper than long ; temporals 24 2; eight upper labials, the
third, fourth and fifth entering the eye ; two large subequal chin
shields, the anterior in contact with four labials, both in contact
with their neighbours. Body scales narrow, leaf-shaped, slightly
oblique on neck, strongly imbricate ; in 19 rows ; the dorsal row
enlarged throughout, broader than long. Yentrals rounded at
the edge, keeled at either side, 258 in number ; anal entire ; caudals
152. Gotoration — dorsal surface and sides pale brown profusely
spotted and marbled with dark brown and, less profusely, with dull
yellow ; a large number of irregular dark bars on the dorsal sur*
face. Ventral surface dull yellow marbled posteriorly with dark
brown ; chin and throat spotted with dark brown.
IHmenstom —

Total Length ... ... 900 mm.

Length of Tail ... ... 266 „

Habitat, Malav Archipelago. A single specimen.

This remarkable snake was confused at first sight with some
specimens of Dipsadomorphus cy^wdon in the same collection to
which it bore a close external resemblance. It is one of the many
interesting species received from the Royal Natural History Society
of Batavia.

BtTKGARUS SINDANU8*, Blgr.

B. sindanus, Baulengevf Joum. Bombay N^ H. 8oc. XI, 1897*
1898, p. 73, pi.

214 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

A specimen 64^ inches long has lately been sent to th«
Museum from the Zoological Garden, AHpore. The Superintend-
ent of the Gardens tells me that it was captured at Midnapore,
Lower Bengal, by a reliable collector and arrived at the Gardens
early in 1896. It must, therefore, have lived in captivity for nine
years. The Giant Krait, as this species may be called, has hither-
to been recorded only from Sind, but probably occurs, somewhat
sparingly, all over northern India.

Vol. I, No. 8.] Kaniahudiyas of Guttack, 215

IN. >S\]

27. Note on the Kantabudiyas of Cnttack, — By Jamini Mohin Das.
Communicated by the Anthropological Secretary,

The Kantabadiya caste immbers less than one thousand per-
sons, and is confined to the Cuttack District. The family titles
are KhnntiyS, Parira, Nayak, Leuka, Sahu, Barn, Behara, R&nt,
and Mahanti. Most of these ai*e also titles of the Khandaits and
Ohasas, and the Kantabudiyas may have been degraded from one
of these castes because they took to the occupation of dealing in
tobacco. The members of the caste claim that it is an offshoot of
the Khandait caste. They use the same Santak or signature mark
as the Khandaits — the KatGri or dagger. Like the Khandaits, they
assume the sacred thread at marriage, but unlike them, they only
wear it for eight days and not permanently. They account for
their name by a legend that they ai*e the descendants of a found*
ling who was abandoned near a thorny bush (Kantfibudd) but
tradition does not give any further pai^ticulars as to his origin or
history. The caste is divided into two totemistic gotras, Kaochap
and Nagasa, the members of which revere the tortoise and the
cobra respectively. These gix)ups are neither endogamous nor ex-
ogamous. There are no endogamous groups within the caste.
The exogamous limit is formed by the family title. A Khnntiya
for instance may marry a Parira but not another Khuntiya.
Similarly, a person may not marry into a family which bears the
same title as his maternal gi^andfather.

Widow re-marriage is allowed. Divorce is permitted on th«
ground of unchastity. There is nothing to prevent the re-marriage
of a woman who has been divorced, if any one will take her.
Polygamy is not practised unless the first wife is barren or suffers
from an incurable disease.

The Kantabudiyas belong to the Vaisnava sect. Adhikari
Brahmans act as their priests, and Brahman and Karan Yaisnavas
as their gurus. In all essential respects they follow the marriage
customs of the Khandaits and Chasas.

Persons who die befoi'e marriage are buried. Others ara
buried or burned according to convenience. Mourning continues
for ten days and the Sraddka is performed on the eleventh day.

The traditional occupation of the caste is dealing in tobacco
and turmeric, but about half of the members now combine agricul-
ture with it. There is no organised caste council ; meetings of
the caste are presided over by the most learned or intelbgent
member present.

In the matter of food and drink, the Kantabudiyas follow the
customs of the Khandaits and Chasas, who will not, however, take
any food from them. The higher castes will not take their water,
but they are served by the barber and washerman. The Oauras,
however, will neither carry their jpaZibi^ nor eat in their houses, and
this alone is sufficient to show that they rank lower than the
Khandaits and Chasas. As a consequence of this custom, the
Kantabndiya bridegrooms walk on foot in their marriage proces-
sions.

VoL I, No. 9.] Dign^ga and his PramAna-samuccaua. 217

[N.8.]

28. DignOga aiid his PramSna-samuecaya. — By Satis Chandra

YlDYlfiUO^ANA, M.A.

Hindu philosophy is divided into six principal systems of

which the Nyaya is one. This Nyaya

Distinotion be- again is divided into two schools called re-

yy&ya^ax^^odern sp®<5tively the ancient Nyaya and modem

Ny&ya. Nyaya. The distinction between the two

schools is this : the ancient Nyaya treats of
atoms, properties of atoms, souls, the transmigration of the soul,
mind, God, etc., as well as of processes of perception, inferences,
and the like, while the modem Nyaya deals only with the methods
of perception, inference, etc. The object of the ancient Nyaya is to
explain the means of salvation, widle that of the modern Nyaya is
to give an exposition of the fundamental principles of reasoning.
This shows that the ancient Nyaya is a mixture of physics, meta-
physics, theology, logic, etc., while the modern Nyaya is exactly
identical with what we understand by the term logic.

As this modem Nyaya is the most favourite and honoured

j^i.^ t -J subject of study in the Sanskrit tols (acade-

ffln of toe modern ^^^^ °^ Bengal, it is worth while to trace

Ny&ya. ^^ origin. There can be no doubt as to the

modem Nyaya having been developed from
the ancient Nyaya, but nothing can be definitely stated as to how
and when it was so developed. The first extant work on ancient
Nyaya is undoubtedly Gotama's Nyftya Sfttra dated about 500 B.C.,
but we do not know definitely what was the first work on modem
Nyaya.

It was for a long time the universal belief of the Pandits of
our country that the Prama^a-cintamani, compiled by Gange^a
Upadhyaya of Mithila in the I4th century A.D , was the oldest
work on modem Nyaya. But this belief of the Pan4it8 was shaken
nearly sixteen years ago by Pi-ofessor Peterson, who published
under the auspices of the Asiatic Society of Bengal a Buddhist
Sanskrit work on modei*n Nyftya, called Nyayabindu, by Dharma-
klrti. This work, which was dated the 7th century A.D., at once
showed that Gafigeia UpadhySya^s Pramana-cintamaQi could nqt
have been the first work on modem Nyaya Recently another i*e-
volution has been caused in our theories by the literary collection
of the late Tibet Mission. The Mission has brought from Gyantse
the Tibetan vextsion of another Buddhist Sanskrit work on modem
Nyaya, called Pramapa-samuccaya, compiled by the Buddhist logi-
cian Dignaga who flourished long before Dharmakirti. The Sans*
krit original of this wotk is not available in India or Nepal and has
perhaps been lost. But the Tibetan version and numerous authori-
tative commentaries on the same show in unmistakable terms thst
this work is the earliest at present known work on modem Nyaya.
In Tibetan there are numerous treatises on log^c by various
Indian Buddhist authors. These treatises are contained in the
Tangyur, section Mdo, volumes 95-116. There the first work on

218 Jaunial of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 190^«

logic is Pramanasamaccaja bj Dignaga. The next work is Pra-
mapa-Tartika-karika (or a oommentaiy in verse on the above).
Then follows Prama^a-vftrtikala^kara, and so on. Jinendrabodhi's
excellent commentaiy on the Prama^a-samnccaya, called Vi^alania-
lavati-nania-Prama]^a-8amnccaya-fik&,i is also to be found there.
Nyajabinda, Pramapa-vini^caya and other excellent Buddhist
works on logic are also preserved there. The Tansyur, containing
all these works, has been brought from Gyantse by the Tibet Mission,
and is now deposited in the British Museum, London. Nearly
eighty years ago another set of the Tangyur was brought from
Tibet by tlie late Mr. B. H. Hodgson. That set is now contained in
the library of the India Office, London. These excellent and old
works on logic lead us to conclude that the credit of having
founded the modem Nyaya must be attributed to the Buddhists,
among whom there were numerous logicians such as Dignaga,
Dharmakirti, Dharmottara, Vinitadeva, S'fintabhadra, Akalanka-
deva, Jineiidrabodhi, Kamala^ila and others. These Buddhist
writers had flourished long before the BrShma^ic logician Gange^a-
Upadhyaya compiled his Prama^a-cintama^i.

The circumstance which led the Buddhists to forsake the
ancient Nyaya and to lay the foundation of a new svstem called
modem Nyaya was due to the peculiarity of the religion which
they professed. Having considered the sixteen categories treated
in the ancient Nyaya to be redundant and some of them as mainly
based on the orthodox principles of the Hindus, the Buddhists took
up only one category, viz., Pram^^a (evidence of knowledge), and
treated it in such a way that the doctrine of evidence might b&
equally applied to the religious systems of the Hindus and Bud-
dhists. The attempt on the peui^ of the Buddhists to divest th&
principles of logic from those of theology, metaphysics, ete., was
the cause of the foundation of tlie modem Nyaya, otherwise called
Tarka-^astra or Logic proper.

As Pi amapa-sarouccaya (Tibetan : ^gc'j^i'm^rqE^^* \ is the

T 4#A 0^^ Ti«»«is»o earliest-known work on the Buddhist Nyaja,
litre or uignagB. ^ ^^^^^^ account* of its author may be of

some interest to the reader. Dignftga (Tib. Phyogg-glan

Sfm^"gi[;^"v the celebrated author of this work, was born in a

Brahman family in the south near the country of KaSci bordering
pn the city of Siiphavakta, and acquired vast knowledge in all
Tirtha systems. By Nagadatta the Pa^j^^ of the Yatslputriya
school he was admitted to the religious system of that school and

^ 'i'his work (together with the Tibetan version of the Nyaya-bindu>tikn,
Caiidi-k-Tjnkarria and Tari stotra) has been kindly lent to me for six month r
by the Government of India.

t Vide \HKfTWV'%^ ^WC:* Pag-sam-jon-zang (pages KXMOl), edited

by Rai Barat Chandra Das, Bahadur, C.IJ<.,and Lama Tarinitha's Buddhism.
8ebiefner, pp. 130-185.

YoL I, No. 9.] Diyndga and his PrawiOna'SamucCfiya. 2PJ

[N.8.']

attained emdition in the Tripitaka of the S'ravaka. Afterwards be
became a disciple of Acaryja Vasubandhn, with whom he studied
all the Pitakas of the Mahajfina and Hinayana. When he had
specially obtained incantation formula from a mantra-knowinff
Acaryya and practised sorcery, he saw the face of Munju^i and
learned the dharmn (Law) from him. He resided in a solitary and
woodv country in the land of Orissa in a cayem of a mountain
called Bhora^ila, and gave himself entirely up to contemplation.

A few years later he was invited at Nftlanda, where he
defeated the Brahman Sudurjnya and other Tirtha dialecticians
and led- them into the doctrine of Buddha He expounded many
Sutras to the religious body, spread the Abhidharma, and composed
several logical and dialectical S^ftstras. He is said to have com-
posed one nundred ^astras in all. Returning to Orissa he busied'
himself with contemplation. Seeing that the S^ftstras on Dialectics,
composed earlier by him, remained scattered about, he resolved to

collect them. Accordingly, putting together

C^nAplilatioa of fracrmente from particular works, he ensaged

I^mftvs.«ainao. ^^^ j^ oomp&ng the Pramft^ksftmu^ya

(Tib. Tshacl-ma^i-i^o-kun-las-l^tus-pa, or
simply,Tsha4-nia-kun-)^tu8) in which at the opening lines he pays
obeisance to Buddha : —

^* Having bowed down before Him who is Logic incarnate, the
benefacter of all creatures, the teacher, Sugata and the protector/*...

While he was writing the opening lines the earth trembled
and all the places were filled with light and a great tumult was
audible. A Brahman named I^ara Krvva,^ surprised at this
wonder, came to Acaryya Dignaga, and, finding that he had gone
out to collect alms, wiped out the words he had written. When in
lAiis manner he had wiped them out twice, Dignftga wrote them a
third time and added — '^ Let no one wipe this out even in jest and
sport, for none should wipe out what is of great importance ; if the
sense is not right and one wishes to dispute on that account, let
one appear before me in person." When, after he had gone to col-
lect alms, the Brahman came to wipe out the wi*iting8 and saw
what was added, he waited. When the Adiryya had returned they
began controversy, either steking his own doctrine. When he had
Vanquished the Tirtha several times and challenged him to accept
the Buddhist doctrine, the Tirtha scattered ashes, pronounced in-
cantation formula on them and burnt all the goods of the Acaryya;

^ KffV-I^vfira, or simpljr Kffva, seems to be the same as Isvara Kft^a, the
49elebr»feed author of Sltpkhya-Uriki, which was translated into Chinese by
Param&rtha, A.D. 567-56 », noticed in Nanjio's Catalogue, No. 1300. The

Tibetan name is W U'Cm'^Ti at Krf^a-'nvara.

220 Jcmrnal of the Adatic Societij of Bengal, [November, 1905.

and when tbe Jicaryya was kept back by the conflagration the
Tirtha went away. Thereupon Dignaga reflected that when he
could not work the salvation of this single individual he would not
be able to work that of others, and was on the point of giving up
his purpose (of compiling Pramana-samuccaya). Aryya Manju^ri
appeared to him in person and said : —

" Son, don't do so, don't do so : owing to contact with a low
person there has arisen a bad thought in thee : know that the
Tirtha crowd cannot harm this ?aBtra of thine : since I shall remain
thy spiritual adviser until thou attainest perfection, this ffastra
will hencefoi'th become the sole eye of all the S^astras."

The Acaryya asked : —

'^ If I am to suffer many unbearable misfortunes and have to
rejoice in the practice of an ignoble being, and if it is difficult to
meet with a noble one, what profits it to me to see thy countenance
if thou dost not bless me P "

Maiiju^ri replied, " Trouble thyself not, I will protect thee
from all terrors,'* and disappeared. Thereupon Dignaga completed
the S'adtra.

Once he was slightly ill and obtained alms from the city ;.

and having fallen asleep while staying in a
powers of DiiK^^ forest he dreamed a dream. In that dream
F * ^* * he saw the face of many Buddhas and at-

tained many samSdhis. He saw many gods pouring rain of flowers,
and the flowers of the wood coming together before him and the
elephants affording him cool shade. The king of the country, who
had gone for a pleasure excursion with a troop, saw him and, full
of admiration, he caused him to be awakened from sleep by the notes

Vol, I, No. 9.] JJignHyu and hia Pramdna-Bamuccaya. 221

IN.S.]

of music. Beiug asked whether he was Dignagn, he replied in the
affirmative, and the king fell at his feet. Subsequently he travelled
to the south, chiefly meeting his Tirtha controversalists in discus-
sions.

He i^estored, for the most part, the schools of religion founded
by the former Acaryyas. Again, at Orissa, he converted to
Buddhism Bhadi^apAlita, the treasury minister of the king. This
Brahman founded sixteen viharas and placed religious men in them.
As a pix)of of the perfect purity of his character, the stem of a
Myrohalan tree, called Mu$tiharitaki, which cured all diseases and
which was to be found in the garden of this Brahman, having been
entirely withered, revived in seven days after the Acaryya had
uttered an incantation for its restoration.

Since he had refuted chiefly the Tirtha controversalists, he was
called the " Fighting Bull " ( Sanskrit : Tarkapwhgava ; Tibetan :

g^^*/M*[n'3J|^5rn* \ His pupils, combined together by I'eligion, filled

all countries, but he had not with him a single Sflnianera who could
succeed him. Since he was a man of limited desires and content-
ment, he performed during his life-time the twelve tested virtues
and died in a solitary wood of Orissa.

In the works of the Chinese pilgrims the name Dignaga is not

_. . . A'fl -J mentioned at all. But there occurs the

wit^DiirnftM name Jina, which I suppose to be identical

with Dignaga. Dignaga in the Brah manic
works, especially in those of Udyotakara and Vacaspati MiSra, is.
designated as a Bhadanta. Similarly Jina in Chinese books,
specially in those of I-tsing, is mentioned as one of the ten Bhadan-^
tas {vide I-tsing's Takakusiij p. 181). As Dign6ga in Sanskrit
and Tibetan books is known as an eminent logician, so is Jina in
Chinese books. Thus I-tsing observes {Takakusn, p. 184): —
" When they have understood the arguments of Hetuvidya (logic),
they aspire to be like Jina (the great reformer of logic). I-tsing
continues (Takakusu, p. 188) : — "When a priest wishes to distin-
guish himself in the study of logic he should thoroughly under-
stand Jina*s eight S'astras." These, according to I-tsing, are : —

1. The S'astra on the Meditation of the Three Worlds (not

found).

2. Sarva-lak^apa-dhyana-^astra (karikfi)—- (Nanjio's Cata-
logue, No. 1229).

3. The S'astra on the Meditation on the Object. Probaibly

a-pratyava-dhvana-^astra fx^'aniio't
logue, No. 1173).

Alambana-pratyaya-dhyana-^astra (Nanjio's Cata-

4. The S'astra on the Gate of the Cause (Hetu-dvaraJ — (not

found).

5. The ffastra on the Gate of the Resembling Cause (not

found).

6. The Nyaya-dvara (tftraka) S'astra (by Nagarjuna P) —

(Nanjio's Catalogue, Nos. 1223, 1224).

222 Journal of the Astatic Society of Bengal. . [November; 1905

7. Prajfiapti-hetu-sangraha (?) 9astra — (Nan^io's Cata-

logue, No. 1228).

8. The S'fistra on the grouped inferences (not fonnd).

The seventh book, called Prajnapti-hetu-sangraha, compiled by
Jina, seems to be identical with Pramaoa-samuccaya which, besides
ninety-nine other works, was compiled by Dignft^.

According to I-tsing (TaJcakusUj p. 182) Dharmakirti made
a farther improvement in logic after Smib. From Indian sources too
(such as from Nyaya^binan) we know t;hat Dharmakirti was a
distinguished successor of Dign&ga and i^oomaaientatorai Ids works
(vide K. B. Pathaka's article on the authorship of Nyayabindu in the
Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, 1895,
Vol. XIX, No. LI, pp. 47-57 ; also G. A. Jacob's Note on the
authorship of Nyaya-bindu in the London Boyal Asiatic Bopiety's
Journal, April 1905, pp. 361—362).

Hwen-thsang (vide Beal's Buddhistic Record of the Western
World) mentions Jina as having been bom in th# country of
Andhra in the south. We have already seen that Dignftga was
bom near the country of Kaiici in the south, probably in the
dominion of the Andhras.

The facts stated above go to show that Dignaga and Jina were
the same person. As a matter of fact Jina se^ms to be only a
Chinese phonetic equivalent for Di^aga.

So it appears that BignOga (Tibetan : phyogg-glan) was
_ .^ . variously naiped as Jina (victor) Bhadanta '

ofDte^^S '^"*** ^"^ venerafelq monk) and Acftiyya (as in
' Nyftyabindu, the Tibetan equivalent being

Slob-4pon). He was also called MahddigftSgdfyuna (vide Eitel's
Dictionary of Ohinese Buddhism)^ 9,nd is thus often mistaken for
Nftgdrjuna. This explains the fact that Nyaya-dvara-tfiraka-^stra,
really composed by Dignagn, has been attributed to Nagarjuita.
Dignaga also bore the title of Tarkapuhgava (a fighting bull) ; while
his Brfihmanic opponents gave him the title of Ku-tdrhika (a
quibbler).

Besides the allusion to Dignaga in Kalidftsa*s Maghadtfta ^

Brfthma if ^® come across several of his actual views

enoes to IMnteaf * criticised by such eminent authorities as

' UdyotAkara, Vacaspati Mi^ and others.

t The word Bhadanta in the vocative ca^e assumes the fonns Bhaddanta
and Bhante. Compare ^(l^m^t «?^iir inJl (^-••H) Kaooayana, p. 141,
edited by Satis Chandra Vidyibhufana,). A junior monk should address a
senior monk by calling him Bhante or AjasmS. So Buddha says :*-l|WlKi|

fill^WT •f.irO fMw M^lflf V ^n^inflf WT ^fl^l^fiH*^ (Mahlparinib.
bftnasnttta, Bhi^avira, 6)

Vol. I, No. 9.1 Dtgnflga and his Pravidfui'samuccaya, 223

IJdyotakara in his Nyaya-vartika ' mentions Dignaga under
tlie name of Bhadanta, and describes bim as a Ku-tSrhika. V&cas-

g^ti Miira, in his Titparyatikft * on the NySyavftrtika has identified
hadanta with Dignaga, has mentioned Dignaga by name and has
tried to justify his appellation Ku-tdrkika, Dignftga's definition of
Pratyakfa (perception) has been mentioned by Udyotakara aiid

VScaspati Mi^B thus :— ini# WM^ I nilfH I '* Perception is (intui-
tive and therefore) exempt from reflection." ^

( i^wyfii, Tjj^s, \8 ) ■

The commentator Mallinitha says that Dignaga referred to in this verse
the Baddhiflt philosopher of that name.

HM\M WW wRft ^irw \

'edited by Vindhye^rari Prasida Dabe, in Bibliotheca Indica Beriee).
^fnCIVI V^ t P.li Nyayavirtika-atparyyafika, edited by Gangadhar 9<8tri

... ^wwjf ^imwi iEt«%f' irf^ OTwf wninr* wir wn iiwi-
li^f^Rfii inSk wnfcr^rfW^^ w m fail n fa ft ^mY wmr%

^ The nme definition of Pratyahfa (perception) occurs in Digiiiga*8
Aramlvaaamttooaya. Compare the Tibetan Tersion of the Praminaaamnocaya
in the Tangynr, section Mdo, volnme XCV. foL 2a, qnoted by Prof . De La

224 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

'Regarding anum&na (inference)' Dignaga, according to Udyo-
takara and YScaspati, says :~ By seeing smoke, we do not, as it
has been usually asserted, infer two things — viz,, (1) fire, and (2)
the connection between fire and the place which is the abode of
fire ; but we infer only one thing — viz., the place as containing the
fire.

Udyotakara and Vacaspati further inform us that Dignaga
did not accept upamGna (comparison)* and Uptavacana (testi-

Valled-Poossin in the Miiseon ; vide Prof. Poossin's Extrait da Museon, p. 68.
The definition mns arfollowB :— «r^'SW*i^'y'^c;'Q5QI'XJ |

fr^T ^cnftwm^n^ I ^Bifiwi^ ^ i[^ %q[ w ^?T^

^^^sf^ 1^ Tififf iR?t ^s(^^ i^f^ \

( ^nnRTf^^ir 2n?«ra eWi, \-\-*, ^^ \^* ) i

irfir^fwr lefir 'iPnirT fr ^w ef^^^ «r ^r^ H?r^ iiw^ irar

Vol. I, No. 9.] IXynaga and his Pram^na-saviaccaya, 225

iN.8.-]

monj) 1 as separate forms of evidence, but included the former in
perception and the latter in perception and inference. Dignaga
criticised Vatsyftyana's inclasion of manas (mind)^ among the sense-
organs, while his own theory of sSintaraiva (interstice or interral) ^
was criticised by Udyotakara and Vacaspati.

Dignaga is said to have cited an instance of inference contrary
to perception, and his view was criticised by Kumarila Bhatta, as
we learn from Parthasarathi Miira's gloss, on 59-60, Anomana-
pariccheda of- Kumarila's vartika on the 5th s&tra of Jaimini.
Udyotakara and Vacaspati Mii^ too ^ criticise the same view of
Dignaga.

^'ft]l*<l*I1'flr*lftr i^Pfft Wf^ fifSf'IT^ wf^Tftr I

( siinnfTfnwr mrom t[w\, \-\-<, ^- \si ) i
Tft{^*i*^*MWWOT ^vw ITT vi^wdi irfinrfti' frnnpn^j i

:226 Journcd of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

Jayanta in his Nyayamanjari (drd ahnika, p. 131, Vizianaga-
mm Sanskrit series) probably alludes to DignSg^ in the subject
<3alled '^Bhadanta-kalaha."

I have already referred to the fact that Dharmakirti wrote a

R AAYth H f commentary ' on a certain work of Dignaga

e^BtomStSKt^.' ^®«id®s alluding to his logical views in the

* Nyaya-bindu. It was Dharmottaracaryya*
who explicitly mentioned Di^Sg^ sometimes under that name, but
often under the name of DignfigacSryya or simply AcSryya.
Jinendrabodhi 3 and others wrote commentaries on Prama^asa-
muccava of Dignaga.

The exact date of Digniga is not known. On the authority of
Dlmtea'B date Mallinatha we have found that DignSga was

* an opponent of Kalidftsa, and from Tibetan
49ources we have seen that he was a contemporary of one I^vara-
Kr9Qa who, I believe, was no other person than the celebrated
■author of the Saipkhya-karikft. From Sanskrit sources we have
further learnt that Dignaga was anterior to Udyotakara but pos-
terior to Vatsyayana, and that Kum&rila Bhatfa and Dharmakirti
flourished after the time of Dignaga. But these facts do not help
us much, as the dates of most of these writers are unknown. From
Chinese sources we know that I^vara-Krf^a's Sftipkhya-karika was
tmnslated into Chinese by Paramirtha 557-567 A.D. (Nanjio*8 Cat,

' ( ompara.

^?fT mm ifhj: I (^nift^feWi. ^: «^) i

^w^ wnEii«nr i wn f^ ^m^ i

1 «rfir ^i^i4rf^«nfNw ^ ^ ^n wrrr i

( ^BWft^^, «: ^ ) I

^ Jinendrabodhi'fl commentary on Pramii;ia-8amQC0aym is named " Ti^U-
inalavati noma Prarai9a*Bamaccnya-tikB "—Tibetan VC|^M*^c;*$'sr^S*

'S*^^' eQI'^^^'5^1 It i« contained in the Tangyur, section Mdo-
Volame Re.

Vol. I, No. 9.] DtgtiQga mid his Pramdna-samaccaycu 227

1300). One of Jina^s works was also translated about the same time
and by the same translator (Nanjio^s Catalogue i. 10). We haye-
alreadj seen that Jina was identical with Digna^^a. These lead as
to conclude that Dignaga flourished before 557 A.D.

From Tibetan sources we have further found that Dign&ga
was a disciple of Vasubandhu. Now Vasubandhu ^ was contem-
porary of Lha-tho-ri, King of Tibet who lived up to 371 A.D.«
There seems to have existed a Sanskrit work* on the life of Vasu-
bandhu which was translated into Chinese by Kumarajiva A.D..
401-409. These facts go to show that Vasubandhu lived in the
middle of the 4th century A.D. and Dignaga about 400 A.D.^

1 Vide Flig-8ain-]on«zang.

* Csoma De Koros't TiMtan Orammar, p. 182.
8 Konijo's Oatalogae, Appendix i. 6.

* Mr. Takakusn in a Tery learned article on Tasabandhn, published in the-
Joamal of the London Royal Asiatic Society, January 1906, fixes the date of
VasQbandhn at abont AD. 990-500. According to this theory Digniga most
have flourished about 600 A.D. Takakusu's chief argument is that Saipgha-
bhadra was a contemporary of Yasnbandhu {vide Hwon thsang, I-tsing,
Paramirtha's Life of Vasubandhn, etc.), and was the translator of the Saman-
tepnsidiU of Bnddhaghosa into Chinese in 488 A.D.

I ^*%rf * « ^ . V# \ ^ \^ « « V« «^ '

^228 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

29. Vidydpatt Thahur.—By G. A. Grierson, C.I.E., Ph.D.,
D. LiTT., Honorary Member of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

I have read with great interest the acconnt of the collection
of Vidyapati's poems, which is given by Babu Nagendra Nath
Gupta on pp. 20 and ff. of the Extra No of Vol. LXXIII, Part
I, of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. He has been
kind enough to refer to the small collection of songs published by
me about twenty-three years ago. In order to facilitate his
labours, may I state at once that I have learnt a good deal since
then, and that I by no means maintain all that I wrote about
Yidyapati in 1882.

Babu Nagendra Nath Gupta refers to the deed of gift of the
village of Bisphi as if he considered it to be a genuine document.
1 am afraid that this contention can hardly be sustained. The
plate contains a date in the Fasli San, and that date was long
before the Fasli era had been invented. He will find a facsimile
of the grant in the Proceedings of the Society for August, 1895.
My reasons for considpring it to be spurious are given in fall on
page 96 of Vol. LXVIII (1899), Part I, of the Journal. See also
Dr. Eggeling's Catalogue of Sanskrit MSS. in the India Office
Library, Part IV, No. 2864..

The following list of articles on Vidyapati may be useful : —

J. Beames. The Early Vaishnava Poets of Bengal, Indian
Antiquary, II, 1873, p. 37.

J. Beames. On the Age and Oountry of Vidydpatt, Ibid. IV,
1875, p. 299.

Article in the Bai^ga-darian^ Vol. IV, 1282 B.S. (Jyai?tha),
p. 75.

S^arada-carani Maitra. Introduction to Vidydpatir Paddvali.
Second edition, Calcutta, 1285, B.S.

G. A. Grierson. Vidyapati and His Oontemporaries, Indian
Antiquary, Vol. XIV, 1885, p. 182.

G. A. Grierson. On some Mediaeval Kings of Mithild, Ibid.
Vol. XXVIIT, 1899, p. 67.

Pandit Chanda Jha, referred to by Babu Nagendra Nath
Gupta, has published a useful edition of the Sanskrit text of the
Pumsapariksa^ together with a translation into Maithili. It was
printed at the Baj Press, Darbhanga, in 1296 F.S. He has added
a valuable Appendix dealing with historical questions, and con-
taining frequent quotations from the Ktrtti-lata, a work of Vidya-
pati partly written in the Maithili of his time. If these quotations
are correct, they show that the vernacular of the poet's time
differed widely from modern Maithili, and was rather a form of
Prakrit.

I believe that Mahamahopadhyiya Pandit Hara Prasad
S^astri discovered a very old collection of Vidyapati's poems in
Nepal in the year 1899. He was kind enough to send me a copy
of one of them, which showed much the same Prakritic appear-
ance. I had published a current version of the same song in my

Vol. I, No. 9.] ViJydpati ThSkur. 229

[N.S.]

edition of 1882, and the points of difference showed that there
had been extensive modernization in the language of my copy.
The same is no donbt also tme with regard to all the genuine
songs in my collection.

I am very glad to learn that an attempt is going to be made
to publish a correct text of the dainty sonnets of the old Master-
Singer, and I look forward to its appearance with pleasant anti-
cipations.

230 Joui^ud of the Anattc Society of Bengal, [November, 1905 ►

30. 8ome remarks o?^ the Geology of the Oangetic Plain.^^By

E. MoLONY. [With one plate.]

It requires no arjopiment to prove that the present gangetie^
plain is the alluvial deposit of the river Ganges, and that the
whole of the area of the gangetic plain south of the Himalayas
must at one time have consisted of a network of morasses and
river-channels very similar to the Sanderbans at the ^esent time.
It is also evident that, over the whole area of the United Pro-
vinces of Agra and Oudh, so far from the Ganges being at pre-
sent engaged in raising its flood plain, it has become an agent of
denudation, and has, long since, entered on the work of denuding^
the whole of its plain which lies above flood-leveL

It may be taken as proved that this great change has been
occasioned by the submergence of the area at the mouth of the-
river.

The period at which this important movement took placa
must have been very remote.

The river has eroded a bed iu the old alluvium which is in
manyplaces several miles in width.

Within the limits of the former bed there is a considerable
amount of later alluvium, but it varies very mach from the older
alluvium in its characteristics, and, in most places, there is a very
well-marked line of demarcation between them

Most of the recent alluvium is liable to be flooded during^
high floods of the Ganges, though there is some which has never
been flooded during the memoir of man. This is probably due to
deposit of sand and light soil by the action of trie wind during
the hot weather.

In the recent alluvium the substratum is nearly always pure
river sand, the finer soils being deposited in shallow water wnere
the current is usually less.

Another difference is that the recent alluvium never contains
nodular limestone {kunkar), which occurs inmost places in the
old alluvial deposits.

I liave perhaps made this assertion more positive than the
text-books would appear to warrant, but I have never come across
an instance in whicli kunkar was found in soil that clearly
belonged to the recent alluvium, though I have occasionally found
it in a localitv near the boundary of the new and old alluvium.

The soil also differs, the recent alluvium being generally
much more fertile, at any rate in the eastern portion of the United
Provinces, where the recent alluvium contains a percentage of the
black cotton soil brought down by the Jumna and its tributaries
from Central India.

The area that lies between the extreme limits up to which
the Ganges has excavated its bed in the old alluvium may be
styled the ** Khfidir. "

Having had good opportunities for observation in the Ghazipur

Vol I, No. 9.] Th^ Geology of the Gangetic Plain. 231

District, I have marked in on a map of the district the limits of
the"Khadir."

I may say that in some places the limit of the ^* Khadir " is
exceedingly plain, whereas in other places it is not at all so plain
to the eye.

However, by tracing the line from one curve which is well
defined and following slight indications, it is almost always pos-
sible to follow the line till it reaches another point where the
indications are again quite unmistakeable.

In the Ghazipur district the only part where, in my opinion,,
the line is really doubtful, is the western edge of the island of old
alluvium opposite the confluence of the Ganges and K&rmnasa.
Both the northern and the southern edges of that island are^
extremely well defined as far west as a line drawn north and
south just west of Birpur; but the western edge is very ill-
defined.

In my opinion, two causes have united to create this diffi-
culty. The first is the proximity of the deep stream of the Gan-
ges within comparatively recent years, which has led to a great
accumulation of water-borne material ; and the second is the prox-
imity to the west of the boundary of a large sandy tract whence
a considerable amount of material has probably been blown by
the strong west winds which prevail during the early part of ih^
hot weather.

It is clear that at any particular time each bank of the river
must have concave bends alternating with convex bends. Centri-
fugal force throws the current against the concave bends and
away from the convex bends. Erosion, therefore, only takes place
at the concave bends, and this is the reason why the edge of the
" Khadir," as delineated on the map, does not contain any convex
bends.

The fact that these concave bends, which form the limits of
the " Khadir," are not connected by convex bends, but cut each
other at various angles, proves that no two adjacent bends could
have been made at the same time.

The width and shape of the '* Kh&dir " opposite the town of
Ghazipur show that there must have been many complete altera*
tions in the course of the river.

Between each of the alterations in the course at tlie river,
indicated by the indentations in the edg^ of the ** Khadir, ^^ a very
long period must have elapsed.

Although the vagaries of the Ganges are proverbial, it mu^t
be borne in mind that, whenever the river impinges on the old
alluvium, the process of denudation is very slow.

In the new alluvium the river often cuts away three or four
hundred feet in a year, but in the old alluvium, whenever the
river impinges on reefs ofkunkar, there is practically no denudation.

Even where the river impinges directly on the stiffish clay
(without any kunkar reefs to protect it), which is the prevail^
ing soil in tiie Ghazipur district, the denudation, as will be shown^!
later, does not exceed ten feet in the year.

232 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [November, 1905.

It will be noticed that tJl sharp bends of the river are in the
old alluvium, and that the main direction of the river's course is
determined by the bends in the old alluvium. Although, in the
new alluvium, the river does, at times, rapidlj make consider-
able changes in its course, yet its general direction remains con-
stant for long periods of time, owing to the fact that it is deter-
mined by the bends in the old alluvium, which alter very slowly.

There is no historical record of the river ever having been at
any distance from either Zamania, Ghazipur or Chausa, although
the configuration of the ** Khadir " shows that, at some past
period, it must have been several miles distant from each of these
places.

The same probably holds true of both Benares and Chunar.
At the time of the battle of Chausa, where Humayun was
defeated in 1539 A.D., the point of confluence of the Granges and
K&rmnasa must have been at the same place as at present,
though it is clear, from the island of the old alluvium just oppo-
site, that, at one time, the Ganges must have been flowing a con-
siderable distance to the north, and the confluence of the Ganges
and K&rmnasa must have been east of Buxar. There is, there-
fore, unmistakeable historical evidence that there has been no
radical alteration in the course of the Ganges in the Ghazipur
District foreclose on four hundred years.

At Chochakpur there has been very little alteration in the
course of the river. The coufiguration of the " Khadir " in the
reach between Chochakpur and Zamania can be accounted for by
supposing that between Chochakpur and Karanda the river origi-
nally flowed nearly east to west, and that the great bend at
Zamania has been the result of gradual and continuous erosion
hj the river.

The distance between Karanda and the point of the bend at
Zamania is 72 miles or 39,000 feet.

Allowing 4,600 feet as the original width of the river, this
would give a distance of 35,000 feet which has been eroded by the
river.

The first survey was made of the district in 1840/ From
that time to 1872 Mr. Oldham records in his Memoirs of the
Ghazipur District that the annual rate of erosion was 12 feet
(weZe p. 3 of Oldham's Memoirs of the Ghazipur District), Since
the last survey, made in 1882, the annual rate of erosion has
been 9 feet. This gives an average of close on 11 feet a year for
the last 64 years.

At this rate the erosion of the Zamania bend would require
about 3,200 years. At the Zamania bend the soil is the ordinary
stifE clay found in the district without any kunkar reefs. There
is, however, a kunkar reef at Zamania town, and very solid kun^
kar reefs at Ghazipur.

Another noteworthy feature shown by the map is the island
ol old alluvium opposite Chausa surrounded on au sides by the
*• Khadir." . ^

It is stated in Mr. Oldham's Memoirs that a similar island

Vol. I, No. 9.] The Geology of the Gangetic Plain. 233

exists in the Benares District opposite Saidpnr. I have not had
an opportanitv of yerifying the statement, and have not therefore
shown it on the map.

Mr. Oldham's is the only possible explanation, viz,, that the
river Ganges has gradually eroded the land at some bend in its
course till it has cut into the course of the affluent at a point
above the former confluence.

When once a channel had been made into the course of the
affluent, centrifugal force would drive the water of the Oanges
through the breach so made, and the new channel would rapidly
be widened out till it became the main course of the Ganges.

The island opposite Chausa must have been caused by the
Ganges usurping the course of the Ktonnasa, and that opposite
Saidpur by the usurpation of the course of the Gumti.

Similarly, tradition, which Mr. Oldham considered trust-
worthy, says that, at one time, the water of the Gogra passed
down the present river Sarju, or Tons as it is sometimes styled,
which separates the Chazipur and Ballia Districts. This would
indicate that the Ballia District consists of a similar island caused
by the river Gogra (or Sarju as it is called in some parts) usurp-
ing the course of some smaller river that used to now down the
present bed of the Gogra.

Any such usurpation of another river's course would probab-
ly completely alter the set of the current at the old confluence,
and release the river from the bends in the old alluvium which
had formerly given the river its general direction.

At the commencement of the paper it was taken as already
proved that the area at the mouth of the Ganges was an area of
subsidence.

There are, however, indications that within the area of the
United Provinces of Agra and Oudh the southern portion of the
Gangetic plain has sunk relatively to the northern portion.

The first piece of evidence is that supplied by the artesian
well sunk at Lucknow. (vide Oldham's Oeology of India, p. 434. )

At a depth of 158 feet the water stood at 61 feet below the
top of the borehole. At a depth of 975 feet the water had risen
to 2 feet. At 990 feet it stood at a depth of 5 feet below the
top of the borehole, and at 1,189 feet the water rose over the top
of the casing, itself 24 feet above the surface of the ground.

This shows that the lower strata must be inclined, though it
does not indicate the direction of the dip.

As the Himalayas are known to have risen and the Gangetic
plain to have sunk, the probability is that the dip of the strata is
from north to south.

A river flowing over a flat alluviual plain would naturally
find its way directly down the slope, and there is no reason why
the watershed should not be equidistant from either bank.

If, however, after the river had excavated a channel for itself
with the watershed equidistant from either bank, the whole allu-
vial plain through which it flowed was slightly tilted at right
angles to the river's course, the result would be tiiat the slope into

234 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

the river from one bank would be increased, while the slope to the
other bank would be decreased. Gonsequentlj, denudation on one
side of the river would be greater than on the other. The same
thing would happen to all the rivers flowing on parallel courses.
Thus, in the area between two rivers which run on nearlj parallel
courses, the denudation into one river would be greater than into
the other. Each river would, in time, force the water-shed on one
bank back towards the next river, but, in exchange, would lose on
the other bank an equivalent in its catchment area.

The result would be that each river would have a larger
catchment area on one bank than on the other. This appears to
be the case in several districts of the United Provinces with which
I was acquainted.

Canals are generally aligned to run along the water-sheds,
and in the following cases the canals are aligned very near the
rivers running parallel to them on the north side : —

(a) The main upper Oanges canal in the Aligarh District is
very much nearer the Kali Naddi on its north than
the Jumna on the south.

(6) The Anupshahr branch of the Ganges canal in the
Aligarh District is very much nearer the Ganges on
its north than the Kali Naddi on its south.

(c) The projected Sarda canal in the Lucknow District was
aligned very much nearer the Gumti on its north
than the Sai on its south.

The fact that, at Lucknow, water from a great depth rose to
above the surface, shows not only that the strata at great depths
are inclined, but that they are continuous over very considerable
distances.

This is a very intei^sting fact, because it has been conclu-
sively shown that the surface strata are not continuous.

For certain reasons too technical to be given here a good
irrigation well can only be made where the masonry cylinder can be
taken down to a firm clay stratum underlaid by waterbearing sand.

A good deal of attention has therefore been paid to the strata
near the surface, by which I mean down to a depth of say 125
feet.

Colonel Clibbom was deputed in the seventies to make an
examination into the subject of wells, and, in his report published
by the Board of Revenue of the North- West Provinces and Ondb,
in a collection of papers relating to the construction of wells, it is
clearly demonstrated that the clay strata so essential to the
success of wells are not continuous.

I might add that anyone practically acquainted with the
construction of iirigation wells knows that Uoldnel Glibbom's
conclusions are correct.

A very difficult problem is here presented to us ; how can

•we account for the fact that the surface strata are clearly not oon-

tinnons, while those at great depths appear to be continuous P Two

possible explanations suggest themselves ; the first is that at great

Vol. I, No. 9.] The Geology of the Gangetic Plain. 235

[N.8.'\
depths, the pressure of the superincumbent earth renders imper-
vious to water everything but the coarser and cleaner kinds of sand.

Extensive and continuous deposits of such sand would only
be found along the beds of the larger rivers which may be pre-
sumed to have existed though they have been long since deeply
buried by alluvial deposits.

If a deep borehole struck such an old river-bed, it is concei-
vable that the necessary head to bring the water ix) the surface
might be supplied through a deposit of sand in the former river-
bed continuous up to a point in its uppper course where it attained
the necessary elevation.

The observed facts at Lucknow do not, however, support this
explanation, as there were several rises in the level of the water in
the borehole, and it seems unlikely that one borehole should have
struck the beds of several such former rivers one above the other.

The second possible explanation is that the surface deposits
were laid down in running water and the deeper deposits in still
water. Anyone acquainted with the country can see in the cres-
cent-shaped swamps and the alternations of clay, light soil and
sand on the surface of the country, the result of the same agency
that is reproducing similar features in the alluvium of the great
rivers, namely deposition by running water ; and the inference is
inevitable, that the surface of the country was formed by the
deposit of the material derived from the mountains in a labrynth
of vast morasses amd deltaic rivers.

This agency, however, would not explain the enormous area of
clay and sand revealed to us by the Lacknow borehole ; and it
seems necessary to assame the existence of an enormous sheet of
water with currents sufficient to transport sand great distances
to account for the phenomena.

In Oldham's Geology of India, p. 144, the occurrence of a'
species of fresh-water porpoise, common only to the Gkknges and
Indus and their tributaries, is cited as showing that the Ganges
and Indus flowed at one time into the sea through a common delta. '

The sea is shown to have extended up the Indus valley within '
a geologically recent period ; and it seems possible that it may have
extended east much further into the gangetic plain than is usually
supposed.

The absence of any indications of marine origin in the upper
strata might well be due to their having been deposited in n^sh
water after the communication with the sea by the Indas valley
had been cut off.

At any rate, whether the water was fresh or salt, the con-
tinuity of the deeper strata over great distances seems to strengthen
the theoxy that the lower strata were deposited in a great sheet of
still watco*.

Such a great sheet of water, originally salt but gradually be-
coming fresh as the communication with the sea became gnAusJlj-
more and more obstructed, would satisfactorily account for the
change of the salt-water porpoise into an animal inhabiting fresh
water.

236 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

31. The NafdisU'l'MaSsir—By H. Bbveridge, I.C.S. (retired).

Among the Elliot manuscripts in the British Museum there is
a volume which contains, among other things, about a hundred
pages of an extract from the Nafa'isu-l-Maasir. It is numbered
Or. 1761 and is described at p. 1022a of vol. Ill of Bieu's Persian
Catalogue. The title Nafa'isu-l-Maasir may be rendered " Choice
Deeds," and is a chronogram implying that the book was begun in
973 (1565-66). It is stated by Dr. Sprenger that a postscript
gives 979 as the date of the completion of the work, but that much
later dates are mentioned in it. The work was a biographical dic-
tionary of Persian poets and was written by Mirza *Alau-d-daulah
Qazvini, the younger brother of Mir *Abdu-l-latif, who was for a
time Akbar's preceptor. 'Alau-d-daulah was himself a poet, and
wrote under the name of Kami. He is described by Badaynni at
pp. 97 and 316 of the third volume of his history. A copy of the
original work was seen by Dr. Sprenger in the Moti Mahall Library
in Lucknow, and he has described its contents at pp. 46-55 of his
Catalogue ; but apparently the manuscript was lost in the Mutiny,
and there does not seem to be any copy in our public libraries. It
is to be hoped that a copy will turn up in India some day for the
work was a valuable one and was the basis of Badayuni's
third volume. Sprenger states that the book contained notices of
about 350 poets, most of whom flourished in tlie time of Akbar.
He also gives the index of the names. Fortunately the Elliot MS.
contains the historical introduction which gives an acooaut of the
reigns of Babar, Humaynn and Akbar. The account of Akbar is
the fullest of the three, but only goes down to 982 or 1575, i.e., to
the twentieth year of the reign. Though the historical introduc-
tion is only a sketch, it gives here and there useful bits of infor*
mation, and it is valuable as being, apparently, the earliest written
of all the lives of Akbnr. Like his father Mir Yahya, the author
of the Labb-u-tawarikb, 'Alau-d-daulah is very fond of chrono-
grams, and gives many of them in his introduction. Among others
he gives the well-known one about Babar*s birth, and adds that it
was composed by Maulana Jam.. This cannot have been the great
Jam!. On p. 265 he speaks of Babar's reb'gious poem, and corrobo-
rates Sprenger's statement that it was entitled '* Dar Fiqh." He
adds that it was sent to Qazrat Imam A'zam, who is probably the
same person as the Maqdum A^zam of Transoxiana whose name is
mentioned in Ney Elias s history of the Khojas. That is, he is
probably one of several MaqdQm A'zams, for the name was borne
by more than one saint. At p. 336 we have the statement that
Humavtin conversed in Hei*at with the writer^s father, here called
Amir K'a9iru-d-din Yahya. At p. 376 mention is made of a Khw&-
jah Qa?i who was Humayun's prime minister and who, unless he
be the same as Khwaji^ Ghazi, does not seem to be named by other
authorities. It is added that he belonged to the family of the
famous enthnsiast ghams-i-Tabrizi, The account of Humiylin's
death gives one or two new details. In the first place it says that

Vol. I, No. 9.] The Nafai8u4-Maastr, 237

[KS]

the accident of the fall from the roof occurred on Fridaj the 16th
Babi-al-awwal, and not on the 11th, and that he died on the follow-
ing Sunday the 18th. Then it adds, p. 375, that Hnmaj^n was
wrapped in a blanket, or dressing-gown (galimwSr) at the time,
and WHS leaning on his staff when the latter slipped on the stones.
When he came to his senses, he repeated the Kalima, Then follow
several chronograms. Khizr !^wajah ^an, the husband of
Gulbadan Begam, is mentioned as one of those who concealed the
fact of the death for some days.

In the accoant of Akbar's conquest of Qajlpur we are told
that Bajah Gajpati (of the Dumraon family) assisted with 2,000
Gheims, and in mentioning Da'ud's escape by boat from Patna on
the night of Sunday 21, Babi-as-sani the new circumstance is
given that he fled to Tanda. When the bridge over the Pun Pun
was broken down by the flying Afghans, some 2,000 of them were
killed.

The Elliot MS. gives, besides the introduction, a few extracts
from the notices of poets in the body of tlie work. Among them is
the interesting account of Waf ai, i.e., Zainu-d-din Q^wafi, who was
Babar*s ^dr, or ecclesiastical judge, and who translated, or para-
phrased Babar's Memoirs. It is this accoant which has been
borrowed by Badayuni (see Dr. Banking's translation, p. 609).

I hope that this notice may lead to the discovery of the ori-
ginal work, and if not, that someone will publish the extracts in
the Elliot Manuscript.

24th July, 1906.

238 Journal of the Astatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

32. Notes on the Species, External Characters and Habits of the
Dtigong. — By N. Annandale, D.Sc, Deputy Superintendent
of the Indian Museum, [With three plates.]

The present commanication is largely of the nature of a pre-
liminary notice. Later I hope to offer to the Society a memoir on
the anatomy of certain organs and structures in the Dugong,
which will be based partly on the specimen whose measurements
■are given below, and partly on the fine collection of Indian and
Aus^lian skulls and other bones already in the Indian Museum.
At present I feel confident in stating (with four fully adult Indian,
two fully adult Australian, and parts of three immature Indian
skulls before me) that the individual variations among Indian
specimens are at least as great as those which were believed by
Owen to constitute a specific difference between Indian and
Australian species. Skeletons of the Dugong exhibit very great
differences (not solely connected with sex and nge) inter se, and
these cannot be specific, as they are not constant even in a series
from the same seas. Owen's Halicore australis, therefore, must
be relegated, as most recent mammalologists have thought pro-
bable, to the synonomy of JBT. dugong.^

In the summer of 1905, 1 was deputed by the authorities of
the Indian Museum to visit the northern part of the Gulf of
Manaar, in order to obtain a complete skeleton and skin of an
Indian specimen of the Dugong, the only skins hitherto in the
collection, and the most nearly perfect skeleton, having been
obtained from Queensland in exchange with the Brisbane
Museum. Thanks largely to the kind offices of the Rev. A. D.
Limbrick, of Raman^d, I was so fortunate as to obtain a fine
male, the external characters of which are described below : —

Dimensions —

1 Length to tip of tail ... ... 9 ft., 6 in.

2 Length to extremity of fluke ... 9 „ 11

3 From posterior border of anus to tip

of tail

4 From anterior border of anus to

genital opening ... 1 „ 5

5 Ijength of flipper ... ... 1 „ 8

6 Width of flipper ... ... 10

7 Breadth of fluke (injured at one

extremity) ... ... 2 „ 10

8 Height of facial disk ... ... 8

9 Breadth of facial disk ... 11
10 Length of upper lip (upper jaw pad) 6 J

f»

>» ^ i»

»»

i Strictly speaking, the specific name should be duyong^ in accordance
with the Malay; bnt the incorrect form is so well known that it seems
l>etter not to change it.

Vol. I, No. 9.] Notes on the Dugong. 239

[N.8,]

In this table and thronghont the paper the "tip of tail"
means the extremity of the actual taU. The length between this
point and the extremity of the snout was measured by means of
sticks stuck into the sand. The '' length to extremity of fluke *'
was obtained by drawing a straight line immediately in front of
the snout and another parallel to it immediateiy behind the unin-
jured extremity of what may be called, on the analogy of the
Cetacea, the fluke. The posterior margin of this organ being con-
cave, the latter measurement is considerably the greater. The
third measurement given practically represents the length of the
tail, which is a little less than half that of the head and body.
This observation is perhaps of some importance, as the pads of
stout connective tissue intervening between the dorsal vertebrae are
of considerable thickness, although there are no bony epiphyses.
Consequently, skeletons, as set up in museums, very often do not
represent anything approaching the true length of the animal.
By the *' facial disk " 1 mean the flattened area, which does not
include the nostrils, above the tusks. It will be described in
detail later. What I have called the *' upper lip " is plainly the
homologue of what Murie and others have called the " upper

J* aw pad" in the Manatees; but it is better developed in the
)ugong and probably plays a more important part in the assi-
milation of food.

Oohur —

The dorsal surface, shortly after death, was a doll brownish
grey, which faded gradually, though pure grey on the sides, to
dirty flesh-colour on the belly. The face, flippers and fluke were
dull grey ; but the skin round the base of the tusks and the upper
lip was mottled with dirty flesh-colour, which was also the tint
of the lower jaw. Judging from the different descriptions given
by different observers, the coloration of the animal is as variable
as I find its skeleton to be.

Integument —

The skin of the specimen had not the corrugated and wrin-
kled surface of that of the Manatees ; but, on the other hand, it
had not quite the smooth and oily appearance of that of many of
the Cetacea. It was smooth, as it were, but not polished.
Undoubtedly the hair, especially on the back, contributed to this
effect, giving the animal quite a prickly appearance in certain
lights. I shall here state merely that three distinct kinds of hair
existed on the external surface, two on the facial disk and lower
jaw, and a third over the whole of the trunk, limbs and fluke, the
the kind last mentioned having two distinct phases of growth.
The hairs are apparently devoid of pigment. The general
character of the integument, apart from the hairs, resembled
that of tropical Cetacea, the '* blubber" being less thick than
that of northern Porpoises. No oil was set free by cutting through
it. Beneath it, however, there was a layer of opaque white ntt
very like that of a pig in appearance.

240 Jouifwl of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [November, 1905.

Q&neral Characters of the Trunk and 2itm6«—

The general form differed very considerably from that of all
Getacea, resembling that of some of the larger Eared Seals in
several points. The appearance of the animal was clumsy, and
evidently not adapted for rapid motion of any kind, the back and
sides being rounded and the belly flat. There was no apparent
neck, but the head was massive and terminated bluntly in front.
The tail was distinct from the trunk, having a more compact and
a less amorphous character. The vertebral column extended to the
tip, which projected slightly below the edge of the fluke. The
latter organ was deficient as regards one extremity, which had
been removed, probably by the bite of a shark. The wound had
healed completely. Running from near the tip of the tail to a point
neai' its commencement was a conspicuous ridge formed chiefly by
a thickening of the epidermis. This was about two inches high
near the centre. It is well shown in the photograph reproduced on
plate 7. The fore-limbs were regular in outline, flattened, with a
distinct posterior fringe, but with no trace of separation of the digits
externally. Only the fore-arm projected externally, the humerus
being buried in the body as far as the articulation of the radias and
ulna. There was a conspicuous fold of skin immediately above the
limb. The mammas, which were large considering the sex of the
individual, were situated immediately behind the limb, almost on
a level with its posterior edge ; they were long in comparison
with their diameter. Judging from a female, otherwise correctly
mounted, in the Colombo Museum, this elongated character of the
mammas is characteristic of both sexes. The lateral position is
apparently characteristic of all living Sirenia. Native fishermen
tell me that in the lactating female the milk squirts out with
great violence to a considerable distance if the mamma is pressed.
The copulatory oigan, of which Dr. Francis H. A. Marshall, of
the University of Edinburgh, has kindly promised to furnish a
description later, was entirely withdrawn into the body.

Head —

The head of the Dugong is perhaps its most characteristic
feature, but all the figures of the animal, including some very
recent ones, that I have beeu able to discover, are. incorrect as
regards this part, at any rate if they are intended to represent
adult males. The only mounted specimens T have seen which
are at all correct are those in the Colombo Museum ; but these
are a female, a half-grown male and a newly (probably pre-
maturely) bom young one. Except as regards the tusks, they
agree very fairly well with my notes and photographs.

The mouth of the specimen was vety small. It was tightly
closed by the upper lip ('* upper jaw pad ") which projected over
the lower jaw, the lower lip being represented merely by a tliin
fold of skin. The upper lip was stout in shape, flabby in struo*
ture, in the newly-killed specimen ; tongue-shaped, smooth and
hairless on the surface. The tusks, one of which was broken^
projected through the skin above it, not from the mouth, as has

Vol. I, No. 9.] Notes on the Dugong. 241

[N.a.]

been stated. The curious projection of the anterior part of the
lower jaw was only covered by a thin layer of skin and con-
nective tissue ; it is the rounded structure which looks like a heavy
lower lip in fig. 1, plate 8. Above the tusks the integument
expanded into a large flattened disk, which was divided into two
halves by a vertical cleft. This cleft also extended along the base
of the upper lip between the tusks. The lower part of the disk .
bore two oroadly raised transverse ridges, which were divided from
one another by the cleft and covered with bristles comparable to, but
shorter and blunter than, the spines of a Porcupine. These ridges
are evidently the honiologues of the two lobes of the " upper lip,'*
by means of which the Manatees crop the plants on which they
feed. They do not appear to be either so mobile or so widely
separable, however, in the Dugong. Above them the disc was
covered with longer and finer bristles, evidently of a sensory
nature. The upper edge of the disk was turned backwards and
upwards, and there was a more or less inturned flap on either side.
The nostrils were entirely outside the disk, on the top of the head :
they were crescentic in shape and could evidently be closed during
life. The tissues surrounding the eye were somewhat prominent ;
but the eye itself was small, black, beady and deeply sunk. It was
not surrounded by radiating wrinkles as in the Manatees. The
presence of large glands in connection with it afforded some justi-
fication for tbe Malays' belief^ that the Dugong weeps when
captured. The external ear was extremely minute, being a
circular aperture less than 10 mm. in diameter.

Habits —

It seems probable that the habits^ of the Dugong have
changed considerably within the last half century, together with
the diminution in Ub numbers noted by Blanford and others.
Only having seen a freshly-killed specimen, I am not in a position
to say anything on this point from actual observation, but from
what I was told by the native fishermen, who possess special nets
for the capture of the Dugong, it is rare nowadays for more
than one specimen to be taken at a time, whereas formerly, in the
Gulf of Manaar, flocks of many hundreds were said to occur.
Further, the animal appears to have ceased to frequent shallow
water, for, according to the fishermen, the only specimens they

1 They regard the tears of the ikan duyong (" Dngong fish) '' as a
powerful love- charm. Mnhammadan fishermen on the Oolf of Manaar
appeared to be ignorant of this usage, but told me that a " doctor " once
went out with them to oonect the tears of a Dugongf should they capture
one. Though they do not oall the animal a &h» they are less particular
about eating its flesh than are the Patani Malays and the Trang Samsams,
who will not do so unless the '* fish's " throat has been cut in the manner
orthodox for warm-blooded animals. The common Tnmil name for the
Dugong is hAddlpudru {** sea>pig"); but the fishermen at Kilakarai (Lubbais)
call it dvUliah.

* These remarks refer only to the Gulf of Mnnnar. Major A. B. Ander'
son informs me that in the Andamans, Dugongs still enter Fort Blair
harbour occasionally in parties of two or three. Dee, Ibth, 1905.

242 Journal of the Astatic Society of Bengal, [November, 1905.

see near the shore are those which have been wounded or are sick.
I was unable to discover the depth at which those taken for the
market are usually captured ; but a gentleman who has visited
the Dugong '* fisheries " off the northern coast of Queensland, tells
me that in Australian waters the usual depth is from the ten
to twelve fathoms. In the Gulf of Manaar stout nets, very deep,
witli a large mesh and heavily weighted, are sunk in the neigh-
bourhood of the animal's known feeding-places, and individuals
of both sexes, but apparently more especially young ones, become
entangled in them and are thus taken. Occasionally specimens
are even captured in the ordinary drift nets used in catching fish.
I was told that as many as sixty were sometimes brought into
Kilakarai, a large native porfc near the northern corner of the Ghilf
on the Indian shore, in a year; but this number is probably
exaggerated. The Muhammadans of the district are so fond of
the flesh^ that they give large prices for it, and probably the
fishermen who possess the right kind of nets go in pursuit of the
Dugong as often as they have nothing else to do ; for the search is
precarious, but the profits considerable should it be successful.

As regards the food of the Dugong, it has often been stated, but
not by filanf ord, that it feeds exclusively on a marine phaneroga-
mous plant. This is evidently not the case, as the stomach of my
specimen was full of pieces of a green alga, all of which belonged to
one species. Two things struck me about the contents of the stomach
and the upper part of the intestines : (I) their freedom from all
adventitious growths, either animal or vegetable, and (2) their
pei*fect and unbruised condition. They consisted of clean pieces of
seaweed about 2^ inches long, plucked off and evidently not
masticated. Even the little bladders which the seaweed bore
had not burst. As regards the method of feeding, I do not think
that it can be the same as that of the Manatees, which pluck the
plants which they eat by means of the two lobes above the " upper
jaw pad," and push their food towards the mouth with their
flippers. Similar lobes certainly exist in the case of the Dugong,
but they did not appear in the fresh specimen to be capable of
any great degree of separation or movement, while the flippers
are hardly long enough to give any great assistance in feeding.
As the *' upper jaw pad " (upper lip) itself, on the other hand, was
evidently freely moveable and possilsly to some extent extensile, it
seems possible that it is used in plucking seaweed, which certainly
could be g^rasped between it and the lower jaw. This would
necessitate the food being passed under the homy pad, with its
bundles of more or less consolidated hairs, on the anterior part of
the palate. Possibly these hairs may have the function, as they

1 The meat is excellent ; roaated, I ooald not have distinguished it from
good, hot rather tongh beefsteak. It had none of the peoaliar flavour of
wbale-meat. Moreover, it has the same qnalitj as that assigned, both by the
old voyagers and by modern observers, to the flesh of the American Manatees
•^it keeps good for a considerable time, for at least three days in hot
weather, during which mutton goes bad in twenty-four hours. The blubber is
not made into oil at Kilakarai.

Vol. I, No. 9.] Notes on the Dugong. 243

certainlj have the appearance, of the bristles of a scrubbing
brash. I have already noted the small size of the month, and I
believe, judging from the small area of the articular surface of
the lower jaw, as well as from observations on the fresh specimen,
that the jaw has very little, if any, lateral movement. For all
these reasons I doubt whether the persistent teeth have any
function beyond crashing the calcarious or other growths brushed
o£E the seaweed by the hair-papillaB of the anterior palate.

The fishermen told me that they took females with young
ones accompanying them at all times of year, but never more than
one young one with each female. They had never seen the female
raise the upper part of her body vertically from the water, clasp-
ing the young one in her flippers, which seem hardly suitable for
the purpose. Jadging from the scars on the specimen examined,
I believe that the males fight with their tusks at the breeding
season.

244 Jvumal of the Asiatic Society of BengaL [November, 1905.

32. Hedyotis sisaparensis, a hitherto undesoribedlndian species, — By

Captain A. T. Oaqe. I.M.S.

The writer when re-arran^ng the earlier genera of RubiacesB
in the Calcutta Herbarium in 1902, came across what appeared to
be an undescribed species of Hedyotis. The writer's opinion was
confirmed by Sir George King, who kindly compared the species
at Kew. The description written in 1902 is now offered for pub-
lication.

Hedyotis sisaparensis, — Undershrub with branches about as
thick as a crowqiiiU^ glabrous, pale grey almost white, four augled ;
intemodes much shortened in the region of the infloresence and
hidden by the stipules. Stipules about 9 mm. long, pectinate,
scurfily tomieniose, and showing a few raphides. Leaves shortly-
petioled, lanceolatet acute, base narrow cuneate tapering into the
glabrous petiole ; lamina glabrous on both surfaces, upper surface
bright green, lower grey, with abundance of raphides ; midrib on
lower surface of lamina flattened out, white ; Interal nerves 4-6,
rather faint, running forward at an acute angle with the midrib ;
length of lamina 5-8 '8 cm., breadth 1 '25-2*5 cm , length of petiole
6*5 mm.-l'25 cm. Flowers in axillary bracteate cymes of about
4*5 cm. in length; main peduncle 1*8 cm. long; bracts about
5 mm, long, flowers pseudo-pedicellate in groups of three on the
secondary peduncles. Calyx including lobes 8 mm. long, lobes 4,
subulate, equalling the length of the cnlyx-tube, but exceeding the
capsule. Corolla, unopened, exceeding the calyx tube, lobes 4.
Stamens 4. Kipe capsule 3 mm. in diameter, glabrous, dehiscing
septicidally. Seeds not seen.

Wynaad, Beddome, Above Sisapara, Nilgiri district, 7,000 feet
alt. Gamble, No. 13381.

The affinity of this species is with H. mollis. Wall., from
which it is easily enough distinguished by its infloresence.

Vol. I, No, 10.] An Examinatimi of the NySya'Sfttras, 245

[N.8.']

■34. An Examination of the Nydya-Sutras, — By HARAPiLkSAD SlsiBi,

Anyone who careftdlj reads the Ny&ya Sutras will perceive
that they are not the work of one man, of one age, of the pro*
lessors of one science, or even of the professors of one system of
religion. It would seem apparent that at different ages philoso*
phers, logicians and divines have interpolated various sections into
an already-existing work on what we may, for the want of a better
term, call Logic.

It is evident that snch a book would be full of contradictions,
inconsistencies and irreconcilable passages. So the Nyaya Sutras
are. The Hindu Commentators from Vfttsayana, in the third
eentury a.d. to Radhamohan Oosv&mi in the nineteenth, have
•attempted to evolve a harmonious system of Logic and Philosophy
from the Sutras. The task is an impossible one, and so every
-one of them has failed, and that miserably. They have imported
later and more modem ideas into the commentaries, but without
-success. The acute logicians of Bengal thought it was a diffi-
cult work ; and they had recourse to various shifts to explain the
Bha^ya and other commentaries. They have changed some
passages and imported extraordinary meanings into others.

But unfortunately the idea of studying the Sutras by them*
selves did not occur to any one of them. Ninety-nine per cent, of
ihe manuscripts of this work are accompanied with some comment-
ary or other. Manuscripts giving the Sfltras only are extremely
rare. I got one from Midnapore, and gave a copy of it to my
friend Dr. Yenis, and it was published at Benares. It is known as
the Nyayastltroddhfira. My friend Pa^iji^t YindhyeBvariprasada
Duve got one at Benares, and he published it in the Bibliotheca
Indica as an appendix to his edition of the Nyftyavftrtika. This
is known as NyftyasGcinibandha. But from what I know of the
habits of pa^4^^> 1 &in siu*e nobody has studied the StLtras by
themselves. Thev have been used only as works of reference.

I took up the Nyayasucinibandha for independent study.
On comparing the Sfttnts as given there with StLtras in editions
accompanied by commentaries, and also vnth the Nyayasutrod*
dhara, I was struck with the varietv of readings which the NySya
StLtras presented. A number of Sutras are regarded as spurious^
The readings of a large number of S&tras are irreconcilably
•different in different editions. This is not the case with the
Yedanta Sutras, and with the Mimai^sa Sutras, in which various
readings are exix^mely rare, almost non-existent, and interpolated
Sutras there are none. I am not speaking of the Saipkhya and
Yoga Sutras, which are comparatively modem. The difficulty
which I feel in regard to the Nyftya Sfttraa was also felt about a
thousand years ago, when Yacaspatimisra, who flourished about
the end of the tenth century, twice attempted to fix the number
of Sutras and their readings, namely, in Nyayasutroddhftra, and
in Ny&yasucinibandha, both of which go by his name. If both
are the works of one man, as they profess to be, it is apparent
that the author did not feel sure of his ground.

246 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [December, 1905;

For convenience sake, I took up the Njayasucinibandha
dated 898 Saka, i.e., 976 a.d., and that for three reasons,
— ( 1 ) because it counts the number of Sutras, number of
i^ords, and even the number of letters in the Nyiya Sutras ; (2)
because it divides the Sutras into sections, each dealing with a
single topic ; (3) and because it is dated, and there are internal
evidences to show that it was written by the great Vacaspati,.
the commentator on the six systems. I have made an English
translation of the Sutras with as little help from the commentaries
as possible.

The study of the Sutriis makes it apparent that works of two
different sciences have been mixed up. One is a work on
Logic, or rather the science of Reasoning, or, as Sadajiro
Sugiura terms it, '* science of discriminating true knowledge from
the false " ; and the other is a work on some system of philosophy.
The work on Logic is confined almost exclusively to the first
and the fifth chapters. I say almost, because some sections of the
second chapter also may belong to the Logic part. The rest of
the work with about eight Stltras in the first chapter belong to
the philosophical part.

Let us analyse the Logic section. This section seems to
contain three separate treatises. The first chapter, with the
exception of the Satras mentioned above, constitutes the first and
the most important treatise. It is complete in itself. The first
S&ti*a enumerates the sixteen topics essential in Debate, and
all the sixteen topics are fully treated of in the first chapter. It
is fnliy self-contained, and nothing farther is needed to complete
it. The first Sotra gives, so to say, the objects and I'easons for
the science. It says that anyone who has a complete knowledge
of the sixteeen topics attains the highest proficiency in every
walk of life, and the first chapter deals with the complete knowl*
edge of all the sixteen topics.

I may remnrk in passing thnt the science embodied in the-
first chapter of these Sutras is not Log^c, in the present signi-
fication of the term, but Logic in its primitive and rudimentary
stage. It may better be called the Science of Debate. And all
the requisites of a well-regulated Debate are included in the
sixteen topics. They are not always the requisites of the science of
Logic, as known at present. The second treatise on Logic, embodied
in the Sutras, is the first '* daily lecture '* of the fifth chapter. The^
Jast Sutra of the first chapter simply says that Jfttis and Points^
of Defeat are many, thus leaving no room for any elaborate
subdivision, of these two topics. But the first lecture of the fifth
chapter not only enumerates twenty-four subdivisions of the JAtis,
but gives careful definitions of every one of them. The author wha
wrote the first chapter is not the author of the first Lecture of
the fifth chapter. The last section of the first lecture of the
fifth chapter, which has nothing to do with definitions of the
subdivisions of Jitia, but which limits the extent of a fruitless
Debate, is no part of the second treatise, and seems to be an
addition. The third treatise consists of the second "daily lecture '*^

Vol. I, No. 10.1 'An Examination of the Nyaya-Sutrds. 247

[N.S.I

of chapter fifth. It enumerates the various Points of Defeat and
defines them.

One of the most cogent reasons for considering these trea-
tises as separate, and also for considering them to be composed by
different authors, is the fact that the same technical terms have
been used and defined in all the three, but in very different senses.
The Definition of JSti, as given in the first, does not cover all the
subdivisions enumerated in the second. The terms prakaranasama
and 8ddhyasama are defined among the '' Semblances of Reason *'
in the first treatise, but these two have been differently defined as
subdivisions of Jatis. The term matfinujiifl has been defined one
way in the second and another way in the third. If all the
three had been written by one and the same person, the same
technical terms would not receive at his hands two such wide
definitions.

It is difficult to say whether the composition of the second
and thiixi treatises preceded or followed that of the first treatise,
which is a comprehensive work on the Science of Debate. Many
scholars hold that such comprehensive treatises generally follow
separate and partial treatises on parts, just as the unndi-s&ti*as
and the gnna-sutras preceded Paiiini, and that these separate treatises
after the composition of the comprehensive treatise, formed its
appendices.

One would be tempted to believe that all the sections of the
first lecture ()f chapter second, with the exception of the last,
and the first and last sections of the second Daily Lectme of that
chapter, may be included in the Logical part, because they have a
direct i 'earing on pramana or the instruments of true knowledge,
which forms the fii*st essential topic in the Science of Debate.

The commentators and modem pandits, in order to make
this incoherent collection of Sutras a harmonious whole, are
obliged to say that the Nyayasutras consist of the enumeration,
the definition and the examination of the sixteen topics. The
enumeration is complete in the first Sutra, the definition in the
first chapter, and the examination in the other chapters. There
would have been no cause of complaint if all this were a fact.
The examination is, however not complete. It does not comprehend
all the sixteen topics. The topics examined in fact are the 1st,
2nd, 8rd, 15th, and 16th. The examination of others have been
altogether omitted. If there is any, it is of a very nebulous charac-
ter. So a complete examination of the sixteen topics is not to be
found in the Sutras, and this is exceedingly suspicious. The
•examinations are, as a rule, examinations of the definitions given in
Chapter I., at least so the commentators say. If so, the examina-
tion of Jati and of the Points of Defeat are not really the examina-
tion intended by the commentators. On the other hatid, in the
-case of Jati, we find that the definition as given in Chapter I.,
depending simply upon homogeneity and heterogeneity, does
not apply to a number of the subdivisions of Jatis as given in
Chapter V. The examination of other three topics, too, contains so.
much of heterogeneous matter, besides an examination of the

248 Jawmal of the Asiatic Society of BengaU [December, 1905*

definition, that one is tempted to say tbat the whole of the
examination a&iir, i.e., all the chapters II. to IV. are an addition.
So far about the Logic portion.

The Philosophy portion has its beginning in the second Sutra of
the first chapter. The first Sutra of Chapter I., as has been already
said, gives the objects and reasons of the work. And these
objects and reasons seem to be all secular. There was na
need for a second enunciation of the objects and reasons. But
the second Sutra again enunciates them. And in this case^
they are philosopicnl and spiritual. YacaspatimiSra puts the
two together in one section, and calls the section ^^ objects and
reasons.'' The commentators have tried to reconcile this double
enunciation of objects and reasons, but without success. The
only reasonable explanation of this double enunciation seems to
be that some later writer has interpolated the second Sutra with
a view to add philosophical sections to the work. The second
Sutra contains topics which are not enumerated in the first, and
the thoughtful reader is struck with the introduction of new
matter so early as in the second Sutra. These topics are misery ^
birth, activity and fault together with " apavarga.** The intro-
duction of these new topics is defended by saying that they fall
under the subdivisions of the second topic, in the first Sutra^
namely, " objects of true knowledge.'* " The object of true knowl-
edge '' is a topic which is so vast that all the topics of the world
may come under its subdivisions. And, as a result of this, the
interpolator has tampered with the definition of prameya (Sutra I.
1*9) which is virtually an enumeration of its subdivisions, and put
in five new topics into it. That the prameyasutra at one time was
different from what it is now, is apparent from the statement of
Haribhadrasuri, a Jain writer, who in his Qa^darSana samuccaya
describes the prameyasutra in the following terms : —

^W ^IW^^I^ jilPmU^lf^ ^t (Bibliotheca Indica edition),

or, as in the Benares edition, 1|W ^KH^^I^ W^ftftjT'^TfW ^. The

order of words is different; sukba or happiness seems to have
been included in the old prameyasutra Snkha finds no place in
that Sutra now and in Chapter lY., Ahnika I., the Section 13 on
the examination of du^kha, reduces sukha into duhkha, and is not
prepared to admit sukha as a separate subdivision of prameya.
But from Haribhadra's statement we find that sukha was there at
some early time. Now the question is, who changed the Sutras
and why ? The answer is not far to seek. In a work on Logic
prameya, as a topic, must come in. But Logic does not require a
long enumeration of prameyas and an elaborate examination of
their details, which are essential in philosophy. So the author
who wanted to convert a logical treatise into a system of
philosophy, iind who is responsible for the interpolation of the
second Sutra is also responsible for this alteration in the
prameyasuti^ The logical treatise was an ancient Hindu
treatise, and Hindus never took an ultra-pessimistic view of the
world. Sukha is the ultimate goal of the Mfmaipsakas, of the

Vol. I, No. 10«] An Examination of the Ny^ya-Siitras, 24^

Vedantins, the two really orthodox systems of Hind a philosophy.
Why should Nyaya be so pessimistic P There is no reason
for it, and it has been shown that the word sukha did at one
time occur in the prameyastttra. The Buddhists are downright
pessimists. To them ererything is du^kha, and it is they who
believed that sukha was, if properly analysed, du^kha. It seems
that the Hindu logical treatise underwent the first stage of its
philosophical transformation in the hands of some Buddhist phil*
osopher, and became a gloomy and pessimistic science. The second
Sutra of the first chapter, destroying so many things successively
and reaching to apavarga, has the appearance of Buddhistic
teaching. They enumerate a long series of effects from false
knowledge, and teach us that as we destroy effects, we perceive-
the causes, that these causes are also effects ; we destroy them and
gradually we come to the original cause of all these, namely,
false knowledge ; when that is destroyed we come to nirvana.
This is precisely the teaching of the second Sfiira, though the
enumeration is not so long. The Buddhist tradition, as we know
it from China and Japan, distinctly savs that the Logic of
Akyapada was their handbook in logic, and that tliey added to and
subtracted £rom it. The tradition is positive that Mirok mixed up
NySya and Yoga, and we find in the present Nyayasutra a long
section on Yoga in lY. 2, and one is puzzled to know why it has
been introduced. The grounds advanced by Hindu commentators
for its introduction are of the flimsiest kind. But the fact
comes from China that Mirok mixed the two up. So some other
Buddhist philosophers might have introduced the second Sutra
and changed the prameyasutra so as to suit his purpose.

That the science of Ak^apada was, for a long time, in the
hands of the Buddhists, and, therefore, not in great favour with
the Brahmanist, will appear from the following considerations.
The Ramaya^a, the Mahabharata, the Purapas, and even the
DharmaaStras dislike those who studied the TarkaSastra.
The VedantasHtras distinctly say that this science was not
accepted by the orthodox. They are known as little removed
from the Buddhists— the Buddhists are nihilists, thev are half
nihilists (ardhavainasika). That there was an unholy alliance
between the NySya and the Buddhists in the early centuries of
Buddhism, is not open to grave doabts. The introduction of the
second Sutra, the alterations in the prameyasutra, and the
definitions of misery, birth or rebirth, activity, faults, and
emancipation in the first chapter appear to be the work of Bud«
dhists. The examination of these definitions occupy the whole of
the first Lecture of the fourth chapter.

The work underwent another transformation in the hands of
a later Hindu sect who vigorously assailed some of the prominent
Buddhist doctrines, both Mahayanist and Hinayanist. These
avssailed SarvadBttnvatavada on the one hand, and Sarvftstvftda
on the other. To kuow who they were not, one has simply to
ca^t his eves on the various theories that have been assailed
in connexion with the examination of rebirth. These are

250 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [December, 1905.

i^mcjlHi^i^, t^Om^i^, ^mftww, ^^ffftwn, ^•^(iimn, ^4n^,

^hp^lg ^Wl^^l^ i But this gives ns no clue to the identi-

ficatiou of the sect, save and except that they were non-Buddhists.
Haribhadra, however, tells as that these were Saivas and Hari-
bhadra belongs to the fifth century of the Christian era.

Haribhadra's statement is borne out by two facts. Sutra 8,
Chapter I., seems to be out of place. The pramanas are defined
in the four previous Sutras, and, all of a sudden, comes a Sutra
subdividing Sabda ; subdivisions of 8abda are unknown in other
systems of philosophy. It is generally translated by the word,
** dogma." The distinctions between the Bevealed Word and the
Ordinary Word is peculiar to the Nyayasntras. It is not Buddhis-
tic, because thev did not know of this subdivision. And in the
fifth century, they discarded dogma altogether. Moreover, the
introduction of this Sutra explains the introduction of the section,
on the authority of the Vedas, and along with it, of a quarrel with
the Mimaipsakas on the eternity of sound.

All this seems to be the work of a Hindu sect which we take
to be the Saivas at the instance of Haribhadra. These are a
compromise between the Hindus and the Buddhists.

So the present NyayasGtras consist of three treatises on Logic.
And the bit of Hindu systems of philosophy that it contained has
been mixed up with two other systems of philosophy, which have
been laterly interpolated into the book.

Even after a careful examination, I do not find the Nine
Beasons and Fourteen FaUacies attributed to Ak^pada by the
Chinese authorities. There are chapters on fallacies and * homo-
geneity, and heterogeneity ' play an important part in the Nyaya-
sutras. But yet no "Nine Reasons'* and "Fourteen Fallacies."
Perliaps tlie primitive work of Ak^apada was systematised in
very early times by another person na^led Gotama. But this
is diving too deep into the antiquity of Hindu thought, and our
appliances are not sufficient for the purpose.

Vol. 1, No. 10.] Optimism in Ancient NyHytt, 251

35. Optimism in Ancient Nyaya, — By Vanamali VedantatIrtha.

In the interesting paper "A study of_the Nyfija-Sutras,"
which Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasada Sa^trl read in the
Asiatic Society's Meeting in November 1905, I was delighted to
find him advocating, with veiy cogent arguments, that the original
Ny^ya-Sutraa were not pessimistic. Nowadays Nyaya Philosophy
means NyayavaiSe^ika, and the philosophic pixjd notions of the
modem Naiyayikas are really VaiSe^ika Philosophy in a Naiya-
yika garb. The terminology and the method are Naiyayika, but
the philosophy is, nevertheless, VaiSepika. Thus the pessi-
mism of the modem Naiyayika is due not to his Nyaya, but to
his VaiSe^ika, from which he does not know how to distinguish
his Nyaya. The well-known couplet

makes the YaiSe^ika salvation consist in an unconscious, pleasui'e-
less, painless existence. This is as it should be. But when
Sriha^a makes Gotama (otherwise called Ak^apada) responsible
for a pessimistic doctrine of salvation, be seems to have uncriti-
cally stated the common opinion of his time. Says he —

^^ nx ftj^amm wm^ «%cf^T?{ i
lit^ji fppck^ (j^) ^ ^niT ftw <t^ ^: g

(Naisadha XVII., 75.)

The following extracts fi^om the Saipksepa-Sankai-ajaya of
Madhavacfirya will substantiate the Sa^tri's view. It shows
that even the comparatively recent Madhava was not unacquain-
ted with the fact that the Naiyayika salvation was really optimis-
tic and included an element of pleasui*e, though it was vulgarly
identified with the VaiSe^ika salvation. Whether the author
was or was not the celebrated Madhavacarya, the minister
of the Bukka family of Vijaynagar, is immaterial to the argument.
For what is contended hei-e is that even in such a late pnxiuction
as the Sak^epa Sankara-jaya, which professedly is an abstract
of a larger life of Saukara, the Naiyayikas are credited with an
optimistic view of salvation.

252 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

(Saipk^epa SaAkarajaya XVI., 68-69).

Says the Naiyayika vauntingly (to SaDkara) : " If you are
omniscient, state the difference between the theories of salvation as
held by Ka^ada and by Ak$apada. Otherwise give up your
pretensions to omniscience." (Replies SaQkara) '^According to
Kapada, salvation is existence, where all connexion with attributes
has been absolutely destroyed, and the soul remains like the sky.
According to your Ak^apada that salvation includes a conscious*
ness of pleasure."

Sankara, the great Advaita commentator on the Brahma*
Butras, went to S&rada-pitha in KaSmira, and before he could
enter into the shrine, he was questioned by different philosophers
on nice points of Indian Philosophy. Permission to enter was
conditional upon answering these questions rightly. The two
couplets quoted above occur just after Sankara had successfully
answered the atomic philosopher (Kapftda).

From what has been said, it will be evident that though
sukha or pleasure is not enumerated as a separate prameya in
Nyayasutra (I. 1. 9), as known at present, and though section 13
of the first ahnika of the fourth chapter reduces it to mere pain, yet
it (pleasure) had a place in the old Nyaya Sii$tra, and that the
true tradition was not lost in such out-of-the-way places as thef
arada pitha in KaSmira, and that only such great masters as
Sankara were expected to know it, the tradition having been lost
in the mainland of India much earlier.

. ^ -^ ^ V '

Vol. I, No. 10.1 The Dates of Suhandhu aiid Di^-nilga. 25a

[KB.]

36. Some Notes on the Dates of Suhandhu and Dtn-ndya. — By

HaRAPRASID S^lSTRI.

Since the publication of an edition of the Yasavadatta bj
Edward Hall, in the Bibliotheca Indica, in 1859, the date of its
author is taken to be either the end of the sixth century or the
beginning of the seventh. The reason assigned hy Hall for
arriving at this conclusion is the fact that Bai]ia in the beginning
of the seventh century mentions Sabandhu as one of his prede-
cessors.

However unsatisfactory the reason might be, the Orientalists
have accepted the above date for Suhandhu. The question, how-
ever, is still an open one ; and here are facts which may be taken
for what they are worth.

In discoursing on the excellencies of style, Yamana, who
belongs to the ninth century A.U., in his Kavyalaukara Sutra
Vftti, quotes a verse as an example of the excellency named
Significance (sabhiprayatva ) .

The verse or rather hemistich runs thus : —

^' The celebrated son of Gandra^pta, the young raja Candra-
praksa, has become the refuge of learned men, and fortunately
his labours are successful."

Commenting on this the author says, that the words, *' the
i-efuge of learned men," are significant, been use they bring to
mind the fact that Suhandhu was one of his ministers.

Now, there were two Candraguptas in the Gupta line; both
were called Yikramaditya. The first was the founder of the
empii*e and the second his grandson. The second Gandragupta
was a patron of learned men. Is it not likely that Suhandhu
served under one of his sons, GandraprakaSa ?

It is an old custom among Indian sovereigns to appoint their
adult sons to rule extensive territories, and these Princes used
to hold courts on the model of their imperial fathers This
GandraprakaSa seems to have done with Suhandhu as oue of
his ministers.

As Candi*agupta's inscriptions range from 400 to 414 a.d.,
Suhandhu must nave flourished about that time, i.e., in the
beginning of the fifth century.

There may be an objection to this, that in some MSS»
the woi*d is not Suhandhu but Yastubandhu. But there is no such
name as Yastubandhu in the history of Sanskrit literature, so
far as it is known. Yastubandhu may be a corruption of
Yasubandhu who flourished about this time; but he was a
Buddhist monk who would not accept office and would not be
spoken of with favour by a Hindu writer. Yastubandhu is only,
I believe, a scribe's mistake for Suhandhu.

254 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

There is a passage hi Sabandhu's own work Vasavadatta
whicli seems to confirm my conclusion. In the preface to his
Vasavadatta, he regrets that on the death of Yikramaditja, new
people came to the front, the old taste for poetry was gone, and
everyone's hand was at his neighbour's throat. It seems that on
the death of Candragnpta there was a civil war, and Subandhn
came to grief, by supporting a losing cause. The successor of
Candragnpta Yikramaditya was Kumaragnpta and not Candra-
prakaSa.

Kern in his " Indian Bnddhism " pnts down Dinnaga between
520 and 600 a.d. The Chinese think that he flourished in
the tenth century of the Buddhist era, i.e., between 420 and 520
A 0. Takakusu, in his paper on the date of Vasubandhn, has
shown from the dotted Buddhist records left by Indian
pandits in Chinese monasteries, that the date of Buddha's death
is very nearly the same as has been arrived at by the Orientalists
of Europe, viz., 480. b.c.

I have got a quotation from Diiinaga's work in Haribhadra's
famous work entitled " Sa4dari$ana Samuccaya." He says that the

definition of Pratyak^a or perception is ^VI^IHlf 44MI^— and he

also says that tlie Buddhists believe only in two sources of right
knowledge. It is well known that Dinnaga discarded Sabda,
or dogma, from the sources of right knowledge, and fixed the
number of these sources at two; and Dinnaga's definition of

Pratj^aktfia is known to be ^dOTTS^ftT^nirT^. So the quotation is
from Dinnaga.

Haribhadra was one of the great Jaina writers whose date
of death is fixed by the universal tradition amongst the Jainas, at
535 Vikrama samvat, i.e., 479 a.d. The dates are given in
two Prakfta gathas, in pp. 372 and 378, vol. iv. Peterson's
Reports.

A study of Haribhadra's work confirms the idea that he
belonged to about the fifth century a.d. He does not know
Vedanta as a system of Philosophy. He enumerates the following
as the six systems : —

Bauddha, Naiyayika, Samkhya, Jaina, Yai^e^ika and Mimani-
saka. But, says he, if one considers Naiyayika and Yaise^ika
to be one and the same system, to him the sixth would be the
Carvaka. All these stamp him as flourshing before the rise of
Yedanta and Yoga. His MimaipsS does not show any sign that
he knew Kumarila.

If Haribhadra, before 479 A.n., quotes from Dinnaga and
adopts his view as universally accepted by Buddhists, Dinnaga
must have flourished some time before him.

Sadajira Sugiura, who writes a monograph on Hindu Logic
as presei*vedin China and Japan, says that the name of Dinnaga's
teacher is not known. But Kern says he was a pupil either of
Asanga or of Vasubandhu — two brothers who distinguished them-
selves as Mah&yanist writers. Tftkakusu places Vasubandhu in
the reign of Skandagupta, and his son Baladitya in the seventies

Vol. I, No. 10.] The Dates of Suhandhu and DU-naga. 256-

and eighties of the fifth century a.d. This, I think, is untenable.
Takaloisu makes two initial mistakes: (1) Skandagupta is not
Vikramaditya but Kramaditja; and (2) he was not succeeded by
Baladitya but by Pura Gupta.

If we take the Yikramaditya mentioned by T&kakusu to be
Candragupta, who is really called Yikramaditya in his coins, and
Baladitya for his heir-apparent Kumaragupta, then the account by
T&kAkusu and that by Haribhadra can be reconciled. Baladliya
is not a proper name : it simply means " the young Sun,*' the
heir-apparent. If this view of the thing is accepted. Dinnaga,
the pupil either of Vasubandhu or of Asanga, would write his
books in the first quarter of the fifth century ; and by the time
Haribhadra wrote, they would be well-known works.

Candragupta Yikramfiditya seems to have had two sons —
Candrapraka^ and Baladitya ; of these Baladitya favoured the
Buddhists and succeeded to the throne, while Gandraprakft^ was
worsted in civil war and his minister Suhandhu complained
that " new men " came to the front, the old taste for poetry was
gone, and everyone's hand was at his neighbour's throat.

266 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

37. Formation of New Oastes. — By R. Burn, I.C.S.

An interesting example of the constant movement going on among
Hindu castes Has recently been brought to m j notice. Among the
numerous endogamous groups included in the term Yai^ya or Bania
are two known as Barahseni and Chauseni, the members of which
are chiefly found in the Central Doab. The former claim descent
from the Chandravansi King Bra^i^i, while one account of the
latter traces their origin to Chanur, a wrestler attached to the
Court of Raja Kans who was slain by Kri$na. There seems little
doubt that neither group is in reality of any considerable antiquity.
While thfe Barahsenis are shopkeepers and frequently confectioners,
they were, till recently, only allowed to sell articles made up of
milk and curds, such as pera, harft, etc., and not sweetmeats contain-
ing flour or grain such as puri and halwS. The Chausenis are
usually regarded as a class composed of illegitimate children of
Barahsenis or outcastes from that group.

Two events have, however, recently happened which show
that the Chausenis are rising in importance and now object to
receive recruits in the usual manner. The Hindu Bftrahsenis
have already reached the stage at which widow remarriage is no
longer recognized. Some members have, however, joined the
Arya Samaj, and a marriage was lately celebrated between a
Barahseni man and a widow of the same group. When the
project was announced, the orthodox Hindus held a meeting and
endeavoured to stop further proceedings, but without success.
Two days after the marriage another meeting was held, and the
married couple and those who aided them were solemnly ex-
communicated. A printed notice has been widely circulated
directing all Barahsenis to avoid dining, marrying, drinking or
holding any communication with those outcasted. A large feast
was subsequently held, at which about 4,000 orthodox Barahsenis
were present, but to which none of the guilty members were
invited. The feeling has gone so far that some men whose sons
had previously married into families now outcasted have re-
called their daughters-in-law, and refuse to let them visit their
parents. Others have turned their own daughters out of their
houses as they are married to outcastes.

The other case differs in nature. A Barahseni, A^ has a
daughter who was married to B. B abandoned his wife and
kept a Musalman woman by whom he had several children, and
it was thought that he had become a Musulman. He recently
came to A and claimed his wife, and was entertained by his
father-in-law. A has, therefore, been outcasted, and was not
invited to the caste feast which celebrated the expulsion of those
concerned with the remanaage of a widow.

The question now arises, what is to become of the persons
outcasted r Up to a recent date they would have been received
by the Chausenis. This group, however, refuses to admit them,
as an important section of it has refused to recognize widow
marriage, and even the rest of the group look on the practice

Vol.|T, No. 10.] Formation of New Castes. 257

INS.-]

with growing disfayonr. The outcastes in the first ease themselves
refuse to be considered as Ghausenis on the ground that the widow
remarriage took place between persons of the same caste, while
degradation is only effected where a connection takes place be-
tween members of different castes. The Ghausenis refuse to
accept A and fi, because they hold that the contact with Musal-
mans has rendered them unfit for any relations. So far, no final
decision has been arrived at, and the result is that the excommu-
nicated persons are regarded as having no caste at all. It is not
improbable that the persons turned out for their connection with
the widow remarriage will form a separate group.

258 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

38. Ascaris halicoris Baird. — By Dr. V. Linstow. Commnmcafed

by N. Annandale.^ (With 1 plate).

Aus der Pars pylorica des Magens von Halicare duyong Qnoy
& Gaim. Golf von Manaar.

Owen, Oatalogue of the Physiological Series of Oomparative
Afiatomy, London, 1833.

Owen, Proc. Zool, Soc , London, VI., 1838, p. 30.

Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc, London, XXVIL, 1859, pp. 148-149,
tab. Ivi, figs. 2-2c.

Parona, Annah Mus. Oivic. Ghnova, 2 ser., VII., Genova,
1889, pp. 751-761, fig. 1-3, tab. xiii, figs. 1-16.

Stiles u. Hassall, Intern. Paras, of the Fur Seal^ Washing^n^
1899, pp. 147-151, figs. 70-75.

Aus dem Magen von Halicore dugong ; Penang, Rothes Meer,
Assab.

Die Art hiess friiher Ascaris halicoris Owen, aber Owen*s
Bezeichnnng vom Jahi'e 1833 ist ein blosser Catalog-Name ohne
jede Beschreibnng ; anch im Jahre 1838 sagt er nur : " in each case
file gland (des Magens von Halicore dugong) was infested by
Ascarides, hereafter* to be described " ; er hat aber eine solche
Beschreibnng nicht gegeben.

Die erste Beschreibnng, anch unter dem Namen Ascaris
halicoris, stammt von Baird, der die Lange des Mannchens anf
63*5 mm, die des Weibchens anf 82 '5 mm. angiebt, nnd die Vulva
des Weibchens in f der Korperlange vom Kopfende findet.

Eine eingehendere Beschx'eibung lieferte erst Parona ; er
giebt an, dass das Mannchen 85-115 mm. lang ist, am Schwanzende
stehen jederseits 4 prae- nnd 1 post-anale PapiUe nnd die Spicula
sind kurz ; das Weibchen hat eine Lange von 85-144 mm. und
eine Breite von 3* 5 mm ; die Vulva liegt an der Grenze vom 1-
und 2 Drittel des Korpers ; die Vagina ist 6*5 mm., die Uteri sind
29 mm. lang ; eine blinddarmartige Verlangerung des Darms
verlauft nach vom neben dem Osophagus und hat \^ der Lange
desselben ; Paeona giebt Durchschnitte der Korperwandung mit
der Muskulatur, dem Dorsalfeld und dem Lateralfeld, letzteres
mit dem in ihm verlaufenden ExcretionsgefiLss, Durchschnitte der
3 Lippen, des Osophagus, des Darms, des Blinddarms, des-
Ovarium, des Uterus und des Hodens.

Stiles und Hassall haben die Art nicht untersucht; sie
referiren fiber die Beschreibungen Baird' s und Parona's, und
reproduciren einen Theil der Abbildungen derselben.

Parona's Schilderung kann ich mehrfach erganzen und die
Ezemplare, welche meinen Untersuchungen zu Grunde lagen

[^ Dr. yon LinBtow has been kind enough to send nie the aooompanjing
not« on the Bound Worm of the Dugong. It appears that no oommu*
nication hns previously been published in German by the Asiatic Society of
Bengnl ; but it has been felt that the work of so distinguished an authority
should be issued etaotly as it was received. No student of the Nematodes
can be ignorant of the contents of Dr. von Linstow's numerous and invaluable
contributions to the literature of the group. — N. A.]

Vol. I, No. 10.] Asm r is Halianis Baird. 259

[jsr.^f.]

verdanke ich der Giite des Dr. N. Ax nan dale, Deputy Superinten-
dent of the Indian Museum in Calcutta.

Die Farbe der Nematoden soil im Leben eine griinliehe sein.
Beide Korperenden sind vei^diinnt, und Kopf und Schwanzende
sind abgerundet.

Die Cuticula ist in Abstanden von 0*016 mm. regelmassig
quergeringelt ; eine gr6bei*e, tiefere Querringelung findet sich in
Entfemungen von 028— 035 mm., und in den beiden Seitenlinien
Bteben. in Intervallen von 079 mm. vertiefte schwarz-pigmentirte
Querfurcben.

Die Leitenfelder haben eine Breite von \-^ des Durchmessers
und Bchimmein als weisse Strange durch die Cuticula bindurcb.

Die drei Lippen sind obne Zwiscbenlippen, Zabnleisten und
Loffelbildung ; die Dorsallippe ist 0*45 mm. lang und 0*48 mm.
breit ; die grosste Breite liegt etwas vor der Mitte ; die Form ist
gleicbmassig abgerundet, die Pulpa bildet 2 rundlicbe Yorspriinge
nacb vom, die jeder einen kleinen fingerformigen Auslaufer nach
innen, nicbt weit vom Vorderrande, haben; die Papillen stehen
im vorderen Drittel und sind weit nach aussen geruckt.

Der Osophagus nimmnt -f ~ ? ^^^ Gesammtlange ein und ist
0*59 mm. breit ; der 0*51 mm. breite Dann sendet eine blinddarm-
artige Verlangening nach vom, die an der Dorsalseite des Osopha-
gus verlttuft und langer als die Halfte des letzteren ist.

Das Mannchen erreicht eine Lange von 115 mm., und eine
Breite von 3'16 mm. ; das Schwanzende, welches -^^ der Gesammt-
lange einnimmt, ist ventral eingebuchtet ; an demselben stehen
jederseits in grosseu Abstanden 4 prae- und 3 post- anale Papillen ; .
die vorderste der pi*ae-analen steht 4*9 mm. vom Schwanzende
entfemt ; das 0*19 mm. breit« Vas defei'ens schwillt 4'7 mm. vor
der Cloakenoffnung zu einer spindelfoimigen 062 mm. breiten
Samenblase an ; die beiden Siiren sind fast gerade, an der Wurzel
knopffOrmig veidickt und 158 mm. lang bei einer Breite von
0*079 mm. Sie verlaufen in einem Musculus protrusor, der sie mit
einer Scheide rings umgiebt, und konnen von einem Musculus
i^etractor zurlickgezogen werden. Das dickwandige Vas deferens
ist aussen gebildet von einer Ringmuskellage, an der innen ein sehr
breites gekemtes Epithel steht ; auch der Ductus ejaculatorius hat
im Innem hohe gekemte Epithelzellen.

Das Weibchen wird 140 mm. lang und 3 '95 mm. breit ; das
Schwanzende nimmt ^^p der ganze Thierlange ein ; die Vulva
theilt die Lange von voni nach hinten im Verhaltniss von 14-29.
liegt also an der Gi^enze von 1. und 2. DritteL Die Vagina ist
4*75 mm. lang und 0*39 mm. breit ; sie ist sehr dickwandig und
lasst nnter der Hiillmembran eine breite gekemte Ringmuskel-
Bchicht erkennen ; dann folgt eine homogene Lage und nach innen
▼on dieser eine breite Auskleidungsmembran mit Langsleisten.
Die Vagina theilt sich in 2 Uteri, die 1*07 mm. breit sind ; unter
der dicken Hiillmembitin liegt eine gekemte Ringmuskelschicht,
innen von dieser eine granulirte Lage mit kleinen Kemen und
nach innen von dei- letzteioi eine Schicht sehr kleiner hjaliner
kugelformiger gekemter Koi'peiieheii. Die Uteri verschmalem

260 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [December, 1906.

sich am Ende anf 024 m.m. und gehen in ein gestreckt eiformiges
Receptacnliim seminis von 1'78 mm. Lange und 0*69 mm. Bi^eite
liber, das an seiner Innen-wand rundliche gekemte Epithelzellen
tragi ; dann folgt eine 4'3 mm. lange und 0'24 mm. breite Tuba,
welcbe ausser der Hiillmembran nur aus einer selir machtigen
gekemten Bingmuskulatur besteht, und auf diie Tuba folgt das
0*39 mm. breit^, sebr lange, vielfach gewundene Ovarium.

Die Eier sind kugelrund und O'lS mm. gross ; die Schale ist
dick und aussen dicht mit unregelmassigen Eindriicken bedeckt,
die bald rundlicb, bald viereckig, bald dreieckig und bald linien-
formig sind.

Erkldrung der Ahhildungen.

Fig. 1. Dorsallippe.

Fig. 2. Mannliches Scbwanzende von der linken Seite.

Fig. 3. Querschnitt durcb das Vas deferens.

Fig. 4. Querschnitt durcb die Vagina.

Fig. 5. u XJterus-Ende ; r Receptaculum seminis ; t Tuba ;

o Theil des Ovarium.
Fig. 6. Querschnitt des Uterus.
Fig. 7. Theil eines Uterus-Querschnitts (starker vergros-

sert).
Fig. 8. Querschnitt der Tuba.

Fig. 9. Theil eines Querschnitts des Receptaculum seminis.
Fig. 10. Vas^a mit dem Beginn der beiden Uteri.

Vol. I, No, 10.] Numismatic Supptement VI. 261

[.V.6f.]

39. NUMISMATIC SUPPLEMENT VI.

N.B. — The enumeration of these articles is continued from page 135

of the Journal for 1905.

II.— MEDIEVAL INDIA,
42. A Hoard of Rajput coins pound in the Gabhwal District.

The following analysis of a hoard of Rajput coins fonnd at
Lansdowne, in the Garhwal District of the United Provinces, is of
some interest, both on account of the contents of the hoard and on
account of the place of its discovery.

The circumstances of the find cannot be better described than
in the words of the owner, Major M. B. Roberts, 1/39 Garhwal
Rifles. In a letter to the British Museum, dated 29th May, 1905,
he says : —

" The following is the history of the finding of these coins:

My Regiment is permanently stationed at Lansdowne (a

cantonment which came into existence on 4th November, 1887 ) in
the Garhwal District of the United Provinces of Agra and Oadh
(late North- Western Provinces). The station is situated on the
outer range of the Himalayas between 5,000 or 6,000 feet above
fiea level, and lies just about half-way between Naini Til and
Mussoorie. The district is populated for the most part by Rajputs,
who were supposed to have immigrated there from Rajputina at
various perioas up to about l,0iOO years ago, I believe. On the
22nd October last, whilst having a building site for my house ex-
cavated on the top of the ridge, a number of these coins, all exactly
alike, were discovered buried in a small earthenware pot about two
feet below the surface. Unfortunately the earthenware pot was
broken into minute fragments by the pickaxe."

The coins were 157 in number ; they were of copper, often show-
ing traces of silverplating, and they were all of the well-known
Rajput types *^ the bull and horseman." They are distributed as
follows : —

TomQra Dynasty of Behli and Qanauj,

No.
£allak9a9a-Pala Deva, A.D. 978-1003.^

(v. Ounningham, Coins of Mediasval India^ page 88,

Jr 1* x.*k,» x) ••• ••• •«• O

AnaAga-Pala Deva, A.D. 1049-1079.
{find, page 85, PL IX. 4 and 5)

••« •••

RUhtor Dynasty of Qanauj,

Madana-Pala Deva, A.D. 1080-1115.

{ibid, page 85, PI. IX. 15) ♦.• ••• 39

I The*dtices given are tliose of CaiiDingbam.

262 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905,

OhauhUn Dynasty of Ajmir and Dehli.

Some*vara Deva, A.D. 1162-1166.

{thid. page 86, PL IX. 9 ) ... ... 21

Eajputs of Nancar.

Chaha^a Deva, A.D. 1234-1256.

(Thomas, PathSns^ p&ge 70, referred to but not

illustrated in Gnnningbam, op. cit, page 92) 72

Coins not completely identified,

(cf. Cunningham, op, dt, page 88) ... ... 14

Total ... 157

It will be seen that the coins, which are at the same time both
the most numerous and the latest in date, are those of Ghahaijia
Deva ; and it is, therefore, not unreasonable to suggest that the-
hoard was most probably concealed during his reign.

An excellent summary of the chief events of the reign of
Ghahada Deva is to be found in Thomas, Pa^^dns, page 67fP. His
position seems to have been that of " the recognised leader and
lord paramount of the Hindu princes of Gentral India, struggling
to preserve their kingdoms from the foreign invader " (op. cit.
page 68). He is described in an inscription of his descendant Ga^a-
pati (Vikrama 1355, A.D. 1298) as the founder of a family of
Rajput princes reigning at Nalapura (Narwar),^ and his coins of
the Narwar type bear dates varying from 129aj to 1311 Vikrama
(A.D. 1233-1- a; to 1254)*; but such of his coins as occur in the
persent hoard are not of the well-known Narwar type, and they
would certainly seem to indicate some extension of his dominion.
Ajmir would be a far more probable attribution for these coins,
though the varieties of Rajput coinage have not yet been studied-
with sufficient minuteness to enable us in most cases, to deter-
mine their different localities with precision.^ All that can be said
with certainty in regard to the locality of these coins is that they'
do not belong to Narwar, the characteristic types of which are
quite different.

As Thomas points out (page 70), the coins bearing the name
of Ghaha4ft Deva represent him either (1) as an independent sov-
ereign, or (2) as a tributary to the Muhammadan conqueror, Shams-
ud-din Altamsh. All the seventy-two coins of his which are in-
cluded in this hoard belong to the former class ; and we may

1 Indian AntiqXMry, XXII, p. 81.

S Cunningham, Ooint of Medissval India^ p. 90, PI. X. 6-7.

S Cunningham (op. dt, p. 91) attributes these coins to Banthambhor.
But if the Qlu^nologieal t&Jt>le given by Thomns, p. 46, is ooneot, Bantham-
bhor was captured by Altamsh in Hejira 628- A.D. 1226; and Oh&hafa*
deva seems not to be heard of before A.D. 1234 (Thomas, p. 67).

VoL I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VL 263

[jsr.fif.]

perhaps conclude that the hoard was buried in the earlier part of
his reign before the date of his submission to Altamsh.

Major Roberts has noticed the tradition which is still preserved
of immigrations of the population from Bajputana to Garhwal.
It is exb^emely probable that the Muhammadan conquests were
one of the chiei causes of such immigrations ; and the hoard, which
we have examined, may, therefore, be regarded as an historical
record of considerable interest.

It remains only to add that, through the generosity of Major
Roberts, specimens of each variety represented in the hoai^d have
been added to the collection of the British Museum.

British Museum : E. J, Rapson.

45. IV.— MUGHAL EMPERORS.

Some rark Mughal Coins.
(i) Akhar.

Weight, 306 grains.

Size, *84 inch.

Date, 981 in Persian words.

Obverse. ^^^ ^atj^iu^

Reverse. .5^^-** {San-i-Nuksad has^tdd wa yak)

Fulus of Akbar from the Dehli Mint with the title Hazrat are
known, but this FulUs bears the full title Ddr-ul-Mulk Hazrat^
which we^meet on Humayun's Fulus.

(ii)

Weight,\lb4i grains.

Size, 'i inch.

Date, 965 in Persian words.

Obverse. tjjj^ (Zarh Fulus

j'lf- Hissdr Firota)

264 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [December, 1 905.

o^aA JU vijtj {8an-i-TdHkh

Reverse. *i-*» Nuhsad Shasht,)

«>-A^ {wa) Panj).

This Fuliis (hitherto unpublished) weighs 154 grains, and i&
therefore half a DOm or half a Fulus,

There is an eight-rayed star just to tlie right of sS of v^^

(iii) Farrukhsiyar.

JE.

Weight, 100 grains.

Size, '75 inch.

Mint, Bahadur garh. ?

No date.

»
(ihveme. jir^ 9^j9

Reverse. 5 *;' J«^^

This is a new mint in copper of this king. As the word Bah&*
dur is found engraven on this Fuliis, it is open to question whe-
ther it is (1) Bahadargarh, (2) Baha«lurpatan, or (3) Bahadarpdr.
I was fortunate in getting this coin as a present from my kind friend
Mr. Cowasjee Eduljee Kotwall of this place, along with some
rubbings of copper Fulus of the same king. On one of the rub-
bings 1 read distinctly the mint (Bah)adurgarh.

(iv) Jahdnddr Shah.

Weight, 166 grains.

Size, '75 inch.

Mint, Darn-s-Saltanat Burhanpur.

Date, Ahad A^l

Obverse. Portions of the usaal legends.

»'^ j->t* ^^ *^ ^} i3^ j^

in three lines.

Reverse.

Vol. I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VL 265

[N.S.']

Hitherto coins are known to have been issued from the Bur-
hanpur Mint either without, or with one of its titles — viz.^ Baldat

VJii Buldai-i'Fakhira »^li i^h and DarU'S'Sarurjjjm)])]^. This

mohr adds a new epithet to this mint.

(v) Bafiu-d-Darjflt.
JEl.

Weight, 170 grains.
Size, •92 inch.

Mint, Zinat-ul-Bulad Ahmadabad.
Dafe, 11(31) A.H.

Obverse. Couplet in three lines thus —

The Hijri year is at the right of the top line.

irii."

Beverse.

^y\jo oi*i* yj^ji^

I hare had a rupee similar in desi^^n to this gold mohr pre-
sented by my kind friend Dr. Geo. P. Taylor, of Ahmadabad.
It was Dr. Taylor who pointed out, for the first time, that
Akmud6bdd, like other epithets, was associated also with the
title Zinat-ul-Bulad (the Beauty of Towns). Ft^ his interest-
ing article on "Coins of Ahmadabad,** pages 436-437, Plate V.
Vohime XX. No. LVI, Journal Bombay B.R.A. Society.

P. J. ThAnawIla,

Bombay.

44. A New Typk of thk Coins ok Shah ShujI*.

The coin described below lias recently been acquired for the
Lucknow Museum from a find in the Banda District.

OhnTst'. Beverse.

A* »uc

Margin doubtful.
M. Weight, 143. Hize, '7^ inch

266 Journal of the Asiatic Society of JhngaL [December, 1906.

No coins of Shah Shaja are recorded in the catalogues of the
Calcutta and Lahore Museums. The British Museum Catalogue
described two coins (Nos. 690 and 691). The reading of the
new coin differs from these in the case of the reverse. There
is no trace of a square area, and in this respect the new coin
resembles the early issues of Shah Jahan. The horizontal mark
below the first line is probably part of the word »U», and the similar
mark above the last line is possibly ^j^i the completion of the word
aI| which commences in the last line. I cannot explain the letter
read as j which comes between dli and isj^ in the first line. The

reading of the last line suggests that the lower mai'gin of the re-
verse on both the coins described in the B.M. catalogue should

read »UjaIC.». In Coin No. 690 it is read aU ( » )^ ( I ) which

is historically improbable. The Hght margin of Coin No. 691 is

read ih\ c^^l^. A comparison with Coin No. 690 shows that it

sbould be ^-iL* eityL^L*. The top margin of No. 691 seems to

read eH**^l j^^ » which presents a difficulty.

R. Burn.

45, On the Identity op the Coins of Gujarat Fabric and the

SiJRAT MahmudIs.

In this article I purpose submitting evidence which, in my
opinion, goes to prove that the silver coins designated in the
British Museum Catalogue coins of " Gujarat Fabric '* are iden-
tical with those known to early writers under the name of " Snrat
Mahmudis.'*

I. From the testimony of European travellers in India in
the seventeenth century, it is clear that in the first half of that
century silver coins of two distinct types were current in and
around the city of Surat.

(a) Edward Terry, *' Chaplain to the Right Hon. Sir
Thomas Row, Knt., " landed from the good ship
" Charles " at the poi-t of Surat on the 26th of
September, 1616 (A.H. 1025). In his " Voyage to
East India," first published in 1665, he thus
writes : —

** They call their pieces of money roopes, of which
" there are some of divers values, the meanest
"worth two shillings and three-pence, and the
" best two shillings and nine- pence sterling. By
" these they account their estates and payments.
" They have another coin of inferior value in
" Guzarat, called Mamoodies, about twelve-pence
" sterling ; both the former and these are made in
" halves, and and some few in quarters ; so that
" three-pence is the least piece of silver current in
" those countries, and very few of them to be seen.

Vol I, No. 10,1 Numismatic Supplement VI. 267

[N.8.]

" Their silver coin is made either round or

*' square, bat so thick as that it never breaks, nor
" wears out.^"

The " meanest " rupees in this passage coiTespond doubtless to
the ordinary rupees issued by Akbar and Jnhangir, weighing each
about 180 grains ; but the " best " rupees will be the heavy ones,
from 212 to 220 grains each, that were struck in the first few
years of Jahangir's reign. The ratio of the former to the latter
would be 180 : 220, or, as Terry has it, 27 : 33. But besides
these rupees a coin distinctly inferior was also current in Gujarat,
to wit, the "mamoody," worth about 12fZ., or a little less than
half the ordinary rupee of that time.

(h) Sir Thomas Herbert, who, as Secretary to the English
Embassy to Persia, journeyed in the East from
1627 to 1629 (A.H. 1037-9), writes in his '' Travels"
regarding the money of " Indostan. "
" The current money here is pice, which is an heavy
" round piece of brass, 30 of which make one
" shilling. The Mamoody, which is of good
** silver, round and thick, stamped after the man-
" ner of the Saracens (who allow no images) with
" Arabick letters, only importing the King and
'* Mahomet, is in value one shilling of our coin ;
" and the Roopee, which is made also of like pure
" silver, is 2«. 3J., and aPardow 4«.*
(c) But it is Albert de Mandelslo, resident in Surat in
1638 (A.H. 1048), who gives the most precise infor-
mation as to the money current in " tlie Kingdome
of Gnznratta." In his " Voyages and Travels " he
writes : —

" They have also two sorts of money, to wit, the
" Mamoudies and the Ropias. The Mamoudis ai*e
made at Surat, of silver of a very base alley, and
are worth about twelve- pence sterling, and they
" go onely at Surat, Brodra, Broitclna, Cambaya,
" and those parts. Over all the Kingdome be-
" sides, as at Amadabath and elsewhere, they have
" Ropias Chagam, which are very good silver,
" and worth halfe a crown French mony. Their
'* small mony is of copper, and these are the
** Peyses we spoke of, and whereof twenty-six

** make a Mamoudy, and fifty -four a Ropia

** Spanish Ryalls and Rixdollars are worth there

** five Mamoudis The Chequines and Ducats of

" Venice are more common there (than the Xera-
" phins), and are worth eight and a half, and

I Terry : "A Voyage to East India," edition of 1777, p. 113.
• Harris: "ACompleat Collection of Voyages and Travels," Vol. T.,
p. 411.

268 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

" sometimes nine Bopias, Surat-money, accord-
" ing to the change and the rate set on the
" money."'

Beckoning the French crown (6cu), the Spanish real, and
the German rixdollar (reichsthaler) each at is, 6d,, and the
Italian sequin and Venetian (gold) ducat each at ds. 4d,, we arrive,
according to the above passage, at the following values : The
" Bopia Chagam *' 27d. ; the Ma^mudi, or " Bopia, Surat-money,"
12^., or ISd. or 10 8d. or 12 4(2. It thus appears that, while the
" Bopia Chagam, " which is evidently the full Imperial rupee,
stood fairly constant at 27d., the value of the Surat Mahmtidl
fluctuated between a minimum of lO'Sd. and a maximum of ISd.
We should also bear in mind that the silver of the Mal^mtidi is
here stated to have been inferior to that of the rupee ; also that
the district in which the Mahmudi passed as current coin was
limited to the southern part of the province of Gujarat, say from
Surat to Cam bay.

II. With what coin may we identify this Surat Ma^mndi ? Is
it the same as the well-known Mahmudi of Persia ?

That any Persian money should have been current in Gujarat
and restricted there to merely the southern districts is certainly
very improbable.

Moreover the value of this Persian Mahmudi is given by
Tavemier as one-sixteenth of the Venetian sequin, i.e., 7d. or
one-eighth of the Spanish dollar, i.e., 6|(i." Also in the Table of
Equivalences prefixed to J. P[hillip8]'8 English Translation of
Tavemier's "Six Voyages" (1636-1667) the Persian Mahmudi is
entered as S'Obd, This, then, is plainly a considerably less valuable
silver piece than the Surat Mahmudi ranging from lO'Sd. to IZd.

When treating of the Persian coins. Fryer, whose eight
letters were written from India or Persia between the years 1672
and 1681, states —

** 3 Shahees is 1 Mam. Surat ;
2 Shahees is 1 Mamood. Persia "^

When Fryer thus definitely distinguishes between the Surat
Mal^udi and the Persian, we may safely conclude that the two
coins are not identical.

III. Can the Surat Mal^mudi have been a silver coin of one
or other of the various types that were current in Cutch and
Kafhiawar (Navanagar, Junaga<}h, and Porbandar) P

The trade between Gujarat and Cutch, or Gujarat and
Kafhiawar, was for the most part carried on by land and not by

^ MaudeUlo : *' Voyages and Travels " : English translation by John
Davies, edition^of 1662, p. 85.

Ball's edition of " Travels in India by Jean Baptiste Tavernier,^
Vol I., p. 26, n. 4.

8 Fryer: ** A New Account of East India and Persia": edition of
1698. p 211.

Vol. I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VL 269

[N.S.']

sea, and the influence of this trade would thus be specially felt in
the north and north-west portion of the province. It hence
appears extremely improbable that any coins from Cutch or
Katbiawar should become the circulating medium in South Guja-
rftt, yet not find acceptance as currency for Al^madabad and the
north.

The coins of Cutch and Ka^hiawar may indeed have been
originally called ' mahmudis/ but this designation soon gave
place to the term * korl,' the name that still attaches to them.
Accordingly, if ever current in the Surat district, they would, in
all probability, have been denominated not the Mahmudis but the
Korls of Snrat.

Lastly, these Koris, like the Persian Mahmudis, were all of
them considerably inferior in value to the Surat Mal^m&di. The
latter, we have seen, was reckoned at about 12(2., the rupee being
27 d., Ibut the Cutch Korl is now, and was probably then too, ap-
praised at 71d.y that of Junagadh at 7*3^/., of Navanagar at 7'6d.,
and of Porbandar at 8 5^. Or, to express these relative values in
another way, in exchange for Rs. 100, 225 Surat Mahmudis
sufficed; but of the Banaghai Korls of Porbandar 318 were
required ; of the Jamshai Koris of Navanagar, 355 ; of the Diwan-
B}iai Koris of Junagadh, 369 ; and of the Koris of Cutch, 380. In
fact it would seem that, while the Surat Mal^mndi fluctuated
between half a rupee and a third, inclining to the half, the Kori
ranged in value between a third of a rupee and a quarter, inclin-
ing to the quarter.

For the above reasons the conclusion is inevitable that the
Kori, whether of Cutch or of Katiiiawar, cannot be regarded as
identical with the Surat Mahmudi.

IV. Were the Sui^t Mahmudis the same as the silver coins
of the Gujarat Saltanat ?

No reason can be given why the Gujarat Saltanat coins should
have remained current in the south of Gujarat, yet not in the
north. Indeed, bearing in mind that during the declining years of
the Saltanat, say, after the death of Bahadur in 1536, its coins
probably all issued from a single mint — that of A^madabad — we
may fairly assume that they would survive in circulation longer in
the Ahmadabad, or northern, districts than in the south. It seems
incredible that coins struck in Ahmadabad should be superseded
there and yet be accepted as the currency of Surat.

It was in A.H. 980 (A.D. 1573) that Akbar conquered Gujarat
and annexed it to his Empire. In that same year he issued coins
in his own name from the Ahmadabad Mint, and we may safely
affirm that thereafter he would permit no more coins to be struck in
the name of the vanquished Sultdn Muzaffar III. Save for the five
months of A.H. 991 (A.D. 1683) when Muzaffar again held the
sovereignty of Gujarat, the minting of coins of the independent
Saltanat must have ceased in the year 1573, thus some sixty -five
years before Mandelslo's visit to Surat. Now it is surely most im-
probable that during all these sixty-five years the coinage — ^never
very plentiful — of tlie conquered province of Gujarat should have

270 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

maintained its standing as the recognised currency of the sonthem
districts.

We have already seen that the Sarat Mahmudi was worth just
about four-ninths of the Imperial rupee, hence, had both coins been
of equally good silver, the Mahmud! would have weighed 80 grains
over against the 180 grains of the rupee. Its actual weight, how-
ever, owing to the presence of a " very base alley," must have been
more than 80 grains, say between 85 and 90. Now, no silver coins
of the Gujarat Saltanat are known of this weight : they are all
either much lighter or much heavier. Of fifteen silver coins of
MuzafEar III. now in my possession, the weights are as follow : —
" 35, 36, 67, 70, 71, 72 (four), 73, 74, 110, 111, 112, and 114 grains.
Of these not one could by any possibility be regarded as in value
four-fifths of a Mughal rupee.

Thus we are compelled to the conclusion that the Surat Mah-
mudi was not identical with any silver coin of the Gujarat
Saltanat.

V. If, now, this Mahmudi current in Surat was not the Persian
Ma^mudl, nor the Gutch orKa^hiawar Kori, nor the Mahmudi of
the Gujarat Saltanat, then, by the ^^ method of exhaustion," it must
have been the Coin of Gujarat Fabric — the only remaning type.
The identity of these two is confirmed by the following considera-
tions : —

(a) All the Gujarat Fabric coins bear impressed the name of
Akbar, the conqueror of the province, and hence the
Imperial Government would readily sanction the use
of such coins for currency in a portion of the Empire.

(6) The dates on these coins, ranging, so far as yet known,
from A.H. 989 to 1027 (A.D. 1581-1618), bring
them easily within the period to which the state-
nients made regarding the Surat Mahmudi by Terry
and Herbert and Mandelslo have reference.

(c) One comes across these coins nowadays in the strip
of country between Surat and A^madabad, but
they are seldom found in Kathiawar or in North
Gujarat. Thus it is the area in which the Surat
Mahmudis were originally current that mainly sup-
plies us at the present day with specimens of Guja-
rat Fabric coins.

{d) And — most important of all — the average weight of
these Gujarat Fabric coins which now come to hand
proves to be 85 grains. Hence we may infer the
original weight to have been about 90 grains. Con-
sidering both their base material and their weight, the
money-value of such coins would bear to that of the
Akbari or ordinary Jahangiri rupee a ratio of just
about 12 : 27 — the ratio affirmed by Mandelslo to
subsist between the Surat Mahmudi and the ^' Ropia
Chagam."

If, then, as the conclusion of the whole matter, we may regard

yd, I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VI. 271

IKS.]

the Gujarat Fabric coins as identical with the Sorat Mahmudis,
we may further unhesitatingly accept as true Mandelslo's express
statement that these coins were " made at Surat." For a currency
purely local there was a purely local mintage. The capital city of
the province, Ahmadabad, issued imperial rupees in the very year
of the imperial conquest ; but soon thereafter the less important
city in the south, S&rat, opened with, we may well believe, im-
perial sanction, a mint of its own, whence for some forty years
issued not indeed *' Ropias Chagam " but the Surat Mal^mudi,.
known to-day as the coins of " Gujarat Fabric."

Ahmadabad. Geo. P. Taylor.

V.-^MISCELLANEOUS.

46. On some '* Gknkalouical " coins op the Gujarat Saljanat.

On the occasion of a recent visit to Bombay it was my good
fortune to visit the rooms of the Bombay Branch of the S^yal
Asiatic Society in the company of my kind friend Mr. Framji
Jamaspji Thanawala. He had previously written me that in the
Society's cabinet he had discovered two coins of the Gujarat Sal-
tanat, remarkable since bearing the pedigree of the regnant Sultan
traced back, in each case, to the founder of the dynasty. Two
such, if we may so call them, ** genealogical " coins of Gujarat
have already been published, one in Thomas' " Pathap Kings," and
the other in the Journal of the Bo. Br. R.A.S. No. LVIII. A
description of all the four coins now known of this extremely rare
type may prove of interest.

J. Vide Thomas : " PathSn Kings," page 362.

ixv.

Weight, 172 graiun.

Bate, A.H. 828 (by a misprint entered in Thomas as A.H.

823), A.D. 1424-25.

• • • « •

Ohrvrse.

W verse.

272 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

2. In cabinet of Bo. Br. E.A.S. This coin was once looped,
but the loop has been wrenched off.

Weight, 167 grains.
Date, wanting.

Obverse. In square.

jili^ 4^ lis:,

Margins quite illegible.
Reverse,

3. In cabinet of Bo. Br. R.A.S. This coin is looped.

Weight, 188 grains.

Date, A.H. [8]65, A.D. 1460-61.

Obverse.

i« ...

*#• ••• ... ... ...

On the last line the first word is probably i^ltiUf

Reverse,

.• i"^!!!.® ^l<^\^ earliest Gajarat coin yet known bearing the phrase
c;UJl «Wb JJt^r, the Truster in Allah, the Gracious.

Vol. I, No; 10.] Numismatic Supplement VL 273

[N.8.-\

4. Vide Jour Bo. Br. R.A.S., No. LVIII., page 334, and
Plate IV.

Weighty 130 grains.

Bate, A.H. 933, (A. D. 1626-27).

verse.

Part of this legend is worn, bat it is probable that the coin
bore at this parfc the words cLiA/j^l

Reverse,

Thus the legend, beginning on the obverse, is continued on the
reverse.

This most interesting coin was very kindlj presented to me
four years ago by Mr. H. Nelson Wright

Kinaiy
, I.C.S.

In connexion with these four " genealogical " coins in silver,
reference may be made to a bullion coin of allied type, struck by

N.B, — The following Genealogical Table includes all the kings
of the Gujarat Saltanat whose names occur on any of the five
coins : —

2.— Muzaffar I., H. 810-818.

I
1. — Mul^ammad I., H. 806.

3.— Mmadl., H. 813-846.

4.— Muhammad IL, H . 846-855.

I"
5. - Qutbaldin A^mad II.,

H. 855-863.

6.— Mabmlid I., H. 863-917.
7.— Muzafifar II., H. 917-932.

8.— Bahadur, H. 932-943.

274 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [December, 1905.

Mal^mud I in A.H. 863 (A.D. 1458-59), in whicli his relationship
to the two preceding Sultans is indicated. The coin is figured
on Plate II (Nos. 15flr, '*156) of the Jour. Bo. Br. R.A.S.^
No. LVIII.

Its legends read as follow : —

Obverse.

Reverse.
Akmaddh^d. Geo. P. Taylor.

EftBATA BT COBBIOBMDA.

Dr. AnDandsle'i p«p«r, Journal and Practedingi, Tol. I., Ho. 5, Uaj,
IQOS.

Pftge, 148, line, 8], for frontinftial, read frontouaMl.
„ 14*, „ 28, for hM mpnocnlkra, rwiil haa 6 mpTMicnlan. ,

„ ISl, „ 16, for Ur. Grey Pilgrim, raad Hr. Ouj Pilgrim.
„ 161, „ 33, Ur. Pilgrim'! apecimena of Kremiat brtviroitrit come from

Bkbrejn lalaud, Peiuaa Golf, the Faranui aod Urontattip

from Chnan.

,.„VLL„DACm«S BUraA«ira.S . rmLODACTYl,..S SUV,ENS,S

(

JOURN. and Proo. A. S. B. Vol. I, 1905.

(fel^^Q^^^^^

%W'^

VMi.

^P ^^ ^^ (^

* I

JOUftN'. and Proo. A. S. B. Vol. I. 19C

iloHrH. «■(! Proc. A.B.B., Vol. I, nOS.

< r tf • ,

• (^

.«.

•iourn. and Proc. A.8.B., Vol. I, 1906.

U.L. ' Upper Lip (Upper Jmw Pad).

T. =■ Tuek.

L.J> - Lowar J«w.

< !■ tf If

.1,

Journ. and Proc. A.S.B.. Vol. I. 1

Journ. and Proc. A.8.B.,

Journal and Proc.A.S.B Vol. 3.1!

TRACfNG FROM THE MA
CORRECTED UP TO 186

OF THE GA

mM=

;

IE MAPiiE GHA2IPUR DIS

TO 188 ^ 1//NC THE UMITS
E GANiHADIR

Journ

.&Proo.A.S.B.,Vol.l,l905.

.* •

v.LinstrOvr

dol.

AN ATOMY OF ASC^

Plate XL.

K''

*-v.

-')

- V

T- V.

"-•r

<v^--:

-f

('J

i /Jr*^*^

\ -

'-T.

S.aMondul lith.

3 HALICORIS, Baird.

JOURNAL & P)^OCEEDI)<GS

OP THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. I, No. 10.

1908.

CALCUTTA :

«,rrfr PAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
PRINTED AT Tir^ »

^ VIATIC SOCIETY, 07, PARK STREET.

1906.

Issued 28th February. 1906.

- PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Kesearches, Vols. I— XX and Index, 1788—1839.

Proceedings, 1865 — 1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).

Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc, 1905, etc.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. flf.] Vol. 1, etc^ 1905, etc.

Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, etc

A. complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
obtained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
Calcutta.

PRIVILEOES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a\ To be pi*esent and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October.

(h\ T DropoRC and second candidates for Ordinary Member-

sbip-
'xitroduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
d to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
lurin*' the houi's when they are open to members.
"have pei'sonal access to the Library and other public
oms of the Society, and to examine its collections,
take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
bibi-ai-y.
rr receive gratis, copies of the Jouimal and Proceedings

and Memoirs of the Society.
n' fill ^^^y oflBce in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

Optimism in Ancient NySya. — By VanamIli VKDiNTAxlRTHA ... 251

CONTENTS.

Page.
Proceedings for December, 1905. ... ... ... 53

An Eosamtnation of the Nyfiya-Sutras. — By HaraprasId I

oASTKI ... ••. ••• •<• ... ^4d

(
J

Some notes on the dates of Suhandhu and JXii'nQga.-'^By Hara-

PEASAD Sastrt. ... ... ... ... 253 !

Formation of New Oastes. — By R. Burn, I.C.S. ... ... 256 j

Ascaris halicoris Baird. — By Dr. V. Linstow. Oommnnicated <

by N. Annandale. (With one plate. ) ... ... 258 ;

Numismatic Supplement VI. ... ... ... 261

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Journal and Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal"

See other formats